initial commit of ebook 7126HEADmain

1 files changed, 16662 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/7126.txt b/7126.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..107d9ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/7126.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16662 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treaties of Canada with The Indians of
+Manitoba
+and the North-West Territories, by Alexander Morris
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: The Treaties of Canada with The Indians of Manitoba
+and the North-West Territories
+
+Author: Alexander Morris
+
+Release Date: December, 2004 [EBook #7126]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on March 13, 2003]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREATIES OF CANADA ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Andrew Sly, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team.
+
+
+
+
+
+THE TREATIES OF CANADA WITH THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA AND THE
+NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, INCLUDING THE NEGOTIATIONS ON WHICH
+THEY WERE BASED, AND OTHER INFORMATION RELATING THERETO.
+
+BY THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, P.C., LATE LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR
+OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN.
+
+
+TO HIS EXCELLENCY
+The Right Honorable the Earl of Dufferin,
+
+Her Britannic Majesty's Ambassador at St. Petersburg, K.P.P.C.,
+K.C.B., G.C.M.G., &c., &c., &c.
+
+My Lord,--
+
+Encouraged by the earnest interest, your Lordship ever evinced, in
+the work of obtaining the alliance and promoting the welfare of the
+Indian tribes in the North-West of Canada, and in opening up the
+Territories for settlement, by obtaining the relinquishment of the
+natural title of the Indians to the lands of the Fertile Belt on
+fair and just terms, I have the honor, by your kind permission, to
+dedicate this collection of the treaties made with them, to your
+Excellency, in the belief that its publication will be timely, and
+that the information now supplied in a compact form, may prove of
+service to the Dominion of Canada.
+
+      I have the honor to be
+          Your Lordship's obedient servant,
+                   ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+
+Late Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, the North-West Territories, and
+Kee-wa-tin.
+
+TORONTO, March, 1880.
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+The question of the relations of the Dominion of Canada to the
+Indians of the North-West, is one of great practical importance The
+work, of obtaining their good will, by entering into treaties of
+alliance with them, has now been completed in all the region from
+Lake Superior to the foot of the Rocky Mountains. As an aid to the
+other and equally important duty--that of carrying out, in their
+integrity, the obligations of these treaties, and devising means
+whereby the Indian population of the Fertile Belt can be rescued
+from the hard fate which otherwise awaits them, owing to the speedy
+destruction of the buffalo, hitherto the principal food supply of
+the Plain Indians, and that they may be induced to become, by the
+adoption of agricultural and pastoral pursuits, a self supporting
+community--I have prepared this collection of the treaties made
+with them, and of information, relating to the negotiations, on
+which these treaties were based, in the hope that I may thereby
+contribute to the completion of a work, in which I had considerable
+part, that, of, by treaties, securing the good will of the Indian
+tribes, and by the helpful hand of the Dominion, opening up
+to them, a future of promise, based upon the foundations of
+instruction and the many other advantages of civilized life.
+
+M.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+       Introduction
+    I. The Selkirk Treaty
+   II. The Robinson Treaty
+  III. The Manitoulin Island Treaty
+   IV. The Stone Fort and Manitoba Post Treaties, Numbers One
+          and Two
+    V. Treaty Number Three; or, the North-West Angle Treaty
+   VI. The Qu'Appelle Treaty, or Number Four
+  VII. The Revision of Treaties Numbers One and Two
+ VIII. The Winnipeg Treaty Number Five
+   IX. The Treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt
+    X. Treaty Number Seven; or, the Blackfeet Treaty
+   XI. The Sioux in the North-West Territories
+  XII. The Administration of the Treaties--The Half-breeds--The
+          Future of the Indian Tribes
+       APPENDIX--Texts of the Treaties and Supplementary
+          Adhesions thereto
+
+
+
+THE TREATIES WITH THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST
+TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN, IN THE DOMINION OF CANADA.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+One of the gravest of the questions presented for solution by the
+Dominion of Canada, when the enormous region of country formerly
+known as the North-West Territories and Rupert's Land, was
+entrusted by the Empire of Great Britain and Ireland to her rule,
+was the securing the alliance of the Indian tribes, and maintaining
+friendly relations with them. The predecessors of Canada--the
+Company of Adventurers of England trading into Hudson's Bay,
+popularly known as the Hudson's Bay Company--had, for long years,
+been eminently successful in securing the good-will of the
+Indians--but on their sway, coming to an end, the Indian mind was
+disturbed. The events, that transpired in the Red River region, in
+the years 1869-1870, during the period when a provisional
+government was attempted to be established, had perplexed the
+Indians. They, moreover, had witnessed a sudden irruption into the
+country of whites from without. In the West, American traders
+poured into the land, and, freighted with fire-water, purchased
+their peltries and their horses, and impoverished the tribes. In
+the East, white men took possession of the soil and made for
+themselves homes, and as time went on steamboats were placed on the
+inland waters--surveyors passed through the territories--and the
+"speaking wires," as the Indian calls the telegraph, were erected.
+What wonder that the Indian mind was disturbed, and what wonder was
+it that a Plain chief, as he looked upon the strange wires
+stretching through his land, exclaimed to his people, "We have done
+wrong to allow that wire to be placed there, before the Government
+obtained our leave to do so. There is a white chief at Red River,
+and that wire speaks to him, and if we do anything wrong he will
+stretch out a long arm and take hold of us before we can get away."
+The government of Canada had, anticipating the probabilities of
+such a state of affairs, wisely resolved, that contemporaneously
+with the formal establishment of their rule, there should be formed
+alliances with the Indians. In 1870 the Parliament of Canada
+created the requisite machinery for the Government of the Province
+of Manitoba and of the North-West Territories respectively, giving
+to the former a Lieutenant-Governor and Legislature, and to
+the latter, a Lieutenant-Governor and Council, Executive and
+Legislative--the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba being ex officio
+Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories. Subsequently the
+North-West Territories were erected into a distinct government,
+with a Lieutenant-Governor and Executive, and Legislative Council.
+The District of Kee-wa-tin, "the land of the north wind," was also
+established, comprising the eastern and northern portions of the
+Territories, and placed under the control of the Lieutenant-Governor
+of Manitoba, and an Executive and Legislative Council. Since 1870,
+no less than seven treaties have been concluded, with the Indian
+tribes, so that there now remain no Indian nations in the North-West,
+inside of the fertile belt, who have not been dealt with.
+
+It is the design of the present work to tell the story of these
+treaties, to preserve as far as practicable, a record of the
+negotiations on which they were based, and to present to the many
+in the Dominion and elsewhere, who take a deep interest in these
+sons of the forest and the plain, a view of their habits of thought
+and speech, as thereby presented, and to suggest the possibility,
+nay, the certainty, of a hopeful future for them.
+
+Prior to proceeding to deal, with the treaties of the Dominion of
+Canada, it will render this book more complete to present the
+reader, with information as to three treaties which preceded those
+of the Dominion, viz., the treaty made by the Earl of Selkirk in
+the year 1817, those popularly known as the Robinson Treaties, made
+by the late Hon. William B. Robinson, of the City of Toronto, with
+the Indians of the shores and islands of Lakes Superior and Huron
+in the year 1850, and that made by the Hon. William Macdougall, for
+the surrender of the Indian title, to the great Manitoulin Island,
+both acting for and on behalf of the Government of the late
+Province of Canada.
+
+Ere however entering upon an explanation of these two first-mentioned
+treaties, I submit a few brief observations.
+
+The Indians inhabiting the region covered by the treaties in
+question, extending in Canadian territory from Lake Superior to the
+foot of the Rocky Mountains, are composed of distinct tribes having
+different languages.
+
+The Ojibbewas, Chippawas, or Saulteaux as they now call themselves,
+are found in numbers in the District of Kee-wa-tin and the Province
+of Manitoba. In the North-West Territories they are not numerous
+except within the limits of Treaty number Four. These Indians
+migrated from the older Provinces of Quebec and Ontario many years
+ago.
+
+The Crees, inhabit the North-West Territories and are divided into
+Plain, Wood and Swampy Crees, according to the region of the
+country they dwell in. The Swampy Crees reside in Manitoba and
+Kee-wa-tin.
+
+The Black Feet nation are to be found towards the slope of the
+Rocky Mountains, in the region comprised within the limits of the
+Treaty number Seven.
+
+A few Chippawayans, or Northerners, dwell within the North-West
+Territories.
+
+The once powerful nation of the Assiniboines, or Stonies--a kindred
+tribe to the Sioux--are greatly reduced in numbers, and are now
+only to be met with in the North-West Territories.
+
+The Sioux in the Dominion are refugees from the United States, the
+first body having come over some fourteen years ago. A large influx
+of similar refugees, have recently fled to the Dominion from, the
+same country, as the issue of the recent war between the United
+States and the Sioux.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE SELKIRK TREATY
+
+
+In the year 1811, the Earl of Selkirk purchased [Footnote:
+Vide Appendix for copy of the agreement in question.] from the
+Governor and Company of Adventurers trading into Hudson's Bay,
+in consideration of ten shillings and certain agreements and
+understandings contained in the Indenture, a large tract of
+territory within Rupert's Land described in the Indenture as
+follows:
+
+"All that tract of land or territory being within and forming part
+of the aforesaid lands and territories of the said Governor and
+Company, bounded by an imaginary line running as follows, that
+is to say, beginning on the western shore of the Lake Winnipic,
+otherwise Winnipeg, at a point in fifty-two degrees and thirty
+north latitude and thence running due west to the Lake Winnipegoos,
+otherwise called Little Winnipeg, then in a southerly direction
+through the said Lake so as to strike its western shore in latitude
+fifty-two degrees, then due west to the place where the parallel of
+fifty-two degrees north latitude intersects the western branch of
+Red River, otherwise called Assiniboine River, then due south from
+that point of intersection to the height of land which separates
+the waters running into Hudson's Bay from those of the Missouri and
+Mississippi, then in an easterly direction along the said height
+of land to the source of the River Winnipic, or Winnipeg (meaning
+by such last named river the principal branch of the waters which
+unite in Lake Sagenagos), thence along the main stream of these
+waters and the middle of the several lakes through which they
+flow to the mouth of the Winnipic River and thence in a northerly
+direction through the middle of Lake Winnipic to the place of
+beginning." The deed is accompanied by a map intended to show the
+tract of country, and there is an endorsement on the map that
+as the surveys were not sufficient to ascertain with precision
+whether, latitude 52 degrees does intersect the river called Red or
+Assiniboine River, it was agreed, that in case the waters of of Red
+River, shall on more accurate survey be found, not to extend so far
+north as latitude 52 degrees, then the west boundary of the tract
+of land intended to be within the grant, should be a line drawn due
+north and south, through the post upon the Red River, marked on the
+plan is "Carlton House."
+
+The Company reserved the right to call upon the Earl to set off
+one-tenth, however, of the tract for the use of the servants of
+the Company--and the Earl covenanted, within ten years, to settle
+within the tract one thousand families, each of them consisting of
+one married couple at the least, on pain of revocation of the
+grant, if on receipt of notice to that effect from the Company he
+did not, within three years after the receipt of the notice,
+complete the settlement of the one thousand families.
+
+In pursuance of his obligations, Lord Selkirk, in the autumn of the
+year 1811, sent out a number of families from the County of
+Sutherland, in Scotland, who spent the winter at Fort Churchill on
+the western shore of Hudson's Bay. On the arrival of spring, they
+travelled thence to the confluence of the Assiniboine and Red
+Rivers, and thus was commenced the interesting settlement of the
+Red River, which is now included in the Province of Manitoba. It is
+not my purpose to notice here the eventful history of the Selkirk
+colonists, and I will only note the fact that in 1836, the Company
+bought back the whole tract, from the heirs of Lord Selkirk, for
+the sum of L84,000, the rights of colonists who had purchased land
+between 1811 and 1836, being respected.
+
+In the year 1817 the Earl of Selkirk, visited his wide domain,
+and entered into negotiations with the Indian tribes, for the
+extinction of their title, to a tract of land described as follows:
+
+[Footnote: A large portion of the ceded territory is now
+comprehended in the Territory of Dakota, United States.] "All
+that tract of land adjacent to Red River and Assiniboine River,
+beginning at the mouth of Red River and extending along the same
+as far as Great Forks at the mouth of Red Lake River and along
+Assiniboine River as far as the Musk Rat River, otherwise called
+Riviere des Champignons, and extending to the distance of six miles
+from Fort Douglas on every side, and likewise from Fort Doer, and
+also from the Great Forks and in other posts extending in breadth
+to the distance of two English statute miles back from the banks of
+the river."
+
+The Indians then inhabiting the region were described as being of
+the Chippawa or Saulteaux and Killistine or Cree nations. They were
+made to comprehend, the depth of the land they were surrendering,
+by being told, that it was the greatest distance, at which a horse
+on the level prairie could be seen, or daylight seen under his
+belly between his legs. The consideration for the surrender, was,
+the payment of one hundred pounds of good merchantable tobacco, to
+each nation annually.
+
+The treaty was signed by Lord Selkirk and by five Indian chiefs,
+who affixed thereto drawings of the animals after which they were
+named, by way of signature, a fac simile of which will be found
+elsewhere. The surrender was to the Sovereign Lord, King George the
+Third. The treaty was accompanied by a map which shows that the
+tract surrendered extended to Grand Forks in what is now United
+States territory. A copy of the treaty will be found in the
+Appendix and will prove of interest.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+THE ROBINSON TREATIES
+
+
+In consequence of the discovery of minerals, on the shores of Lakes
+Huron and Superior, the Government of the late Province of Canada,
+deemed it desirable, to extinguish the Indian title, and in order
+to that end, in the year 1850, entrusted the duty to the late
+Honorable William B. Robinson, who discharged his duties with great
+tact and judgment, succeeding in making two treaties, which were
+the forerunners of the future treaties, and shaped their course.
+The main features of the Robinson Treaties--viz., annuities,
+reserves for the Indians, and liberty to fish and hunt on the
+unconceded domain of the Crown--having been followed in these
+treaties. A special feature of the Robinson Treaties, was the
+adjustment of a claim made by the Indians to be paid, the amount
+received, by the Government, for the sale of mining locations. This
+was arranged, by Mr. Robinson, agreeing to pay them, the sum of
+L4,000 and an annuity of about L1,000, thus avoiding any dispute
+that might arise as to the amounts actually received by the
+Government. The number of Indians included in the treaties were
+stated by Mr. Robinson to be: on Lake Superior, 1240, including 84
+half-breeds; and on Lake Huron 1422, including 200 half-breeds.
+[Footnote: The census return of the Department of the Interior
+for the year 1878 gives the numbers of these Indians as follows:
+Chippawas of Lake Superior ... 1,947. Chippawas of Lake Huron ...
+1,458.] The relations of the Indians and half-breeds, have long
+been cordial; and in the negotiations as to these initial treaties,
+as in the subsequent ones, the claims of the half-breeds, to
+recognition, was urged by the Indians.
+
+I cannot do better, in giving information with regard to these
+treaties, than simply to reproduce the Report of Mr. Robinson to
+the Honorable Colonel Bruce, Superintendent-General of Indian
+Affairs, in which he describes the course of his negotiations and
+communicates their results. A copy of the treaties will be found in
+the Appendix. The Report is as follows:
+
+TORONTO, 24th September, 1850.
+
+Sir:--I have the honor herewith to transmit the Treaty which on
+the part of the Government I was commissioned to negotiate with
+the tribes of Indians inhabiting the northern shore of Lakes Huron
+and Superior; and I trust that the terms on which I succeeded in
+obtaining the surrender of all the lands in question, with the
+exception of some small reservations made by the Indians, may be
+considered satisfactory. They were such as I thought it advisable
+to offer, in order that the matter might be finally settled,
+without having any just grounds of complaint on the part of the
+Indians.
+
+The Indians had been advised by certain interested parties to
+insist on such extravagant terms as I felt it quite impossible to
+grant; and from the fact that the American Government had paid
+very liberally for the land surrendered by their Indians on the
+south side of Lake Superior, and that our own in other parts of the
+country were in receipt of annuities much larger than I offered, I
+had some difficulty in obtaining the assent of a few of the chiefs
+to my proposition.
+
+I explained to the chiefs in council the difference between the
+lands ceded heretofore in this Province and those then under
+consideration, they were of good quality and sold readily at
+prices which enabled the Government to be more liberal, they were
+also occupied by the whites in such a manner as to preclude the
+possibility of the Indian hunting over or having access to them
+whereas the lands now ceded are notoriously barren and sterile, and
+will in all probability never be settled except in a few localities
+by mining companies, whose establishments among the Indians,
+instead of being prejudicial, would prove of great benefit as they
+would afford a market for any things they may have to sell, and
+bring provisions and stores of all kinds among them at reasonable
+prices.
+
+Neither did the British Government contemplate the removal of the
+Indians from their present haunts to some (to them) unknown region
+in the far West, as had been the case with their brethren on the
+American side.
+
+I told them that the two chiefs who were in Toronto last winter
+(Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing) only asked the amount which the
+Government had received for mining locations, after deducting the
+expenses attending their sale. That amount was about eight thousand
+pounds which the Government would pay them without any annuity
+or certainty of further benefit; or one-half of it down, and an
+annuity of about one thousand pounds.
+
+There were twenty-one chiefs present, about the same number of
+principal men, and a large number of other Indians belonging to
+the different bands, and they all preferred the latter proposition,
+though two of them (Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing) insisted on
+receiving an annuity equal to ten dollars per head.
+
+The chiefs from Lake Superior desired to treat separately for their
+territory and said at once in council that they accepted my offer.
+I told them that I would have the treaty ready on the following
+morning, and I immediately proceeded to prepare it, and as agreed
+upon they signed it cheerfully at the time appointed.
+
+I then told the chiefs from Lake Huron (who were all present when
+the others signed) that I should have a similar treaty ready for
+their signature, the next morning when those who signed it would
+receive their money; and that as a large majority of them had
+agreed to my terms I should abide by them.
+
+I accordingly prepared the treaty and proceeded on the morning of
+the ninth instant to the council-room to have it formally executed
+in the presence of proper witnesses--all the chiefs and others were
+present. I told them I was then ready to receive their signatures;
+the two chiefs, Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing, repeated their
+demand of ten dollars a head by way of annuity, and also insisted
+that I should insert in the treaty a condition securing to some
+sixty half-breeds a free grant of one hundred acres of land each.
+I told them they already had my answer as to a larger annuity, and
+that I had no power to give them free grants of land. The other
+chiefs came forward to sign the treaty and seeing this the two who
+had resisted up to this time also came to the table and signed
+first, the rest immediately following.
+
+I trust his Excellency will approve of my having concluded the
+treaty on the basis of a small annuity and the immediate and final
+settlement of the matter, rather than paying the Indians the full
+amount of all moneys on hand, and a promise of accounting to them
+for future sales. The latter course would have entailed much
+trouble on the Government, besides giving an opportunity to evil
+disposed persons to make the Indians suspicious of any accounts
+that might be furnished.
+
+Believing that His Excellency and the Government were desirous
+of leaving the Indians no just cause of complaint on their
+surrendering the extensive territory embraced in the treaty, and
+knowing there were individuals who most assiduously endeavored to
+create dissatisfaction among them, I inserted a clause securing to
+them certain prospective advantages should the lands in question
+prove sufficiently productive at any future period to enable the
+Government without loss to increase the annuity. [Footnote: The
+annuities under these treaties have recently been increased, the
+following item having been inserted in the Supplies Act of Canada,
+viz., "Annual grant to bring up annuities payable under the
+Robinson Treaty to the Chippawas of Lakes Huron and Superior, from
+96 cents to $4 per head, $14,000."] This was so reasonable and just
+that I had no difficulty in making them comprehend it, and it in a
+great measure silenced the clamor raised by their evil advisers.
+
+In allowing the Indians to retain reservations of land for their
+own use I was governed by the fact that they in most cases asked
+for such tracts as they had heretofore been in the habit of using
+for purposes of residence and cultivation, and by securing these to
+them and the right of hunting and fishing over the ceded territory,
+they cannot say that the Government takes from their usual means of
+subsistence and therefore have no claims for support, which they no
+doubt would have preferred, had this not been done. The reservation
+at Garden River is the largest and perhaps of most value, but as
+it is occupied by the most numerous band of Indians, and from its
+locality (nine miles from the Sault) is likely to attract others
+to it, I think it was right to grant what they expressed a desire
+to retain. There are two mining locations at this place, which
+should not be finally disposed of unless by the full consent of
+Shinguacouse and his band; they are in the heart of the village and
+shew no indications of mineral wealth, they are numbered 14 and 15
+on the small map appended to Messrs. Anderson and Vidal's report.
+I pledged my word on the part of the Government that the sale of
+these locations should not be completed, and as the locatees have
+not, I believe, complied with the conditions of the Crown Lands
+Department there can be no difficulty in cancelling the
+transaction.
+
+The chiefs are desirous that their several reservations should
+be marked by proper posts or monuments, and I have told them the
+Government would probably send some one next spring for that
+purpose. As I know many of the localities I shall be able to give
+the necessary information when required.
+
+When at Sault Ste. Marie last May, I took measures for ascertaining
+as nearly as possible the number of Indians inhabiting the
+north shore of the two lakes; and was fortunate enough to get
+a very correct census, particularly of Lake Superior. I found
+this information very useful at the council, as it enabled me
+successfully to contradict the assertion (made by those who were
+inciting the chiefs to resist my offers) that there were on Lake
+Superior alone, eight thousand Indians. The number on that lake,
+including eighty-four half-breeds, is only twelve hundred and
+forty--and on Lake Huron, about fourteen hundred and twenty-two,
+including probably two hundred half-breeds, and when I paid the
+Indians they acknowledged they knew of no other families than
+those on my list.
+
+The number paid, as appears on the pay list, does not show the
+whole strength of the different bands, as I was obliged at their
+own request to omit some members of the very large families.
+I have annexed to this Report the names of the chiefs, their
+localities, and number of souls in each band as recognized by me
+in apportioning the money, thinking it will be useful when paying
+the annuity hereafter.
+
+This information may I believe be fully relied on for Lake
+Superior, but the census for Lake Huron is not so perfect; and I
+would suggest that Captain Ironside should be furnished with copies
+of that document and also of the pay-lists in order that he may
+correct in time any errors that are found to exist.
+
+As the half-breeds at Sault Ste. Marie and other places may seek to
+be recognized by the Government in future payments, it may be well
+that I should state here the answer that I gave to their demands on
+the present occasion. I told them I came to treat with the chiefs
+who were present, that the money would be paid to them--and their
+receipt was sufficient for me--that when in their possession they
+might give as much or as little to that class of claimants as they
+pleased. To this no one, not even their advisers, could object,
+and I heard no more on the subject. At the earnest request of the
+chiefs themselves I undertook the distribution of the money among
+their respective bands and all parties expressed themselves
+perfectly satisfied with my division of their funds.
+
+On my arrival at Penetanguishene I found the chiefs Yellowhead and
+Snake, from Lake Simcoe, and Aissance, from Beausoleil's Island,
+waiting to see me, to prefer their claim to a small tract of land
+between Penetanguishene and the vicinity of the River Severn. I
+was aware of their intending to make such a claim and took the
+precaution of asking the chiefs assembled in council at the Sault
+whether it was well founded, they emphatically declared that those
+chiefs had no claim on Lake Huron, that they had long since ceded
+their lands and were in the receipt of a large annuity, this I
+believe to be the case and Captain Anderson, whom I met there,
+is of the same opinion; but I promised to inquire into it and
+give them an answer, and I will therefore thank you to cause the
+necessary information from your office to be furnished to me on the
+subject. Should it appear that these chiefs have any claim I think
+I could get their surrender of it for a small amount, and there
+remain sufficient funds at my disposal for the purpose.
+
+The Canadians resident on the lands just surrendered at Sault Ste.
+Marie are very anxious to obtain titles to the land on which they
+have long resided and made improvements; they applied to me after
+the treaty and I advised them to memorialize the Government the
+usual way setting forth the manner in which they were put in
+possession by the military authorities of the time, and that I had
+little doubt that the Government would do them justice. I think the
+survey of the tract should be made so as to interfere as little as
+possible with their respective clearings and that those who can
+show a fair claim to the favorable consideration of the Government
+should be liberally dealt with.
+
+It will be seen on referring to the treaty that I have kept within
+the amount at my disposal. Of the L4,160 agreed by me to be paid
+to the Indians of both lakes, there remains L75 unexpended. I could
+not from the information I possessed tell exactly the number of
+families I should have to pay, and thought it prudent to reserve a
+small sum to make good any omissions, there may still be a few who
+will prefer claims, though I know of none at present. If not, the
+amount can be paid next year with the annuity to such families as
+are most deserving; or it may be properly applied in extinguishing
+the claim made by the Lake Simcoe Indians, should it appear on
+inquiry to be just.
+
+The whole amount given to me in August was L5,033 6s. 8d., of this
+sum their remains L800, which I have placed in the Bank of Upper
+Canada to the credit of the Receiver-General, and I have prepared
+a detailed account of the whole, which with the proper vouchers, I
+shall deliver to the Accountant of the Crown Lands Department.
+
+I have much pleasure in acknowledging the valuable assistance
+afforded me by all the officers of the Honorable the Hudson's Bay
+Company resident on the lakes; and the prompt manner in which their
+Governor, Sir George Simpson, kindly placed their services at my
+disposal.
+
+The report made last year by Messrs. Anderson and Vidal I found of
+much use to me, and the long services and experience of the former
+gentleman in Indian affairs enabled him to give me many valuable
+suggestions.
+
+Captain Cooper and his officers by attending at the council, and
+otherwise, gave me most cheerfully all the aid in their power;
+and Captain Ironside, of your Department, with his assistant,
+Assickinach, were of essential service to me.
+
+I found it absolutely necessary to have the aid of some one in
+taking the census of the Lake Huron Indians at the time they were
+receiving their presents at Manitoulin; and as Captain Ironside
+was fully occupied in attending to his own duty, I requested Mr.
+Keating, who had long known the Indians on that lake, to give me
+his assistance. This he cheerfully and very efficiently did, and
+afterwards was with me in distributing and paying out the money.
+
+I have, in course of my negotiations with the Indians on the
+present occasion, collected some information which may be useful
+to your Department and will at an early day send it to you.
+
+I will thank you to lay the two treaties accompanying this Report
+before His Excellency, and trust they may meet with his approval.
+
+                                    I have, &c.,
+                                (Signed)       W. B. ROBINSON.
+  THE HON. COL. BRUCE,
+       Superintendent-General, Indian Affairs.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY
+
+
+Some years after the completion of the Robinson Treaties, the then
+Government of the old Province of Canada deemed it desirable to
+effect a treaty with the Indians dwelling upon the Great Manitoulin
+Island in Lake Huron, as a complement to the former treaties, and
+with the object of rendering available for settlement the large
+tract of good land upon the Island. The duty was entrusted to the
+Honorable William McDougall, then Superintendent-General of Indian
+Affairs, who, in the month of October, 1862, proceeded to the
+Island, accompanied by the late William Spragge, Esq., Deputy
+Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack, of the
+Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter. Mr. McDougall encountered
+considerable difficulties, but by firmness and decision eventually
+succeeded in obtaining a surrender from the Indians of the Island,
+excluding however from the surrender that portion of it easterly of
+Heywood Island and the Manitoulin Gulf.
+
+The terms of the treaty, which will be found in the Appendix, were
+adapted to the peculiar circumstances of the Indians and were well
+and wisely framed. The result has been to render available for
+settlement a large tract of land on the Island, much of which is
+now occupied by a prosperous and thriving population. I conclude
+this brief notice of an important treaty by submitting, to the
+attention of the reader, the report of the Hon. W. McDougall, to
+His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, of the results of
+his mission.
+
+MANITOULIN ISLAND, November 3rd, 1862.
+
+The undersigned has the honor to state for the information of
+His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, that, under the
+authority of the Order in Council of the twelfth day of September,
+1862, he proceeded early in the month of October last to visit the
+Great Manitoulin Island, accompanied by William Spragge, Esq.,
+Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack of
+the Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter.
+
+The resident agent, Captain Ironside, under instructions from the
+Department, had caused the Indians residing on the Island to be
+notified of the intended visit of the undersigned, and of its
+object and had summoned them to attend at Manitowaning on the
+fourth ultimo.
+
+The Chiefs and principal men, with the exception of one or two
+detained by illness and nearly all the males above the age of
+eighteen years, were present at the council.
+
+The undersigned stated the object of his visit, explained the
+wishes of the Government in regard to the settlement of the Island,
+and proposed the terms in respect to the Indians specified in the
+Order in Council authorizing the negotiation. The Indians had
+selected one of their Chiefs to reply to the overtures of the
+Government, and without taking time to consider these overtures he
+proceeded to announce the determination of the Indians to reject
+them unconditionally.
+
+The undersigned made some further explanations and directed an
+ajournment of the council for an hour, during which time the
+Indians were requested to consider the propositions he had made
+with care and deliberation.
+
+On re-assembling there was an evident disposition among the bands
+living westwardly of the place of meeting to listen favorably to
+the propositions of the Government, but the majority were still
+unwilling to treat, and by intimidation and threats of violence
+prevented any open expression of opinion except by the old war
+Chief, Assicknack, who declared his full assent to the wishes of
+the Government.
+
+Ascertaining that the Chief's opposition came from Indians living
+eastwardly of Heywood Sound, the undersigned determined to modify
+the propositions of the Government, so as to meet in some degree
+the objections from that quarter.
+
+He accordingly adjourned the council until the following Monday,
+the first day of meeting being Saturday, informing the Indians that
+those who were disposed to continue the negotiations would remain
+while those who had resolved to reject every proposition of the
+Government might go home. He also informed them that no threats or
+intimidation would be allowed, and that any one who should attempt
+violence would be surely punished. Nearly all the Indians remained
+or returned on Monday, and being apprised of the nature of the
+proposition the undersigned intended to submit, namely, to exclude
+that part of the island eastwardly of the Manitoulin Gulf and
+Heywood Sound from the proposed agreement, they came to the
+adjourned meeting in a more friendly mood and expressed their
+willingness to surrender for sale and settlement all that part of
+the island westwardly of the Gulf and Sound.
+
+The undersigned submits herewith the deed or instrument which embodies
+the agreement made and concluded between the respective parties. It
+was executed by the undersigned and the Deputy-Superintendent of
+Indian Affairs on behalf of the Government, and by nineteen of the
+Chiefs and principal men on behalf of the Indians.
+
+In consequence of the modification of the terms of agreement
+authorized by the Order in Council as above-mentioned and the
+addition of other terms deemed necessary to prevent future
+difficulty, and which will be found in the instrument, the
+undersigned caused a provision to be inserted that it was not to
+take effect until approved by the Governor-General in Council.
+
+The undersigned therefore now begs to submit the same for such
+approval.
+
+                      (Signed)      WM. McDOUGALL,
+                        Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE STONE FORT AND MANITOBA POST TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO
+
+
+In the year 1871, the late Honorable Joseph Howe, then Secretary of
+State of Canada, recommended the appointment by the Privy Council
+of Canada, of Mr. Wemyss McKenzie Simpson, as Indian Commissioner,
+in consequence of "the necessity of arranging with the bands of
+Indians inhabiting the tract of country between Thunder Bay and the
+Stone Fort, for the cession, subject to certain reserves such as
+they should select, of the lands occupied by them." Mr. Simpson
+accepted the appointment, and in company with Messrs. S. J. Dawson
+and Robert Pether visited the Ojjibewas or Chippawa Indians,
+between Thunder Bay and the north-west angle of the Lake of the
+Woods, and took the initiatory steps for securing a treaty with
+them thereafter. On his arrival at Fort Garry, he put himself, as
+directed by his instructions, in communication with his Honor, the
+Hon. A. G. Archibald, then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the
+North-West Territories. A conference took place between His Honor,
+Messrs. Simpson, Dawson and Pether, and the Hon. James McKay, a
+member, at that time, of the Executive Council of Manitoba, and
+himself a half-breed intimately acquainted with the Indian tribes,
+and possessed of much influence over them. The Indians in Manitoba,
+in the fall of 1870, had applied to the Lieutenant-Governor to
+enter into a treaty with them, and had been informed that in the
+ensuing year negotiations would be opened with them. They were
+full of uneasiness, owing to the influx of population, denied
+the validity of the Selkirk Treaty, and had in some instances
+obstructed settlers and surveyors. In view of the anxiety and
+uneasiness prevailing, those gentlemen were of opinion "that it was
+desirable to secure the extinction of the Indian title not only
+to the lands within Manitoba, but also to so much of the timber
+grounds east and north of the Province as were required for
+immediate entry and use, and also of a large tract of cultivable
+ground west of the Portage, where there were very few Indian
+inhabitants." It was therefore resolved to open negotiations at the
+Lower Fort Garry, or Stone Fort, with the Indians of the Province,
+and certain adjacent timber districts, and with the Indians of the
+other districts at Manitoba Post, a Hudson's Bay fort, at the north
+end of Lake Manitoba, the territory being occupied principally by
+one nation, the Chippawas, of whom the Saulteaux of the lakes are a
+branch, although there are also a number of Swampy Crees resident
+within it.
+
+Mr. Simpson accordingly issued proclamations, inviting the Indians
+to meet him on the 25th of July and 17th of August, 1871, at
+these points respectively, to negotiate an Indian treaty. The
+Lieutenant-Governor also issued a proclamation forbidding the sale
+or gift of intoxicating liquors during the negotiation of the
+treaty, and applied to Major Irvine to detail a few of the troops
+under his command to preserve order, which request was acceded to.
+
+The Lieutenant-Governor and Mr. Simpson arrived at the Stone Fort
+on the 24th of July, 1871, but as the Indians had not all arrived
+the meeting was postponed till the 27th, when a thousand Indians
+were found to have assembled, and a considerable number of
+half-breeds and other inhabitants of the country were present,
+awaiting with anxiety to learn the policy of the Government.
+
+Lieutenant-Governor Archibald, after the Indians were assembled
+opened the proceedings by delivering the following address:
+
+"On the 13th September last, on my first arrival in the country,
+I met a number of you at the mission, I told you I could not then
+negotiate a Treaty with the Indians, but that I was charged by your
+Great Mother, the Queen, to tell you that she had been very glad
+to see that you had acted during the troubles like good and true
+children of your Great Mother. I told you also that as soon as
+possible you would all be called together to consider the terms of
+a treaty to be entered into between you and your Great Mother.
+
+"I advised you to disperse to your homes, and gave you some
+ammunition to enable you to gain a livelihood during the winter
+by hunting.
+
+"I promised that in the spring you would be sent for, and that
+either I, or some person directly appointed to represent your Great
+Mother, should be here to meet you, and notice would be given you
+when to convene at this place to talk over what was right to be
+done.
+
+"Early in the spring, Mr. Simpson, who sits beside me, was made
+Commissioner. He left his home at once for this Province, by Rainy
+Lake and the Lake of the Woods.
+
+"The Indians of the lake districts meet, as you know, on Rainy
+River yearly, about the 20th June, to fish for sturgeon, I and they
+could not be called together sooner.
+
+"Mr. Simpson met them there at that time, and talked over their
+affairs with them, and made certain arrangements with them. He then
+hurried on to see you, and reached this Province a week ago last
+Sunday. He then sent messengers at once to all the Indians within
+certain bounds, asking them to meet him here on the 25th day of
+July. Some of you were unable to come so soon, and he has
+therefore, at the instance of those who were here, waited till
+to-day to open the talk. I believe that now you are all arrived,
+and ready to proceed to business.
+
+"It will be the duty of the Commissioner to talk to you on the
+particular details of the treaty, and I will give place to him
+presently, but there are one or two things of a general kind which
+I would like, before I close, to bring to your notice, for you to
+think about among yourselves.
+
+"First. Your Great Mother, the Queen, wishes to do justice to all
+her children alike. She will deal fairly with those of the setting
+sun, just as she would with those of the rising sun. She wishes
+order and peace to reign through all her country, and while her arm
+is strong to punish the wicked man, her hand is also open to reward
+the good man everywhere in her Dominions.
+
+"Your Great Mother wishes the good of all races under her sway. She
+wishes her red children to be happy and contented. She wishes them
+to live in comfort. She would like them to adopt the habits of the
+whites, to till land and raise food, and store it up against a
+time of want. She thinks this would be the best thing for her red
+children to do, that it would make them safer from famine and
+distress, and make their homes more comfortable.
+
+"But the Queen, though she may think it good for you to adopt
+civilized habits, has no idea of compelling you to do so. This she
+leaves to your choice, and you need not live like the white man
+unless you can be persuaded to do so of your own free will. Many
+of you, however, are already doing this.
+
+"I drove yesterday through the village below this Fort. There I saw
+many well-built houses, and many well-tilled fields with wheat and
+barley and potatoes growing, and giving promise of plenty for the
+winter to come. The people who till these fields and live in these
+houses are men of your own race, and they shew that you can live
+and prosper and provide like the white man.
+
+"What I say in my drive is enough to prove that even if there was
+not a buffalo or a fur bearing animal in the country, you could
+live and be surrounded with comfort by what you can raise from
+the soil.
+
+"Your Great Mother, therefore, will lay aside for you 'lots' of
+land to be used by you and your children forever. She will not
+allow the white man to intrude upon these lots. She will make rules
+to keep them for you, so that as long as the sun shall shine, there
+shall be no Indian who has not a place that he can call his home,
+where he can go and pitch his camp or if he chooses build his house
+and till his land.
+
+"These reserves will be large enough, but you must not expect them
+to be larger than will be enough to give a farm to each family,
+where farms shall be required. They will enable you to earn a
+living should the chase fail, and should you choose to get your
+living by tilling, you must not expect to have included in your
+reserve more of hay grounds than will be reasonably sufficient for
+your purposes in case you adopt the habits of farmers. The old
+settlers and the settlers that are coming in, must be dealt with on
+the principles of fairness and justice as well as yourselves. Your
+Great Mother knows no difference between any of her people. Another
+thing I want you to think over is this: in laying aside these
+reserves, and in everything else that the Queen shall do for you,
+you must understand that she can do for you no more than she has
+done for her red children in the East. If she were to do more for
+you that would be unjust for them. She will not do less for you
+because you are all her children alike, and she must treat you all
+alike.
+
+"When you have made your treaty you will still be free to hunt over
+much of the land included in the treaty. Much of it is rocky and
+unfit for cultivation, much of it that is wooded is beyond the
+places where the white man will require to go, at all events for
+some time to come. Till these lands are needed for use you will
+be free to hunt over them, and make all the use of them which you
+have made in the past. But when lands are needed to be tilled or
+occupied, you must not go on them any more. There will still be
+plenty of land that is neither tilled nor occupied where you can
+go and roam and hunt as you have always done, and, if you wish to
+farm, you will go to your own reserve where you will find a place
+ready for you to live on and cultivate.
+
+"There is another thing I have to say to you. Your Great Mother
+cannot come here herself to talk with you, but she has sent a
+messenger who has her confidence.
+
+"Mr. Simpson will tell you truly all her wishes. As the Queen has
+made her choice of a chief to represent her, you must, on your
+part, point out to us the chiefs you wish to represent you, as the
+persons you have faith in.
+
+"Mr. Simpson cannot talk to all your braves and people, but when he
+talks to chiefs who have your confidence he is talking to you all,
+and when he hears the voice of one of your chiefs whom you name he
+will hear the voice of you all. It is for you to say who shall talk
+for you, and also who shall be your chief men. Let them be good
+Indians, who know your wishes and whom you have faith in.
+
+"You will look to the Commissioner to fulfil everything he agrees
+to do, and the Queen will look to the chiefs you name to us, to see
+that you keep your parts of the agreement.
+
+"It is our wish to deal with you fairly and frankly.
+
+"If you have any questions to ask, ask them, if you have anything
+you wish the Queen to know, speak out plainly.
+
+"Now chiefs and braves and people, I introduce to you Mr. Simpson,
+who will say anything he thinks fit in addition to what I have
+said.
+
+"When you hear his voice you are listening to your Great Mother the
+Queen, whom God bless and preserve long to reign over us."
+
+Mr. Simpson also addressed them, and thereafter, in compliance with
+a request of the Lieutenant-Governor, the Indians retired to select
+their chiefs and principal spokesmen.
+
+On the next day the conference was resumed, the chiefs and
+spokesmen being presented. The Indians, on being asked to express
+their views, "stated that there was a cloud before them which made
+things dark, and they did not wish to commence the proceedings till
+the cloud was dispersed." On inquiry it was ascertained that they
+referred to the imprisonment of four Swampy Cree Indians, who
+had been convicted under a local law, of breach of contract, as
+boatmen, with the Hudson's Bay Company, and on default of payment
+of a fine, had been sent to prison. The Lieutenant-Governor, as a
+matter of favor, ordered the release of these prisoners, and the
+sky became clear. Next day the Indians met again and declared that
+they would never again raise their voice against the enforcement
+of the law, but much difficulty was experienced in getting them
+to understand the views of the Government--they wishing to have
+two-thirds of the Province as a reserve. Eventually on the 3rd
+of August, 1871, a treaty was concluded, its principal features
+being the relinquishment to Her Majesty of the Indian title; the
+reserving of tracts of land for the Indians, sufficient to furnish
+160 acres of land to each family of five; providing for the
+maintenance of schools, and prohibition of the sale of intoxicating
+liquors on the reserves; a present of three dollars per head to the
+Indians and the payment to them of an annuity of three dollars per
+head. [Footnote: In consequence of misunderstandings having arisen,
+owing to the Indians alleging that certain promises had been made
+to them which were not specified in these treaties, a revision of
+them became necessary, and was effected in 1875, as will be seen
+reported hereafter.] (See copy of treaty which will be found in
+the Appendix.) On the 21st of August Mr. Commissioner Simpson,
+accompanied by the Lieutenant-Governor, the Hon. James McKay,
+and Mr. Molyneux St. John (lately Sheriff of the North-West
+Territories), met the Indians at Manitoba Post, and found them
+disposed to accept the terms of the treaty made at the Stone Fort,
+with which they had already become familiar, so that little time
+was lost in effecting a treaty with them as they had no special
+terms to prefer. By these two treaties, there was acquired by the
+Crown, the extinguishment of the Indian title in Manitoba, and in
+a tract of country fully equal in resources beyond it.
+
+Having submitted these preliminary remarks, I conclude my notice
+of these treaties by quoting, as matter alike of historical record
+and practical interest, the despatches of Lieutenant-Governor
+Archibald and the excellent and instructive report, addressed to
+the Secretary of State by Mr. Simpson, embracing as it does a full
+and graphic narrative of the proceedings which took place at the
+negotiation of these treaties, and of the difficulties which were
+encountered by the Commissioner, and the mode in which they were
+overcome.
+
+                     GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+                            SILVER HEIGHTS July 32nd, 1871.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to enclose you copy of a proclamation I have
+caused to be issued with a view to prevent the danger arising from
+intoxicating drinks being given to the Indians, on the occasion of
+the meeting to negotiate a treaty.
+
+I look upon the proceedings, we are now initiating as important
+in their bearing upon our relations to the Indians of the whole
+continent. In fact the terms we now agree upon will probably shape
+the arrangements we shall have to make with all the Indians between
+the Red River and the Rocky Mountains. It will therefore be well to
+neglect nothing that is within our power to enable us to start
+fairly with the negotiations.
+
+With that view, I have, amongst other things, asked Major Irvine
+to detail a few of his troops to be present at the opening of the
+treaty. Military display has always a great effect on savages, and
+the presence even of a few troops will have a good tendency.
+
+I fear we shall have to incur a considerable expenditure for
+presents of food, etc. during the negotiations; but any cost for
+that purpose I shall deem a matter of minor consequence. The real
+burden to be considered is that which has to be borne in each
+recurring year.
+
+I doubt if it will be found practicable to make arrangements upon
+so favorable a basis as that prescribed by His Excellency the
+Governor-General as the maximum to be allowed, in case of a treaty
+with the Lake Indians.
+
+Nor indeed would it be right, if we look to what we receive, to
+measure the benefits we derive from coming into possession of the
+magnificent territory we are appropriating here by what would be
+fair to allow for the rocks and swamps and muskegs of the lake
+country east of this Province.
+
+But to this subject I shall probably take occasion to call your
+attention at an early day.
+
+                      I have etc.,
+                                    ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD.
+THE HONORABLE
+    THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES,
+                                        Ottawa.
+
+
+
+LOWER FORT GARRY, July 20th, 1871.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on Monday last I came to
+this Fort with the Commissioner to meet the Indians called here,
+with a view to negotiate a treaty, intending to open the business
+on Tuesday morning.
+
+It appeared, however, on inquiry, that some bands of Indians had
+not arrived on Tuesday morning, and we were therefore obliged to
+postpone the opening of the meeting till Thursday. On that day the
+Indians from all the sections of the country to which the
+invitation extended were found present to the number of about one
+thousand. A considerable body of half-breeds and other inhabitants
+of the country were also present, awaiting with some anxiety to
+learn what should be announced as the policy of the Government.
+
+I enclose you a memorandum of the observations with which I opened
+the meeting. On reading them you will observe one or two points
+which may require some explanation.
+
+At the time of the treaty with the Earl of Selkirk, certain Indians
+signed as Chiefs and representatives of their people. Some of the
+Indians now deny that these men ever were Chiefs or had authority
+to sign the treaty.
+
+With a view therefore to avoid a recurrence of any such question we
+asked the Indians, as a first step, to agree among themselves in
+selecting their Chiefs and then to present them to us and have
+their names and authority recorded.
+
+Furthermore, the Indians seem to have false ideas of the meaning
+of a reserve. They have been led to suppose that large tracts of
+ground were to be set aside for them as hunting grounds, including
+timber lands, of which they might sell the wood as if they were
+proprietors of the soil.
+
+I wished to correct this idea at the outset.
+
+Mr. Simpson followed me with some observations in the same strain,
+after which the Indians retired to select their Chiefs and
+spokesmen.
+
+On Friday morning the Chiefs and spokesmen were duly presented,
+and after their names were recorded, the Indians were invited to
+express their views.
+
+After some delay they stated that there was a cloud before them
+which made things dark, and they did not wish to commence the
+proceedings till the cloud was dispersed.
+
+On inquiring into their meaning, I found that they were referring
+to some four of their number who were prisoners in gaol. It seems
+that some Swampy Indians had entered into a contract with the
+Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen, and had deserted, and had been
+brought up before magistrates under a local law of last session,
+and fined, and in default of payment sent to prison for forty days.
+
+Of this term some considerable part had expired. A few of the
+offenders had paid their fines, but there were still four Indians
+remaining in prison.
+
+On learning the facts I told the Indians that I could not listen
+to them if they made a demand for the release of the Indians as a
+matter of right; that every subject of the Queen, whether Indian,
+half-breed or white, was equal in the eye of the law; that every
+offender against the law must be punished, whatever race he
+belonged to; but I said that on the opening of negotiations with
+them the Queen would like to see all her Indians taking part in
+them, and if the whole body present were to ask as a matter of
+grace and favor, under the circumstances, that their brethren
+should be released, Her Majesty would be willing to consent to
+their discharge; she would grant as a favor what she must refuse if
+asked for on any other ground. They replied by saying that they
+begged it as a matter of favor only. Thereupon I acceded to their
+request, and directed the discharge of the four Indians. This was
+received with great satisfaction. I explained again, that there
+might be no misunderstanding about it, that henceforth every
+offender against the law must be punished. They all expressed their
+acquiescence in what I said. The discharge of the prisoners had an
+excellent effect.
+
+Next morning the Indians, through one of their spokesmen, declared
+in presence of the whole body assembled that from this time they
+would never raise their voice against the law being enforced. After
+the order of the release, the Chiefs and spokesmen addressed us
+questions were asked and answered, and some progress made in the
+negotiations. Eventually the meeting adjourned till this morning
+at ten o'clock.
+
+A general acquiescence in the views laid down by Mr. Simpson and
+myself was expressed, but it was quite clear by the proceedings of
+to-day, that our views were imperfectly apprehended. When we met
+this morning, the Indians were invited to state their wishes as
+to the reserves, they were to say how much they thought would be
+sufficient, and whether they wished them all in one or in several
+places.
+
+In defining the limits of their reserves, so far as we could see,
+they wished to have about two-thirds of the Province. We heard them
+out, and then told them it was quite clear that they had entirely
+misunderstood the meaning and intention of reserves. We explained
+the object of these in something like the language of the
+memorandum enclosed, and then told them it was of no use for
+them to entertain any such ideas, which were entirely out of
+the question. We told them that whether they wished it or not,
+immigrants would come in and fill up the country; that every year
+from this one twice as many in number as their whole people there
+assembled would pour into the Province, and in a little while would
+spread all over it, and that now was the time for them to come to
+an arrangement that would secure homes and annuities for themselves
+and their children.
+
+We told them that what we proposed to allow them was an extent of
+one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that
+proportion; that they might have their land where they chose,
+not interfering with existing occupants, that we should allow an
+annuity of twelve dollars for every family of five, or in that
+proportion per head. We requested them to think over these
+propositions till Monday morning.
+
+If they thought it better to have no treaty at all, they might do
+without one, but they must make up their minds; if there was to be
+a treaty, it must be on a basis like that offered.
+
+That under some such arrangements, the Indians in the east were
+living happy and contented enjoying themselves, drawing their
+annuities, and satisfied with their position.
+
+The observations seemed to command the acquiescence of the
+majority, and on Monday morning we hope to meet them in a better
+frame for the discussion and settlement of the treaty.
+
+                 I have, etc.,
+                                ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD.
+The Honorable
+    The Secretary of State for the Provinces.
+
+
+
+LOWER FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, July 30th, 1871.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, for the information of His
+Excellency the Governor-General, that I arrived in this Province on
+the 16th instant, and, after consultation with the Lieutenant-Governor
+of Manitoba, determined upon summoning the Indians of this part of the
+country to a conference for the purpose of negotiating a treaty at
+Lower Fort Garry, on Tuesday, the 25th instant, leaving for a future
+date the negotiation with the Indians westward of and outside of the
+Province of Manitoba.
+
+Proclamations were issued, and every means taken to insure the
+attendance of the Indians, and on Monday, the 24th instant, I
+proceeded to Lower Fort Garry, where I met His Excellency the
+Lieutenant-Governor.
+
+On Tuesday, finding that only a small portion of the Indians had
+arrived, we held a preliminary conference with Henry Prince--the
+Chief of the Swampies and Chippewas residing on what is known as
+the Indian Reserve, between Lower Fort Garry and Lake Winnipeg--at
+which we arranged a meeting for the next day at twelve o'clock, for
+the purpose of ascertaining the names of the Chiefs and head men of
+the several tribes. At this preliminary conference, Henry Prince
+said that he could not then enter upon any negotiations, as he was
+not empowered to speak or act for those bands of Indians not then
+present.
+
+In the meantime it was found necessary to feed the Indians
+assembled here, and accordingly provisions were purchased and
+rations served out.
+
+On Wednesday, the 26th, His Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor and
+myself met those Indians who had arrived, in council, and addressed
+them with the view of explaining the purport of my commission, and
+the matters which were to form the subject of a treaty.
+
+It having been reported that the Indians who had not then arrived
+were on their road here, we agreed that another meeting should take
+place on the following day, at which the Chiefs and head men were
+to be presented to us.
+
+On Thursday, pursuant to appointment, we again met the Indians,
+when the Chiefs and head men of the several bands present were
+named and presented. I then explained to them the nature of
+Indian reserves, and desired them to determine, in council among
+themselves, the locality in which they desired their reserves to
+be laid out.
+
+On Friday, the 28th, we again met the Indians, but they were not
+then prepared to state their demands, and another meeting was
+appointed for Saturday.
+
+On Saturday, the 29th, we again met them, all having by this time
+arrived. When the subject of reserves came up, it was found that
+the Indians had misunderstood the object of these reservations, for
+their demands in this respect were utterly out of the question.
+After a prolonged discussion with them, I consulted with the
+Lieutenant-Governor, and determined to let them at once understand
+the terms that I was prepared to offer and I pointed out that the
+terms offered were those which would receive Her Majesty's consent.
+On further explanation of the subject, the Indians appeared to be
+satisfied, and willing to acquiesce in our arrangements as
+hereinafter mentioned, and having given them diagrams showing the
+size of the lots they would individually become possessed of, and
+having informed them of the amount of their annuity, it was finally
+settled that they should meet on Monday, the 31st and acquaint me
+with their decision.
+
+The reserves will comprise sufficient land to give each family of
+five persons one hundred and sixty acres, or in like proportion
+together with an annual payment in perpetuity of twelve dollars
+for each family of five persons, or in like proportion.
+
+As far as I can judge, I am inclined to think that the Indians will
+accept these terms.
+
+I am happy to be able to say that the precautions taken to prevent
+the introduction of liquor amongst the Indians have been wholly
+successful, and that perfect order and contentment have prevailed
+up to the present time.
+
+                        I have etc.
+                                 WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
+                                      Indian Commissioner.
+The Honorable
+    The Secretary of State for the Provinces,
+                                       Ottawa.
+
+
+
+OTTAWA, November 3rd, 1871.
+
+TO THE HONORABLE
+     THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES,
+                                   Ottawa
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to submit to you, for the information of
+His Excellency the Governor-General, a report of my negotiations
+with the Indians of the Province of Manitoba, and with certain of
+the Indians of the North-West Territory, entered upon by me, in
+accordance with your instructions, dated 3rd May, 1871.
+
+Having, in association with S. J. Dawson, Esq., and Robert Pether,
+Esq., effected a preliminary arrangement with the Indians of Rainy
+Lake, the particulars of which I have already had the honor of
+reporting to you in my Report, dated July 11th, 1871, I proceeded
+by the Lake of the Woods and Dawson Road to Fort Garry, at which
+place I arrived on the 16th July.
+
+Bearing in mind your desire that I should confer with the
+Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, I called upon Mr. Archibald, and
+learned from him that the Indians were anxiously awaiting my
+arrival, and were much excited on the subject of their lands being
+occupied without attention being first given to their claims for
+compensation. Amongst the settlers, also, an uneasy feeling
+existed, arising partly from the often-repeated demands of the
+Indians for a treaty with themselves, and partly from the fact that
+certain settlers in the neighborhood of Portage la Prairie and
+other parts of the Province, had been warned by the Indians not to
+cut wood or otherwise take possession of the lands upon which they
+were squatting. The Indians, it appeared, consented to their
+remaining on their holdings until sufficient time had been allowed
+for my arrival, and the conclusion of a treaty; but they were
+unwilling to allow the settlers the free use of the country for
+themselves or their cattle. Mr. Archibald and those residents in
+the Province of Manitoba with whom I conversed on the subject,
+appeared to think that no time should be lost in meeting the
+Indians, as some assurances had already been given them that a
+treaty would be made with them during the summer of 1871; and I
+therefore, at once, issued notices calling certain of the Indians
+together, naming two places at which I would meet them. The first
+meeting, to which were asked the Indians of the Province and
+certain others on the eastern side, was to be held on the 25th of
+July, at the Stone Fort, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, situated
+on the Red River, about twenty miles northward of Fort Garry--a
+locality chosen as being the most central for those invited. The
+second meeting was appointed to be held on August 17th, at Manitoba
+Post, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, at the north-west extremity of
+Lake Manitoba, as it was deemed that such of the bands of Indians
+residing without the limits of the Province of Manitoba, as I
+purposed to deal with at present, would meet there more readily
+than elsewhere.
+
+On Monday, the 24th of July, I met the Lieutenant-Governor of
+Manitoba at the Stone Fort; but negotiations were unavoidably
+delayed, owing to the fact that only one band of Indians had
+arrived, and that until all were on the spot those present declined
+to discuss the subject of a treaty, except in an informal manner.
+Amongst these, as amongst other Indians with whom I have come in
+contact, there exists great jealousy of one another, in all matters
+relating to their communications with the officials of Her Majesty;
+and in order to facilitate the object in view, it was most
+desirable that suspicion and jealousy of all kinds should be
+allayed. The fact of the Commissioner having arrived was sufficient
+evidence of the good intentions of Her Majesty's Government, and it
+seemed better to await the arrival of all whom I had summoned, than
+to press matters to an issue while any were absent. This, however,
+entailed the necessity of feeding those who were already there, and
+others as they arrived.
+
+It is customary in dealing with Indians to do so, and in this case
+it was absolutely necessary, for, obviously, it would have been
+impossible to invite those people from a distance, and then leave
+them to starve at our doors, or, in search of food, to plunder the
+neighborhood into which they had been introduced. At that season of
+the year the Indians were not engaged in fishing or hunting, and
+consequently large numbers of men, women and children attended at
+the place of meeting, for all of whom food was provided. The price
+of provisions, even at the lowest price for which they could be
+obtained, was high, pork being fifty dollars a barrel, and flour
+twenty shillings sterling per hundred, and such cattle as I was
+able to purchase L16 per head, so that the expense of keeping
+the Indians during the negotiation of treaty and payment of the
+gratuity, which lasted eleven days, forms no small share of the
+total expenditure. In addition to this expense, it was thought
+necessary by the Lieutenant-Governor that Major Irvine commanding
+the troops at Fort Garry should be requested to furnish a guard at
+the Stone Fort during the negotiations, and that there should be at
+hand, also, a force of constabulary, for the purpose of preventing
+the introduction of liquor amongst the Indian encampments. Other
+expenses of a somewhat similar nature were incurred, which would be
+totally unnecessary upon any future occasion of payment being made
+to the Indians of Manitoba. I may here refer to the apparently
+prolonged duration of the first negotiation, and explain, in
+reference thereto, the causes, or some of them, that entailed the
+loss of time and attendant expense. For some time a doubt has
+existed whether the Chief, nominally at the head of the Indians of
+the Indian settlement, possessed the good will and confidence of
+that band; and I thought it advisable to require that the several
+bands of Indians should select such Chiefs as they thought proper,
+and present these men as their authorized Chiefs, before anything
+was said as to the terms of a treaty. The Indians having acquiesced
+in this proposal, forthwith proceeded to such election; but the
+proceeding apparently involved discussion and consideration amongst
+themselves, and two days elapsed before the men chosen were
+presented for recognition, and the business of the meeting
+commenced.
+
+When the peculiar circumstances surrounding the position of the
+Indians of the Province were pointed out, the future of the country
+predicted, and the views and intentions of the Government explained
+by the Lieutenant-Governor and myself, the Indians professed a
+desire for time to think over what had been said before making any
+reply; and when their answer came it proved to contain demands of
+such an exorbitant nature, that much time was spent in reducing
+their terms to a basis upon which an arrangement could be made.
+
+Every band had its spokesman in addition to its Chief, and each
+seemed to vie with another in the dimensions of their requirements.
+I may mention, as an illustration, that in the matter of reserves,
+the quantity of land demanded for each band amounted to about three
+townships per Indian, and included the greater part of the settled
+portions of the Province. It was not until the 3rd of August, or
+nine days after the first meeting, that the basis of arrangement
+was arrived at, upon which is founded the treaty of that date.
+Then, and by means of mutual concessions, the following terms were
+agreed upon. For the cession of the country described in the treaty
+referred to, and comprising the Province of Manitoba, and certain
+country in the north-east thereof, every Indian was to receive a
+sum of three dollars a year in perpetuity, and a reserve was to he
+set apart for each band, of sufficient size to allow one hundred
+and sixty acres to each family of five persons, or in like
+proportion as the family might be greater or less than five. As
+each Indian settled down upon his share of the reserve, and
+commenced the cultivation of his land, he was to receive a plough
+and harrow. Each Chief was to receive a cow and a male and female
+of the smaller kinds of animals bred upon a farm. There was to be
+a bull for the general use of each reserve. In addition to this,
+each Chief was to receive a dress, a flag and a medal, as marks of
+distinction; and each Chief, with the exception of Bozawequare, the
+Chief of the Portage band, was to receive a buggy, or light spring
+waggon. Two councillors and two braves of each band were to receive
+a dress, somewhat inferior to that provided for the Chiefs, and
+the braves and councillors of the Portage band excepted, were to
+receive a buggy. Every Indian was to receive a gratuity of three
+dollars, which, though given as a payment for good behaviour, was
+to be understood to cover all dimensions for the past.
+
+On this basis the treaty was signed by myself and the several Chiefs,
+on behalf of themselves and their respective bands, on the 3rd of
+August, 1871, and on the following day the payment commenced.
+
+The three dollars gratuity, above referred to, will not occur in
+the ordinary annual payments to the Indians of Manitoba, and,
+though doubling the amount paid this year, may now properly be
+regarded as belonging to a previous year, but only now liquidated.
+
+A large number of Indians, entitled to share in the treaty, were
+absent on the 3rd August, and in the belief that I should, almost
+immediately, be able to obtain a more accurate knowledge than I
+possessed of the numbers of the several bands, I paid to each
+person present only three dollars--the gratuity--postponing for
+a short time the first annual payment. Having completed this
+disbursement, I prepared to start for Manitoba Post, to open
+negotiations with the Indians on the immediate north and north-west
+borders of the Province of Manitoba, promising however to visit the
+several bands of the first treaty, in their own districts, and to
+there pay them. By this means the necessity for their leaving their
+own homes, and for the Government's feeding them while they were
+being paid, and during their journey home, was avoided.
+
+After completing the treaty at Manitoba Post, of which mention
+is herein after made, I visited Portage la Prairie, the Indian
+settlement at St. Peter's, Riviere Marais, and the Town of
+Winnipeg, according to my promise, and at each place, with the
+exception of Riviere Marais, found the Indians satisfied with the
+treaty and awaiting their payment. At Riviere Marais, which was
+the rendezvous appointed by the bands living in the neighborhood
+of Pembina, I found that the Indians had either misunderstood the
+advice given them by parties in the settlement, well disposed
+towards the treaty, or, as I have some reason to believe had become
+unsettled by the representations made by persons in the vicinity
+of Pembina, whose interests lay elsewhere than in the Province of
+Manitoba; for, on my announcing my readiness to pay them, they
+demurred at receiving their money until some further concessions
+had been made by me.
+
+With a view to inducing the Indians to adopt the habits and labors
+of civilization, it had been agreed, at the signing of the treaty
+as before mentioned, to give certain animals as a nucleus for
+stocking the several reserves, together with certain farming
+implements; and it was now represented to me by the spokesman of
+the bands, that as the Queen had, with that kindness of heart which
+distinguished her dealings with her red children, expressed a
+desire to see the Indians discard their former precarious mode of
+living and adopt the agricultural pursuits of the white man, they
+were desirous of acceding to the wish of their great Mother, and
+were now prepared to receive the gifts she had been good enough to
+speak of, through her Commissioner, in full. But, as it could make
+no difference whatever to their great Mother whether these things
+were given in kind or in money value, her red children of the
+Pembina bands were resolved to receive them in the latter form.
+I had put a valuation upon all the articles mentioned in the
+supplement to the treaty, and could go no further in the matter
+unless I was prepared to pay them for all these articles at the
+rates they would now proceed to mention. I declined to comply
+with the request, and they declined to receive their first annual
+payment, whereupon I broke up my camp and returned to Winnipeg. As
+I foresaw at the time this determination on their part was shortly
+repented, and a number of their leading men were subsequently paid
+at Winnipeg, while at the request of the Indians, the money for the
+remainder, together with a pay sheet, was forwarded to the officer
+in charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Pembina, with
+instructions to pay the Indians as per list as each might present
+himself. At Portage la Prairie, although the number paid at the
+Stone Fort was largely increased, there still remained many who,
+from absence or other causes, were not paid, and by the request of
+the Chief the money was left for these with the officers in charge
+of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post, in the same manner as was done
+for the Pembina bands.
+
+As I was unable to proceed to Fort Alexander, the payments for the
+Indians or for such of them as were present at the signing of the
+treaty, were sent in like manner to the officer in charge of the
+Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Fort Alexander; but it may be as
+well to mention that the number so paid will fall far short of the
+total number belonging to that place. The latter remark will apply
+to the Pembina band, for their payment was sent as per gratuity
+list, and there must necessarily have been others who did not
+receive payment. All these must receive their back payments during
+the course of next year.
+
+During the payment of the several bands, it was found that in some,
+and most notably in the Indian settlement and Broken Head River
+Band, a number of those residing among the Indians, and calling
+themselves Indians, are in reality half-breeds, and entitled to
+share in the land grant under the provisions of the Manitoba Act.
+I was most particular, therefore, in causing it to be explained,
+generally and to individuals, that any person now electing to be
+classed with Indians, and receiving the Indian pay and gratuity,
+would, I believed, thereby forfeit his or her right to another
+grant as a half-breed; and in all cases where it was known that
+a man was a half-breed, the matter, as it affected himself and
+his children, was explained to him, and the choice given him to
+characterize himself. A very few only decided upon taking their
+grants as half-breeds. The explanation of this apparent sacrifice
+is found in the fact that the mass of these persons have lived all
+their lives on the Indian reserves (so called), and would rather
+receive such benefits as may accrue to them under the Indian
+treaty, than wait the realization of any value in their half-breed
+grant.
+
+The Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba having expressed a desire to
+be present at the negotiation of the treaty at Manitoba Post. His
+Honor, accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, proceeded thither
+with me, in company with Mr. Molyneux St. John, the Clerk of the
+Legislative Assembly of Manitoba, who had assisted me in the duties
+connected with the former treaty and payments. I left Winnipeg on
+the 13th August, but owing to adverse winds on Lake Manitoba did
+not arrive until two days after the time appointed. I found that,
+in the meanwhile, the officer in charge of the Hudson's Bay
+Company's Post had been obliged to give some provisions to the
+Indians pending my arrival, but on my speaking to the leading men
+of the bands assembled, it was evident that the Indians of this
+part had no special demands to make, but having a knowledge of the
+former treaty, desired to be dealt with in the same manner and on
+the same terms as those adopted by the Indians of the Province of
+Manitoba.
+
+The negotiation with these bands therefore occupied little time and
+on the 21st August, 1871, a treaty was concluded by which a tract
+of country three times as large as the Province of Manitoba was
+surrendered by the Indians to the Crown. Payment in full, that is
+to say, the gratuity and the first payment, was at once made; and
+I have since written to the officers in charge of the Hudson's Bay
+Company's Posts within the tract above referred to, requesting them
+to procure for me a reliable census of the Indians, parties to this
+treaty.
+
+I have referred to the cost of effecting these treaties, and
+remarked that it will prove to be exceptional. It may be regarded
+as entirely so, as far as the Indians with whom the dealings were
+held are concerned. In the future the annual payment will be only
+one-half to each Indian of the amount paid this year, for the
+gratuity was the same as the payment, and the heavy expense of
+feeding the Indians while at the place of meeting and on their
+journey home, will be avoided by the payment being made at or near
+their own reserves.
+
+All the collateral expenses, therefore, of this year, including
+dresses, medals, presents to the Indians, etc., etc., will not
+appear in the expenses attending during future payments.
+
+But it is to be remembered that a large number of Indians, whose
+lands were ceded by the second treaty, were not present. The
+distance from the hunting grounds of some to Manitoba Post is
+very great; but while their absence was to be regretted for some
+reasons, it effected a very considerable saving in the item of
+provisions.
+
+During the ensuing season, these persons will probably be found at
+the place where the payments will be made, and will then require
+their payments as if they had been present at the signing of the
+treaty.
+
+Of the land ceded in the Province of Manitoba, it will be hardly
+necessary for me to speak, as His Excellency the Governor-General
+is already in possession of accurate information touching its
+fertility and resources; but I may observe that, valuable as are
+these lands, they are fully equalled if not exceeded by the country
+of which the Government now comes into possession by virtue of
+the treaty concluded at Manitoba Post. Already settlers from the
+Provinces in Canada and elsewhere are pushing their way beyond the
+limits of the Province of Manitoba; and there is nothing but the
+arbitrary limits of that Province, and certain wood and water
+advantages found in the territory beyond it, to distinguish one
+part of the country from the other. The fertility that is possessed
+by Manitoba is shared by the country and its confines. The water
+courses of the Province are excelled by those of the territory; and
+the want of wood which threatens serious difficulty in the one is
+by no means so apparent in the other.
+
+The Indians of both parts have a firm belief in the honor and
+integrity of Her Majesty's representatives, and are fully impressed
+with the idea that the amelioration of their present condition
+is one of the objects of Her Majesty in making these treaties.
+Although many years will elapse before they can be regarded as a
+settled population--settled in the sense of following agricultural
+pursuits--the Indians have already shown a disposition to provide
+against the vicissitudes of the chase by cultivating small patches
+of corn and potatoes. Moreover, in the Province of Manitoba, where
+labor is scarce, Indians give great assistance in gathering in the
+crops. At Portage la Prairie, both Chippawas and Sioux were largely
+employed in the grain field; and in other parishes I found many
+farmers whose employes were nearly all Indians.
+
+Although serious trouble has from time to time occurred across the
+boundary line, with Indians of the same tribes, and indeed of the
+same bands as those in Manitoba, there is no reason to fear any
+trouble with those who regard themselves as subjects of Her
+Majesty. Their desire is to live at peace with the white man, to
+trade with him, and, when they are disposed, to work for him; and I
+believe that nothing but gross injustice or oppression will induce
+them either to forget the allegiance which they now claim with
+pride, or molest the white subjects of the sovereign whom they
+regard as their Supreme Chief.
+
+The system of an annual payment in money I regard as a good one,
+because the recipient is enabled to purchase just what he requires
+when he can get it most cheaply, and it also enables him to buy
+articles at second hand, from settlers and others, that are quite
+as useful to him as are the same things when new. The sum of three
+dollars does not appear to be large enough to enable an Indian to
+provide himself with many of his winter necessaries; but as he
+receives the same amount for his wife or wives, and for each of his
+children, the aggregate sum is usually sufficient to procure many
+comforts for his family which he would otherwise be compelled to
+deny himself.
+
+*    *    *    *    *
+
+I take this opportunity of acknowledging the assistance afforded
+me in successfully completing the two treaties, to which I have
+referred, by His Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, the
+Hon. James McKay, and the officers of the Hudson's Bay Company. In
+a country where transport and all other business facilities are
+necessarily so scarce, the services rendered to the Government by
+the officers in charge of the several Hudson's Bay Posts has been
+most opportune and valuable.
+
+                         I have, etc.,
+                                   WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
+                                         Indian Commissioner.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+TREATY NUMBER THREE, OR THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY
+
+
+In the year 1871 the Privy Council of Canada issued a joint
+commission to Messrs. W. M. Simpson, S. J. Dawson and W. J. Pether,
+authorizing them to treat with the Ojibbeway Indians for the
+surrender to the Crown of the lands they inhabited--covering the
+area from the watershed of Lake Superior to the north-west angle of
+the Lake of the Woods, and from the American border to the height
+of land from which the streams flow towards the Hudson's Bay. This
+step had become necessary in order to make the route known as "the
+Dawson route," extending from Prince Arthur's Landing on Lake
+Superior to the north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, which
+was then being opened up, "secure for the passage of emigrants
+and of the people of the Dominion generally," and also to enable
+the Government to throw open for settlement any portion of the
+land which might be susceptible of improvement and profitable
+occupation. The Commissioners accepted the appointment, and in
+July, 1871, met the Indians at Fort Francis.
+
+The tribes preferred claims for right of way through their country.
+The Commissioners reported "that they had admitted these to a
+limited extent and had made them presents in provisions and
+clothing and were also to pay them a small amount in money, it
+being fully and distinctly understood by the Indians that these
+presents and clothing were accepted by them as an equivalent for
+all past claims whatever." The Commissioners having explained to
+them fully the intentions of the Government as to obtaining a
+surrender of their territorial rights, and giving in return
+therefor reserves of land and annual payments, asked them to
+consider the proposals calmly* and meet the Commissioners the
+succeeding summer to come to an arrangement. In 1872, the Indians
+were found not to be ready for the making of a treaty and the
+subject was postponed. In the year 1873 a commission was issued to
+the Hon. Alexander Morris, then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and
+the North-West Territories, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, who had in the
+interval been appointed Commissioner of Indian Affairs in the place
+of Mr. Simpson, who had resigned, and Lindsay Russell Esq., but
+the latter being unable to act, Mr. Dawson, now M.P. for Algoma,
+was appointed Commissioner in his stead. These Commissioners
+having accepted the duty confided to them, met the Indians at the
+north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods in the end of September,
+1873, and, after protracted and difficult negotiations, succeeded
+in effecting a treaty with them. A copy of the treaty will be
+found in the Appendix, and a brief record of the utterances of
+the Indians and of the Commissioners, which was taken down in
+short hand by one of the soldiers of the militia force, is hereto
+subjoined. This treaty was one of great importance, as it not
+only tranquilized the large Indian population affected by it, but
+eventually shaped the terms of all the treaties, four, five, six
+and seven, which have since been made with the Indians of the
+North-West Territories--who speedily became apprised of the
+concessions which had been granted to the Ojibbeway nation. The
+closing scenes were striking and impressive. The chief speaker,
+Mawe-do-pe-nais, thus winding up the conference on the part of
+the Indians, in his final address to the Lieutenant-Governor and
+his fellow Commissioners:
+
+"Now you see me stand before you all: what has been done here to
+day has been done openly before the Great Spirit and before the
+nation, and I hope I may never hear any one say that this treaty
+has been done secretly: and now in closing this council, I take off
+my glove, and in giving you my hand I deliver over my birthright
+and lands: and in taking your hand I hold fast all the promises you
+have made, and I hope they will last as long as the sun rises and
+the water flows, as you have said."
+
+The conference then adjourned, and on re-assembling, after the
+treaty had been read and explained, the Commissioners signed it
+and the Lieutenant-Governor called on an aged hereditary Chief,
+Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais, to sign next. The Chief came forward, but declined
+to touch the pen, saying, "I must first have the money in my hand."
+The Lieutenant-Governor immediately held out his hand and directed the
+interpreter to say to the chief, "Take my hand and feel the money in
+it. If you cannot trust me for half an hour do not trust me forever."
+When this was repeated by the interpreter, the Chief smiled, took
+the out-stretched hand, and at once touched the pen, while his mark
+was being made, his last lingering distrust having been effectively
+dispelled by this prompt action and reply. The other Chiefs followed,
+and then the interpreter was directed to tell Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais,
+the Chief, that he would be paid forthwith, but the Chief at once
+replied, "Oh no, it is evening now, and I will wait till to-morrow."
+The payments were duly made next day, and so was closed, a treaty,
+whereby a territory was enabled to be opened up, of great importance
+to Canada, embracing as it does the Pacific Railway route to the
+North-West Territories--a wide extent of fertile lands, and, as is
+believed, great mineral resources. I now quote the official despatch
+of the Lieutenant-Governor, dated the 14th October, 1873, in which
+will be found, a full narrative of the proceedings, connected with the
+treaty, and a statement of the results thereby effected. I also submit
+a short-hand report of the negotiations connected with the treaty.
+
+                  GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+                        FORT GARRY, October 14th, 1873.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to enclose copy of a treaty made by myself,
+Lieut.-Col. Provencher, Indian agent and S. J. Dawson, Esq.,
+Commissioner, acting on behalf of Her Majesty, of the one part,
+and the Saulteaux tribe of Ojibbeway Indians on the other, at the
+North-West Angle of the Lake of the Woods, on the 3rd of October,
+for the relinquishment of the Indian title to the tract of land
+therein described and embracing 55,000 square miles. In the first
+place, the holding of the negotiation of the treaty had been
+appointed by you to take place at the North-West Angle before you
+requested me to take part therein, and Mr. Dawson had obtained the
+consent of the Indians to meet there on the 10th of September, but
+they afterwards changed their minds, and refused to meet me unless
+I came to Fort Francis. I refused to do this, as I felt that the
+yielding to the demand of the Indians in this respect, would
+operate injuriously to the success of the treaty, and the results
+proved the correctness of the opinion I had formed. I therefore
+sent a special agent (Mr. Pierre Levaillier) to warn them that I
+would meet them as arranged at the North-West Angle on the 25th,
+or not at all this year, to which they eventually agreed.
+
+I left here for the Angle on the 23rd September and arrived there
+on the 25th, when I was joined by Messrs. Provencher and Dawson the
+last named of whom I was glad to find had been associated with the
+Commissioners in consequence of the resignation of Mr. Lindsey
+Russell, thereby giving us the benefit as well of his knowledge of
+the country to be dealt with, as of the several bands of Indians
+therein. Mr. Pether, of Fort Francis, was also in attendance, and
+Mr. Provencher was accompanied by Mr. St. John, of his department.
+
+On arriving, the Indians, who were already there, came up to the
+house I occupied, in procession, headed by braves bearing a banner
+and a Union Jack, and accompanied by others beating drums. They
+asked leave to perform a dance in my honor, after which they
+presented to me the pipe of peace. They were then supplied with
+provisions and returned to their camp. As the Indians had not all
+arrived, and for other reasons, the 26th, 27th and 28th were passed
+without any progress but on the 29th I sent them word that they
+must meet the Commissioners next morning. Accordingly, on the 30th,
+they met us in a tent, the use of which I had obtained from the
+military authorities. I explained to them the object of the
+meeting, but as they informed me that they were not ready to confer
+with us, I adjourned the meeting until next day. On the 1st October
+they again assembled. The principal cause of the delay was
+divisions and jealousies among themselves. The nation had not met
+for many years, and some of them had never before been assembled
+together. They were very jealous of each other, and dreaded any of
+the Chiefs having individual communications with me, to prevent
+which they had guards on the approaches to my house and Mr.
+Dawson's tent. On the 2nd October they again assembled, when I
+again explained the object of the meeting, through Mr. McPherson,
+an intelligent half-breed trader, whose services I secured. M.
+Chatelan, the Government interpreter, was also present. They had
+selected three spokesmen, and had also an Indian reporter, whose
+duty was to commit to memory all that was said. They had also
+secured the services of M. Joseph Nolin, of Point du Chene, to
+take notes in French of the negotiations, a copy of which notes I
+obtained from him and herewith enclose. The spokesmen informed me
+they would not treat as to the land until we settled with them as
+to the Dawson route, with regard to which they alleged Mr. Dawson
+had made promises which had not been kept, and that they had not
+been paid for the wood used in building the steamers, nor for the
+use of the route itself. Mr. Dawson explained that he had paid them
+for cutting wood, but had always asserted a common right to the use
+of wood and the water way. He asked them what promise had not been
+kept, and pointed out that the Government had twice before
+endeavored to treat with them for a settlement of all matters. He
+referred them to me as to the general question of the use of the
+route. They were unable to name any promises which had not been
+kept. Thereupon I told them I came on behalf of the Queen and the
+Government of the Dominion of Canada to treat with them with regard
+to the lands and all other matters, but that they refused to hear
+what I had to say; they had closed my mouth; and as we would not
+treat except for the settlement of all matters past and future I
+could not speak unless they asked me to do so. They conferred among
+themselves, and seeing that we were quite firm, the spokesman came
+forward and said that they would not close my mouth, after which
+they would make their demands. The Commissioners had had a
+conference and agreed, as they found there was no hope of a treaty
+for a less sum, to offer five dollars per head, a present of ten
+dollars, and reserves of farming and other lands not exceeding one
+square mile per family of five, or in that proportion, sums within
+the limits of our instructions, though I had private advices if
+possible not to give the maximum sum named, as the Government had
+been under a misapprehension as to amounts given to the bands in
+the United States. The Chiefs heard my proposal, and the meeting
+adjourned until next day. On the 3rd October the Chiefs again
+assembled and made a counter proposition, of which I enclose a
+copy, being the demand they have urged since 1869. I also enclose
+an estimate I had made of the money value of the demand, amounting
+to $125,000 per annum. On behalf of the Commissioners I at once
+peremptorily refused the demand. The spokesmen returned to the
+Chiefs, who were arranged on benches, the people sitting on the
+ground behind them, and on their return they informed me that the
+Chiefs, warriors and braves were of one mind, that they would make
+a treaty only if we acceded to their demand. I told them if so the
+conference was over, that I would return and report that they had
+refused to make a reasonable treaty, that hereafter I would treat
+with those bands who were willing to treat, but that I would advise
+them to return to the council and reconsider their determination
+before next morning, when, if not, I should certainly leave. This
+brought matters to a crisis. The Chief of the Lac Seul band came
+forward to speak. The others tried to prevent him, but he was
+secured a hearing. He stated that he represented four hundred
+people in the north, that they wished a treaty, that they wished a
+school-master to be sent them to teach their children the knowledge
+of the white man; that they had begun to cultivate the soil and
+were growing potatoes and Indian corn, but wished other grain for
+seed and some agricultural implements and cattle. This Chief spoke
+under evident apprehension as to the course he was taking in
+resisting the other Indians, and displayed much good sense and
+moral courage. He was followed by the Chief "Blackstone," who
+urged the other Chiefs to return to the council and consider my
+proposals, stating that he was ready to treat, though he did not
+agree to my proposals nor to those made to me. I then told them
+that I had known all along they were not united as they had said;
+that they ought not to allow a few Chiefs to prevent a treaty, and
+that I wished to treat with them as a nation and not with separate
+bands, as they would otherwise compel me to do, and therefore urged
+them to return to their council, promising to remain another day to
+give them time for consideration. They spent the night in council,
+and next morning having received a message from M. Charles Nolin, a
+French half-breed, that they were becoming more amenable to reason,
+I requested the Hon. James McKay (who went to the Angle three times
+to promote this treaty), Charles Nolin and Pierre Levaillier to go
+down to the Indian Council, and as men of their own blood, give
+them friendly advice. They accordingly did so, and were received
+by the Indians, and in about half an hour afterwards were followed
+by Messrs. Provencher and St. John, who also took part in the
+interview with the Council of Chiefs. The Chiefs were summoned to
+the conference by the sound of a bugle and again met us, when they
+told me that the determination to adhere to their demands had been
+so strong a bond that they did not think it could be broken, but
+they had now determined to see if I would give them anything more.
+
+The Commissioners had had a conference, and agreed previously to
+offer a small sum for ammunition and twine for nets, yearly--a few
+agricultural implements and seeds, for any band actually farming
+or commencing to farm, and to increase the money payment by two
+dollars per head if it should be found necessary in order to secure
+a treaty, maintaining a permanent annuities at the sum fixed. The
+Indians on the other hand had determined on asking fifteen dollars,
+with some other demands. In fixing the ten dollars the Commissioners
+had done so as a sum likely to be accepted in view of three dollars
+per head having been paid the Indians the first year the Dawson route
+was used, and that they had received nothing since. In reply to the
+Indians, I told them I was glad that they had reconsidered their
+decision, and that as they had done so, being desirous of inducing
+them to practice agriculture and to have the means of getting food
+if their fishing and hunting failed, we would give them certain
+implements, cattle and grain, once for all, and the extra two dollars
+per head of a money payment. This proposal was received favorably, but
+the spokesmen again came forward and said they had some questions to
+ask before accepting my proposal. They wanted suits of clothing every
+year for all the bands, and fifty dollars for every Chief annually.
+This I declined, but told them that there were some presents of
+clothing and food which would be given them this year at the close of
+treaty. They then asked free passes forever over the Canada Pacific
+Railway, which I refused. They then asked that no "fire-water" should
+be sold on their reserves, and I promised that a regulation to this
+effect should be introduced into the treaty. They then asked that they
+should not be sent to war, and I told them the Queen was not in the
+habit of employing the Indians in warfare. They asked that they should
+have power to put turbulent men off their reserves, and I told them
+the law would be enforced against such men. They asked what reserves
+would be given them, and were informed by Mr. Provencher that reserves
+of farming and other lands would be given them as previously stated,
+and that any land actually in cultivation by them would be respected.
+They asked if the mines would be theirs; I said if they were found on
+their reserves it would be to their benefit, but not otherwise. They
+asked if an Indian found a mine would he be paid for it, I told them
+he could sell his information if he could find a purchaser like any
+other person. They explained that some of their children had married
+in the States, and they wished them to return and live among them, and
+wanted them included in the treaty. I told them the treaty was not for
+American Indians, but any bona fide British Indians of the class they
+mentioned who should within two years be found resident on British
+soil would be recognized.
+
+They said there were some ten to twenty families of half-breeds who
+were recognized as Indians and lived with them, and they wished
+them included. I said the treaty was not for whites, but I would
+recommend that those families should be permitted the option of
+taking either status as Indians or whites, but that they could not
+take both. They asked that Mr. Charles Nolin should be employed as
+an Indian Agent, and I stated that I would submit his name to the
+Government with favorable mention of his services on that occasion.
+They asked that the Chiefs and head men, as in other treaties,
+should get an official suit of clothing, a nag, and a medal, which
+I promised. Mawedopenais produced one of the medals given to the
+Red River Chiefs, said it was not silver, and they were ashamed
+to wear it, as it turned black, and then, with an air of great
+contempt, struck it with his knife. I stated that I would mention
+what he had said, and the manner in which he had spoken. They
+also stated the Hudson Bay Company had staked out ground at Fort
+Francis, on part of the land they claimed to have used, and to be
+entitled to, and I promised that enquiry would be made into the
+matter. They apologized for the number of questions put me, which
+occupied a space of some hours, and then the principal spokesman,
+Mawedopenais, came forward and drew off his gloves, and spoke as
+follows: "Now you see me stand before you all. What has been done
+here to-day, has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and
+before the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one say
+that this treaty has been done secretly. And now in closing this
+council, I take off my glove, and in taking your hand, I deliver
+over my birthright, and lands, and in taking your hand I hold fast
+all the promises you have made, and I hope they will last as long
+as the sun goes round, and the water flows, as you have said." To
+which I replied as follows: "I accept your hand, and with it the
+lands and will keep all my promises, in the firm belief that the
+treaty now to be signed will bind the red man and the white man
+together as friends forever." The conference then adjourned for an
+hour to enable the text of the treaty to be completed in accordance
+with the understanding arrived at. At the expiration of that period
+the conference was resumed, and after the reading of the treaty,
+and an explanation of it in Indian by the Hon. James McKay it was
+signed by the Commissioners and by the several Chiefs, the first
+signature being that of a very aged hereditary Chief. The next
+day the Indians were paid by Messrs. Pether and Graham, of the
+Department of Public Works; the latter of whom kindly offered
+his services as Mr. Provencher had to leave to keep another
+appointment. The negotiation was a very difficult and trying one,
+and required on the part of the Commissioners great patience and
+firmness. On the whole I am of opinion that the issue is a happy
+one. With the exception of two bands in the Shebandowan District,
+whose adhesion was secured in advance and the signatures of whose
+Chiefs Mr. Dawson left to secure, the Indian title has been
+extinguished over the vast tract of country comprising 55,000
+square miles lying between the upper boundary of the Lake Superior
+treaty, and that of the treaty made by Mr. Commissioner Simpson at
+Manitoba Post, and embracing within its bounds the Dawson route,
+the route of the Canada Pacific Railway and an extensive lumber and
+mineral region. [Footnote: Mr. Dawson succeeded in obtaining the
+adhesion to the treaty of the Chiefs in question.] It is fortunate,
+too that the arrangement has been effected, as the Indians
+along the lakes and rivers were dissatisfied at the use of the
+waters, which they considered theirs, having been taken without
+compensation, so much so indeed that I believe if the treaty had
+not been made, the Government would have been compelled to place a
+force on the line next year.
+
+Before closing this despatch, I have much pleasure in bearing
+testimony to the hearty co-operation and efficient aid the
+Commissioners received from the Metis who were present at the
+Angle, and who, with one accord, whether of French or English
+origin, used the influence which their relationships to the Indians
+gave them to impress them with the necessity of their entering into
+the treaty. I must also express my obligations to the detachment of
+troops under the command of Captain Macdonald, assigned me as an
+escort, for their soldierly bearing and excellent conduct while at
+the Angle. Their presence was of great value, and had the effect of
+deterring traders from bringing articles of illicit trade for sale
+to the Indians; and moreover exercised a moral influence which
+contributed most materially to the success of the negotiations. I
+have further to add, that it was found impossible, owing to the
+extent of the country treated for, and the want of knowledge of the
+circumstances of each band, to define the reserves to be granted to
+the Indians. It was therefore agreed that the reserves should be
+hereafter selected by officers of the Government, who should confer
+with the several bands, and pay due respect to lands actually
+cultivated by them. A provision was also introduced to the effect
+that any of the reserves, or any interest in them, might hereafter
+be sold for the benefit of the Indians by the Government with their
+consent. I would suggest that instructions should be given to Mr.
+Dawson to select the reserves with all convenient speed; and, to
+prevent complication I would further suggest that no patents should
+be issued, or licenses granted, for mineral or timber lands, or
+other lands, until the question of the reserves has been first
+adjusted.
+
+                 I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                            Your obedient servant,
+                                      ALEXANDER MORRIS.
+                                               Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+Attention is called to the ensuing report of the proceedings
+connected with the treaty, extracted from the Manitoban newspaper
+of the 18th October, 1873, published at Winnipeg. The reports of
+the speeches therein contained were prepared by a short-hand
+reporter and present an accurate view of the course of the
+discussions, and a vivid representation of the habits of Indian
+thought.
+
+                                     NORTH-WEST ANGLE,
+                                             September 30, 1873.
+
+The Lieutenant-Governor and party, and the other Commissioners
+appointed to negotiate a treaty with the Indians, arrived here on
+Thursday, 24th inst., having enjoyed delightful weather during the
+entire trip from Fort Garry. The Governor occupies the house of the
+officer in charge of the H. B. Post. The grounds around it have
+been nicely graded and cleared of brush, and surrounded by rows of
+evergreens planted closely, so as to completely screen the house
+from wind, and at the same time contribute much to relieve the
+monotony of the scenery. Immediately west of this, and likewise
+enclosed by walls of evergreens, is the large marquee used as
+a Council House, by the contracting parties; and immediately
+surrounding it to the north and west are the tents of the other
+officers of the Commission and the officers and men of the
+Volunteers on detachment duty.
+
+Situated to the eastward, and extending all along the river bank,
+are the tents of the Indians to the number of a hundred, with here
+and there the tent of the trader, attracted thither by the prospect
+of turning an honest penny by exchanging the necessaries of Indian
+life for such amounts of the price of their heritage as they can be
+induced to spend.
+
+The natives now assembled here number about 800 all told, and hail
+from the places given below. Among them are many fine physically
+developed men, who would be considered good looking were it not for
+the extravagance with which they be-smear their faces with pigments
+of all colors.
+
+It was at first thought probable that the serious business of the
+meeting would be begun on Friday, but owing to the non-arrival of
+a large body of Rainy River and Lac Seul representatives, it was
+decided to defer it until next day. Saturday came, and owing to the
+arrival of a messenger from the Lac Seul band asking the Governor
+to wait for their arrival, proceedings have further stayed until
+Monday. But "hope deferred maketh the heart sick;" so the advent of
+Monday brought nothing but disappointment, and this, coupled with
+the disagreeable wet and cold weather that prevailed, made every
+one ill at ease if not miserable. The Chiefs were not ready to
+treat--they had business of their own to transact, which must be
+disposed of before they could see the Governor; and so another
+delay was granted. But Monday did not find them ready, and they
+refused to begin negotiations. An intimation from the Governor that
+unless they were ready on the following day he would leave for
+home on Wednesday, hurried them up a little--they did wait on him
+to-day, Tuesday, but only to say they had not yet finished their
+own business, but that they would try and be ready to treat on
+Wednesday. And so the matter stands at present--if the Indians
+agree amongst themselves, the treaty will be opened to-morrow,
+otherwise the Governor will strike camp and return to Fort Garry.
+
+Divisions and local jealousies have taken possession of the Indian
+mind. The difficulties are the inability of the Indians to select
+a high or principal chief from amongst themselves, and as to the
+matter and extent of the demands to be made.
+
+It is many years since these people had a general council, and in
+the interval many head men have died, while others have grown to
+man's estate, and feel ambitious to take part in the proceedings.
+But the fiat has gone forth, that unless a conclusion is arrived at
+to-morrow negotiations will be broken off for this year.
+
+BOUNDARIES OF THE LANDS TO BE CEDED
+
+Beginning at the North-West Angle eastward, taking in all the Lake
+of the Woods, including White Fish Bay, Rat Portage and north to
+White Dog in English River; up English River to Lake Seul, and then
+south east to Lake Nepigon; westward to Rainy River and down it
+to Lake of the Woods, and up nearly to Lac des Mille Lacs; then
+beginning at the 49th parallel to White Mouth River, thence down it
+to the north, along the eastern boundary of the land ceded in 1871,
+embracing 55,000 square miles.
+
+In the neighborhood of Lac des mille Lacs and Shebandowan are
+several bands, who have sent word that they cannot come as far as
+this point, but will accept the terms made at this treaty and
+ratify it with any one commissioner who will go there to meet them.
+
+The whole number of Indians in the territory is estimated at
+14,000, and are represented here by Chiefs of the following bands:
+
+   1. North-West Angle.
+   2. Rat Portage.
+   3. Lake Seul.
+   4. White Fish Bay on Lake of the Woods.
+   5. Sha-bas-kang, or Grassy Narrows.
+   6. Rainy River.
+   7. Rainy Lake.
+   8. Beyond Kettle Falls, southward.
+   9. Eagle Lake.
+  10. Nepigon.
+  11. Shoal Lake (three miles to the north of this point).
+
+
+                           NORTH-WEST ANGLE,
+                                   October 1, 1873.
+
+The assembled Chiefs met the Governor this morning, as per
+agreement, and opened the proceedings of the day by expressing the
+pleasure they experienced at meeting the Commissioners on the
+present occasion. Promises had many times been made to them, and,
+said the speaker, unless they were now fulfilled they would not
+consider the broader question of the treaty.
+
+Mr. S. J. Dawson, one of the Commissioners, reciprocated the
+expression of pleasure used by the Chiefs through their spokesman.
+He had long looked forward to this meeting, when all matters
+relating to the past, the present, and the future, could be
+disposed of so as to fix permanently the friendly relations between
+the Indians and the white men. It was now, he continued, some years
+since the white men first came to this country--they came in the
+first place at the head of a great military expedition; and when
+that expedition was passing through the country all the chiefs
+showed themselves to be true and loyal subjects--they showed
+themselves able and willing to support their Great Mother the
+Queen. Subsequently, when we began to open up the road, we had to
+call upon the Indians to assist us in doing so, and they always
+proved themselves very happy to help in carrying out our great
+schemes. He was, he continued, one of the Commission employed by
+the Government to treat with them and devise a scheme whereby both
+white men and Indians would be benefitted. We made to the Indians
+the proposals we were authorized to make, and we have carried out
+these proposals in good faith. This was three years ago. What we
+were directed to offer we did offer, but the Indians thought it
+was too little, and negotiations were broken off. Since this I
+have done what was in my power to bring about this meeting with
+new terms, and consider it a very happy day that you should be
+assembled to meet the Governor of the Territory as representative
+of Her Majesty. He would explain to them the proposals he had to
+make. He had lived long amongst them and would advise them as a
+friend to take the opportunity of making arrangements with the
+Governor. When we arrange the general matters in question, should
+you choose to ask anything, I shall be most happy to explain it,
+as I am here all the time.
+
+The Chief in reply said his head men and young men were of one
+mind, and determined not to enter upon the treaty until the
+promises made in the past were fulfilled, they were tired of
+waiting. What the Commissioners called "small matters" were great
+to them, and were what they wished to have settled.
+
+The route that had been built through the country proved this,
+and the Commissioners promised something which they now wanted.
+
+This was taking the Commissioners on a new tack, but Mr. Dawson
+promptly undertook to answer the objections. He said all these
+questions had been discussed before; but if he had made any
+promises that remained unfulfilled, he would be happy to learn
+their nature. The Chief replied that all the houses on the line,
+and all the big boats on the waters, were theirs, and they wanted
+to be recompensed for them.
+
+Mr. Dawson continued, saying he was glad they had now come to a
+point on which they could deal. The Indians questioned the right
+of the Government to take wood for the steamers. This was a right
+which the speaker had all along told them was common to all Her
+Majesty's subjects. He then referred them to the Governor if they
+had anything more to say on that subject. Wood on which Indians had
+bestowed labor was always paid for; but wood on which we had spent
+our own labor was ours.
+
+His Excellency then addressed them at some length. He understood
+that they wanted to have the questions in which they were
+interested treated separately. This was not what he came there for.
+Wood and water were the gift of the Great Spirit, and were made
+alike for the good of both the white man and red man. Many of his
+listeners had come a long way, and he, too, had come a long way,
+and he wanted all the questions settled at once, by one treaty. He
+had a message from the Queen, but if his mouth was kept shut, the
+responsibility would rest on the Indians, and not with him if he
+were prevented from delivering it. He had authority to tell them
+what sum of money he could give them in hand now, and what he could
+give them every year; but it was for them to open his mouth. He
+concluded his remarks, which were forcibly delivered, with an
+emphatic "I have said."
+
+The Chief reiterated that he and his young men were determined not
+to go on with the treaty until the first question was disposed of.
+What was said about the trees and rivers was quite true, but it
+was the Indian's country, not the white man's. Following this the
+Governor told the Council that unless they would settle all the
+matters, the big and little, at once, he would not talk. He was
+bound by his Government, and was of the same mind to treat with
+them on all questions, and not on any one separately.
+
+On seeing His Excellency so firm, and feeling that it would not do
+to allow any more time to pass without coming to business the Chief
+asked the Governor to open his mouth and tell what propositions he
+was prepared to make.
+
+His Excellency then said--"I told you I was to make the treaty on
+the part of our Great Mother the Queen, and I feel it will be for
+your good and your children's. I should have been very sorry if
+you had shut my mouth, if I had had to go home without opening my
+mouth. I should not have been a true friend of yours if I had not
+asked you to open my mouth. We are all children of the same Great
+Spirit, and are subject to the same Queen. I want to settle all
+matters both of the past and the present, so that the white and red
+man will always be friends. I will give you lands for farms, and
+also reserves for your own use. I have authority to make reserves
+such as I have described, not exceeding in all a square mile for
+every family of five or thereabouts. It may be a long time before
+the other lands are wanted, and in the meantime you will be
+permitted to fish and hunt over them. I will also establish schools
+whenever any band asks for them, so that your children may have the
+learning of the white man. I will also give you a sum of money for
+yourselves and every one of your wives and children for this year.
+I will give you ten dollars per head of the population and for
+every other year five dollars a head. But to the chief men, not
+exceeding two to each band, we will give twenty dollars a-year for
+ever. I will give to each of you this year a present of goods and
+provisions to take you home, and I am sure you will be satisfied."
+
+After consultation amongst themselves, the Councillors went to
+have a talk about the matter and will meet the Governor to-morrow
+morning, when it is expected the bargain will be concluded. Of
+course the Indians will make some other demands.
+
+Immediately after the adjournment as above, the Governor presented
+an ox to the people in camp; and the way it disappeared would have
+astonished the natives of any other land. Half-an-hour after it was
+led into encampment, it was cut up and boiling in fifty pots.
+
+THIRD DAY
+
+Proceedings were opened at eleven o'clock by the Governor
+announcing that he was ready to hear what the Chiefs had to say.
+The Fort Francis Chief acted as spokesman, assisted by another
+Chief, Powhassan.
+
+MA-WE-DO-PE-NAIS--"I now lay down before you the opinions of those
+you have seen before. We think it a great thing to meet you here.
+What we have heard yesterday, and as you represented yourself,
+you said the Queen sent you here, the way we understood you as a
+representative of the Queen. All this is our property where you
+have come. We have understood you yesterday that Her Majesty has
+given you the same power and authority as she has, to act in
+this business; you said the Queen gave you her goodness, her
+charitableness in your hands. This is what we think, that the Great
+Spirit has planted us on this ground where we are, as you were
+where you came from. We think where we are is our property. I will
+tell you what he said to us when he planted us here; the rules that
+we should follow--us Indians--He has given us rules that we should
+follow to govern us rightly. We have understood you that you have
+opened your charitable heart to us like a person taking off his
+garments and throwing them to all of us here. Now, first of all, I
+have a few words to address to this gentleman (Mr. Dawson). When he
+understood rightly what was my meaning yesterday, he threw himself
+on your help. I think I have a right to follow him to where he flew
+when I spoke to him on the subject yesterday. We will follow up
+the subject from the point we took it up. I want to answer what
+we heard from you yesterday, in regard to the money that you have
+promised us yesterday to each individual. I want to talk about the
+rules that we had laid down before. It is four years back since we
+have made these rules. The rules laid down are the rules that they
+wish to follow--a council that has been agreed upon by all the
+Indians. I do not wish that I should be required to say twice what
+I am now going to lay down. We ask fifteen dollars for all that you
+see, and for the children that are to be born in future. This year
+only we ask for fifteen dollars; years after ten dollars; our
+Chiefs fifty dollars per year for every year, and other demands of
+large amounts in writing, say $125,000 yearly."
+
+ANOTHER CHIEF--"I take my standing point from here. Our councillors
+have in council come to this conclusion, that they should have
+twenty dollars each; our warriors, fifteen dollars; our population,
+fifteen dollars. We have now laid down the conclusion of our
+councils by our decisions. We tell you our wishes are not divided.
+We are all of one mind." (Paper put in before the Governor for
+these demands.)
+
+CHIEF--"I now let you know the opinions of us here. We would not
+wish that anyone should smile at our affairs, as we think our
+country is a large matter to us. If you grant us what is written on
+that paper, then we will talk about the reserves; we have decided
+in council for the benefit of those that will be born hereafter.
+If you do so the treaty will be finished, I believe."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I quite agree that this is no matter to smile at. I
+think that the decision of to-day is one that affects yourselves
+and your children after, but you must recollect that this is the
+third time of negotiating. If we do not shake hands and make our
+Treaty to-day, I do not know when it will be done, as the Queen's
+Government will think you do not wish to treat with her. You told
+me that you understood that I represented the Queen's Government to
+you and that I opened my heart to you, but you must recollect that
+if you are a council there is another great council that governs a
+great Dominion, and they hold their councils the same as you hold
+yours. I wish to tell you that I am a servant of the Queen. I
+cannot do my own will; I must do hers. I can only give you what she
+tells me to give you. I am sorry to see that your hands were very
+wide open when you gave me this paper. I thought what I promised
+you was just, kind and fair between the Queen and you. It is now
+three years we have been trying to settle this matter. If we do not
+succeed to-day I shall go away feeling sorry for you and for your
+children that you could not see what was good for you and for them.
+I am ready to do what I promised you yesterday. My hand is open and
+you ought to take me by the hand and say, "yes, we accept of your
+offer." I have not the power to do what you ask of me. I ask you
+once more to think what you are doing, and of those you have left
+at home, and also of those that may be born yet, and I ask you not
+to turn your backs on what is offered to you, and you ought to see
+by what the Queen is offering you that she loves her red subjects
+as much as her white. I think you are forgetting one thing, that
+what I offer you is to be while the water flows and the sun rises.
+You know that in the United States they only pay the Indian for
+twenty years, and you come here to-day and ask for ever more than
+they get for twenty years. Is that just? I think you ought to
+accept my offer, and make a treaty with me as I ask you to do. I
+only ask you to think for yourselves, and for your families, and
+for your children and children's children, and I know that if you
+do that you will shake hands with me to-day."
+
+CHIEF--"I lay before you our opinions. Our hands are poor but our
+heads are rich, and it is riches that we ask so that we may be able
+to support our families as long as the sun rises and the water
+runs."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I am very sorry; you know it takes two to make a
+bargain; you are agreed on the one side, and I for the Queen's
+Government on the other. I have to go away and report that I have
+to go without making terms with you. I doubt if the Commissioners
+will be sent again to assemble this nation. I have only one word
+more to say; I speak to the Chief and to the head men to recollect
+those behind them, and those they have left at home, and not to go
+away without accepting such liberal terms and without some clothing."
+
+CHIEF--"My terms I am going to lay down before you; the decision of
+our Chiefs; ever since we came to a decision you push it back. The
+sound of the rustling of the gold is under my feet where I stand;
+we have a rich country; it is the Great Spirit who gave us this;
+where we stand upon is the Indians' property, and belongs to them.
+If you grant us our requests you will not go back without making
+the treaty."
+
+ANOTHER CHIEF--"We understood yesterday that the Queen had given
+you the power to act upon, that you could do what you pleased, and
+that the riches of the Queen she had filled your head and body
+with, and you had only to throw them round about; but it seems it
+is not so, but that you have only half the power that she has, and
+that she has only half filled your head."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I do not like to be misunderstood. I did not say
+yesterday that the Queen had given me all the power; what I told
+you was that I was sent here to represent the Queen's Government,
+and to tell you what the Queen was willing to do for you. You can
+understand very well; for instance, one of your great chiefs asks
+a brave to deliver a message, he represents you, and that is how I
+stand with the Queen's Government."
+
+CHIEF--"It is your charitableness that you spoke of yesterday--Her
+Majesty's charitableness that was given you. It is our chiefs, our
+young men, our children and great grand-children, and those that
+are to be born, that I represent here, and it is for them I ask for
+terms. The white man has robbed us of our riches, and we don't wish
+to give them up again without getting something in their place."
+
+GOVERNOR--"For your children, grand-children, and children unborn,
+I am sorry that you will not accept of my terms. I shall go home
+sorry, but it is your own doing; I must simply go back and report
+the fact that you refuse to make a treaty with me."
+
+CHIEF--"You see all our chiefs before you here as one mind; we have
+one mind and one mouth. It is the decision of all of us; if you
+grant us our demands you will not go back sorrowful; we would not
+refuse to make a treaty if you would grant us our demands."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have told you already that I cannot grant your
+demands, I have not the power to do so. I have made you a liberal
+offer, and it is for you to accept or refuse it as you please."
+
+CHIEF--"Our chiefs have the same opinion; they will not change
+their decision."
+
+GOVERNOR--"Then the Council is at an end."
+
+CHIEF (of Lac Seule)--"I understand the matter that he asks; if he
+puts a question to me as well as to others, I say so as well as the
+rest. We are the first that were planted here; we would ask you to
+assist us with every kind of implement to use for our benefit, to
+enable us to perform our work; a little of everything and money. We
+would borrow your cattle; we ask you this for our support; I will
+find whereon to feed them. The waters out of which you sometimes
+take food for yourselves, we will lend you in return. If I should
+try to stop you--it is not in my power to do so; even the Hudson's
+Bay Company--that is a small power--I cannot gain my point with it.
+If you give what I ask, the time may come when I will ask you to
+lend me one of your daughters and one of your sons to live with us;
+and in return I will lend you one of my daughters and one of my
+sons for you to teach what is good, and after they have learned, to
+teach us. If you grant us what I ask, although I do not know you, I
+will shake hands with you. This is all I have to say."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have heard and I have learned something. I have
+learned that you are not all of one mind. I know that your
+interests are not the same--that some of you live in the north far
+away from the river, and some live on the river, and that you have
+got large sums of money for wood that you have cut and sold to the
+steamboats; but the men in the north have not this advantage. What
+the Chief has said is reasonable; and should you want goods I mean
+to ask you what amount you would have in goods, so that you would
+not have to pay the traders' prices for them. I wish you were all
+of the same mind as the Chief who has just spoken. He wants his
+children to be taught. He is right. He wants to get cattle to help
+him to raise grain for his children. It would be a good thing for
+you all to be of his mind, and then you would not go away without
+making this treaty with me."
+
+BLACKSTONE (Shebandowan)--"I am going to lay down before you the
+minds of those who are here. I do not wish to interfere with the
+decisions of those who are before you, or yet with your decisions.
+The people at the height of land where the waters came down from
+Shebandowan to Fort Frances, are those who have appointed me to lay
+before you our decision. We are going back to hold a Council."
+
+MR. DAWSON--"I would ask the Chief who has just spoken, did the
+band at Shebandowan--did Rat McKay, authorize him to speak for
+them? Ke-ha-ke-ge-nen is Blackstone's own Chief; and I am perfectly
+willing to think that he authorized him. What I have to say is that
+the Indians may not be deceived by representations made to them,
+and that the two bands met me at Shebandowan and said they were
+perfectly willing to enter into a treaty."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I think the nation will do well to do what the Chief has
+said. I think he has spoken sincerely, and it is right for them to
+withdraw and hold a Council among themselves."
+
+Blackstone here handed in a paper which he alleged gave him authority
+as Chief, but which proved to be an official acknowledgement of the
+receipt of a letter by the Indian Department at Ottawa.
+
+The Governor here agreed with the Council that it would be well for
+the Chiefs to have another meeting amongst themselves. It was a
+most important day for them and for their children, and His
+Excellency would be glad to meet them again.
+
+The Council broke up at this point, and it was extremely doubtful
+whether an agreement could be come to or not. The Rainy River
+Indians were careless about the treaty, because they could get
+plenty of money for cutting wood for the boats, but the northern
+and eastern bands were anxious for one. The Governor decided that
+he would make a treaty with those bands that were willing to accept
+his terms, leaving out the few disaffected ones. A Council was held
+by the Indians in the evening, at which Hon. James McKay, Pierre
+Leveillee, Charles Nolin, and Mr. Genton were present by invitation
+of the Chiefs. After a very lengthy and exhaustive discussion, it
+was decided to accept the Governor's terms, and the final meeting
+was announced for Friday morning. Punctually at the appointed time
+proceedings were opened by the Fort Francis Chiefs announcing to
+His Excellency that they were all of one mind, and would accept his
+terms, with a few modifications. The discussion of these terms
+occupied five hours, and met every possible contingency so fully
+that it would be impossible to do justice to the negotiators
+otherwise than by giving a full report of the speeches on both
+sides; but want of space compels us to lay it over until next week.
+
+The treaty was finally closed on Friday afternoon, and signed on
+Saturday, after which a large quantity of provisions, ammunition
+and other goods were distributed.
+
+When the council broke up last (Thursday) night, 3rd October, it
+looked very improbable that an understanding could be arrived at,
+but the firmness of the Governor, and the prospect that he would
+make a treaty with such of the bands as were willing to accept
+his terms, to the exclusion of the others, led them to reconsider
+their demands. The Hon. James McKay, and Messrs. Nolin, Genton,
+and Leveillee were invited in to their council, and after a most
+exhaustive discussion of the circumstance in which they were
+placed, it was resolved to accept the Governor's terms, with some
+modifications. Word was sent to this effect, and at eleven o'clock
+on Friday, conference was again held with His Excellency.
+
+The Fort Francis Chief opened negotiations by saying:--"We present
+our compliments to you, and now we would tell you something. You
+have mentioned our councillors, warriors and messengers--every
+Chief you see has his councillors, warriors and messengers."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I was not aware what names they gave me--they gave
+their chief men. I spoke of the subordinates of the head Chiefs;
+I believe the head Chiefs have three subordinates--I mean the
+head Chief and three of his head men."
+
+CHIEF--"I am going to tell you the decision of all before you. I
+want to see your power and learn the most liberal terms that you
+can give us."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I am glad to meet the Chiefs, and I hope it will be the
+last time of our meeting. I hope we are going to understand one
+another to-day. And that I can go back and report that I left my
+Indian friends contented, and that I have put into their hands the
+means of providing for themselves and their families at home; and
+now I will give you my last words. When I held out my hands to you
+at first, I intended to do what was just and right, and what I had
+the power to do at once,--not to go backwards and forwards, but at
+once to do what I believe is just and right to you. I was very much
+pleased yesterday with the words of the Chief of Lac Seul. I was
+glad to hear that he had commenced to farm and to raise things for
+himself and family, and I was glad to hear him ask me to hold out
+my hand. I think we should do everything to help you by giving
+you the means to grow some food, so that if it is a bad year for
+fishing and hunting you may have something for your children at
+home. If you had not asked it the Government would have done it all
+the same, although I had not said so before. I can say this, that
+when a band settles down and actually commences to farm on their
+lands, the Government will agree to give two hoes, one spade, one
+scythe, and one axe for every family actually settled; one plough
+for every ten families, five harrows for every twenty families, and
+a yoke of oxen, a bull and four cows for every band; and enough
+barley, wheat and oats to plant the land they have actually broken
+up. This is to enable them to cultivate their land, and it is to be
+given them on their commencing to do so, once for all. There is one
+thing that I have thought over, and I think it is a wise thing to
+do. That is to give you ammunition, and twine for making nets, to
+the extent of $1,500 per year, for the whole nation, so that you
+can have the means of procuring food.--Now, I will mention the last
+thing that I can do. I think that the sum I have offered you to be
+paid after this year for every man, woman and child now, and for
+years to come, is right and is the proper sum I will not make an
+change in that, but we are anxious to show you that we have a great
+desire to understand you--that we wish to do the utmost in our
+power to make you contented, so that the white and the red man will
+always be friends. This year, instead of ten dollars we will give
+you twelve dollars, to be paid you at once as soon as we sign the
+treaty. This is the best I can do for you I wish you to understand
+we do not come here as traders but as representing the Crown, and
+to do what we believe is just and right. We have asked in that
+spirit, and I hope you will meet me in that spirit and shake hands
+with me day and make a treaty for ever. I have no more to say."
+
+CHIEF--"I wish to ask some points that I have not properly
+understood. We understand that our children are to have two dollars
+extra. Will the two dollars be paid to our principal men as well?
+And these things that are promised will they commence at once and
+will we see it year after year?"
+
+GOVERNOR--"I thought I had spoken fully as to everything, but I
+will speak again. The ammunition and twine will be got at once for
+you, this year, and that will be for every year. The Commissioner
+will see that you get this at once; with regard to the things to
+help you to farm, you must recollect, in a very few days the river
+will be frozen up here and we have not got these things here now.
+But arrangements will be made next year to get these things for those
+who are farming, it cannot be done before as you can see yourselves
+very well. Some are farming, and I hope you will all do so."
+
+CHIEF--"One thing I did not say that is most necessary--we want a
+cross-cut saw, a whip saw, grindstone and files."
+
+GOVERNOR--"We will do that, and I think we ought to give a box of
+common tools to each Chief of a Band."
+
+CHIEF--"Depending upon the words you have told us, and stretched
+out your hands in a friendly way, I depend upon that. One thing
+more we demand--a suit of clothes to all of us."
+
+GOVERNOR--"With regard to clothing, suits will be given to the
+Chiefs and head men, and as to the other Indians there is a
+quantity of goods and provisions here that will be given them at
+the close of the treaty. The coats of the Chiefs will be given
+every three years."
+
+CHIEF--"Once more; powder and shot will not go off without guns. We
+ask for guns."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have shewn every disposition to meet your view, but
+what I have promised is as far as I can go."
+
+CHIEF--"My friends, listen to what I am going to say, and you,
+my brothers. We present you now with our best and our strongest
+compliments. We ask you not to reject some of our children who have
+gone out of our place; they are scattered all over, a good tasted
+meat hath drawn them away, and we wish to draw them all here and be
+contented with us."
+
+GOVERNOR--"If your children come and live here, of course they will
+become part of the population, and be as yourselves."
+
+CHIEF--"I hope you will grant the request that I am going to lay
+before you. I do not mean those that get paid on the other side of
+the line, but some poor Indians who may happen to fall in our road.
+If you will accept of these little matters, the treaty will be at
+an end. I would not like that one of my children should not eat
+with me, and receive the food that you are going to give me."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I am dealing with British Indians and not American
+Indians, after the treaty is closed we will have a list of the
+names of any children of British Indians that may come in during
+two years and be ranked with them; but we must have a limit
+somewhere."
+
+CHIEF--"I should not feel happy if I was not to mess with some of
+my children that are around me--those children that we call the
+Half-breed--those that have been born of our women of Indian blood.
+We wish that they should be counted with us, and have their share
+of what you have promised. We wish you to accept our demands. It is
+the Half-breeds that are actually living amongst us--those that are
+married to our women."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I am sent here to treat with the Indians. In Red River,
+where I came from, and where there is a great body of Half-breeds,
+they must be either white or Indian. If Indians, they get treaty
+money; if the Half-breeds call themselves white, they get land. All
+I can do is to refer the matter to the Government at Ottawa, and to
+recommend what you wish to be granted."
+
+CHIEF--"I hope you will not drop the question; we have understood
+you to say that you came here as a friend, and represented your
+charitableness, and we depend upon your kindness. You must remember
+that our hearts and our brains are like paper; we never forget.
+There is one thing that we want to know. If you should get into
+trouble with the nations, I do not wish to walk out and expose my
+young men to aid you in any of your wars."
+
+GOVERNOR--"The English never call the Indians out of their country
+to fight their battles. You are living here and the Queen expects
+you to live at peace with the white men and your red brothers, and
+with other nations."
+
+ANOTHER CHIEF--"I ask you a question--I see your roads here passing
+through the country, and some of your boats--useful articles that
+you use for yourself. Bye and bye we shall see things that run
+swiftly, that go by fare--carriages--and we ask you that us Indians
+may not have to pay their passage on these things, but can go
+free."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I think the best thing I can do is to become an Indian.
+I cannot promise you to pass on the railroad free, for it may be a
+long time before we get one; and I cannot promise you any more than
+other people."
+
+CHIEF--"I must address myself to my friend here, as he is the one
+that has the Public Works."
+
+MR. DAWSON--"I am always happy to do anything I can for you. I have
+always given you a passage on the boats when I could. I will act as
+I have done though I can give no positive promise for the future."
+
+CHIEF--"We must have the privilege of travelling about the country
+where it is vacant."
+
+MR. McKAY--"Of course, I told them so."
+
+CHIEF--"Should we discover any metal that was of use, could we have
+the privilege of putting our own price on it?"
+
+GOVERNOR--"If any important minerals are discovered on any of their
+reserves the minerals will be sold for their benefit with their
+consent, but not on any other land that discoveries may take place
+upon; as regards other discoveries, of course, the Indian is like
+any other man. He can sell his information if he can find a
+purchaser."
+
+CHIEF--"It will be as well while we are here that everything should
+be understood properly between us. All of us--those behind us--wish
+to have their reserves marked out, which they will point out, when
+the time comes. There is not one tribe here who has not laid it
+out."
+
+COMMISSIONER PROVENCHER (the Governor being temporarily absent)--"As
+soon as it is convenient to the Government to send surveyors to lay
+out the reserves they will do so, and they will try to suit every
+particular band in this respect."
+
+CHIEF--"We do not want anybody to mark out our reserves, we have
+already marked them out."
+
+COMMISSIONER--"There will be another undertaking between the
+officers of the Government and the Indians among themselves for the
+selection of the land; they will have enough of good farming land,
+they may be sure of that."
+
+CHIEF--"Of course, if there is any particular part wanted by the
+public works they can shift us. I understand that; but if we have
+any gardens through the country, do you wish that the poor man
+should throw it right away?"
+
+COMMISSIONER--"Of course not."
+
+CHIEF--"These are matters that are the wind-up. I begin now to see
+how I value the proceedings. I have come to this point, and all
+that are taking part in this treaty and yourself I would wish to
+have all your names in writing handed over to us. I would not find
+it to my convenience to have a stranger here to transact our
+business between me and you. It is a white man who does not
+understand our language that is taking it down. I would like a man
+that understands our language and our ways. We would ask your
+Excellency as a favor to appoint him for us."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have a very good feeling to Mr. C. Nolin, he has been
+a good man here; but the appointment of an Agent rests with the
+authorities at Ottawa and I will bring your representation to them,
+and I am quite sure it will meet with the respect due to it."
+
+CHIEF--"As regards the fire water, I do not like it and I do not
+wish any house to be built to have it sold. Perhaps at times if I
+should be unwell I might take drop just for medicine; and shall any
+one insist on bringing it where we are, I should break the treaty."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I meant to have spoken of that myself, I meant to put it
+in the treaty. He speaks good about it. The Queen and her
+Parliament in Ottawa have passed a law prohibiting the use of it in
+this territory, and if any shall be brought in for the use of you
+as medicine it can only come in by my permission."
+
+CHIEF--"Why we keep you so long is that it is our wish that
+everything should be properly understood between us,"
+
+GOVERNOR--"That is why I am here. It is my pleasure, and I want
+when we once shake hands that it should be forever."
+
+CHIEF--"That is the principal article. If it was in my midst the
+fire water would have spoiled my happiness, and I wish it to be
+left far away from where I am. All the promises that you have made
+me, the little promises and the money you have promised, when it
+comes to me year after year--should I see that there is anything
+wanting, through the negligence of the people that have to see
+after these things, I trust it will be in my power to put them in
+prison."
+
+GOVERNOR--"The ear of the Queen's Government will always be open to
+hear the complaints of her Indian people, and she will deal with
+her servants that do not do their duty in a proper manner."
+
+CHIEF--"Now you have promised to give us all your names. I want a
+copy of the treaty that will not be rubbed off, on parchment."
+
+GOVERNOR--"In the mean time I will give you a copy on paper, and as
+soon as I get back I will get you a copy on parchment."
+
+CHIEF--"I do not wish to be treated as they were at Red River--that
+provisions should be stopped as it is there. Whenever we meet and
+have a council I wish that provisions should be given to us. We
+cannot speak without eating."
+
+GOVERNOR--"You are mistaken. When they are brought together at Red
+River for their payments they get provisions."
+
+CHIEF--"We wish the provisions to come from Red River."
+
+GOVERNOR--"If the Great Spirit sends the grasshopper and there is
+no wheat grown in Red River, we cannot give it to you."
+
+CHIEF--"You have come before us with a smiling face, you have shown
+us great charity--you have promised the good things; you have given
+us your best compliments and wishes, not only for once but for
+ever; let there now for ever be peace and friendship between us. It
+is the wish of all that where our reserves are peace should reign,
+that nothing shall be there that will disturb peace. Now, I will
+want nothing to be there that will disturb peace, and will put
+every one that carries arms,--such as murderers and thieves--outside,
+so that nothing will be there to disturb our peace."
+
+GOVERNOR--"The Queen will have policemen to preserve order, and
+murderers and men guilty of crime will be punished in this country
+just the same as she punishes them herself."
+
+CHIEF--"To speak about the Hudson's Bay Company. If it happens that
+they have surveyed where I have taken my reserve, if I see any of
+their signs I will put them on one side."
+
+GOVERNOR--"When the reserves are given you, you will have your
+rights. The Hudson's Bay Company have their rights, and the Queen
+will do justice between you."
+
+CHIEF OF FORT FRANCIS--"Why I say this is, where I have chosen for
+my reserve I see signs that the H. B. Co. has surveyed. I do not
+hate them. I only wish they should take their reserves on one side.
+Where their shop stands now is my property; I think it is three
+years now since they have had it on it."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I do not know about that matter; it will be enquired
+into. I am taking notes of all these things and am putting them on
+paper."
+
+CHIEF--"I will tell you one thing. You understand me now, that I
+have taken your hand firmly and in friendship. I repeat twice that
+you have done so, that these promises that you have made, and the
+treaty to be concluded, let it be as you promise, as long as the
+sun rises over our head and as long as the water runs. One thing I
+find, that deranges a little my kettle. In this river, where food
+used to be plentiful for our subsistence, I perceive it is getting
+scarce. We wish that the river should be left as it was formed from
+the beginning--that nothing be broken."
+
+GOVERNOR--"This is a subject that I cannot promise."
+
+MR. DAWSON--"Anything that we are likely to do at present will not
+interfere with the fishing, but no one can tell what the future may
+require, and we cannot enter into any engagement."
+
+CHIEF--"We wish the Government would assist us in getting a few
+boards for some of us who are intending to put up houses this fall,
+from the mill at Fort Francis."
+
+GOVERNOR--"The mill is a private enterprise, and we have no power
+to give you boards from that."
+
+CHIEF--"I will now show you a medal that was given to those who
+made a treaty at Red River by the Commissioner. He said it was
+silver, but I do not think it is. I should be ashamed to carry it
+on my breast over my heart. I think it would disgrace the Queen, my
+mother, to wear her image on so base a metal as this. [Here the
+Chief held up the medal and struck it with the back of his knife.
+The result was anything but the 'true ring,' and made every man
+ashamed of the petty meanness that had been practised.] Let the
+medals you give us be of silver--medals that shall be worthy of
+the high position our Mother the Queen occupies."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I will tell them at Ottawa what you have said, and how
+you have said it."
+
+CHIEF--"I wish you to understand you owe the treaty much to the
+Half-breeds."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I know it. I sent some of them to talk with you, and I
+am proud that all the Half-breeds from Manitoba, who are here, gave
+their Governor their cordial support."
+
+The business of the treaty having now been completed, the Chief,
+Mawedopenais, who, with Powhassan, had with such wonderful tact
+carried on the negotiations, stepped up to the Governor and said:--
+
+"Now you see me stand before you all; what has been done here
+to-day has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and before
+the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one say that this
+treaty has been done secretly; and now, in closing this Council, I
+take off my glove, and in giving you my hand, I deliver over my
+birth-right and lands; and in taking your hand, I hold fast all the
+promises you have made, and I hope they will last as long as the
+sun goes round and the water flows, as you have said."
+
+The Governor then took his hand and said:
+
+"I accept your hand and with it the lands, and will keep all my
+promises, in the firm belief that the treaty now to be signed will
+bind the red man and the white together as friends for ever."
+
+A copy of the treaty was then prepared and duly signed, after which
+a large amount of presents consisting of pork, flour, clothing,
+blankets, twine, powder and shot, etc., were distributed to the
+several bands represented on the ground.
+
+On Saturday, Mr. Pether, Local Superintendent of Indian Affairs at
+Fort Francis, and Mr. Graham of the Government Works, began to pay
+the treaty money--an employment that kept them busy far into the
+night. Some of the Chiefs received as much as one hundred and
+seventy dollars for themselves and families.
+
+As soon as the money was distributed the shops of the H. B. Co.,
+and other resident traders were visited, as well as the tents of
+numerous private traders, who had been attracted thither by the
+prospect of doing a good business. And while these shops all did a
+great trade--the H. B. Co. alone taking in $4,000 in thirty
+hours--it was a noticeable fact that many took home with them
+nearly all their money. When urged to buy goods there, a frequent
+reply was: "If we spend all our money here and go home and want
+debt, we will be told to get our debt where we spent our money."
+"Debt" is used by them instead of the word "credit." Many others
+deposited money with white men and Half-breeds on whose honor they
+could depend, to be called for and spent at Fort Garry when "the
+ground froze."
+
+One very wonderful thing that forced itself on the attention of
+every one was the perfect order that prevailed throughout the camp,
+and which more particularly marked proceedings in the council.
+Whether the demands put forward were granted by the Governor
+or not, there was no petulance, no ill-feeling, evinced; but
+everything was done with a calm dignity that was pleasing
+to behold, and which might be copied with advantage by more
+pretentious deliberative assemblies.
+
+On Sunday afternoon, the Governor presented an ox to the nation,
+and after it had been eaten a grand dance was indulged in. Monday
+morning the river Indians took passage on the steamer for Fort
+Francis, and others left in their canoes for their winter quarters.
+
+The Governor and party left on Monday morning, the troops, under
+command of Captain McDonald, who had conducted themselves with the
+greatest propriety, and had contributed, by the moral effect of
+their presence, much to the success of the negotiation, having
+marched to Fort Garry on Saturday morning.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, OR NUMBER FOUR
+
+
+This treaty, is, so generally called, from having been made at
+the Qu'Appelle Lakes, in the North-West Territories. The Indians
+treated with, were a portion of the Cree and Saulteaux Tribes, and
+under its operations, about 75,000 square miles of territory were
+surrendered. This treaty, was the first step towards bringing
+the Indians of the Fertile Belt into closer relations with the
+Government of Canada, and was a much needed one. In the year 1871,
+Major Butler was sent into the North-West Territories by the
+Government of Canada, to examine into and report, with regard to
+the state of affairs there. He reported, to Lieutenant-Governor
+Archibald, that "law and order are wholly unknown in the region
+of the Saskatchewan, in so much, as the country is without any
+executive organization, and destitute of any means of enforcing
+the law." Towards remedying this serious state of affairs, the
+Dominion placed the North-West Territories under the rule of
+the Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the Territories, the
+Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, being, ex officio, Governor of the
+Territories. This body, composed of representative men, possessed
+executive functions, and legislative powers. They entered upon
+their duties with zeal, and discharged them with efficiency.
+Amongst other measures, they passed a prohibitory liquor law, which
+subsequently was practically adopted by a Statute of the Dominion.
+They proposed the establishment of a Mounted Police Force, a
+suggestion which was given force to by the Dominion Cabinet, and
+they recommended, that, treaties should be made, with the Indians
+at Forts Qu'Appelle, Carlton and Pitt, recommendations, which, were
+all, eventually, carried out. In the report of the Minister of
+the Interior, for the year 1875, he states "that it is due to the
+Council to record the fact, that the legislation and valuable
+suggestions, submitted to your Excellency, from time to time,
+through their official head, Governor Morris, aided the Government
+not a little in the good work of laying the foundations of law
+and order, in the North-West, in securing the good will of the
+Indian tribes, and in establishing the prestige of the Dominion
+Government, throughout that vast country." In accordance with these
+suggestions, the Government of the Dominion, decided, on effecting
+a treaty, with the plain Indians, Crees and Chippawas, who inhabit
+the country, of which, Fort Qu'Appelle, was a convenient centre,
+and entrusted the duty, to the Hon. Alexander Morris then
+Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West Territories,
+the Hon. David Laird, then Minister of the Interior, and now
+Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and the Hon. W.
+J. Christie, a retired factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and a
+gentleman of large experience, among the Indian tribes.
+
+In pursuance of this mission, these gentlemen left Fort Garry in
+August, 1874, and journeyed to Lake Qu'Appelle (the calling or
+echoing lake), where they met the assembled Indians, in September.
+The Commissioners, had an escort of militia, under the command of
+Lieut.-Col. Osborne Smith, C.M.G. This force marched to and from
+Qu'Appelle, acquitted themselves with signal propriety, and proved
+of essential service. Their return march was made in excellent
+time. The distance, three hundred and fifty miles having been
+accomplished in sixteen and a half days.
+
+The Commissioners encountered great difficulties, arising, from the
+excessive demands of the Indians, and from the jealousies, existing
+between the two Nations, Crees and Chippawas, but by perseverance,
+firmness and tact, they succeeded in overcoming the obstacles, they
+had to encounter, and eventually effected a treaty, whereby the
+Indian title was extinguished in a tract of country, embracing
+75,000 square miles of territory. After long and animated
+discussions the Indians, asked to be granted the same terms as were
+accorded to the Indians of Treaty Number Three, at the North-West
+Angle, hereinbefore mentioned. The Commissioners assented to their
+request and the treaty was signed accordingly.
+
+On the return, of the Commissioners to Fort Ellice, they met there,
+the Chippawas of that vicinage, and made a supplementary treaty
+with them. These Indians were included in the boundaries of Treaty
+Number Two, but had not been treated with, owing to their distance
+from Manitoba House, where that treaty was made. In 1875, the Hon.
+W. J. Christie, and Mr. M. G. Dickieson, then of the Department of
+the Interior, and subsequently, Assistant Superintendent of Indian
+affairs, in the North-West Territories, were appointed to make the
+payments of annuities, to the Indians, embraced in the Treaty
+Number Four, and obtain the adhesion of other bands, which had
+not been present at Qu'Appelle, the previous year. They met, the
+Indians, at Qu'Appelle (where six Chiefs who had been absent,
+accepted the terms of the treaty) and at Fort Pelly and at Shoal
+River, where two other Chiefs, with their bands, came into the
+treaty stipulations. A gratifying feature connected with the making
+of this, and the other, North-Western Treaties, has been the
+readiness, with which the Indians, who were absent, afterwards
+accepted the terms which had been settled for them, by those, who
+were able to attend. I close these observations, by annexing,
+the reports of Lieutenant-Governor Morris, to the Honorable the
+Secretary of State of Canada, of date 17th October, 1874, giving,
+an account, of the making of the treaties at Qu'Appelle and
+Fort Ellice, and an extract, from that of Messrs. Christie and
+Dickieson, dated 7th October, 1875, describing its further
+completion, and I also insert, accurate short-hand reports of the
+proceedings at Qu'Appelle and Fort Ellice, which, were made, at
+the time, by Mr. Dickieson, who, was present, at the treaty, as
+secretary to the Commissioners. These will be found to be both
+interesting and instructive.
+
+
+
+GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, October 17, 1874.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with the
+request of the Government, I proceeded to Lake Qu'Appelle in
+company with the Hon. David Laird, in order to act with him and W.
+J. Christie, Esq., as Commissioners to negotiate a treaty with the
+tribes of Indians in that region.
+
+Mr. Laird and I left Fort Garry on the 26th of August, and arrived
+at Lake Qu'Appelle on the 8th of September, Mr. Christie having
+gone in advance of us to Fort Pelly.
+
+We were accompanied on arriving by the escort of militia under the
+command of Lieut.-Col. W. Osborne Smith, who had preceded us, but
+whom we had overtaken.
+
+The escort took up their encampment at a very desirable situation
+on the edge of the lake, the Indians being encamped at some
+distance.
+
+The Commissioners were kindly provided with apartments by W. J.
+McLean, Esq., the officer in charge of the Hudson Bay Company's
+Post.
+
+After our arrival, the Commissioners caused the Indians to be
+summoned, to meet them, in a marquee tent adjoining the encampment
+of the militia.
+
+The Crees came headed by their principal Chief "Loud Voice," and
+a number of Saulteaux followed, without their Chief, Cote. The
+Commissioners, having decided that it was desirable that there
+should be only one speaker on behalf of the Commissioners,
+requested me owing to my previous experience with the Indian tribes
+and my official position as Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West
+Territories, to undertake the duty, which I agreed to do.
+Accordingly, I told the Indians the object of our coming and
+invited them to present to us their Chiefs and headmen. "Loud
+Voice" stated that they were not yet ready and asked for a delay
+till next day, to which we assented.
+
+On the 9th, four Indian soldiers were sent to the Commissioners to
+ask for two days delay, but we replied that when they met us in
+conference they could prefer any reasonable request, but that we
+expected them to meet us as agreed on the previous day, and further
+that the Saulteaux had not conducted themselves with proper respect
+to the Commissioners, as representatives of the Crown, as their
+principal Chief Cote had not met us. Eventually, both the Crees and
+the Saulteaux met us, with their Chiefs, when I addressed them.
+They asked time to deliberate and we appointed the 11th at ten
+o'clock for the next conference.
+
+The Crees then left the tent suddenly, under constraint of the
+Indian soldiers, who compelled the Chiefs to go.
+
+On the 11th we sent a bugler round to summon the Indians to the
+appointed conference, but they did not come.
+
+Instead the Saulteaux sent word that they could not meet us except
+in their own soldiers tent, distant about a mile from the militia
+encampment, but we refused to do so.
+
+The Crees were ready to proceed to the marquee, but were prevented
+by the Saulteaux, a section of whom displayed a turbulent
+disposition and were numerically the strongest party. We sent our
+interpreter Charles Pratt, a Cree Indian, who was educated at
+St. John's College here, and who is a catechist of the Church of
+England, to tell the Indians that they must meet us as agreed upon.
+
+In consequence, about four o'clock in the afternoon the Crees led
+by "Loud Voice," came to the conference but the Saulteaux kept
+away, though a number were sent to hear and report. On behalf of
+the Commissioners, I then explained to the Crees the object of our
+mission and made our proposals for a treaty, but as they were not
+ready to reply, we asked them to return to their tents and meet us
+next day.
+
+On the 12th the Crees and Saulteaux sent four men from the soldiers
+tent or council, which they had organized, to ask that the
+encampment of the militia and the conference tents should be
+removed half way, towards their encampment.
+
+In consequence, we requested Lieut.-Col. Smith to proceed to the
+Indian encampment and ascertain the meaning of this demand
+authorizing him, if necessary, to arrange for the pitching of the
+conference tent nearer the Indians, if that would give them any
+satisfaction.
+
+He reported, on his return, that the Indians wished the militia to
+encamp with them, and that they objected to meet us anywhere on
+the reserve of the Hudson Bay Company, as they said they could not
+speak freely there.
+
+He refused to remove the militia camp, as it was a very desirable
+place where it had been placed, but with the assent of the Indians
+selected a spot adjoining the reserve and at a suitable distance
+from the Indian tents, on which the conference tent was to be daily
+erected, but to be removed after the conferences closed.
+
+We then summoned the Indians to meet us at one o'clock which they
+did at the appointed place.
+
+After the formal hand shaking, which ceremony they repeat at the
+beginning and close of every interview the Commissioners submitted
+their terms for a treaty, which were in effect similar to those
+granted at the North-West Angle, except that the money present
+offered was eight dollars per head, instead of twelve dollars as
+there.
+
+The Indians declined, however, to talk about these proposals, as
+they said there was something in the way. They objected to the
+reserve having been surveyed for the Hudson Bay Company, without
+their first having been consulted, and claimed that the L300,000
+paid to the Company should be paid to them. They also objected to
+the Company's trading in the Territory, except only at their posts.
+The Commissioners refused to comply with their demands, and
+explained to them how the Company had become entitled to the
+reserve in question, and the nature of the arrangement, that had
+resulted in the payment by the Government of Canada of the
+L300,000.
+
+The conference adjourned to Monday the 14th, on which day the
+Commissioners again met them, but the Cree Chief "Loud Voice" asked
+for another day to consider the matter, and "Cote" or "Meemay" the
+Saulteaux Chief, from Fort Pelly, asked to be treated with, at his
+own place. They demanded, that the Company should only be allowed
+to trade at their own posts, and not to send out traders into the
+Territory--which was of course refused, it being explained to them
+that all Her Majesty's subjects had equal right of trading. The
+Commissioners then agreed to grant a final delay of another day,
+for further consideration. Up to this period the position was very
+unsatisfactory.
+
+The Crees were from the first ready to treat, as were the Saulteaux
+from Fort Pelly, but the Saulteaux of the Qu'Appelle District were
+not disposed to do so and attempted to coerce the other Indians.
+
+They kept the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and "Cote" under close
+surveillance, they being either confined to their tents or else
+watched by "soldiers," and threatened if they should make any
+overtures to us.
+
+The Saulteaux cut down the tent over the head of one of the Cree
+Chiefs and conducted themselves in such a manner, that "Loud Voice"
+applied to the Commissioners for protection, and the Crees
+purchased knives and armed themselves.
+
+The Saulteaux, one day went the length of placing six "soldiers,"
+armed with rifles and revolvers, in the conference tent to
+intimidate the other Indians, a step which was promptly counteracted
+by Lieut.-Col. Smith, calling in six of the militiamen who were
+stationed in the tent. In this connection, I must take the
+opportunity of stating that the results proved the wisdom of the
+course taken by the Commissioners in obtaining the escort of the
+militia, as their presence exerted great moral influence, and I am
+persuaded, prevented the jealousies and ancient feud between the
+Crees and Saulteaux culminating in acts of violence.
+
+The conduct of the whole force was excellent and, whether on the
+march or in the encampment ground, they conducted themselves in a
+most creditable manner.
+
+Resuming, however, my narrative, on the 15th of September, the
+Commissioners again met the Indians at eleven o'clock in the
+forenoon.
+
+The Crees had, in the interval, decided to treat with us
+independently, and the Saulteaux, finding this, came to a similar
+conclusion. After a protracted interview, the Indians asked to be
+granted the same terms as were given at the North-West Angle. The
+Commissioners took time to consider and adjourned the conference
+until three o'clock.
+
+In the interval, the Commissioners, being persuaded that a treaty
+could not otherwise be made, determined on acceding to the request
+of the Indians.
+
+The Indians, having again met the Commissioners in the afternoon,
+presented their Chiefs to them, when they asked to be informed what
+the terms granted at the North-West Angle were. These were fully
+and carefully explained to them, but after a request that all the
+Indians owed to the Hudson Bay Company should be wiped out and a
+refusal of the Commissioners to entertain their demands, they then
+asked that they should be paid fifteen dollars per annum per head,
+which was refused, and they were informed that the proposals of the
+Commissioners were final, and could not be changed.
+
+The Chiefs then agreed to accept the terms offered and to sign
+the treaty, having first asked that the Half-breeds should be
+allowed to hunt, and having been assured that the population in
+the North-West would be treated fairly and justly, the treaty was
+signed by the Commissioners and the Chiefs, having been first fully
+explained to them by the interpreter.
+
+Arrangements were then made to commence the payment and distribution
+of the presents the next day, a duty which was discharged by Mr.
+Christie and Mr. Dickieson, Private Secretary of the Hon. Mr. Laird.
+
+I forward you to form an appendix to this despatch, a report
+marked "A" and "B" extended from notes taken in short hand, by Mr.
+Dickieson, of the various conferences and of the utterances of the
+Commissioners and the Indians.
+
+It is obvious that such a record will prove valuable, as it enables
+any misunderstanding on the part of the Indians, as to what was
+said at the conference, to be corrected, and it, moreover, will
+enable the council better to appreciate the character of the
+difficulties that have to be encountered in negotiating with the
+Indians.
+
+On the 17th I left for Fort Ellice, in company with Mr. Laird, Mr.
+Christie and Mr. Dickieson remaining to complete the payments,
+which were satisfactorily disposed of.
+
+Before leaving, the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and Cote called on us to
+tender their good wishes, and to assure us that they would teach
+their people to respect the treaty.
+
+The Commissioners received every assistance in their power from
+Mr. McDonald of Fort Ellice, in charge of the Hudson Bay Company
+District of Swan River, and from Mr. McLean, in charge of the
+Qu'Appelle Post,--I also add, that the Half-breed population were I
+believe generally desirous of seeing the treaty concluded and used
+the influence of their connection with the Indians in its favor.
+
+I forward in another despatch a copy of an address I received from
+the Metis, or Half-breeds, together with my reply thereto.
+
+The treaty was taken charge of by the Hon. Mr. Laird, and will be
+by him placed on record in his Department and submitted to council
+for approval.
+
+I enclose herewith, however, a printed copy of it, marked "C," to
+accompany this despatch.
+
+The supplementary treaty made at Fort Ellice will form the subject
+of another despatch.
+
+Trusting that the efforts of the Commissioners to secure a
+satisfactory understanding with the Western Indians will result in
+benefit to the race, advantage to the Dominion, and meet the
+approval of the Privy Council,
+
+                 I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                           Your obedient servant,
+                                    ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                         Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.
+
+
+
+                           GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+                  FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, October 17th, 1874.
+
+Sir,--Referring to my despatch of the 17th inst., (No. 211) I have
+the honor to report that Mr. Laird and I arrived at Fort Ellice
+from Qu'Appelle Lakes, on Saturday the 19th of September.
+
+On Monday, we met the band of Saulteaux Indians, who make their
+headquarters at Fort Ellice, and who had remained there, instead of
+going to Qu'Appelle at our request.
+
+This band have been in the habit of migrating between the region
+covered by the Second Treaty and that comprehended in the Fourth,
+but had not been treated with.
+
+We proposed to them to give their adhesion to the Qu'Appelle Treaty
+and surrender their claim to lands, wherever situated, in the
+North-West Territories, on being given a reserve and being granted
+the terms on which the treaty in question was made. We explained
+fully these terms and asked the Indians to present to us their
+Chief and headmen. As some of the band were absent, whom the
+Indians desired to be recognized as headmen, only the Chief and one
+headman were presented. These, on behalf of the Indians accepted
+the terms and thanked the Queen and the Commissioners for their
+care of the Indian people. A supplement to the treaty was then
+submitted and fully explained to them, by our acting interpreter,
+Joseph Robillard, after which it was signed by Mr. Laird and
+myself, and by the Chief and head man.
+
+The original of the supplementary treaty will be submitted for
+approval by Mr. Laird, but I annex a printed copy of it, as an
+appendix to this despatch.
+
+I also annex, notes of the conference with these Indians, extended
+from the short hand report taken of the proceedings by Mr.
+Dickieson, Private Secretary to the Hon. Mr. Laird.
+
+In the afternoon, Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson arrived from Lake
+Qu'Appelle, and shortly afterwards proceeded to make the payments
+to the Indians, under the treaty.
+
+It was satisfactory to have this band dealt with, as they asserted
+claims in the region covered by the Manitoba Post Treaty, but had
+not been represented at the time it was made.
+
+On the 22nd of September the Commissioners left Fort Ellice and
+arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 26th of that month,
+having been absent a little over a month.
+
+            I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                      Your obedient Servant,
+                             ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                 Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.
+THE HONORABLE
+   THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES,
+                                      Ottawa.
+
+
+
+WINNIPEG, MANITOBA, 7th October, 1875.
+
+Sir,--We have now the honor to submit, for your information, our
+final report in connection with our missions to the Indians
+included in Treaty No 4.
+
+As former reports have made you fully acquainted with the
+arrangements that had been entered into previous to our departure
+from this place, any further reference to them is unnecessary.
+
+Having left Winnipeg on the 19th August, we arrived at Fort Ellice
+on the 24th, the day appointed for the meeting the Indians of
+that place. The same evening we had an interview with, and fully
+explained the terms and conditions of the treaty to some of the
+Indians who were not present when the treaty was concluded last
+year. Next morning, by appointment, we met all the Indians
+and explained to them the object of our mission, and, after
+considerable discussion, made arrangements to commence paying the
+annuities next day. This, however, was prevented by heavy rains,
+which continued more or less to retard our operations on the
+two following days, the 27th and 28th, but everything was
+satisfactorily concluded with this band on the evening of the
+latter day, and on the following morning we started for the
+Qu'Appelle Lakes, accompanied by an escort of fifteen men of the
+Mounted Police Force, under the command of Sub-Inspector McIllree,
+which had arrived at Fort Ellice on the evening of the 26th, and
+reached our destination on the forenoon of the 2nd September.
+
+As you are aware, we had heard before leaving Winnipeg, that the
+number of Indians assembled at the Qu'Appelle Lakes would be very
+large, but we did not anticipate that so many as we found (nearly
+five hundred lodges) would be congregated.
+
+We at once saw that the funds at our disposal to pay the annuities
+and gratuities would be inadequate, and availed ourselves of the
+opportunity presented by the return of Major Irvine to Winnipeg,
+to forward a telegram on the 5th September, requesting a further
+amount of six thousand dollars to be placed to our credit; and we
+may state here, though out of the order of time, as we found after
+the first two days payments that we had still underestimated the
+number of Indians present, we transmitted a telegram to Winnipeg by
+special messenger, on the 9th September, for a further credit of
+fifteen thousand dollars.
+
+On the 3rd September we met the Indians and explained the object
+of our mission, and, for the benefit of those who were absent last
+year, the terms and conditions of the treaty, and stated that
+we were now ready to fulfil so many of the obligations therein
+contained as the Government were bound to execute this year. The
+Indians declined saying anything on this occasion, but wished to
+meet and confer with in the following day, as they had something
+they wished to speak about. They accordingly met us on the 4th,
+and made several demands, one of which was that the annuities be
+increased to twelve dollars per head. We replied that the treaty
+concluded last year was a covenant between them and the Government,
+and it was impossible to comply with their demands; that all we had
+to do was to carry out the terms of the treaty in so far as the
+obligations of the same required. An idea seemed prevalent among
+the Indians who were absent last year that no treaty had been
+concluded then; that all which had been done at that time was
+merely preliminary to the making of the treaty in reality, which
+they thought was to be performed this year. The prevalence of this
+opinion amongst them operated very prejudicially to the furthering
+of our business, and we saw that until this was done away with it
+would be impossible to do anything towards accomplishing the real
+object of our mission. After a great deal of talking on their
+part, and explanation on ours, the meeting adjourned until Monday
+morning, as it was necessary that provisions should be issued to
+the different bands that evening for the following day.
+
+On Monday (the 6th) we again met the Indians, and as they evidently
+wished to have another day's talking to urge the same demands they
+had made on Saturday, we assured them all further discussion on the
+subject was useless; that if they declined to accept the terms of
+the treaty we must return and report to the Government that they
+had broken the promise made last year. They then asked that we
+should report to the Government what they had demanded. This we
+agreed to do. After some further explanation to those Chiefs who
+had not signed the treaty, the payment of the annuities and
+gratuities was commenced and continued by Messrs. Dickieson and
+Forsyth on this and the three following days until completed,
+during which time Mr. Christie conferred with the Chiefs as to
+the locality of their reserves.
+
+Six Chiefs who had not been present last year when the treaty was
+concluded, agreed to accept the terms of the same, and signed their
+adhesion previous to being paid. The instruments thus signed by
+them are transmitted herewith.
+
+The suits of clothes, flags, medals and copies of the treaty were
+given to the Chiefs and headmen as they were paid, and on the 10th
+the ammunition and twine were distributed, also provisions to each
+band for the return journey to their hunting grounds. * * * * * *
+
+       We have the honor to be, Sir,
+                  Your obedient servants,
+                             W. J. CHRISTIE,
+                                Indian Commissioner.
+                             M. G. DICKIESON.
+
+
+
+Report of the proceedings at the Conference between the Hon.
+Alexander Morris, Lieut.-Governor of the North-West Territories,
+the Hon. David Laird, Minister of the Interior, and W. J. Christie,
+Esq., the Commissioners appointed by Order in Council to treat with
+the Indians inhabiting the country described in the said Order in
+Council, the first conference having been held at Qu'Appelle,
+September 8th, 1874:
+
+FIRST DAY'S CONFERENCE
+
+At four o'clock the Commissioners entered the marquee erected for
+the accommodation of themselves, and the Indians, who in in a short
+time arrived, shook hands with the Commissioners, the officers of
+the guard, and other gentlemen who were in the tent, and took their
+seats.
+
+It having been noticed that Cote, "the Pigeon," a leading Chief of
+the Saulteaux tribe, had not arrived but that several of his band
+were present and claimed that they had been sent to represent him,
+His Honor the Lieut.-Governor instructed the (acting) interpreter,
+William Daniel, to enquire why their Chief had not come to meet the
+Commissioners, the white chiefs?
+
+To this question they answered, that he had given no reason.
+
+His Honor, through the interpreter, told them that the Queen had
+sent him and the other Commissioners to see their Chief and their
+nation, and that the least a loyal subject could do would be to
+meet the messengers of the Queen.
+
+His Honor then addressed the Crees as follows: "The Commissioners
+having agreed that as Lieut.-Governor he should speak to them, as
+we are sent here by the Queen, by the Great Mother--the Queen has
+chosen me to be one of her Councillors, and has sent me here to
+represent her and has made me Governor of all her Territories
+in the North-West. She has sent another of her Councillors who
+has come all the way from Ottawa. She has also sent with us Mr.
+Christie, whom you all know, who has lived for a long time in this
+country, but who had gone away from it to live in another part of
+the Dominion of Canada. The Queen loves her Red children; she has
+always been friends with them; she knows that it is hard for them
+to live, and she has always tried to help them in the other parts
+of the Dominion. Last year she sent me to see her children at the
+Lake of the Woods. I took her children there by the hand, and the
+white man and the red man made friends for ever. We have come here
+with a message from the Queen and want to tell you all her mind. We
+want to speak to you about the land and what the Queen is willing
+to do for you, but before we tell you, we want you to tell us, who
+your Chiefs and headmen are who will speak for you, while we speak
+for the Queen, and we want to know what bands of Crees are here and
+who will speak for them. We wish to know if the Crees are ready to
+speak with us now?"
+
+RA-KU-SHI-WAY, THE LOUD VOICE,--Said in reply: "I do not wish to
+tell a lie. I cannot say who will speak for us; it will only be
+known after consultation."
+
+HIS HONOR THE LIEUT.-GOV.--"By to-morrow you will probably have
+chosen whom you will have to speak for you and the Commissioners
+will be glad to meet you after you have chosen your spokesmen, and
+will meet you at ten o'clock. We want you to tell us openly what
+you want and we will speak to you for the Queen in the same way.
+The Colonel will send a man round to sound a bugle at ten o'clock
+to let you know."
+
+To the Saulteaux His Honor said: "We are here with a message from
+the Great Mother and want you to open my mouth so that I can tell
+you what I have to say. If you and your Chiefs will meet together
+in council and talk it over we will be glad to meet you, if you
+bring your Chief to-morrow. You must also choose your speakers who
+will come with your Chief and speak for you."
+
+LOUD VOICE--"I will tell the message that is given me to tell. I
+have one thing to say, the first word that came to them was for the
+Saulteaux tribe to choose a place to pitch their tents."
+
+HIS HONOR--"This place was chosen because it is a good place for
+my men--for the soldiers--there is plenty of water and grass, and
+I will meet you here to-morrow. That is all at present."
+
+After the departure of the main body of Cree Indians, Saulteaux,
+from the Cypress Hills, entered the tent saying that they had no
+Chief, and did not want to go with the main body of the nation,
+that they had plenty of friends on the plains.
+
+His Honor said they would hear the Queen's message with the rest of
+the Indians.
+
+
+
+SECOND DAY'S CONFERENCE
+
+September 9, 1874.
+
+The Indians, both Crees, Saulteaux and their Chiefs having arrived,
+His Honor Lieut.-Governor Morris said: "I am glad to see so many
+of the Queen's red children here this morning. I told those I
+saw yesterday that I was one of the Queen's councillors, and had
+another councillor with me from Ottawa and that the Queen had sent
+Mr. Christie who used to live amongst you to help us. Yesterday the
+Cree nation with their Chief were here, the Saulteaux did not come
+to meet the Queen's servants, their Chief was not here. I thought
+that the Saulteaux could not have understood that the Queen had
+sent her servants to see them, or they would have come to meet
+them. If Loud Voice or any other Chief came down to Fort Garry to
+see me, and I sent one of my servants to meet them instead of
+shaking hands with them, would they be pleased? I wanted you to
+meet me here to-day because I wanted to speak to you before the
+Great Spirit and before the world. I want both Crees and Saulteaux
+to know what I say. I told those who were here yesterday that we
+had a message from the Queen to them. Last year I made a treaty
+with the Indians, 4,000 in number, at the Lake of the Woods. To-day
+the Queen sends us here. I told you yesterday that she loves her
+red children, and they have always respected her and obeyed her
+laws. I asked you yesterday, and ask you now, to tell me who would
+speak for you, and how many bands of each nation are represented
+here. I have heard that you are not ready to speak to me yet but do
+not know it, and I want you to say anything you have to say before
+all, and I will speak in the same way. What I have to talk about
+concerns you, your children and their children, who are yet unborn,
+and you must think well over it, as the Queen has thought well over
+it. What I want, is for you to take the Queen's hand, through mine,
+and shake hands with her for ever, and now I want, before I say any
+more, to hear from the Chiefs if they are ready with their men to
+speak for them, and if they are not ready if they will be ready
+to-morrow."
+
+CAN-A-HAH-CHA-PEW, THE MAN OF THE BOW,--"We are not ready yet, we
+have not gathered together yet. That is all I have to say."
+
+PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--O-TA-HA-O-MAN, THE GAMBLER--"My dear friends,
+do you want me to speak for you to these great men?" (the Indians
+signified their consent). "I heard you were to come here, that was
+the reason that all the camps were collected together, I heard
+before-hand too where the camp was to be placed, but I tell you
+that I am not ready yet. Every day there are other Indians coming
+and we are not all together. Where I was told to pitch my tent that
+is where I expected to see the great men in the camp. That is all."
+
+HIS HONOR--"With regard to the camp, the Queen sent one of her
+chief men of our soldiers with us, and he selected the best place
+for the men, the place where we are now, and I think it is a good
+place. At first he thought to have encamped across the river, but
+he thought this was better ground and chose it. I think it just as
+well that our tents should be at a little distance from your braves
+and your camp. I want to say to the Indian children of the Queen
+that if their people are coming in, that our men have walked a long
+way here, and must go back again to Fort Garry, and I have other
+things to do. Mr. Laird has to go back again to look after other
+things for the Queen at Ottawa. I want to ask the Chiefs when they
+will be ready to meet us to-morrow."
+
+PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--"I have said before, we are not ready."
+
+HIS HONOR--"Let them send me word through their Chiefs when they
+are ready."
+
+
+
+THIRD DAY'S CONFERENCE
+
+September 11, 1874.
+
+The Crees and their Chiefs met the Commissioners. The Saulteaux
+Chief was not present, though most of the tribe were present.
+
+An Indian, "the Crow," advised the assembled Crees, the Saulteaux
+not having arrived, to listen attentively to what words he said.
+
+His Honor the Lieut.-Governor then arose and said: "I am glad to
+meet you here to-day. We have waited long and began to wonder
+whether the Queen's red children were not coming to meet her
+messengers. All the ground here is the Queen's and you are free to
+speak your mind fully. We want you to speak to me face to face. I
+am ready now with my friends here to give you the Queen's message.
+Are your ears open to hear? Have you chosen your speakers?"
+
+THE LOUD VOICE--"There is no one to answer."
+
+HIS HONOR--"You have had time enough to select your men to answer
+and I will give you the Queen's message. The Queen knows that you
+are poor; the Queen knows that it is hard to find food for
+yourselves and children; she knows that the winters are cold, and
+your children are often hungry; she has always cared for her red
+children as much as for her white. Out of her generous heart and
+liberal hand she wants to do something for you, so that when the
+buffalo get scarcer, and they are scarce enough now, you may be
+able to do something for yourselves."
+
+THE LOUD VOICE (to the Indians)--"I wonder very much at your
+conduct. You understand what is said and you understand what is
+right and good. You ought to listen to that and answer it, every
+one of you. What is bad you cannot answer."
+
+HIS HONOR--"What the Queen and her Councillors would like is this,
+she would like you to learn something of the cunning of the white
+man. When fish are scarce and the buffalo are not plentiful she
+would like to help you to put something in the land, she would like
+that you should have some money every year to buy things that you
+need. If any of you would settle down on the land, she would give
+you cattle to help you; she would like you to have some seed to
+plant. She would like to give you every year, for twenty years,
+some powder, shot, and twine to make nets of. I see you here before
+me to-day. I will pass away and you will pass away. I will go where
+my fathers have gone and you also, but after me and after you will
+come our children. The Queen cares for you and for your children,
+and she cares for the children that are yet to be born. She would
+like to take you by the hand and do as I did for her at the Lake of
+the Woods last year. We promised them and we are ready to promise
+now to give five dollars to every man, woman and child, as long as
+the sun shines and water flows. We are ready to promise to give
+$1,000 every year, for twenty years, to buy powder and shot and
+twine, by the end of which time I hope you will have your little
+farms. If you will settle down we would lay off land for you, a
+square mile for every family of five. Whenever you go to a Reserve,
+the Queen will be ready to give you a school and schoolmaster, and
+the Government will try to prevent fire-water from being sent among
+you. If you shake hands with us and make a treaty, we are ready to
+make a present at the end of the treaty, of eight dollars for every
+man, woman and child in your nations. We are ready also to give
+calico, clothing and other presents. We are ready to give every
+recognized Chief, a present of twenty-five dollars, a medal, and a
+suit of clothing. We are also ready to give the Chief's soldiers,
+not exceeding four in each band, a present of ten dollars, and next
+year and every year after, each chief will be paid twenty-five
+dollars, and his chief soldiers not exceeding four in each band,
+will receive ten dollars. Now I think that you see that that the
+Queen loves her red children, that she wants to do you good, and
+you ought to show that you think so. I cannot believe that you will
+be the first Indians, the Queen's subjects, who will not take her
+by the hand. The Queen sent one of her councillors from Ottawa, and
+me, her Governor, to tell you her mind. I have opened my hands and
+heart to you. It is for you to think of the future of those who are
+with you now, of those who are coming after you, and may the Great
+Spirit guide you to do what is right. I have only one word more to
+say. The last time I saw you I was not allowed to say all I wanted
+to say until you went away. What I wanted to say is this, I have
+put before you our message, I want you to go back to your tents and
+think over what I have said and come and meet me to-morrow.
+Recollect that we cannot stay very long here. I have said all."
+
+FOURTH DAY'S CONFERENCE
+
+September 12, 1874.
+
+In the morning four Indians, two Crees and two Saulteaux, waited on
+the Commissioners and asked that they should meet the Indians half
+way, and off the Company's reserve, and that the soldiers should
+remove their camps beside the Indian encampment, that they would
+meet the Commissioners then and confer with them; that there was
+something in the way of their speaking openly where the marquee had
+been pitched. Their request was complied with as regarded the place
+of meeting only, and the spot for the conference selected by Col.
+Smith and the Indians.
+
+The meeting was opened by the Lieut.-Governor, who said, "Crees and
+Saulteaux,--I have asked you to meet us here to-day. We have been
+asking you for many days to meet us and this is the first time you
+have all met us. If it was not my duty and if the Queen did not
+wish it, I would not have taken so much trouble to speak to you. We
+are sent a long way to give you her message. Yesterday I told the
+Crees her message, and I know that the Saulteaux know what it was,
+but that there may be no mistake, I will tell it to you again and I
+will tell you more. When I have given my message understand that
+you will have to answer it, as I and my friends will have to leave
+you. You are the subjects of the Queen, you are her children, and
+you are only a little band to all her other children. She has
+children all over the world, and she does right with them all. She
+cares as much for you as she cares for her white children, and the
+proof of it is that wherever her name is spoken her people whether
+they be red or white, love her name and are ready to die for it,
+because she is always just and true. What she promises never
+changes. She knows the condition of her people here; you are not
+her only red children; where I come from, in Ontario and in Quebec,
+she has many red children, and away beyond the mountains she has
+other red children, and she wants to care for them all. Last year I
+was among the Saulteaux; we have the Saulteaux where I came from.
+They were my friends. I was the son of a white Chief who had a high
+place among them, they told him they would do his work, they called
+him Shekeisheik. I learned from him to love the red man, and it was
+a pleasant duty and good to my heart when the Queen told me to come
+among her Saulteaux children and I expect the Crees and the
+Saulteaux to take my hand as they did last year. In our hands they
+feel the Queen's, and if they take them the hands of the white and
+red man will never unclasp. In other lands the white and red man
+are not such friends as we have always been, and why? Because the
+Queen always keeps her word, always protects her red men. She
+learned last winter that bad men from the United States had come
+into her country and had killed some of her red children, What did
+she say? This must not be, I will send my men and will not suffer
+these bad men to hurt my red children, their lives are very dear to
+me. And now I will tell you our message. The Queen knows that her
+red children often find it hard to live. She knows that her red
+children, their wives and children, are often hungry, and that the
+buffalo will not last for ever and she desires to do something for
+them. More than a hundred years ago, the Queen's father said to the
+red men living in Quebec and Ontario, I will give you land and
+cattle and set apart Reserves for you, and will teach you. What has
+been the result? There the red men are happy; instead of getting
+fewer in number by sickness they are growing in number; their
+children have plenty. The Queen wishes you to enjoy the same
+blessings, and so I am here to tell you all the Queen's mind, but
+recollect this, the Queen's High Councillor here from Ottawa, and
+I, her Governor, are not traders; we do not come here in the spirit
+of traders; we come here to tell you openly, without hiding
+anything, just what the Queen will do for you, just what she thinks
+is good for you, and I want you to look me in the face, eye to eye,
+and open your hearts to me as children would to a father, as
+children ought to do to a father, and as you ought to the servants
+of the great mother of us all. I told my friends yesterday that
+things changed here, that we are here to-day and that in a few
+years it may be we will not be here, but after us will come our
+children. The Queen thinks of the children yet unborn. I know that
+there are some red men as well as white men who think only of
+to-day and never think of to-morrow. The Queen has to think of what
+will come long after to-day. Therefore, the promises we have to
+make to you are not for to-day only but for to-morrow, not only for
+you but for your children born and unborn, and the promises we make
+will be carried out as long as the sun shines above and the water
+flows in the ocean. When you are ready to plant seed the Queen's
+men will lay off Reserves so as to give a square mile to every
+family of five persons, and on commencing to farm the Queen will
+give to every family cultivating the soil two hoes, one spade, one
+scythe for cutting the grain, one axe and plough, enough of seed
+wheat, barley, oats and potatoes to plant the land they get ready.
+The Queen wishes her red children to learn the cunning of the white
+man and when they are ready for it she will send schoolmasters on
+every Reserve and pay them. We have come through the country for
+many days and we have seen hills and but little wood and in many
+places little water, and it may be a long time before there are
+many white men settled upon this land, and you will have the right
+of hunting and fishing just as you have now until the land is
+actually taken up. (His Honor repeated the offers which had been
+given to the Saulteaux on the previous day.) I think I have told
+you all that the Queen is willing to do for you. It ought to show
+you that she has thought more about you than you have about her. I
+will be glad now to have those whom you have selected speak for you
+and I again ask you to keep nothing back. This is the first time
+you have had white chiefs, officers of the Queen, so high in her
+Councils, so trusted by her among you. We have no object but your
+good at heart, and therefore we ask you to speak out to us, to open
+your minds to us, and believe that we are your true and best
+friends, who will never advise you badly, who will never whisper
+bad words in your ears, who only care for your good and that of
+your children. I have told you the truth, the whole truth, and now
+we expect to hear from the two nations and any other tribe who may
+be represented here. My friend Mr. Laird reminds me that he has
+come from an Island in the far off sea, that he has go back to
+Ottawa and then go to his own home, that he was asked specially to
+help me in speaking to you and advising me. He is obliged to go
+away as I am, and therefore we want you to answer us."
+
+COTE, or MEE-MAY (Saulteaux Chief)--"I cannot say anything to you.
+It is that man (pointing to Loud Voice) will speak."
+
+LOUD VOICE (Cree Chief)--"If I could speak, if I could manage to
+utter my feelings there is reason why I should answer you back; but
+there is something in my way, and that is all I can tell you. This
+man (the Gambler) will tell you."
+
+O-TA-KA-O-NAN, OR THE GAMBLER.--"This morning I saw the chief of
+the soldiers, who asked me what is in your way that you cannot come
+and meet the Queen's messengers; then I told him what was in the
+way. And now that I am come in, what do I see? You were rather slow
+in giving your hand. You said that the Queen spoke through you and
+spoke very plainly, but I cannot speak about what you said at
+present; the thing that is in the way that is what I am working
+at."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We have come here for the purpose of knowing
+what is in your mind. I held out my hand but you did not do as your
+nation did at the Angle. When I arrived there the Chief and his men
+came and gave me the pipe of peace and paid me every honor. Why?
+Because I was the servant of the queen. I was not slow in offering
+my hand, I gave it freely and from my heart, and whenever we found
+I could please you by coming here, we sent the chief of the
+soldiers to select a suitable place to meet you. You tell me there
+is something in your mind. If there is anything standing between
+us, how can we take it away or answer you unless we know what it
+is?"
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I told the soldier master you did not set your camp
+in order, you came and staid beyond over there, that is the reason
+I did not run in over there. Now when you have come here, you see
+sitting out there a mixture of Half-breeds, Crees, Saulteaux and
+Stonies, all are one, and you were slow in taking the hand of a
+Half-breed. All these things are many things that are in my way. I
+cannot speak about them."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Why are you here to-day? because we asked you
+to come, because it was a good place to speak with them the reason
+we wished to see them. I am now quite willing to tell you all about
+Fort Pelly. The Queen heard that Americans had come into the
+country and were treating her Indian children badly. I myself sent
+her word that twenty-five of her Indian children, men, women and
+children, had been shot down by the American traders, then she
+resolved to protect her red children, for that reason she has
+determined to have a body of men on horses as policemen to keep all
+bad people, white or red, in order. She will not allow her red
+children to be made drunk and shot down again as some of them were
+a few months ago. Now you ought to be glad that you have a Queen
+who takes such an interest in you. What are they doing now up at
+Fort Pelly? The men must have some place to live in this winter,
+they cannot live out of doors, and some men have gone to Fort Pelly
+to build houses for them, and the Queen expects that you will do
+all you can to help them because they are your friends. There was a
+treaty before and Indians are paid under it, but we were told as we
+passed Fort Ellice that there were a few Indians there who were not
+included in that treaty, and had never been paid, and they agreed
+to meet us when we go back, I do not quite understand another
+point. We have here Crees, Saulteaux, Assiniboines and other
+Indians, they are all one, and we have another people, the
+Half-breeds, they are of your blood and my blood. The Queen cares
+for them, one of them is here an officer with a Queen's coat on his
+back. At the Lake of the Woods last winter every Half-Breed who was
+there with me was helping me, and I was proud of it, and glad to
+take the word back to the Queen, and her servants, and you may rest
+easy, you may leave the Half-breeds in the hands of the Queen who
+will deal generously and justly with them. There was a Half-breed
+came forward to the table. He was only one of many here. I simply
+wanted to know whether he was authorized by you to take any part in
+the Council, as it is the Indians alone we are here to meet. He
+told me you wanted him here as a witness. We have plenty of
+witnesses here, but when I heard that, I welcomed him as I had done
+you, and shook hands with him, and he ought to have told you that.
+I have given our answer and I have always found this that it is
+good for men to try to understand each other, and to speak openly,
+if they do that and both are earnest, if their hearts are pure,
+they will and can understand each other."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I have understood plainly before what he (the Hudson
+Bay Company) told me about the Queen. This country that he (H. B.
+Co.) bought from the Indians let him complete that. It is that
+which is in the way. I cannot manage to speak upon anything else,
+when the land was staked off it was all the Company's work. That is
+the reason I cannot speak of other things."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We don't understand what you mean. Will you
+explain?"
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I know what I have to tell you. Who surveyed this
+land? Was it done by the Company? This is the reason I speak of the
+Company, why are you staying in the Company's house?"
+
+LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"The Company have a right to have certain
+lands granted them by the Queen, who will do what is fair and just
+for the Company, for the Indians, for the Half-breeds, and for the
+whites. She will make no distinction. Whatever she promises she
+will carry out. The Company are are nothing to her except that they
+are carrying on trade in this country, and that they are subjects
+to her just as you are. You ask then why I went to the Company's
+house? I came here not at my own pleasure. I am not so strong as
+you are. I never slept in a tent in my life before and was only too
+glad to find a home to go to."
+
+The Gambler--"I understand now. And now this Company man. This is
+the Company man (pointing to Mr. McDonald). This is the thing I
+cannot speak of. The Cree does not know, the Saulteaux does not
+know. It was never known when this was surveyed, neither by the
+Cree nor the Saulteaux."
+
+Lieut.-Gov. Morris--"The Company are trading in this country and
+they require to have places to carry out their trade. If the Queen
+gives them land to hold under her she has a perfect right to do it,
+just as she will have a perfect right to lay off lands for you if
+you agree to settle on them. I am sorry for you; I am afraid you
+have been listening to bad voices who have not the interests of the
+Indians at heart. If because of these things you will not speak to
+us we will go away with hearts sorry for you and for your children,
+who thus throw back in our faces the hand of the Queen that she has
+held out to you."
+
+The Gambler--"It is very plain who speaks; the Crees are not
+speaking, and the Saulteaux is speaking, if the Queen's men came
+here to survey the land. I am telling you plainly. I cannot speak
+any other thing till this is cleared up. Look at these children
+that are sitting around here and also at the tents, who are just
+the image of my kindness. There are different kinds of grass
+growing here that is just like those sitting around here. There is
+no difference. Even from the American land they are here, but we
+love them all the same, and when the white skin comes here from far
+away I love him all the same. I am telling you what our love and
+kindness is. This is what I did when the white man came, but when
+he came back he paid no regard to me how he carried on."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I did not know till I came here that any
+survey had been made because I had nothing to do with it; but my
+friend, one of the Queen's Councillors, tells me it was done by the
+authority of the Queen."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I want to tell you the right story. I waited very
+much for the Queen's messenger when I saw what the Company did.
+Perhaps he may know why he did so. Perhaps if I were to ask him now
+he would say. That is what I would think. This is the reason. I am
+so pleased at what I see here I cannot manage to speak because of
+the Company."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We cannot see why you cannot speak to the
+Queen's messengers because of the Company. The Company is no
+greater in her sight than one of those little children is in yours,
+and whatever she promises, either to the Company or the little
+child, she will do. The Company ought not to be a wall between you
+and us; you will make a mistake if you send us away with a wall
+between us, when there should be none."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I do not send you away; for all this I am glad. I
+know this is not the Queen's work. He (H. B. Co.) is the head; he
+does whatever he thinks all around here, that is the reason I
+cannot say anything."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am very sorry that you cannot answer."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"The Company have stolen our land. I heard that at
+first. I hear it is true. The Queen's messengers never came here,
+and now I see the soldiers and the settlers and the policemen. I
+know it is not the Queen's work, only the Company has come and they
+are the head, they are foremost; I do not hold it back. Let this be
+put to rights; when this is righted I will answer the other."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Company have not brought their soldiers
+here. This man is not an officer of the Company. I am not an
+officer of the Company. We did not come at the request of the
+Company, but at that of the Queen. I told you that the Queen had
+sent her policemen here. You see the flag there, then know that we
+are the Queen's servants, and not the Company's, and it is for you
+to decide on the message I have delivered to you."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"When one Indian takes anything from another we call
+it stealing, and when we see the present we say pay us. It is the
+Company I mean."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What did the Company steal from you?"
+
+THE GAMBLER--"The earth, trees, grass, stones, all that which I see
+with my eyes."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who made the earth, the grass, the stone, and
+the wood? The Great Spirit. He made them for all his children to
+use, and it is not stealing to use the gift of the Great Spirit.
+The lands are the Queen's under the Great Spirit. The Chippewas
+were not always here. They come from the East. There were other
+Indians here and the Chippewas came here, and they used the wood
+and the land, the gifts of the Great Spirit to all, and we want to
+try and induce you to believe that we are asking for the good of
+all. We do not know how the division between us is to be taken
+away. We do not know of any lands that were stolen from you, and if
+you do not open your mouths we cannot get the wall taken away. You
+can open your mouths if you will; we are patient but we cannot
+remain here always."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I cannot manage to speak of anything else. It is this
+I am speaking. All the Indians know how the Company set their land
+in order long ago. The Company is making it more and that is the
+reason I am speaking."
+
+LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"Many, many years ago, before we were born,
+one of the Kings gave the Company certain rights to trade in this
+country. The Queen thought that this was not just neither to the
+white nor the red man. She considered that all should be equal; but
+when the Queen's father's father's hand had been given she could
+not take it back without the Company's consent; therefore she told
+the Company that the time had come when they should no longer be
+the great power in this country, that she would plant her own flag,
+that she would send her own Governor and soldiers, and that they
+must cease to have the only right to trade here (and I am glad to
+know that some of you are good traders), the Queen then told the
+Company that she would govern the country herself, and she told
+them she would give them some land. They had their forts, their
+places of trade where they raised cattle and grain, and she told
+them they could keep them, and she will no more break with them
+than she will with you. There is no reason why you should not talk
+to us. The Company have no more power, no more authority to govern
+this country than you have, it rests with the Queen."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"This is the reason I waited for the Queen's
+messengers to come here because I knew the Company was strong and
+powerful, and I knew they would set every thing in order. Truly
+since the Company came here they have brought me many things which
+are good, but the Company's work is in my way and I cannot utter my
+words."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What do you complain of? I can not tell."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"The survey. This one (pointing to an Indian) did not
+say so, and this Saulteaux and he was never told about it. He
+should have been told beforehand that this was to have been done
+and it would not have been so, and I want to know why the Company
+have done so. This is the reason I am talking so much about it."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before that the Queen had
+promised to give the Company certain lands around the forts and
+she gave them land around this fort. I have told you that what she
+promised she will do. She has taken all the lands in this country
+to manage; they were hers; they were her fathers; if she gives you
+reserves they will be yours and she will let no one take them from
+you unless you want to sell them yourselves. It will be a sorry
+thing if this nation and that nation scattered all over the country
+are to suffer because of this little piece of land I see around me.
+What good is it going to do to raise up a question of this kind
+and block the way to our understanding each other when the Queen's
+hand, full of love and generosity is held out to you? The blame
+rests with you; it is time for you to talk, to open your mouth,
+because I cannot take away what shuts it, you must do it yourselves."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"This is my chief, the Queen never told this man. If
+this had been told him, I would not have said what I said just now.
+The Company's store was only there at first. I do not push back the
+Queen's hand. Let this be cleared up."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Once for all we tell you, whatever number of
+acres the Queen has promised to the Company at this post, they will
+receive no more and no less. We will ascertain what was promised,
+and will take care to see that what was promised and that only will
+be performed with regard to the land around this Fort. We can give
+you no other answer."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I am telling you and reporting what I had to tell.
+The Company have no right to this earth, but when they are spoken
+to they do not desist, but do it in spite of you. He is the head
+and foremost. These Indians you see sitting around report that they
+only allowed the store to be put up. That is the reason I was very
+glad when I heard you were coming. The Indians were not told of the
+reserves at all. I hear now, it was the Queen gave the land. The
+Indians thought it was they who gave it to the Company, who are now
+all over the country. The Indians did not know when the land was
+given."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am weary hearing about the country. You
+might understand me now. You are stronger than that little boy over
+there, and the Company is stronger than a single trader, but the
+Company has its master, the Queen, and will have to obey the laws
+as well as all others. We have nothing to do with the Company. We
+are here to talk with you about the land, I tell you what we wish
+to do for your good, but if you will talk about the Company I
+cannot hinder you, I think it is time now you should talk about
+what concerns you all."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"That is the reason I waited so long. I cannot speak
+of anything else, my mind is resting on nothing else I know that
+you will have power and good rules and this is why I am glad to
+tell you what is troubling me."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before and tell you again that
+the Queen cannot and will not undo what she has done. I have told
+you that we will see that the Company shall obey what she has
+ordered, and get no more and no less than she has promised. We
+might talk here all the year and I could not give you any other
+answer, and I put it to you now face to face--speak to me about
+your message, don't put it aside, if you do the responsibility will
+rest upon your nation, and during the winter that is coming, many
+a poor woman and child will be saying, how was it that our
+councillors and our braves shut their ears to the mouth of the
+Queen's messengers and refused to tell them their words. This
+Company, I have told you is nothing to us, it is nothing to the
+Queen, but their rights have to be respected just as much as those
+of the meanest child in the country. The Queen will do right
+between you and them I can say no more than what I have said and
+if the Indians will not speak to us we cannot help it, and if the
+Indians won't answer our message, we must go back and tell the
+Queen that we came here and did everything we could to show the
+Indians we were in earnest in proving her love for them and that
+when there was a little difficulty, I came at once to meet them
+half way. What prevents you from coming out and speaking openly. I
+cannot take away the difficulty you speak of, and if you will not
+answer us, there is no use in talking."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I told the chief of the soldiers what was in our way,
+what was troubling us and now we are telling you. It is that I am
+working at."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What is troubling you?"
+
+PIS-QUA (the plain) pointing to Mr. McDonald, of the Hudson's Bay
+Company--"You told me you had sold your land for so much money,
+L300,000. We want that money."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I wish our Indian brother had spoken before
+what was in his mind. He has been going here and there, and we
+never knew what he meant. I told you that many years ago the
+Queen's father's father gave the Company the right to trade in the
+country from the frozen ocean to the United States boundary line,
+and from the Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific. The Company grew strong
+and wanted no one to trade in the country but themselves. The
+Queen's people said, "no, the land is not yours, the Queen's
+father's father gave you rights to trade, it is time those rights
+should stop." You may go on and trade like any other merchant, but
+as it was worth money to you to say to this trader you shall not
+buy furs at any post, the Queen would not act unjustly to the
+Company. She would not take rights away from them any more than
+from you; and to settle the question, she took all the lands into
+her own hands and gave the Company a sum of money in place of the
+rights which she had taken from them. She is ready to deal with you
+justly. We are here to-day to make to you her good offers. We have
+nothing to hide, nothing to conceal. The Queen acts in daylight. I
+think it is time you are going to talk with us about the offers we
+have made."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I have made up about no other article. I suppose,
+indeed, I would make the thing very little and very small. When I
+get back I will think over it."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have a word to say to you. In our land we
+worship the Great Spirit, and do not work on Sunday. I am glad to
+see that you are going back into council, and I will only ask you
+to think of these things with single hearts desiring only to do
+what is right and trusting my words. On Monday morning we will be
+glad to meet you here and hope we will find then that your heart
+has come to ours, that you will see that it is for your children's
+good, to take our hands and the promises we have given. As I told
+you before we would be glad to stay longer with you, but we are
+obliged to go away. We ask you then to meet us on Monday morning
+and Mr. Pratt will tell you so that there may be no mistake as to
+what we have promised. He has it written down so that it may not be
+rubbed out."
+
+The conference then ended.
+
+
+
+FIFTH DAY'S CONFERENCE
+
+September 14.
+
+Both nations, Crees and Saulteaux, having assembled, His Honor
+Lieut.-Governor Morris again addressed them:--
+
+"Children of our Great Mother, I am glad to see you again after
+another day. How have you come to meet us? I hope you have come to
+us with good thoughts, and hearts ready to meet ours. I have one or
+two words to say to you. It is twenty days to-day since we left the
+Red River. We want to turn our faces homewards. You told me on
+Saturday that some of you could eat a great deal. I have something
+to say to you about that. There are Indians who live here, they
+have their wives and children around them. It is good for them to
+be here, and have plenty to eat, but they ought to think of their
+brothers; they ought to think that there are men here who have come
+from a distance, from Fort Pelly and beyond, whose wives and
+children are not here to eat, and they want to be at home with
+them. It is time now that we began to understand each other, and
+when there is something troubles us, I believe in telling it. When
+you told us you were troubled about the situation of this tent, we
+had it moved. Now we want you to take away our trouble, or tell us
+what you mean. We are troubled about this. We are servants of the
+Queen; we have been here many days giving you our message, and we
+have not yet heard the voice of the nations. We have two nations
+here. We have the Crees, who were here first, and we have the
+Ojibbeways, who came from our country not many suns ago. We find
+them here; we won't say they stole the land and the stones and the
+trees; no, but we will say this, that we believe their brothers,
+the Crees, said to them when they came in here: "The land is wide,
+it is wide, it is big enough for us both; let us live here like
+brothers;" and that is what you say, as you told us on Saturday, as
+to the Half-breeds that I see around. You say that you are one with
+them; now we want all to be one. We know no difference between
+Crees and Ojibbeways. Now we want to ask you are you wiser, do you
+know more, than the Ojibbeway people that I met last year? You are
+a handful compared with them; they came to me from the Lake of the
+Woods, from Rainy Lake, from the Kaministiquia, and from the Great
+Lake. I told them my message, as I have told you; they heard my
+words and they said they were good, and they took my hand and I
+gave them mine and the presents; but that is not all. There was a
+band of Ojibbeways who lived at Lake Seul, to the north of the Lake
+of the Woods, 400 in number, and just before we came away we sent
+our messenger to them. He told them I had shaken hands for the
+Queen with all the Ojibbeways down to the Great Lake. He told them
+what we had done for these, and asked them if they found it good to
+take the Queen's hand through our messenger; they were pleased;
+they signed the treaty; they put their names to it, saying, We take
+what you promised to the other Saulteaux; and our messenger gave
+them the money, just as our messengers will give your brothers who
+are not here the money if we understand each other. Now, we ask you
+again, are you wiser than your brothers that I have seen before? I
+do not think that you will say you are, but we want you to take
+away our last trouble. What I find strange is this: we are Chiefs;
+we have delivered the message of our great Queen, whose words never
+change, whose tongue and the tongues of whose messengers are never
+forked; and how is it that we have not heard any voice back from
+the Crees or Saulteaux, or from their Chiefs? I see before me two
+Chiefs; we know them to be Chiefs, because we see you put them
+before you to shake hands with us. They must have been made Chiefs,
+not for anything we are talking about to-day, not for any presents
+we are offering to you, not because of the land; then why are they
+chiefs? Because I see they are old men; the winds of many winters
+have whistled through their branches. I think they must have
+learned wisdom; the words of the old are wise; why then, we ask
+ourselves--and this is our trouble--Why are your Chiefs dumb? They
+can speak. One of them is called "Loud Voice." He must have been
+heard in the councils of the nation. Then I ask myself, why do they
+not answer? It cannot be that you are afraid; you are not women. In
+this country, now, no man need be afraid. If a white man does wrong
+to an Indian, the Queen will punish them. The other day at Fort
+Ellice, a white man, it is said, stole some furs from an Indian.
+The Queen's policemen took him at once; sent him down to Red River,
+and he is lying in jail now; and if the Indians prove that he did
+wrong, he will be punished. You see then that if the white man does
+wrong to the Indian he will punished; and it will be the same if
+the Indian does wrong to the white man. The red and white man must
+live together, and be good friends, and the Indians must live
+together like brothers with each other and the white man. I am
+afraid you are weary of my talking. Why do I talk so much? Because
+I have only your good at heart. I do not want to go away with my
+head down, to send word to the Queen, "Your red children could not
+see that your heart was good towards them; could not see as you see
+that it was for the good of themselves and their children's
+children to accept the good things you mean for them." I have done.
+Let us hear the voice of the people. Let us hear the voice of your
+old wise men."
+
+COTE--"The same man that has spoken will speak yet."
+
+KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"This is the one who will speak; after
+he speaks I will show what I have to say."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Understand me, what I want to know is, does he
+speak for the nations. If you prefer to speak by the voice of an
+orator I am glad. All we want is to hear the voice of the people,
+and I asked you at first to choose among yourselves those who would
+speak for you; therefore I am glad to hear the man you have chosen,
+and I am glad to hear that after he has done the Chief will speak
+to us."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"Saturday we met, we spoke to each other, we met at
+such a time as this time, and again we said we would tell each
+other something; now, then, we will report to each other a little
+again. This Company man that we were speaking about, I do not hate
+him; as I loved him before I love him still, and I also want that
+the way he loved me at first he should love me the same; still, I
+wish that the Company would keep at his work the same as he did;
+that I want to be signed on the paper. I want you to put it with
+your own hands. After he puts that there it is given to the
+Indians, then there will be another article to speak about. The
+Indians want the Company to keep at their post and nothing beyond.
+After that is signed they will talk about something else."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you on Saturday that I had nothing to
+do with the Company. The Company have a right to trade. I cannot
+make them buy goods and bring them here, or stop them from bringing
+them. I dare say some of you are traders; you do not ask me whether
+you shall buy goods and sell them again, and I do not stop you. It
+is the same way with the Company. If they make money in bringing
+goods here they will bring them just as they used to do; and I want
+you to understand it fully, the Company may have a little more
+money than the white traders, or the Half-breeds, or the Indians,
+but they have no more right, they have no more privileges, to trade
+than the Indians, or the Half-breeds, or the whites; and that is
+written with a higher hand than ours, and we have no power to write
+anything, or to add anything, to what is written and remains in the
+Queen's house beyond the sea."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"I do not want to drive the Company anywhere. What I
+said is, that they are to remain here at their house. Supposing you
+wanted to take them away, I would not let them go. I want them to
+remain here to have nothing but the trade. I do not hate them; we
+always exchange with them, and would die if they went away."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I do not know whether we rightly understand or
+not. I think you have spoken wise words; the Company helps you to
+live, and they have a right to sell goods as other traders. I do
+not know that I understand you rightly, that you do not want them
+to sell goods anywhere except at the posts; to keep at their posts
+there. If that is what you mean, I cannot say yes to that; they
+have the same right to sell goods anywhere that you have. They are
+no longer as they were once. The Government of the country, I think
+I told you that before--understand me distinctly--the Government
+have nothing to do with the Company, but the Company and all their
+servants are subjects of the Queen and love and obey her laws. The
+day has gone past when they made the laws. They have to hear the
+laws the Queen makes, and like good subjects submit to them."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"The Company is not to carry anything out into the
+country, but are to trade in the Fort. That is what we want signed
+on the paper; then we will talk on other subjects." LIEUT.-GOV.
+MORRIS--"I have told you before, and I tell you again, that the
+Company as traders have the right to sell goods anywhere they
+please, just as you have, just as the whites have, just as the
+Half-breeds have, and we have no power to take it away from them.
+If the Company were to ask me to say to you that you were not to
+trade anywhere except in their Fort by the lake, you would think it
+very hard, and I would say to the Company, No, you shall not
+interfere with the Indians throughout our land. I would like to
+give you pleasure but I cannot do wrong; we won't deceive you with
+smooth words. We will tell you the simple truth what we can do and
+what we cannot do, but we cannot interfere as you ask us."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"Cannot you sign such a paper?"
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"No; the Queen has signed the great paper, and
+the Company have no more rights than any one else, but they have
+the same."
+
+KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"I would not be at a loss, but I am,
+because we are not united--the Crees and the Saulteaux--this is
+troubling me. I am trying to bring all together in one mind, and
+this is delaying us. If we could put that in order, if we were all
+joined together and everything was right I would like it, I would
+like to part well satisfied and pleased. I hear that His Excellency
+is unwell, and I wish that everything would be easy in his mind. It
+is this that annoys me, that things do not come together. I wish
+for one day more, and after that there would not be much in my
+way."
+
+COTE--"You wanted me to come here and I came here. I find nothing,
+and I do not think anything will go right. I know what you want; I
+cannot speak of anything here concerning my own land until I go to
+my own land. Whenever you desire to see me I will tell you what you
+are asking me here. Now I want to return."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We asked the Chief to come here. He has as much
+right to be here as another Indian. We cannot go there and ask the
+people of the two great tribes to meet in one place as they have
+done when they were asked to meet us. You have had many days to talk
+together. If the Saulteaux are determined that they want an agreement
+to prevent the Company from trading, it cannot be given. I think the
+Chief here spoke wisely. He says he is in trouble because you do not
+understand each other. Why are you not of one mind? Have you tried to
+be of one mind? Must we go back and say we have had you here so many
+days, and that you had not the minds of men--that you were not able
+to understand each other? Must we go back and tell the Queen that we
+held out our hands for her, and her red children put them back again?
+If that be the message that your conduct to-day is going to make us
+carry back, I am sorry for you, and fear it will be a long day before
+you again see the Queen's Councillors here to try to do you good.
+The Queen and her Councillors may think that you do not want to be
+friends, that you do not want your little ones to be taught, that you
+do not want when the food is getting scarce to have a hand in yours
+stronger than yours to help you. Surely you will think again before
+you turn your backs on the offers; you will not let so little a
+question as this about the Company, without whom you tell me you
+could not live, stop the good we mean to do. I hope that I am
+perfectly understood; when we asked the chief here we wanted to speak
+with him about his lands at his place; when we asked "Loud Voice"
+here we wanted to speak with him about the land at his place; so when
+we asked the other chiefs here we wanted to speak with them about the
+lands at their places. Why? because we did not want to do anything
+that you would not all know about, that there might be no bad
+feelings amongst you. We wanted you to be of one mind and heart in
+this matter, and that is the reason you are here to-day. Now it rests
+with you; we have done all we could. Have you anything more to say to
+us, or are we to turn our backs upon you, and go away with sorry
+hearts for you and your children? It remains for you to say."
+
+THE GAMBLER--"We do not understand you and what you are talking
+about. I do not keep it from you; we have not chosen our Chiefs; we
+have not appointed our soldiers and councillors; we have not looked
+around us yet, and chosen our land, which I understand you to
+tell us to choose. We do not want to play with you, but we cannot
+appoint our Chiefs and head men quickly; that is in the way. Now it
+is near mid-day, and we cannot appoint our Chiefs. This Chief who
+got up last--the Queen's name was used when he was appointed to be
+Chief--he wants to know where his land is to be and see it, what
+like it is to be, and to find the number of his children; that is
+what is in his mind. He says he came from afar, he had a good mind
+for coming, and he takes the same good mind away with him. I have
+not heard him say to the Saulteaux to keep back their land."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I think I understand you. We do not want to
+separate in bad feeling, or to avoid any trouble in coming to an
+understanding with you; because I do not believe that if we do not
+agree it will ever be my good fortune to endeavor to do so again.
+"Loud Voice," the Chief, has told us he wants a day to think it
+over. The Chief "Cote," from the north, would like to go home, but
+I am sure he will stop a day and try to understand his brothers,
+and agree as the others did at the Lake of the Woods. I put my
+name, and the Chiefs and the head men put theirs, and I gave the
+Chief a copy, and I told him when I went home to Red River I would
+have it all written out, a true copy made on skin, that could not
+be rubbed out, that I would send a copy to his people so that
+when we were dead and gone the letter would be there to speak for
+itself, to show everything that was promised; and that was the
+right way to do. I did so, and sent a copy of the treaty written
+in letters of blue, gold, and black to the Chief "Maw-do-pe-nais,"
+whom the people had told to keep it for them. He who speaks for the
+Saulteaux tells us they have not made up their minds yet about the
+land--he tells us they have not decided to refuse our hands. I am
+glad to hear him say that, and if it will please my Indian brethren
+here we will be glad to wait another day and meet them here
+to-morrow morning, if they will promise me with the words of men
+that they will look this matter straight in the face; that they
+will lay aside every feeling except the good of their people, and
+try to see what is right, and that they will come back and say, 'We
+have done our best, we have tried to be of one mind, and considered
+what was best for now, and to-morrow, and the years that are to
+come when we have all passed away. This is our answer. We are very
+much in earnest about this matter.' The Chief said I was not very
+well, yet I am here. Why? Because the duty was laid upon me I was
+afraid of the journey, but when a Chief has a duty to do he tries
+to do it, and I felt that if I could do you any good, as I believed
+I could, I ought to be here. I tell you this, trust my words, they
+come from the heart of one who loves the Indian people, and who is
+charged by his Queen to tell them the words of truth."
+
+
+
+SIXTH DAY'S CONFERENCE
+
+The Crees having come and shaken hands, His Honor Lieut.-Gov.
+Morris rose and said:
+
+"My friends, I have talked much; I would like to hear your voices,
+I would like to hear what you say."
+
+KA-KU-ISH-MAY, (Loud Voice--a principal chief of the Crees)--"I am
+very much pleased with that, to listen to my friends, for certainly
+it is good to report to each other what is for the benefit of each
+other. We see the good you wish to show us. If you like what we lay
+before you we will like it too. Let us join together and make the
+Treaty; when both join together it is very good."
+
+The Saulteaux arrived at this juncture, when the Lieut.-Governor
+said:
+
+"I will say to the two tribes what I said to the Crees before the
+Saulteaux came. You have heard my voice for many days, you know its
+sound. You have looked in my face, you have seen my mind through my
+face, and you know my words are true and that they do not change.
+But I am not here to talk to-day, I am here to listen. You have had
+our message, you have had the Queen's words. It is time now that
+you spoke. I am here to listen, my ears are open. It is for you to
+speak."
+
+KAMOOSES--"Brothers, I have one word and a small one, that is the
+reason I cannot finish anything that is large. You do not see the
+whole number of my tribe which is away at my back, that is the
+reason I am so slow in making ready."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I want to hear the voice of those who are
+here, they can speak for themselves and for those who are away."
+
+CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy One)--"My ears are open to what you say. Just
+now the Great Spirit is watching over us; it is good. He who has
+strength and power is overlooking our doings. I want very much to
+be good in what we are going to talk about, and our Chiefs will
+take you by the hand just now."
+
+The Chiefs now rose and shook hands with the Commissioners.
+
+KA-HA-OO-KUS-KA-TOO (he who walks on four claws)--"It is very good
+to meet together on a fine day, father. When my father used to
+bring me anything I used to go and meet him, and when my father had
+given it to me I gave it to my mother to cook it. When we come to
+join together one half at least will come."
+
+CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy)--"Now I am going to tell you, and you say
+your ears are open. You see the Qu'Appelle Lake Indians that you
+wished to see, you hear me speak but there are many far away, and
+that is the reason I cannot speak for these my children who are
+away trying to get something to eat; the Crees my child is not
+here, the Saulteaux my child is not here, the Young Dogs are not
+here, the Stonies my children are not here, this is not the number
+that you see; I am only telling you this, I think I have opened my
+mind."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I know you are not all here. We never could
+get you all together, but you know what is good for you and for
+your children. When I met the Saulteaux last year we had not 4,000
+there, but there were men like you who knew what was good for
+themselves, for their wives, for their children, and those not
+born. I give to those who were there, and they took my hand and
+took what was in it, and I sent to those who were away, and I did
+for them just as I did for those who were present. It is the same
+to-day. What we are ready to give you will be given to those who
+are not here. What is good for you, what you think will be good for
+you will be good for them. It is for you to say, not for us; we
+have done all that men who love their red brothers can do, it is
+for you now to act, on you rests the duty of saying whether you
+believe our message or not, whether you want the Queen to help you
+or not, whether or not you will go away and let the days and the
+years go on, and let the food grow scarcer, and let your children
+grow up and do nothing to keep off the hunger and the cold that is
+before them. It is for you to say that, not for us; if we had not
+your good at heart we would not have been here, and we would not
+have labored these many days, if our hearts were not warm towards
+you, and if we did not believe what we are doing, would be for your
+good as children of our Queen. I have said all."
+
+KAN-OO-SES--"Is it true you are bringing the Queen's kindness? Is
+it true you are bringing the Queen's messenger's kindness? Is it
+true you are going to give my child what he may use? Is it true you
+are going to give the different bands the Queen's kindness? Is it
+true that you bring the Queen's hand? Is it true you are bringing
+the Queen's power?"
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes, to those who are here and those who are
+absent, such as she has given us."
+
+KAMOOSES--"Is it true that my child will not be troubled for what
+you are bringing him?"
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Queen's power will be around him."
+
+KAMOOSES--"Now, I am going to ask you that the debt that has been
+lying in the Company's store, I want that to be wiped out. I ask it
+from the great men of the Queen."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you before we have nothing to do with
+the Company, we have nothing to do with its debts. I have told you
+what we will do for you, what the Queen will do for you forever.
+But the money that the Indian owes the Company is just like the
+money that the Indians owe to each other or to any trader and is
+not due to the Queen. We have no power to put money in your hands
+and your children's to pay your debts, and it would not be right
+for the Queen to come in and take away either what is between you
+and the Company, or what is between you and the traders, or what
+is between you and each other. If one of you owes the Chief is it
+right that the Queen should wipe it out? I would be very glad if we
+had it in our power to wipe out your debts, but it is not in our
+power. All we can do is to put money in your hands and promise to
+put money in the hands of those who are away, and give you money
+every year afterwards, and help you to make a living when the food
+is scarce. I have told you from the first that whether my words
+please you or not I will tell you only the truth, and I will only
+speak as far as the Queen has given us power."
+
+(He who walks on four claws)--"Whenever you give to these my
+children what they desire, then you will get what you want."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will give them what we have power to give.
+We are ready to hear."
+
+KAMOOSES--"Yes, I understand and my heart also, but it is not
+large, it is small, and my understanding is small; that is the word
+I tell you."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you what we are ready to do for
+you. Your understanding is large enough to know what is good for
+you. We have talked these many days, and I ask you now to talk
+straight, to tell me your mind, to tell me whether you wish to take
+our offers or not, it is for you to say."
+
+KEE-E-KUK--"Twenty dollars we want to be put in our hand every
+year, this we have heard from the others. Twenty-five dollars to
+each chief."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"If I understand you aright you are mistaken.
+The Saulteaux did not get twenty-five dollars per head. They get
+five dollars every year. We promised them five dollars every year,
+and a messenger was sent this year to pay them that sum. I may tell
+you that my children at the Lake of the Woods had big hearts to
+ask. You say you have small. I told them that if the Queen gave
+them all they asked I would have to ask her to allow me to become
+an Indian, but I told them I could not give them what they asked,
+and when they understood that, and understood the full breadth and
+width of the Queen's goodness, they took what I offered, and I
+think if you are wise you will do the same."
+
+(A proposition was made here by an Indian that they should receive
+five dollars per head every second year for fifty years, but he
+must have done so without authority as it was not acceded to by the
+other Indians who expressed their dissent strongly as soon as the
+offer was made.)
+
+KAMOOSES--"I am going to speak for Loud Voice and for the other
+chiefs. Some chiefs are not here, they are absent, hereafter you
+will see them. I myself will tell them, and my child that is at my
+back will tell them also. Will you receive that which I am asking?
+I want to clear up what the Indians and I want to try and put it
+right, what my child will say. Well, can you give me that. We want
+the same Treaty you have given to the North-West Angle. This I am
+asking for."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who are you speaking for? Is it for the whole
+of the Indians? (They expressed their assent.) Are you ready to
+carry it out? (They again assented.) Are your chiefs ready to sign
+this afternoon if we grant you these terms? (The Indians assented
+unanimously.) It is now after twelve, we will speak to you this
+afternoon."
+
+The Conference here ended to allow the Commissioners time to
+consult.
+
+
+
+AFTERNOON CONFERENCE
+
+The Indians having assembled, presented the Chiefs, whose names
+appear on the Treaty to the Commissioners as their Chiefs.
+
+KAMOOSES--"To-day we are met together here and our minds are open.
+We want to know the terms of the North-West Angle Treaty."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Do we understand that you want the same terms
+which were given at the Lake of the Woods (The Indians assented.) I
+have the Treaty here in a book. You must know that the steamboats
+had been running through their waters, and our soldiers had been
+marching through their country, and for that reason we offered the
+Ojibbeways a larger sum than we offered you. Last year it was a
+present, covering five years; with you it was a present for this
+year only. I paid the Indians there a present in money down of
+twelve dollars per head. I have told you why we offered you less,
+and you will see there were reasons for it. That is the greatest
+difference between what we offered you and what was paid them, but
+on the other hand there were some things promised you that were not
+given at the Lake of the Woods. (His Honor then explained the terms
+granted in that Treaty.) We promised there that the Queen would
+spend $1,500 per year to buy shot and powder, ball and twine. There
+were 4,000 of them. I offered you $1,000 although you are only
+one-half the number, as I do not think you number more than 2,000.
+Your proportionate share would be $750 which you shall receive.
+Then at the Lake of the Woods each Chief had their head men; we
+have said you would have four who shall have fifteen dollars each
+per year, and as at the Lake of the Woods each Chief and head man
+will receive a suit of clothing once in three years, and each Chief
+on signing the treaty will receive a medal and the promise of a
+flag. We cannot give you the flag now, as there were none to be
+bought at Red River, but we have the medals here. Now I have told
+you the terms we gave at the North-West Angle of the Lake of the
+Woods, and you will see that the only difference of any consequence
+between there and what we offered you is in the money payment that
+we give as a present, and I have told you why we made the
+difference, and you will see that it was just. We had to speak with
+them for four years that had gone away. We speak to you only for
+four days. It was not that we came in the spirit of traders, but
+because we were trying to do what was just between you and the
+Queen, and the other Indians who would say that we had treated you
+better than we had treated them because we put the children of this
+year on the same footing as these children through whose land we
+had been passing and running our steamboats for four years. You see
+when you ask us to tell you everything, we show you all that has
+been done, and I have to tell you again that the Ojibbeways at Lake
+Seul who number 400, when I sent a messenger this spring with a
+copy of those terms made at the North-West Angle with their nation,
+took the Queen's hand by my messenger and made the same treaty. I
+think I have told you all you want to know, and our ears are open
+again."
+
+KAMOOSES--"I want to put it a little light for all my children
+around me, something more on the top. For my chief thirty dollars,
+for my four chief head men twenty dollars, and each of my young
+children fifteen dollars a year."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am afraid you are not talking to us
+straight; when we went away you asked us to give you the terms
+given at the Lake of the Woods; you asked to know what they were,
+and the moment I told you, you ask three times as much for your
+children as I gave them. That would not be right; and it is well
+that you should know that we have not power to do so; we can give
+you no more than we gave them. We hope you are satisfied. I have
+one word more to say, we are in the last hours of the day you asked
+us for and we must leave you. The utmost we can do, the furthest we
+can go or that we ought to go is, to do what you asked, to give you
+the terms granted last year at the Lake of the Woods. We can do no
+more, and you have our last words. It is for you to say whether you
+are satisfied or not."
+
+KAMOOSES--"We ask that we may have cattle."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We offered you cattle on the first day, we
+offered your Chief cattle for the use of his band--not for himself,
+but for the use of his band; we gave the same at the Lake of the
+Woods. We can give no more here."
+
+KAMOOSES--"We want some food to take us home."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"When you sign the treaty, provisions will be
+given to take you home. Now I ask you, are you ready to accept the
+offer, the last offer we can make, you will see we have put you on
+the same footing as the Indians at the Lake of the Woods, and we
+think it is more than we ought to give, but rather than not close
+the matter we have given it, we have talked long enough about this.
+It is time we did something. Now I would ask, are the Crees and the
+Saulteaux and the other Indians ready to make the treaty with us.
+Since we went away we have had the treaty written out, and we are
+ready to have it signed, and we will leave a copy with any Chief
+you may select and after we leave we will have a copy written out
+on skin that cannot be rubbed out and put up in a tin box, so that
+it cannot be wet, so that you can keep it among yourselves so that
+when we are dead our children will know what was written."
+
+KAMOOSES--"Yes, we want each Chief to have a copy of the treaty, we
+ask that the Half-breeds may have the right of hunting."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will send a copy to each Chief. As to the
+Half-breeds, you need not be afraid; the Queen will deal justly,
+fairly and generously with all her children."
+
+The Chiefs then signed the treaty, after having been assured that
+they would never be made ashamed of what they then did.
+
+One of the Chiefs on being asked to do so signed; the second called
+on said he was promised the money when he signed, and returned to
+his seat without doing so. The Lieutenant-Governor called him
+forward--held out his hand to him and said, take my hand; it holds
+the money. If you can trust us forever you can do so for half an
+hour; sign the treaty. The Chief took the Governor's hands and
+touched the pen, and the others followed. As soon as the treaty was
+signed the Governor expressed the satisfaction of the Commissioners
+with the Indians, and said that Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson, the
+Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior, were ready to
+advance the money presents, but the Indians requested that the
+payment should be postponed till next morning, which was acceded
+to. The Chiefs then formally approached the Commissioners and shook
+hands with them, after which the conference adjourned, the
+Commissioners leaving the place of meeting under escort of the
+command of Lieut.-Col. Smith, who had been in daily attendance.
+
+Report of the interview at Fort Ellice between the Indian
+Commissioners and certain Saulteaux Indians not present at
+Qu'Appelle, and not included in Treaty Number Two, the Chief being
+Way-wa-se-ca-pow, or "the Man proud of standing upright:"
+
+Lieut.-Governor Morris said he had been here before, and since that
+time he had met the Crees and Saulteaux nations, and had made a
+treaty with them. The Indians there were from Fort Pelly and as far
+distant as the Cypress Hills. He wished to know the number of the
+Saulteaux to be found in this locality.
+
+The Chief said there were about thirty tents who were not at
+Qu'Appelle, and ten who were there.
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Commissioners here are representing the
+Queen. I made a treaty with the Saulteaux last year at the Lake of
+the Woods. They were not a little handful; but there were 4,000 of
+them--and now we have made a treaty with the Crees and Saulteaux at
+Qu'Appelle. There is not much need to say much--it is good for the
+Indians to make treaties with the Queen--good for them and their
+wives and children. Game is getting scarce and the Queen is willing
+to help her children. Now we are ready to give you what we gave the
+Saulteaux at the Lake of the Woods and the Saulteaux and Crees at
+Qu'Appelle. It will be for you to say whether you will accept it or
+not." His Honor then explained the treaty to them.
+
+"What we offer will be for your good, as it will help you, and not
+prevent you from hunting.
+
+"We are not traders. I have told you all we can do and all we will
+do. It is for you to say whether you will accept my hand or not. I
+cannot wait long. I think you are not wiser than your brothers. Our
+ears are open, you can speak to us."
+
+LONG CLAWS--"My father--I shake hands with you, I shake hands with
+the Queen."
+
+SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I find what was done at Qu'Appelle was
+good, does it take in all my children?"
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes."
+
+SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I thank you for coming and bringing what
+is good for our children."
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I forgot to say that we will be able to give
+you a small present, some powder and shot, blankets and calicoes.
+Each band must have a Chief and four headmen, but you are not all
+here to-day. I want to-day to know the Chief and two headmen.
+
+"Now I want to know will you take my hand and what is in it."
+
+The Indians came up and shook hands in token of acceptance.
+
+LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am glad to shake hands with you; the white
+man and the red man have shaken hands and are friends. You must be
+good subjects to the Queen and obey her laws."
+
+The Indians introduced as their Chief, Way-wa-se-ca-pow; and as
+their headmen, Ota-ma-koo-euin and Shaponetung's first son.
+
+His Honor then explained the memorandum to them, when it was
+signed.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+THE REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO
+
+
+When Treaties, Numbers One and Two, were made, certain verbal
+promises were unfortunately made to the Indians, which were not
+included in the written text of the treaties, nor recognized
+or referred to, when these Treaties were ratified by the Privy
+Council. This, naturally, led to misunderstanding with the Indians,
+and to widespread dissatisfaction among them. This state of matters
+was reported to the Council by the successive Lieut.-Governors
+of Manitoba, and by the Superintendent of Indian Affairs. On
+examination of the original Treaty Number One, the Minister of the
+Interior reported that a memorandum was found attached to it signed
+by Mr. Commissioner Simpson, His Hon. Governor Archibald, Mr.
+St. John and the Hon. Mr. McKay, purporting to contain their
+understanding of the terms upon which the Indians concluded the
+treaty. This memorandum was as follows:
+
+Memorandum of things outside of the Treaty which were promised at
+the Treaty at the Lower Fort, signed the 3rd day of August, A.D.
+1871.
+
+For each Chief that signed the treaty, a dress distinguishing him
+as Chief.
+
+For braves and for councillors of each Chief, a dress: it being
+supposed that the braves and councillors will be two for each
+Chief.
+
+For each Chief, except Yellow Quill, a buggy.
+
+For the braves and councillors of each Chief, except Yellow Quill,
+a buggy.
+
+In lieu of a yoke of oxen for each reserve, a bull for each, and a
+cow for each Chief; a boar for each reserve, and a sow for each
+Chief, and a male and female of each kind of animal raised by
+farmers; these when the Indians are prepared to receive them.
+
+A plow and a harrow for each settler cultivating the ground.
+
+These animals and their issue to be Government property, but to be
+allowed for the use of the Indians, under the superintendence and
+control of the Indian Commissioner.
+
+The buggies to be the property of the Indians to whom they are
+given.
+
+The above contains an inventory of the terms concluded with the
+Indians.
+
+               WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
+               MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN,
+               A. G. ARCHIBALD,
+               JAS. McKAY.
+
+The Privy Council, by Order in Council, agreed to consider this
+memorandum as part of the original treaties, and instructed the
+Indian Commissioner to carry out the promises therein contained,
+which had not been implemented. They also agreed to offer to raise
+the annuities from three to five dollars per head, to pay a further
+annual sum of twenty dollars to each chief, and to give a suit of
+clothing every three years to each chief and head man, allowing
+four head men to each band, upon the distinct understanding
+however, that any Indian accepting the increased payment, thereby
+formally abandoned all claims against the Government, in connection
+with the verbal promises of the Commissioners, other than those
+recognized by the treaty and the memorandum above referred to.
+
+The Government then invited Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in conjunction with
+the Indian Commissioner, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, to visit the
+several bands interested in the treaties, with a view to submit to
+them the new terms, and obtain their acceptance of the proposed
+revision of the treaties. His Honor accordingly placed his
+services at the disposal of the Government, and was at his request
+accompanied by the Hon. Mr. McKay, who had been present at the
+making of the original treaties, and was well versed in the Indian
+tongues. In October 1875, these gentlemen entered upon the task
+confided to them, and first proceeded to meet the large and
+important band of St. Peters, in the Province of Manitoba. The
+matter was fully discussed with the Indians, the Order in Council,
+and memorandum read and explained to them, and their written assent
+to the new terms obtained. After their return from St. Peters,
+owing to the advanced season of the year, it was decided to
+divide the work, the Lieutenant-Governor requesting the Indian
+Commissioner to proceed to Fort Alexander on Lake Winnipeg, and to
+the Broken Head and Roseau Rivers, while Messrs. Morris and McKay,
+would undertake to meet the Indians included in Treaty Number Two
+at Manitoba House on Lake Manitoba. Colonel Provencher met the
+Indians at the places above mentioned, and obtained the assent of
+the Indians of the three bands to the revised treaty. Messrs.
+Morris and McKay proceeded by carriage to Lake Manitoba, and thence
+in a sail boat, where they met the Indians of the six bands of
+Treaty Number Two, and after full discussion, the Indians cordially
+accepted the new terms, and thus was pleasantly and agreeably
+closed, with all the bands of Treaties One and Two, except that of
+the Portage band, who were not summoned to any of the conferences,
+a fruitful source of dissension and difficulty. The experience
+derived from this misunderstanding, proved however, of benefit with
+regard to all the treaties, subsequent to Treaties One and Two, as
+the greatest care was thereafter taken to have all promises fully
+set out in the treaties, and to have the treaties thoroughly and
+fully explained to the Indians, and understood by them to contain
+the whole agreement between them and the Crown. The arrangement,
+however, of the matter with the Portage band was one of more
+difficulty. This band had always been troublesome. In 1870, they
+had warned off settlers and Governor MacTavish of the Hudson's Bay
+Company had been obliged to send the Hon. James McKay to make
+terms for three years with them for the admission of settlers. In
+1874, they twice sent messengers with tobacco (the usual Indian
+credentials for such messengers) to Qu'Appelle to prevent the
+making of the treaty there. Besides the claims to the outside
+promises, preferred by the other Indians, they had an additional
+grievance, which they pressed with much pertinacity. To obtain
+their adhesion to Treaty Number One, the Commissioners had given
+them preferential terms in respect to their reserve, and the
+wording in the treaty of these terms enhanced the difficulty. The
+language used was as follows: "And for the use of the Indians of
+whom Oo-za-we-kwun is Chief, so much land on the south and east
+side of the Assiniboine, as will furnish one hundred and sixty
+acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or
+smaller families, reserving also a further tract enclosing said
+reserve, to contain an equivalent to twenty-five square miles of
+equal breadth, to be laid out around the reserve." The enclosure
+around the homestead reserve led to extravagant demands by them.
+They did not understand its extent, and claimed nearly half of the
+Province of Manitoba under it.
+
+The Indians constantly interviewed the Lieutenant-Governor on
+the subject, and when the Hon. Mr. Laird, then Minister of the
+Interior, visited Manitoba, they twice pressed their demands upon
+him. The Government requested the Hon. Messrs. Morris and McKay to
+endeavor to settle the long pending dispute, and they proceeded to
+the Round Plain on the river Assiniboine with that view. They met
+the Indians, some five hundred in number, but without result. The
+Indians were divided among themselves. A portion of the band had
+forsaken Chief Yellow Quill and wished the recognition of the Great
+Bear, grandson of Pee-qual-kee-quash, a former chief of the band.
+The Yellow Quill band wanted the reserve assigned in one locality;
+the adherents of the Bear said that place was unsuited for farming,
+and they wished it to be placed at the Round Plain, where they had
+already commenced a settlement. The land to which they were
+entitled under the treaty was 34,000 acres, but their demands were
+excessive.
+
+The Chief Yellow Quill was apprehensive of his own followers,
+and besides the danger of collision between the two sections was
+imminent. The Commissioners finally intimated to the band that they
+would do nothing with them that year, but would make the customary
+payment of the annuities under the original treaty and leave them
+till next year to make up their minds as to accepting the new
+terms, to which the Indians agreed.
+
+In 1876, the Government again requested Mr. Morris to meet these
+Indians and endeavor to arrange the long pending dispute with them,
+and in July he travelled to the Long Plain on the Assiniboine with
+that object in view. He had previously summoned the band to meet
+there, and had also summoned a portion of the band known as the
+White Mud River Indians, dwelling on the shores of Lake Manitoba,
+who were nominally under the chieftainship of Yellow Quill, and
+were, as such, entitled to a portion of the original reserve, but
+did not recognize the Chief. Mr. Morris was accompanied by Mr.
+Graham, of the Indian Department, Secretary and Paymaster. On
+arrival at his destination, the Lieutenant-Governor found the
+Indians assembled, but in three camps. Those adhering to Yellow
+Quill, the Bear, and the White Mud River Indians, being located
+on different parts of the plains, Mr. Reid, Surveyor, was also
+present, to explain the extent and exact dimensions of the proposed
+reserve.
+
+The next day the Indians were assembled, and the conference lasted
+for two days. The Yellow Quill band were still obstructive, but the
+other two sections were disposed to accept the terms. The question
+of the reserve was the main difficulty. The Yellow Quill band still
+desired a reserve for the whole. The others wished to remain, the
+Bear's party at the Round Plain, and the White Mud River Indians at
+Lake Manitoba, where they resided and had houses and farms. In the
+interval from the previous year, the Bear's band had built several
+houses, and made enclosures for farming. Eventually, the Indians
+were made to comprehend the extent of land they were really
+entitled to, but the Governor intimated that the land was for all,
+and that he would divide the band into three, each with a Chief
+and councillors, and that he would give each band a portion of the
+whole number of acres, proportionate to their numbers--the Bear at
+the Round Plain, the White Mud Indians at their place of residence,
+and the Yellow Quill band wherever they might select, in unoccupied
+territory. After long consultations among themselves the Indians
+accepted the proposal. The Bear was recognized as a Chief, and a
+Chief selected by the White Mud River band was accepted as such.
+
+The Indians also agreed to accept the revised terms of Treaty
+Number One, and an agreement in accordance with the understanding
+was prepared and signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, and the Chief
+and head men. The Indians preferred a request to receive the two
+dollars, increased amount, which, as they said, "had slipped
+through their fingers last year," which was granted, and also that
+the councillors should be paid yearly, as in the other treaties,
+subsequently made. This the Governor promised to recommend, and it
+was eventually granted, being made applicable to all the bands in
+Treaties Numbers One and Two.
+
+Thus was so far closed, a controversy which had lasted for
+some years, and had been fruitful of unpleasant feelings, the
+negotiations terminating in that result having been from a variety
+of causes more difficult to bring to a satisfactory solution than
+the actual making of treaties, for the acquisition of large extents
+of territory. On the leaving of the Lieutenant-Governor, the
+morning after the conclusion of the arrangement, the Indians
+assembled and gave three cheers for the Queen and Governor, and
+fired a feu de joie. Mr. Reid at once proceeded to set aside the
+reserves for the Bear and White Mud bands, but the selection of a
+reserve by the Yellow Quill band was attended with still further
+further difficulty, although it was eventually pointed out by them,
+and surveyed by Mr. Reid, it being in a very desirable locality.
+The despatches of the Lieutenant-Governor to the Minister of the
+Interior, giving an account in full of the negotiations for the
+revision of the Treaties Numbers One and Two, will complete this
+record, and will be found to give a clear narrative of them. These
+are as follows:
+
+                   GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+             FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 5th October, 1875.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in pursuance of your
+request that I should meet the Indians of Treaties Numbers One
+and Two, with a view to a revision of the terms thereof, and
+an adjustment of the disputed questions connected therewith,
+I proceeded to the St. Peter Reserve on the 5th of August and
+encamped near the Indian tents.
+
+On the 6th I met Chief Prince and his band, being accompanied by
+the Hon. James McKay, who at my request gave me the benefit of
+his valuable services, and by Mr. Provencher. I explained to the
+Indians the terms offered to them by the Government, and obtained
+their written assent thereto, endorsed on a parchment copy of the
+Order in Council of date the 30th April, 1875. As however there
+are in the bands of Treaties Numbers One and Two, four councillors,
+i.e., head men, and two braves, we were under the necessity of
+agreeing that they should continue at that number, instead of two,
+as specified in the report of the Privy Council. We then brought
+before them your request that the portion of the reserve embraced
+in the proposed new town near the Pacific Railway crossing should
+be sold for their benefit, to which they agreed, and the formal
+instrument of surrender will be enclosed to you by the Indian
+Commissioner.
+
+The Indians living at Nettley Creek asked to have a reserve
+assigned them there, and I promised to bring their request under
+your notice.
+
+I did not bring up the question of the division of the band into
+two, as my experience with the Portage band, arising from a similar
+difficulty, led me to fear that complications might arise from the
+proposal which might prevent the settlement of the more important
+matter of the disposal of the open questions relating to the
+treaty. I was therefore of opinion that the division of the band
+should be postponed to next year, and acted upon that opinion. A
+party of Norway House Indians were present and asked for a reserve
+at the Grassy Narrows. I informed them that one could not be
+granted at that place, and learning from them that the Chief at
+Norway House was about leaving there with a party of Indians to
+confer with me, I engaged three of the Indians present to proceed
+at once to Norway House and inform the Indians that I would meet
+them there about the middle of September.
+
+I have since learned that they met the Chief after he had left
+Norway House or Fort Garry, and caused him to return.
+
+                 I have the honor to be, etc.,
+                                 ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                         Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+                  GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+             FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 4th October, 1875.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that after my return from St.
+Peters, finding that in view of my contemplated mission to Lake
+Winnipeg it would be impossible for me to visit all the bands of
+Indians included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, I requested
+the Indian Commissioner, Mr. Provencher, to proceed to meet them
+at Fort Alexander and the Broken Head and Roseau rivers, while
+I should proceed to Lake Manitoba and meet at Manitoba House
+the various bands of Indians included in Treaty Number Two. In
+pursuance of this arrangement, I left here on the 17th of August
+for Oak Point, on Lake Manitoba, where I was to take a boat for
+Manitoba Post.
+
+I was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whose presence enabled
+me to dispense with an interpreter, and was of importance
+otherwise, as he had assisted my predecessor in the making of the
+treaty originally at Manitoba Post. Mr. Graham, of the Indian
+Department, also accompanied me to make the payments and distribute
+the pensions. I reached Oak Point on the afternoon of the 18th, and
+left there on the afternoon of the 20th, arriving at Manitoba House
+on the evening of the 21st. The next day being Sunday, nothing of
+course was done relating to my mission, but on Monday morning I
+met the Indians at ten o'clock on the lake shore. The six bands
+included in the treaty were all represented by their Chiefs and
+head men and a large number of their people.
+
+I explained to them the object of our mission, my remarks being
+fully interpreted by Mr. McKay, and obtained their assent in
+writing to the Order in Council of the 30th April last, the terms
+of which were accepted with cordiality and good feeling by the
+Indians.
+
+The new medals and uniforms were distributed to the Chiefs and head
+men, and the payments under the revised treaty were then commenced
+by Mr. McKay and Mr. Graham, and continued until 12.30 p.m.
+
+On the 24th, the payments were resumed and concluded, but owing to
+heavy rain and high winds, we were unable to leave Manitoba Post
+until the 25th. The Indians on our departure again firing their
+guns in token of their respect and good will. Owing to stormy
+weather, which obliged us to encamp on Bird Island, we did not
+return to Oak Point until the afternoon of the 27th.
+
+On the 28th, the Indians residing in that vicinity, and belonging
+to Sousanye's band, were paid by Messrs. McKay and Graham. I
+returned to Fort Garry on the 1st September, in the afternoon, my
+journey having been protracted by unfavorable weather, and by the
+fact that owing to the prevalence of shoals, the navigation of Lake
+Manitoba is difficult in stormy weather.
+
+As only a small portion of the Riding House Indians were present, I
+informed them that Mr. Graham would proceed to the mountains after
+our return, to make the payments, and that I would send by him a
+reply to their requests, as to the retention by them of the reserve
+originally designated in the treaty, and this I have since done
+affirmatively with your sanction. Mr. Provencher succeeded in
+obtaining the adhesion of the bands at Fort Alexander, Broken Head
+and Roseau rivers to the new terms, and has handed me the copies of
+the Order in Council with their assents endorsed thereon.
+
+You will therefore perceive that with the exception of the Portage
+band with regard to whom I wrote you fully on the 2nd of August
+last, the assent of all the Indians interested therein to the
+proposed mode of settlement of the unrecorded promises made at the
+conclusion of Treaties Numbers One and Two, has been obtained, and
+I feel that I have reason to congratulate the Privy Council on the
+removal of a fruitful source of difficulty and discontent. But I
+would add, that it becomes all the more important that a better
+system of Indian administration should be devised so as to secure
+the prompt and rigid carrying out of the new terms in their
+entirety.
+
+You are already in possession of my views on this subject, and
+I trust that local agents will be appointed to be supervised by
+the Indian Commissioner and that an Indian Council of advice
+and control, sitting at Fort Garry, will be entrusted with the
+direction of the Treaties One, Two, and the upper portion of Three,
+and the new Treaty Number Five, so as to secure prompt and
+effective administration of Indian Affairs.
+
+Under the system of local agents, the necessity of large gatherings
+of the Indians will be avoided, and much expense to the Government,
+and inconvenience to the Indians, avoided. I have further to record
+my sense of the services rendered to me by Messrs. McKay and
+Graham. The latter discharged his duties with promptitude and
+efficiency, and Mr. McKay and he introduced a mode of distribution
+of the provisions to which I would call your attention.
+
+                I have the honor to be, etc.,
+                             ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                     Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+                       GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+              FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 2nd August, 1875.
+
+Sir,--In accordance with your request I have commenced my visits to
+the Indian bands included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, with a
+view to settling the matters in dispute. I left here on the 22nd
+inst., and was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whom I had
+invited to accompany me in consequence of his having been present
+at the making of the treaties, and by the Indian Commissioner.
+
+I reached the Round Plain on the Assiniboine river, where Yellow
+Quill's band of Saulteaux had assembled on the 26th, and met the
+Indians next day, explaining to them our mission, and telling them
+what I was empowered to promise them. This band, as you are aware,
+has always been dissatisfied, and have been difficult to deal with
+I found them in an intractable frame of mind, and the difficulty of
+the position was enhanced by a division amongst themselves.
+
+The original Chief of the Portage band was Pee-quah-kee-quah, who
+was a party to the treaty with Lord Selkirk. On his death he was
+succeeded by his son, who died some years ago leaving a boy, who
+has now grown up. Yellow Quill was appointed chief by the Hudson's
+Bay Company when Pee-quah-kee-quah's son died. The grandson is now
+grown up and has returned from the plains, where he has been, and
+claims to be recognized as an hereditary chief, and about half
+the band have followed his lead. After we had been in conference
+some time, an Indian rose and told me that when the chief of the
+Portage died, he charged him to keep the land for his son, and that
+they wished a reserve at the Portage. Another rose and produced
+Pee-quah-kee-quah's King George medal, and said the chief had
+placed it in his keeping and charged him to deliver it to his son,
+when he was old enough to be a chief, and then placed it round the
+neck of Kes-kee-maquah, or the Short Bear. They then asked that I
+should receive him as a chief, in place of Yellow Quill. I told
+them that could not be done. That Yellow Quill must remain a chief,
+but that I would report their request on behalf of the young chief
+to the Government at Ottawa and let them know their decision,
+but that they could get no reserve at the Portage as only that
+mentioned in the treaty would be given, and with this they were
+satisfied. The conference then went on, the two parties sitting
+apart and holding no intercourse with each other. I spent two days
+with them making no progress, as they claimed that a reserve thirty
+miles by twenty was promised them as shewn in the rough sketch
+enclosed, made at their dictation and marked "A." I produced the
+plan of the reserve, as proposed to be allotted to them, containing
+34,000 acres, but Yellow Quill said it was not in the right place,
+and was not what was promised, and morever it was not surrounded
+by the belt of five miles, mentioned in the treaty, but was only
+partially so and did not cross the river. I told them they could
+get no more land than was promised in the treaty. They appealed to
+Mr. McKay whether the Reserve was not promised to be on both sides
+of the river, and he admitted that it was. I told them it was not
+so written in the treaty, and that if the Government should allow
+it to cross the river, the rights of navigation must be conserved,
+but I would consult the Queen's Councillors. They replied that they
+would go to the "Grand Father" and get him to intercede for them,
+meaning the "President of the United States," as I afterwards
+discovered, an American Indian having persuaded them to take this
+course.
+
+They refused to discuss or accept anything until the Reserve
+Question was settled, and while I was speaking on the afternoon of
+the second day, Yellow Quill's Councillors went away, and left him
+alone, when he followed. I then left the Council tent, leaving word
+that I would depart in the morning. Yellow Quill came back and said
+that he would accept the five dollars, but Mr. McKay told him he
+had not taken my hand, and that it would not be paid, as my offer
+was conditioned on a settlement of all questions between them and
+the Government. About six o'clock, Yellow Quill and his Councillors
+sent me the following message which had been written for them by
+Mr. Deputy Sheriff Setter from their dictation.
+
+"They didn't come to see you. You came to see them, and if you
+choose to come and speak to them again, you can come if you like."
+
+I felt that I must now deal firmly with them, and therefore
+prepared the following reply:
+
+"It is not right, for they came to see me at my request, as their
+Governor, and I came to meet them. After spending two days with
+them, their Chief insulted me by rising and going out while I was
+speaking, and breaking up the Conference. I represent the Queen,
+and his action was disrespectful to her. I will not go to meet you
+again. If you are sorry for the way I have been treated you can
+come and see me."
+
+I charged Mr. McKay to deliver it to them in their Council, which
+he did, when they denied having meant to send the message in the
+terms in which it was, and disclaimed all intended offence. The
+message had its desired effect, but their disclaimer was not
+correct, as Mr. Setter informs me that he had originally written
+a welcome to me, which they caused him to strike out, and to say
+that "I could come if I chose." Next morning I struck my tents and
+loaded my waggons and prepared to leave. Seeing this, Yellow Quill
+and his Councillors came to Mr. McKay, and asked if I would not see
+them again, to which I consented. On proceeding to Mr. Provencher's
+pay tent, I met the Chief, Yellow Quill. His spokesman rose, saying
+"that they were glad to have met me, that they had found my words
+good; that they had not desired to offend the Queen or me, and
+were sorry; that God had watched us during two days, and He was
+again looking on." I accepted their apology, and then proceeded
+to practical business, the whole tone and demeanor of the Indians
+being changed, having become cordial and friendly. I may mention
+here, that Yellow Quill reproached his Councillors for their
+conduct. He also informed Mr. McKay privately, that he could not
+act otherwise as he was in danger of his life from some of his own
+"braves." He was guarded all the time by a man armed with a bow and
+steel-pointed arrows. I promised to state their claims as to the
+reserve, but told them it would not be granted, but that I would
+change the location of the reserve, as it had been selected without
+their approval, and would represent their view as to its locality,
+and as to crossing the river, the navigation of which, however,
+could not be interfered with. They asked to be paid three dollars
+per head or one dollar per year for the following transaction:
+In 1868 a number of Ontario farmers had settled on Rat Creek.
+Yellow Quill's band drove them off and trouble was impending.
+Governor McTavish sent Mr. McKay up to arrange the difficulty, in
+anticipation of the advent of Canadian power. He made a lease for
+three years of their rights, assuring them that before that time
+the Canadian Government would make a treaty with them and recognize
+the temporary arrangement, and in consequence the settlers were
+unmolested. The question was not raised at the "Stone Fort" Treaty,
+and I told them I had not known of it before, but supposed the
+Government would hold that the treaty had covered it, and that
+the extra two dollars would compensate for it, but that I would
+represent their news and give them an answer. They complained
+of the mode of payment, as my predecessor assured them that their
+children who were absent should be paid when they presented
+themselves, and that they only got two years payment instead of the
+full amount. As these were Mr. Provencher's instructions I promised
+to report it. They expressed themselves quite satisfied with the
+arrangements as to the outside promises, and would gladly accept of
+it, if the reserve question was settled, but that they could not
+receive that as surveyed. I took the opportunity of explaining to
+them that the "President of the United States" had no power here,
+and that the Queen and Her Councillors were the only authorities
+they had to deal with, and that I would state their wishes as fully
+as they could do themselves. They asked if I would come back,
+but I said not this year, but next year either I or some other
+Commissioner would meet them. Eventually they cheerfully agreed to
+accept the three dollars annuity as usual, and to defer a final
+adjustment of the question between us until next year, and promised
+to accompany any one I sent to select the reserve and agree on
+its locality. They again thanked me for my kindness and patience
+with them, and I took leave of them. I regard the result as very
+satisfactory, as I left the band contented, and you are aware
+of their intimate relation with the "Plain Indians," and the
+difficulty their message to Qu'Appelle, "that the white man had
+not kept his promises," caused us then, and it is very important
+that they should be satisfied. I returned to the Portage, and Mr.
+Provencher proceeded to Totogan, and paid the White Mud section
+of the band, numbering one hundred and thirty, who are nominally
+included in it, but do not recognize Yellow Quill's authority, the
+usual annuities, which they accepted without demur.
+
+I would now make the following recommendations:
+
+1st. That you should write to Yellow Quill declining to entertain
+his demands for the large reserve but offering to them a reserve
+including the "Eagle's Nest" on the north side of the river, and
+laid off in the terms of the treaty, with the land comprised in the
+one hundred and sixty acres for each family, surrounded by the belt
+mentioned in the treaty, in the manner suggested in the enclosed
+rough sketch "B," reserving the rights of navigation and access to
+the river. The land is of inferior quality to that already offered
+them.
+
+2nd. I would propose that the young chief should be recognized as
+head of the section of the band adhering to him. He and his section
+are ready to accept the terms and the reserve as described in
+the treaty. They behaved very well and told Mr. McKay that they
+were glad I had not recognized him then, as it would have led to
+bloodshed, and they would be content if the recognition came when
+the reserve was settled. The young chief is an intelligent, well
+disposed man, aged about twenty-six.
+
+3rd. I would propose that the White Mud Indians, who live there
+constantly, should be recognized as a distinct band and should
+elect a Chief.
+
+4th. I would recommend that the arrears due to Indians who have not
+yet received their annuities, should be paid in full at once, but
+that a period of two years should be fixed for those bona fide
+members of the band to come in and be paid, and that after that
+they should only receive one year's payment. If these steps are
+taken, I think we shall have no more trouble with these Indians.
+
+In conclusion I have to express my obligations to the Hon. Mr.
+McKay for the valuable services he rendered me. The Indians told me
+they would not have come into the Stone Fort Treaty but for him,
+and I know it was the case.
+
+                        I have the honor to be, etc.,
+                                        ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                                 Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+                               GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+                        FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 8th July 1876.
+
+TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that, in compliance with your
+request, I left this on the 14th ult. with the view of proceeding
+to the Long Plain on the Assiniboine, in order to meet the Indians
+of the Portage Band, to arrange the dispute with regard to the
+reserve, and to settle the outside promises. Mr. Graham, of the
+Indian Department, and Mr. Reid, P.L.S., also went there at my
+request, the one to act as paymaster, and the other, as you wished,
+to survey the reserve. Owing to the prevalence of heavy rain the
+roads were in so bad a condition that I was four days in reaching
+the Long Plain, while we were also subjected to inconvenience and
+expense by the detention of the provisions, owing to the same
+cause. Added to my other discomforts was the presence of mosquitoes
+in incredible numbers, so that the journey and the sojourn at the
+Plain were anything but pleasurable. I had taken the precaution
+to request Mr. Cummings, the interpreter, to summon the White Mud
+Indians as well as Yellow Quill's band, and those who adhered to
+the Short Bear.
+
+On my arrival at the Long Plains, which I accomplished on the 17th,
+I found about five hundred Indians assembled, but camped in three
+separate encampments. On arriving, I was saluted by a feu de joie.
+At the Portage, Mr. Graham had obtained some provisions, which he
+had sent forward in carts.
+
+On our way we met some carts sent by the Indians to relieve my
+waggons of the tents and baggage, the Indian trail being almost
+impracticable; but instead of so using them I sent them on toward
+the Portage to meet the loaded carts, and was thus enabled to
+get the temporary supply of provisions to the Plain, which was
+fortunate, as the Indians were without food. The evening of my
+arrival the Councillors of Yellow Quill came to talk with me, but
+I declined to do so, telling them that the Chief had not come, and
+I would only speak with him. I acted thus, in consequence of the
+conduct of their head men, last year, when they controlled the
+Chief and coerced the whole band. In a short time Yellow Quill
+came with them to see me, and finding that they had come about
+provisions, I referred them to Mr. Graham, who, I informed them,
+had charge of the provisions and payments. The incident had a
+marked effect in giving tone to the following negotiations.
+
+On Monday I met the Indians, who ranged themselves in three
+parties. I explained to them the proposed arrangement of the
+outside promises very fully, and told them that as they were
+willing to accept of the settlement last year, I did so for their
+information only. I then took up the question of the reserve, read
+the terms in which it was referred to in the Stone Fort Treaty,
+explained to them that they were getting double the land any other
+Indians in Treaties Numbers One and Two were doing, but told them
+the reserve belonged to all of them, and not to Yellow Quill's band
+alone. I then called on them to speak to me, asking Yellow Quill
+first. He said he did not understand the extent of the reserve. I
+then asked Mr. Reid to shew them a diagram of it, and to explain to
+them its length in ordinary miles, and otherwise, which he did very
+satisfactorily, and at length they comprehended it. I then called
+on Short Bear's band to express their views. They said they wanted
+a reserve at the Long Plain, if it was only a little piece of land;
+that they liked the place, that they had built houses and planted
+gardens, had cut oak to build more houses, and wished to farm
+there. I then called on the White Mud Indians. They said that they
+were Christians and had always lived at the White Mud River; that
+they did not wish to join either Yellow Quill's or Short Bear's
+reserve, but desired a reserve at the Big Point. I told them they
+could not have it there, as there were settlers, and the Government
+wished them to join one of the other bands, and explained to them
+that their holdings would be respected, except where inadvertently
+sold. I took this course, as I had ascertained that the plan of
+Yellow Quill's head men was to make no settlement this year, and
+that they had induced the other Indians to agree to act in that
+way. I accordingly so shaped my opening speech and my dealings with
+the Indians as to defeat this project, by securing the support of
+Short Bear's and the White Mud Indians, which I succeeded in doing,
+though Yellow Quill's spokesman taunted the others with having
+broken their agreement. As the conference proceeded, Yellow Quill's
+councillors said they did not want the band broken up, as they
+wished all to live together. I told Yellow Quill he would have his
+reserve on both sides of the river, reserving the navigation, and
+that if they could agree to go to one reserve, I would be pleased;
+but if not, that I would settle the matter. Yellow Quill said his
+councillors were willing that the other Indians should have a
+separate reserve provided they retained the belt of twenty-five
+miles, in addition to their proportion of the reserve. I informed
+them this could not be done; the reserve belonged to all. They then
+asked for an adjournment, in order that they might meet together
+and have a smoke over it, to assemble again when I hoisted my flag.
+After a couple of hours interval I again convened them. The Short
+Bears and White Mud Indians adhered to what they stated to me, but
+Yellow Quill's band insisted on one reserve for all, but admitted
+that the objections of Short Bear's band to the place asked by them
+were well founded, and that it was sandy and unfit for farming,
+and that they would like to select a reserve higher up the River
+Assiniboine. I then adjourned the conference until morning, and
+asked them to meet together and be prepared for settlement.
+
+On Tuesday, the 20th June, the Indians again responded to the
+hoisting of my flag, and met at 9 o'clock. Yellow Quill told me
+that his band were now willing to separate from the others, and
+wished to select a reserve higher up the river. I informed them
+that I would accede to their request, but that they must do it at
+once, and on the approval thereof by the Privy Council it would be
+laid off. Short Bear's band still desired a reserve at the Long
+Plain, to which I assented. The White Mud River Indians asked for
+a separate reserve where they could farm, and I informed them that
+under the discretionary powers I possessed I would have a reserve
+selected for them, giving them their proportion of the original
+reserve. The Indians then asked that the two dollars per head,
+which had, as they said, slipped through their fingers last year,
+should be paid to them, and I told them that I had been authorized
+to do so, which gave them much satisfaction. In anticipation of a
+settlement I had prepared a draft agreement, which was being copied
+for me by Mr. Graham. I informed them of this, and stated that
+I would sign it, and that the Chiefs and Councillors must do so
+likewise, so that there could be no misunderstanding. When the
+agreement was completed, I asked Mr. Cummings, the Interpreter,
+to read it to them, which he did. Three Indians, who understood
+English, and who had at an early period been selected by the
+Indians to check the interpretation of what was said, standing by,
+and Mr. Cummings being assisted by Mr. Cook, of St. James, who, at
+Mr. Cummings' request, I had associated with him, on the Indians
+choosing their interpreters. I then signed the agreement, and
+called upon Yellow Quill to do so. He came forward cheerfully and
+said he would sign it, because he now understood what he never
+did before, viz., what was agreed to at the Stone Fort. I then
+called on his Councillors to sign, but they refused, saying
+they had agreed by the mouth. I then told the Indians that
+unless the Councillors signed nothing could be done, and that the
+Councillors who refused would be responsible for the failure of the
+negotiations. One of them then signed, but the other persistently
+refused. I repeated my warning, and at length he reluctantly came
+forward and said he wished to ask me a question, "Would the head
+men be paid?" I told him I had no authority to do so, but would
+report his request. He said he did not expect it this year, but
+hoped for it next. Eventually he signed the agreement. I then said
+I would recognize Short Bear as a Chief, and asked him to select
+his Councillors and braves. He did so at once, making a judicious
+choice, and came forward to touch the pen, saying "I thank you for
+my people." His Councillors promptly followed, one of them asking
+for a part of the reserve on the other side of the river, which I
+refused. I then called on the White Mud River Indians to select a
+Chief and one Councillor, being under the impression at the time
+that they were the least numerous band, which, however, has turned
+out not to be the case, which they did at once, and on their being
+presented to me they signed the agreement. I then gave a medal to
+Yellow Quill, and promised to send the other two Chiefs medals
+when procured from Ottawa, the supply here being exhausted. To the
+Chiefs and Councillors suits of clothing were then distributed,
+Yellow Quill and his head men having hitherto refused to accept
+either medals or coats, but now taking them. Yellow Quill then
+presented me with a skin coat, and said that he parted with the
+other Indians as friends, and that there would be no hard feelings.
+The conference then broke up, and thus terminated a difficulty
+which has existed for several years, and the influence of which
+was felt as an obstacle, as you are aware, at Qu'Appelle when the
+treaty was made there. Mr. Graham at once commenced the payments,
+and during the evening the three Chiefs and their Councillors
+called on me, evidently being on the most friendly terms with each
+other, a state of things which had not existed for a considerable
+period. In the morning, as I was leaving for the Portage, the
+Indians assembled near my waggon and gave three cheers for the
+Queen and three for the Governor, and I then drove off amid a
+salute of firearms from all sections of the encampment. I left
+Mr. Graham to complete the payments, and here record my sense of
+the efficient services he rendered me. He understands the Indian
+character, and gets on well with them. I requested Mr. Reid to
+visit the White Mud region and ascertain what persons are entitled
+to holdings under the terms of your instructions, and also to
+survey Short Bear's reserve.
+
+Yellow Quill is to go without delay to look up a reserve, and as
+there are no settlers in the region in question, I propose that if
+Mr. Reid sees no objection to the locality he should at once lay
+it off, so as to effectually terminate the chronic difficulty with
+this band. I shall be glad to receive by telegram your approval
+of his doing so. The interpreters, Mr. Cummings, Mr. Cook, of St.
+James, a trader, and Kissoway, an Indian trader belonging to the
+band, rendered me much service; the latter trades in the west,
+and was passing the Portage on his way to Fort Garry, and as he
+belonged to Yellow Quill's band, and is a relative of his, being
+a son of the deceased Pecheto, (another of whose sons was the
+spokesman at Qu'Appelle, as you will recollect) he came to the
+Long Plains to advise the band to come to terms. He remained at
+my request until the negotiations were concluded, and exerted a
+most beneficial influence over Yellow Quill's band. I call your
+attention to the request of Yellow Quill's Councillors, that they
+should be paid. As in Treaties Three, Four and Five, they are paid,
+and as the expense would not be large, I am of opinion that before
+the Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the Superintendency of
+Manitoba proceeds to make the payments in Treaties One and Two, he
+should be authorized to pay the head men. It will be difficult to
+explain why the difference is made, and it will secure in every
+band, men who will feel that they are officers of the Crown and
+remunerated as such. I returned to Fort Garry on the 23rd inst.,
+encountering on the way a very severe thunder storm, which
+compelled me to take advantage of the very acceptable shelter of
+the kindly proffered residence of the Hon. Mr. Breland, at White
+Horse Plains, instead of a tent on the thoroughly-drenched
+prairie. I congratulate you that with the successful issue of
+this negotiation is closed, in Treaties One and Two, the vexed
+question of the open promises. I forward by this mail a copy of
+the agreement I have above alluded to, retaining the original for
+the present, and will be pleased to hear of its speedy approval
+by the Privy Council.
+
+                        I have the honor to be, etc.,
+                                      ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                              Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+THE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE
+
+
+This treaty, covers an area of approximately about 100,000 square
+miles. The region is inhabited by Chippewas and Swampy Crees.
+The necessity for it had become urgent. The lake is a large and
+valuable sheet of water, being some three hundred miles long. The
+Red River flows into it and the Nelson River flows from it into
+Hudson's Bay. Steam navigation had been successfully established by
+the Hudson's Bay Company on Lake Winnipeg. A tramway of five miles
+in length was being built by them to avoid the Grand Rapids and
+connect that navigation with steamers on the River Saskatchewan. On
+the west side of the lake, a settlement of Icelandic immigrants had
+been founded, and some other localities were admirably adapted for
+settlement. Moreover, until the construction of the Pacific Railway
+west of the city of Winnipeg, the lake and Saskatchewan River are
+destined to become the principal thoroughfare of communication
+between Manitoba and the fertile prairies in the west. A band of
+Indians residing at Norway House, who had supported themselves by
+serving the Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen on the route from Lake
+Winnipeg to the Hudson Bay, by way of the Nelson River, but whose
+occupation was gone, owing to supplies being brought in by way of
+the Red River, desired to migrate to the western shore of Lake
+Winnipeg, and support themselves there by farming.
+
+For these and other reasons, the Minister of the Interior reported
+"that it was essential that the Indian title to all the territory
+in the vicinity of the lake should be extinguished so that
+settlers and traders might have undisturbed access to its waters,
+shores, islands, inlets and tributary streams." The mouth of
+the Saskatchewan River especially seemed to be of importance,
+as presenting an eligible site for a future town. For these
+reasons the Privy Council of Canada, in the year 1875, appointed
+Lieut.-Gov. Morris, and the Hon. James McKay, to treat with these
+Indians. It may be here stated that this remarkable man, the
+son of an Orkneyman by an Indian mother, has recently died at a
+comparatively early age. Originally in the service of the Hudson's
+Bay Company, he became a trader on his own account. Thoroughly
+understanding the Indian character, he possessed large influence
+over the Indian tribes, which he always used for the benefit and
+the advantage of the Government.
+
+The Hudson's Bay Company, to resume this narrative, kindly placed
+their propeller steamer, the Colville, at the service of the
+Commissioners, and the Board in London, in view of the public
+service rendered by its use by the Commissioners, eventually
+declined to make any charge for its employment. A full report
+of the voyage of the Commissioners, and of the results of their
+mission, will be found in the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor,
+which will be found at the end of this chapter. Suffice it to say,
+that the Commissioners proceeded first to Berens River, on the east
+side of the lake, and made a treaty with the Indians of that side
+of the lake, thence they sailed to the head of Lake Winnipeg,
+descended the Nelson River to Norway House, where no steamer had
+ever before been, and concluded a treaty with the Indians there.
+
+They also promised the Indians to give those of them who chose to
+remove, a reserve on the west side of Lake Winnipeg, at Fisher's
+River, about forty miles from the Icelandic settlement.
+
+A considerable number of families have since removed there, and
+have formed a very promising settlement.
+
+From Nelson River the Commissioners proceeded to the mouth of the
+Great Saskatchewan River, and met the Indians who live there. Their
+houses were built at the foot of the Grand Rapids, and in the
+immediate vicinity of the Hudson's Bay, Tramway, some seven miles
+from the mouth of the river. The river is here deep to the very
+shore, so that the steamer ran long aside the bank, and was moored
+by ropes attached to the Chief's house. The Commissioners met
+the Indians and informed them of the desire of the Government
+to control the land where they had settled, and to give them a
+reserve, instead, on the opposite side of the river. They said,
+they would surrender the locality in question, and go to the south
+side of the river, if a small sum was given them, to aid them in
+removing their houses or building others. To this the Commissioners
+willingly acceded, and promised that the next year a sum of five
+hundred dollars would be paid them for that purpose. The treaty was
+then signed, the Commissioners having extended the boundaries of
+the treaty limits, so as to include the Swampy Cree Indians at the
+Pas or Wahpahpuha, a settlement on the Saskatchewan River, and
+recommended that Commissioners should be sent in the ensuing summer
+to complete the work. The Commissioners then returned to Winnipeg,
+after a voyage, on and around the lake, of about one thousand
+miles. The terms of the treaty were identical with those of
+Treaties Numbers Three and Four, except that a smaller quantity of
+land was granted to each family, being one hundred and sixty, or in
+some cases one hundred acres to each family of five, while under
+Treaties Numbers Three and Four the quantity of land allowed was
+six hundred and forty acres to each such family. The gratuity paid
+each Indian in recognition of the treaty was also five dollars per
+head, instead of twelve dollars the circumstances under which the
+treaty was made being different. The area covered by these treaties
+was approximately about 100,000 square miles and has been described
+as lying north of the territory covered by Treaties Numbers Two and
+Three, extending west to Cumberland House (on the Saskatchewan
+River) and including the country east and west of Lake Winnipeg,
+and of Nelson River as far north as Split Lake.
+
+In 1876, Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in accordance with his suggestions to
+that effect, was requested by the Minister of the Interior, to take
+steps for completing the treaty, and entrusted the duty to the Hon.
+Thomas Howard, and J. Lestock Reid, Esq., Dominion Land Surveyor.
+He gave them formal instructions, and directed them to meet the
+Indians together at Dog Head Point, on the lake, to treat with the
+Island Indians there and thence to proceed to Berens River to meet
+the Indians of the rapids of that river who had not been able to be
+present the previous year, and thereafter directed Mr. Howard to
+proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan and pay the Indians the
+five hundred dollars for removal of the houses, and thence to go up
+the Saskatchewan to the Pas and deal with the Indians there, while
+Mr. Reid was to proceed from Berens River to Norway House, and
+arrange with the Indians for the removal of such of them as desired
+it, to Fisher's River, on Lake Winnipeg.
+
+These gentlemen accordingly in July, 1876, proceeded in York boats
+(large sail boats) to their respective destinations, and were very
+successful in accomplishing the work confided to them.
+
+I now append the official despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Morris, dated
+11th October, 1875, giving an account of the making of the treaty
+and of the journey, and his despatch of the 17th November, 1876,
+relating to the completion of the treaty, together with extracts
+from the reports of Messrs. Howard and Reid.
+
+FORT GARRY, October 11th, 1875.
+
+TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, that under authority of the
+Commission of the Privy Council to that effect, I proceeded to
+Lake Winnipeg for the purpose of making a treaty with the Saulteaux
+and Swampy Cree Indians, in company with my associate, the Hon.
+James McKay, leaving Fort Garry for Chief Prince's Landing on
+the Red River, on the 17th September last, in order to embark on
+the Hudson's Bay Company's new propeller, the Colville, which
+Chief Commissioner Graham had kindly placed at our disposal on
+advantageous terms. We selected this mode of conveyance, as
+travelling and conveyance of provisions in York boats would, at the
+advanced period of the season, have occupied at least eight weeks,
+if at all practicable.
+
+The steamer left the landing at five o'clock on the 18th September,
+but owing to the prevalence of a gale of northerly wind was
+compelled to be anchored at the three channels of the Red River,
+inside of the bar which obstructs the entrance of the lake. The
+wind continued during the 18th and 19th, but on the afternoon of
+the latter day, Captain Hackland, a sailor of much practical
+experience on the Northern Seas decided to risk going out, as the
+water on the bar was running down so fast that he feared that the
+steamer would be unable to cross over the bar. I may remark that
+the wind causes the waters of the lake to ebb and flow into the
+river with great rapidity, and that the bar is so serious an
+obstruction to an important navigation, that it ought to be
+examined with a view to ascertain the cost and practicability of
+its removal. Leaving our anchorage, we crossed the bar at three in
+the afternoon with difficulty, and proceeded on our voyage;
+anchored opposite the mouth of the Berens River on Monday, the
+20th, at nine a.m., to await the arrival of a pilot, as no steamer
+had ever before entered the river. Under the pilotage of a Chief
+and a Councillor, we reached Berens River Post, the Indians
+greeting us with volleys of firearms, and at once summoned the
+Indians to meet us in the Wesleyan Mission School House, which the
+Rev. Mr. Young kindly placed at our disposal. We met the Indians at
+four o'clock, and explained the object of our visit. The question
+of reserves was one of some difficulty, but eventually this was
+arranged, and the Indians agreed to accept our offer, and the
+indenture of treaty was signed by the Chiefs and head men about
+eleven p.m. The payment of the present of five dollars per head,
+provided by the treaty, was immediately commenced by Mr. McKay and
+the Hon. Thomas Howard, who accompanied me as Secretary and Pay
+Master, and was continued until one a.m., when the payment was
+concluded.
+
+The steamer left next day, the 21st, for Norway House, but the
+captain was obliged to anchor at George's Island in the evening,
+owing to the stormy weather. The Colville remained at anchor all
+the next day, the 22nd, but left at midnight for Nelson River. We
+sighted the Mossy and Montreal points, at the mouth of that river,
+about nine a.m. on the 23rd, and arrived at the old or abandoned
+Norway House at eleven o'clock, under the guidance of Roderick
+Rose, Esquire, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Service, at Norway
+House, who had been engaged for some days in examining the channel,
+in anticipation of our visit.
+
+The Nelson River expands into Play Green Lake, a large stream of
+water studded with islands, presenting a remarkable resemblance to
+the Thousand Islands of the St. Lawrence River. The distance from
+the mouth of the river to Norway House is twenty miles. We arrived
+at Norway House at three o'clock and were welcomed there by the
+Indians, who fired a salute.
+
+On the 24th we met the Indians in a large store-house of the
+Hudson's Bay Company, and asked them to present their Chiefs and
+head men. We found that there were two distinct bands of Indians,
+the Christian Indians of Norway House, and the Wood or Pagan
+Indians of Cross Lake. Each elected their Chiefs by popular vote in
+a most business-like manner, and the Chiefs, after consulting the
+bands, selected the head men. We then accepted the Chiefs, and I
+made an explanation of the object of our visit in English, and the
+Hon. James McKay in the Indian dialect. We severed the questions of
+terms and reserves, postponing the latter till we had disposed of
+the former. The Indians gratefully accepted of the offered terms,
+and we adjourned the conference to enable them to consult as to
+reserves. On re-assembling, the Christian Chief stated that as they
+could no longer count on employment in boating for the Hudson's Bay
+Company, owing to the introduction of steam navigation, he and a
+portion of his band wished to migrate to Lake Winnipeg, where they
+could obtain a livelihood by farming and fishing. We explained why
+we could not grant them a reserve for that purpose at the Grassy
+Narrows as they wished, owing to the proposed Icelandic settlement
+there, but offered to allot them a reserve at Fisher River, about
+forty miles north of the Narrows, and this they accepted. It is
+supposed that some eighty or ninety families will remove there
+in spring, and it was arranged that those who remain, instead
+of receiving a reserve, should retain their present houses and
+gardens. The Chief of the Pagan band, who has, however, recently
+been baptized, stated that the Wood Indians wished to remain at
+Cross Lake, and we agreed that a reserve should be allotted them
+there. The treaty was then signed and the medals and uniforms
+presented. The Chiefs, on behalf of their people, thanked Her
+Majesty and her officers for their kindness to the Indian people,
+which I suitably acknowledged, and the payment of the presents was
+commenced by Messrs. McKay and Howard, and completed on the 15th.
+
+We left that day at half-past three amidst cheering by the Indians
+and a salute of fire-arms, and came to anchor in Play Green Lake,
+at Kettle Island, at half-past five.
+
+The steamer left Kettle Island next morning at six o'clock for the
+Grand Rapids of the Saskatchewan, which we reached at four o'clock.
+
+The original post of the Hudson's Bay Company, at the mouth of
+the river, has been abandoned, and a new one established on their
+reserve, some six miles higher up the river, at the head of the
+portage, which the river steamer descends to. The Colville, at our
+request ran up to the Chiefs house, situated on the shore of a deep
+bay, and was moored and gangways laid out to the shore. We found an
+Indian village on the north side, and also the Chief's house, which
+was built on the only spot where good and inexpensive wharfage can
+be had, and ascertained afterwards that the Indians claimed the
+whole north shore for a reserve.
+
+On the 27th we met the Indians near the Chief's house in the open
+air, at a spot where a large fire had been lighted by them, as the
+weather was cold. We took a similar course as at Norway House in
+severing the question of terms of the treaty and reserves, and with
+like satisfactory results. After a lengthy discussion the Indians
+agreed to accept the terms, and we then entered upon the difficult
+question of the reserves. They complained of the Hudson's Bay
+Company's reserve, and wished to have the land covered by it,
+but we explained whatever had been promised the Company would be
+given just as promises made to them would be kept. They said the
+Company's reserve should be at the abandoned post at the mouth of
+the river, and not at the end of the portage. We informed them that
+we would inquire as to this. They then claimed a reserve on both
+sides of the river of large extent, and extending up to the head of
+the Grand Rapids, but this we declined to accede to. Eventually, as
+the locality they had hitherto occupied is so important a point,
+controlling as it does the means of communication between the mouth
+of the river, and the head of the rapids, and where a "tram-way"
+will no doubt ere long require to be constructed, presenting also
+deep-water navigation and excellent wharfage, and evidently being
+moreover the site where a town will spring up, we offered them
+reserve on the south side of the river. They objected, that they
+had their houses and gardens on the north side of the river, but
+said that as the Queen's Government were treating them so kindly,
+that they would go to south side of the river, if a small sum was
+given them to assist in removing their houses, or building others,
+and this as will be seen by the terms of the treaty, we agreed to
+do, believing it to be alike in the interests of the Government
+to have the control of so important a point as the mouth of the
+great internal river of the Saskatchewan, and yet only just to the
+Indians, who were making what was to them so large a concession to
+the wishes of the Commissioners. On our agreeing to the proposal,
+the treaty was cheerfully signed by the Chief and head men, and
+the payment of the present was made to them, together with a
+distribution of some provisions. I enclose a tracing of the mouth
+of the river, copied from a sketch thereof kindly made for me by
+Mr. Ross, which will enable you to understand the actual position
+of the locality in question, and the better appreciate our reasons
+for our action in the matter.
+
+The steamer left the Grand Rapids in the afternoon of the 27th, and
+the captain took his course for the mouth of the Red River, but
+anchored, as the night became very dark, between George's Island
+and Swampy Island.
+
+On the 28th, resuming our course at half past five a.m., we sighted
+Berens River Mission House at eight o'clock, and passed into the
+channel between Black Bear Island and Dog Head or Wapang Point,
+at 12.30; then observing a number of Indians on the shore making
+signals to us by firing guns, we requested the captain to approach
+the shore. The water being very deep the steamer went close inshore
+and anchored--the Indians coming off to us in their canoes. We
+found them to be headed by Thickfoot, a principal Indian of the
+band inhabiting the islands, and some of those and the Jack Head
+band of the West Shore, and explained to them the object of our
+visit. They told us they had heard of it, and had been waiting to
+see us. Thickfoot said the Island Indians at Big Island, Black
+Island, Wapang and the other islands in the vicinity had no chief;
+that they numbered one hundred and twenty-eight, and those at
+Jack-Fish Head sixty. Thickfoot said he had cattle and would like
+to have a place assigned to his people on the main shore, where
+they could live by farming and fishing. We suggested Fisher River
+to them, which they approved of. Eventually we decided on paying
+these Indians--took Thickfoot's adhesion to the treaty, of which I
+enclose a copy, and authorized him to notify the Indians to meet at
+the Dog Head Point next summer, at a time to be intimated to them,
+and to request them in the mean time to select a Chief and
+Councillors. Thickfoot expressed gratitude for the kindness of the
+Government, and his belief that Indians of the various Islands and
+of Jack Head Point would cheerfully accept the Queen's benevolence
+and settle on a reserve. After paying this party, and distributing
+a small quantity of provisions among them, we resumed our voyage,
+and, owing to the character of the navigation, again came to anchor
+in George's Channel at seven o'clock, p.m. On the 29th, we left our
+anchorage at five o'clock a.m., and entered the mouth of the Red
+River at twelve o'clock, crossing the bar without difficulty, as
+the weather was calm. We arrived at the Stone Fort at three o'clock
+in the afternoon, but had to remain there till next day, awaiting
+the arrival of conveyances from Winnipeg. Mr. McKay and I left the
+Stone Fort on the 30th at seven a.m. leaving our baggage and a
+portion of the provisions which had not been used to be forwarded
+by the steamer Swallow, and reached Fort Garry at ten o'clock,
+thus terminating a journey of over one thousand miles, and having
+satisfactorily closed a treaty with the Saulteaux and Swampy Crees,
+which will prove of much importance in view of the probable rapid
+settlement of the west coast of Lake Winnipeg. The journey,
+moreover, is of interest, as having been the first occasion on
+which a steam vessel entered the waters of Berens River and of the
+Nelson River, the waters of which river fall into the Hudson's Bay,
+and as having demonstrated the practicability of direct steam
+navigation through a distance of three hundred and sixty miles from
+the city of Winnipeg to Norway House. I may mention here that the
+prevalence of timber suitable for fuel and building purposes, of
+lime and sandstone, of much good soil, and natural hay lands on the
+west shore of the lake, together with the great abundance of white
+fish, sturgeon and other fish in the lake, will ensure, ere long,
+a large settlement.
+
+The east coast is much inferior to the west coast, as far as
+I could learn, but appeared to be thickly wooded, and it is
+understood that indications of minerals have been found in several
+places.
+
+I now beg to call your attention to the boundaries of the treaty,
+which, you will observe, vary somewhat from those suggested in your
+memorandum to the Privy Council. The Commissioners adopted as the
+southern boundary of the treaty limits, the northern boundary of
+Treaties Numbers Two and Three. They included in the limits all the
+territory to which the Indians ceding, claimed hunting and other
+rights, but they fixed the western boundary as defined in the
+treaty, for the following reasons:
+
+1st. The extension of the boundary carries the treaty to the
+western limit of the lands claimed by the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree
+Tribes of Indians, and creates an eastern base for the treaties to
+be made with the Plain Crees next year.
+
+2nd. The Swampy Crees at the Pas, on the Saskatchewan, would
+otherwise have had to be included in the western treaties.
+
+3rd. That the extension of the boundaries will add some six hundred
+to the number of Indians in the suggested limits, of whom three
+hundred at Wahpahhuha or the Pas on the Saskatchewan would have had
+to be treated with owing to the navigation of the Saskatchewan, in
+any event.
+
+4th. The inclusion of the Norway House Indians in the treaty, and
+the surrender of their rights, involved a larger area of territory.
+
+5th. That a number of the Norway House Indians came from Moose Lake
+and the Cumberland region, and possessed rights there which have
+been included in the boundaries.
+
+6th. Unless the boundaries had been properly defined, in conformity
+with known geographical points, a portion of the country lying
+between the territories formerly ceded and those comprised in
+Treaty Number Five, would have been left with the Indian title
+unextinguished.
+
+For these reasons, the Commissioners defined the boundaries as they
+are laid down in the treaty, and it will remain with the Government
+to send a Commissioner to the Pas to obtain the adhesion of the
+Indians there to the treaty next summer, or not as they shall
+decide, though the Commissioners strongly urge that step to be
+taken as a necessity.
+
+I forward the original of the treaty to you by the Hon. Mr.
+Christie, and in order to the better understanding of the treaty
+area, I enclose a very valuable map copied from one made for me at
+my request on board of the Colville, by Roderick Ross, Esq., who
+accompanied me from Norway House to the Stone Fort, and to whom
+I was indebted for much valuable assistance and co-operation, as
+we were in fact to the Company's officers generally. This map is
+prepared from actual observation, and locates many places not
+indicated on any existing map, and covering as it does an area of
+over 100,000 square miles, which, exclusive of the great waters,
+has been included in the treaty, possesses much value.
+
+I enclose herewith duplicates of the pay sheets, a statement of the
+cash expenditure, shewing the balance on hand of the credit which
+was given me for the purposes of the treaty, and statements of the
+distribution of the provisions and of the clothing, and medals,
+as given to the chiefs and head men. These statements will shew
+that every arrangement was made to secure the utmost economy in
+effecting the treaty, and yet to give satisfaction to the Indians
+concerned.
+
+I mention here that the Indians were uniformly informed that no
+back payments of the present would be made to those who did not
+attend the meetings with the Commissioners, but that next year
+those not present would receive payment with the others, if they
+presented themselves.
+
+I have to express my sense of the services rendered to the
+Government by my associate the Hon. James McKay, and the Hon.
+Thomas Howard, who acted as Secretary and Pay Master to the
+Commissioners as well as of the many kind services we received from
+Captain Hackland, and the other officers of the Colville, from the
+Wesleyan Missionaries, and from the officers of the Hudson's Bay
+Company.
+
+I take this opportunity of suggesting that the supervision of
+Treaty Number Five, and the carrying out of the treaty obligations
+with the Indians of the St. Peter's Band, and of those of Fort
+Alexander and the River Roseau and Broken Head, which fall into
+Lake Winnipeg, should be entrusted to a local agent, stationed at
+the Stone Fort or in the vicinity of St. Peter's, and who would
+thence supervise the whole District.
+
+In conclusion, I have only to express the hope that the action of
+the Commissioners, which in every respect was governed by a desire
+to promote the public interest, will receive the approval of the
+Privy Council, and be regarded by them as the satisfactory
+discharge of an onerous and responsible duty.
+
+                  I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                          Your obedient servant,
+                                 ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                     Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.
+
+
+
+                                GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+                          FORT GARRY 17th November, 1876.
+
+TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR.
+
+Sir,--I recommended in my despatch of the 7th June, that measures
+should be adopted to secure the adhesion of the Indians, who had
+not been met with when Treaty Number Five was concluded, and was
+requested by you to entrust the duty to Mr. Graham, of the Indian
+Department here, or to the Hon. Thomas Howard, Mr. Graham was
+unable to leave the office. I therefore entrusted the matter to Mr.
+Howard and J. Lestock Reid, D.L.S. I gave these gentleman written
+instructions, a copy of which will be found appended to the report
+of Mr. Howard, in which I directed them to meet the Island Indians
+and those of Berens River together, and then to separate, Mr. Reid
+proceeding to Norway House and Mr. Howard to the Grand Rapids of
+the Saskatchewan and the Pas, this course being necessary to enable
+the work to be accomplished during the season. I have pleasure in
+informing you that these gentlemen discharged their mission most
+successfully and satisfactorily, as will be seen from the following
+reports, which I enclose, viz:--
+
+A. Joint report of Messrs. Howard and Reid as to the Island Indians
+of Lake Winnipeg and those of Berens River.
+
+B. Report of Mr. Howard as to the band at the Grand Rapids, and as
+to his negotiations with the Indians at the Pas.
+
+C. Report of Mr. Reid with regard to the Norway House Indians.
+
+D. Report of Mr. Howard, submitting the accounts of the expenditure
+incurred in carrying out my instructions.
+
+1. It will appear from these reports that the Commissioners
+obtained the assent of the scattered bands among the islands and
+shores of Lake Winnipeg, and had them united in a band with one
+Chief and his Councillors.
+
+2. That the Indians of the Grand Rapids of the Berens River
+accepted the treaty, being received as part of the band of Jacob
+Berens, and that the latter band wish their reserves to be allotted
+them and some hay lands assigned.
+
+3. That the Norway House Indians contemplate removal to Fisher's
+River, on Lake Winnipeg.
+
+4. That the Indians of Grand Rapids have removed, as they agreed
+to do last year from the point where they had settled on the
+Saskatchewan, and which had been set apart as the site of a town.
+
+5. That the Indians of the Pas, Cumberland, and Moose Lake gave
+their adhesion to the treaty and, subject to the approval of the
+Privy Council, have agreed upon the localities for their reserves.
+
+6. That the bands at the Grand Rapids, the Pas, and Cumberland are
+in a sufficiently advanced position to be allowed the grant for
+their schools.
+
+I forward herewith the balance sheet of Mr. Howard for the receipts
+and disbursements connected with the completion of the treaty and
+the payments, as also the various vouchers in support thereof. I
+placed the charge of the financial arrangements in the hands of Mr.
+Howard, on whom also fell the longest period of service in the work
+entrusted to the Commissioners.
+
+I also forward by parcel post, registered, the original of the
+assents to the treaty of the various bands.
+
+To prevent complications and misunderstandings, it would be
+desirable that many of the reserves should be surveyed without
+delay, and, from Mr. Reid's connection with the treaty, and his
+fitness for the work, I think that he would be a suitable person
+to be employed in the duty.
+
+I would remark in conclusion, that I requested Mr. Provencher to
+obtain the assent to the treaty of the band at the mouth of the
+Black River, and that be informs me that he obtained their adhesion
+and has so reported to you. The having obtained the assent of the
+whole of the Indians within the region treated for so far, is a
+most satisfactory feature of the year's operations.
+
+                                  I have, &c.,
+                                              ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                                      Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+A.
+
+WINNIPEG, October 10th, 1876.
+
+TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                 Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry.
+
+Sir,--Under instructions received from you, dated 14th July last,
+we were directed to proceed to the Dog Head Point and Berens River,
+on Lake Winnipeg, and there obtain the adhesion of certain Indians
+to the treaty that was made and concluded at Norway House last
+year, and we have now the honor to report....
+
+With a fair wind and fine weather we reached the Narrows on Monday
+afternoon, the 24th, at half-past four. Mr. Howard called at the
+Hudson's Bay Company's post to see about the provisions stored
+there, where he found Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head Indians
+encamped, about twenty-five families in all, and learned from them
+that they were desirous to meet and speak to us where they were,
+and not across the Narrows at the Dog Head; but as the place of
+meeting was distinctly fixed, Mr. Howard informed them that they
+would have to move their camps.
+
+Mr. Reid having, in the meantime, gone to the Dog Head Point, was
+received with a salute from the Indians there encamped, viz.: the
+Blood Vein River, Big Island and Sandy Bar bands, and, almost
+simultaneously with Mr. Howard's arrival there, the Indians
+belonging to Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head arrived also.
+
+We hardly had time to make our camp before being waited upon by
+a representative from all the bands except Thickfoot's, and they
+desired to know when we would be prepared to have a conference;
+and, having told them that the following day, the 25th, was the day
+appointed, and that we would meet them at eleven o'clock in the
+morning, we gave them some provisions and they withdrew. Thickfoot
+subsequently called upon us and stated that he was prepared at
+any time to meet us and sign the treaty, that he had learned that
+it was our intention to make only one Chief for all the Indians
+gathered there; that he had felt when the paper was placed in his
+hands last year by the Governor, that he was making him the Chief;
+that he had notified all the Indians that were there as he had
+agreed, and that they had threatened him with violence for saying
+he was to be Chief, and that he was afraid now to join them in any
+way, and that he and his band wished to be spoken to by themselves.
+Upon hearing this, we informed him that he need not be afraid of
+violence, that the paper the Governor gave him merely stated that
+he was a principal Indian, and we would certainly recognize him as
+such, and if the Indians desired him to be their Chief it would be
+a great pleasure to us.
+
+The following morning the Indians sent word by a representative
+from each band, except Thickfoot's, that they desired another day
+to meet in council before having a conference; but, feeling they
+had sufficient time already, yet not wishing to hurry them too
+much, we extended the hour of meeting to four o'clock on the same
+day, which satisfied them, and when they promised to be ready.
+
+About three o'clock, we were informed that the Indians had
+gathered, so we at once proceeded to meet them. The place we had
+chosen for the conference was on a granite plateau, and at one end
+our crews had erected a covering with boughs; a more suitable spot
+for the meeting could not be found.
+
+After inquiring if they had all gathered, and, being assured that
+they had, we began to explain the object of our mission, but
+immediately saw that the bands were determined to be considered
+distinct and wished to be treated with separately, when we informed
+them that only one Chief would be allowed, and that before we could
+proceed any further we would require them all to meet together
+in council and there select one Chief and three Councillors, and
+be prepared to present them to us on the following day. This
+evidently gave great satisfaction to the Island Band, of which
+Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais was head man, but they all withdrew; before doing
+so, agreeing to be ready the next day at noon to meet us.
+
+Before the hour appointed for the meeting the next day, another
+delegation came over and informed us that the Indians were not yet
+prepared, that they could not come to any decision as to who should
+be Chief, and again asked to have the hour of meeting extended to
+three o'clock, which we did upon the understanding that if they
+were not then prepared we would return and report the facts to you.
+
+Shortly after, we noticed Thickfoot and his Indians sitting near
+our tents, and evidently taking no part in the selection of a
+Chief, so we called him over and found him still disinclined to
+join the other Indians. He stated that they would not have him as
+Chief, and that he would therefore remain away. We then explained
+that he could be head man of his band by being elected a Councillor
+to whoever would be appointed Chief, and at last prevailing upon
+him to go with his Indians to the Council tent, we requested the
+Rev. Mr. Cochrane to proceed to the Indian encampment and state to
+them that from each band other than the one from which the chief
+was chosen, a Councillor would have to be taken. By this means
+we saw our way to satisfy all the bands, and Mr. Cochrane having
+notified the Indians accordingly, we felt confident the choice of
+a chief would soon be made; but in this we were disappointed, as a
+messenger shortly after arrived and said no choice could be made,
+as Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais would do nothing unless he was chosen Chief. On
+hearing this Mr. Cochrane decided to visit the Indians in Council,
+and, having done so, proposed to them that they should elect
+a Chief by ballot, and having got them all to agree to this
+proposition, they proceeded to the election. Several ballots had
+to be taken, and at last resulted in favor of the chief Indian of
+the Blood Vein River band, Sa-ha-cha-way-ass, and the Councillors
+elected were the head men from the Big Island, Doghead and
+Jack-Fish Head bands.
+
+At three o'clock p.m., we were notified that the Indians had again
+gathered, when we proceeded to the place of meeting, and were
+presented to the Chief and two of his Councillors. Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais,
+the third Councillor, coming forward, said his band did not want him
+to act as Councillor; that he had seen the Governor the other day, and
+had been told by him that he would be the Chief of the Island Indians.
+Whereupon we informed him that no such promise had been made by you,
+and that we could only recognize the choice of the majority. He then
+desired to withdraw from the negotiations, and wait until he saw you,
+before signing the treaty; but as we had learned that out of the
+twenty-two families that were in his band, all, with one or two
+exceptions, had received the annuity since 1870, with the St. Peter's
+Band, we made them sit by themselves, and then explained that by
+receiving the annuity as a large number of them had done, they had
+really agreed to the treaty and that we were there only to deal with
+those of the band that had at no time received money from the Queen.
+Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais then said that there were very few of his Indians
+that had not received money from the Queen, but that he never had;
+that he was quite prepared to sign the treaty now, only some of his
+people did not want him to do so, unless we agreed to give them the
+Big Island for a reserve. This we at once refused, and at the same
+time told them that unless he and all his band agreed to the terms
+we offered them without further delay, they might return to their
+homes. Hearing this, they all withdrew, but soon returned, when
+Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais said one or two of his people did not want him to
+sign any treaty, but most of them did, and that he was going to do so.
+He then took his seat along with the Chiefs and other Councillors,
+and we proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty. When we came to
+the clause referring to the reserves, each band was anxious that the
+places where they are in the habit of living should be granted them
+as reserves, and the locations of the same mentioned in the treaty;
+but as our instructions were positive on this point, we refused but
+assured them that the names of the places they asked for, we would
+certainly forward with our report to you, and we stated that with the
+exception of the location asked for by the Sandy Bar Indians, we felt
+sure the Government would grant their request, and give them their
+reserves where they desired. The following were the localities
+mentioned:--
+
+    DOG HEAD BAND.--The point opposite the Dog Head.
+    BLOOD VEIN RIVER BAND.--At mouth of Blood Vein River.
+    BIG ISLAND BAND.--At mouth of Badthroat River.
+    JACK-FISH HEAD BAND.--The north side of Jack Head Point, at the
+  Lobstick, and the
+    SANDY BAR BAND.--White Mud River, west side of Lake Winnipeg.
+
+It must be remembered that four bands out of the above named,
+viz.:--Big Island, Jack-Fish Head, Dog Head and Blood Vein River,
+are distinct bands, those at Sandy Bar really belonging to the St.
+Peter's Band of Indians and that they have always lived at the
+different points upon the lake from which they take their names,
+and they therefore look upon these points as their homes. We would,
+therefore, beg to recommend that the request of of all, with the
+exception of the Sandy Bar Indians, be granted, although in doing
+so we are aware of the desire of the Government that Indians should
+not be encouraged to break up into small bands, yet we feel sure in
+this instance it would be impossible to get them all upon any one
+reserve.
+
+The adhesion we had signed on Wednesday evening, July 26th, and
+we then arranged to begin the payments of annuities the following
+morning at nine o'clock, which was done, and the payments
+completed by four o'clock on the same day. We then distributed
+the implements, ammunition, twine, and balance of provisions.
+
+As already stated, the Indians at Sandy Bar, were formerly paid
+with the St. Peter's band. They are now included in the limits of
+Treaty Five, and desire to receive their annuity with the Island
+band.
+
+Having distributed the presents, we immediately moved our camp
+to an island about a quarter of a mile from the Point, and
+there remained until Saturday morning, the 29th, when, having a
+favourable wind, we set sail and arrived off the mouth of Berens
+River, and camped on Lobstick Island the following morning, Sunday,
+at half-past nine o'clock.
+
+We remained there until Tuesday, and then moved our camp to the
+Methodist Mission. The next day we went over in one of our boats
+to the Hudson's Bay Company's post, where we met Mr. Flett, the
+officer in charge and received from him the provisions that had
+been previously forwarded and which he had in store, and then
+returned to our camp.
+
+Mr. Flett informed us that the Indians from the Narrows of Berens
+River, he expected would arrive that evening, and on Thursday,
+visited us to say that they had arrived and were then holding a
+council. The same afternoon the Chief and Councillors called upon
+us and desired to know when we would be prepared to meet them, and
+though the 5th was the day appointed, we thought it advisable, as
+all the Indians were then gathered there, and were anxious to
+return to their homes, to appoint the following day, the 4th
+August.
+
+The next morning the Indians came over from where they were
+encamped near the Hudson's Bay post, in York boats; and when we
+learned that they were all in the school-house we proceeded there,
+and met, in addition to the Berens River band, about thirty Indians
+from the Grand Rapids of Berens River. We explained the object of
+our mission, and found the Indians from the Rapids most anxious to
+accept the Queen's bounty and benevolence, some of them had already
+accepted the annuity with the Lac Seule Indians we found, so we
+immediately told them that it was only to those that had not
+previously received money or presents from the Queen, that the
+first part of our mission extended, and with whom it was necessary
+we should first speak. The head man, Num-ak-ow-ah-nuk-wape, then
+said that he was fully prepared, on behalf of all his Indians, to
+accept the same terms as given to the Berens River band, only be
+wanted his reserve where he then lived, at the Grand Rapids; upon
+which we told him that before we could speak further, we must be
+assured by the band that he was their head man, and this the band
+at once did. We then thought it advisable to recommend that they
+should make the Chief of the Berens River band their Chief,
+and make their head man a Councillor to him, and although our
+proposition was not at once received satisfactorily, we ultimately
+prevailed upon them to accept it, and the Chief was at once
+elected. By this means we saved the expenses necessarily incurred
+in maintaining one Chief and two Councillors. We then stated that
+we were prepared to grant them their reserve where they asked for
+it; and having explained the treaty to them, clause by clause, and
+mentioned in the adhesion where the reserve should be, the adhesion
+was duly signed by the Chief and Councillors. The payment of the
+annuity was then gone on with and finished that afternoon at four
+o'clock.
+
+We then distributed the implements, ammunition, twine and
+provisions. When we had finished, the Chief and Councillors came
+forward, and thanked us for all that had been done for them; they
+said they were well pleased with what they had received and desired
+us to inform you of the fact, which we accordingly promised. They
+then returned in the same boats they had come over in: before
+leaving the bank, giving three cheers for the Queen and three for
+the Governor.
+
+We are very much pleased to inform you that the best possible
+feeling appears to exist between the Indians in this region. They
+all appeared anxious to farm and settle down, and we heard that a
+number of houses had been built at Poplar River, and considerable
+clearing done there since the treaty was made with them last year;
+the implements and tools we brought them were therefore most
+acceptable. As these bands live at a considerable distance from
+each other, we would recommend that an extra supply of tools be
+allowed them. We also feel satisfied that the animals promised by
+the treaty might be furnished, as we certainly consider them in a
+position to take care of the same.
+
+As you directed, we informed them that their application for hay
+lands had been forwarded to the Government, and this gave them
+great satisfaction. The following morning, Saturday, August 5th,
+Mr. Reid left for Norway House, and during the afternoon of the
+same day, Mr. Howard sailed for the Stone Fort on the Red River.
+
+Having obtained the adhesion of the Indians at the Dog Head, and at
+Berens River, our duties as Joint Commissioners under your
+instructions ceased....
+
+We were fortunate enough to secure the services of the Rev. Henry
+Cochrane, who kindly acted as interpreter. Being in the Province on
+a visit from his mission at the Pas, and desirous of returning, Mr.
+Howard gave him a passage in his boat, and he rendered us the most
+valuable assistance throughout.
+
+Having thus referred to the different matters connected with our
+mission while acting together, and assuring you that our aim and
+desire was to fulfill it to your entire satisfaction, which we
+trust we have done,
+
+                We have the honor to be, Sir,
+                       Your obedient servants,
+                                    THOS. HOWARD,
+                                    J. LESTOCK REID,
+                                             Commissioners.
+
+
+
+B.
+
+WINNIPEG, October 10th, 1876.
+
+TO THE HONORABLE ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                 Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with your
+instructions, a copy of which I hereunto annex, I proceeded,
+accompanied by Mr. Reid, to the Dog Head and Berens River on Lake
+Winnipeg, and there successfully secured the adhesion of the Island
+and Grand Rapids of Berens River Bands of Indians to Treaty Number
+Five, and, having paid the annuities to the Berens River Indians,
+returned to the Stone Fort. As mentioned in the joint report
+submitted to you by Mr. Reid and myself, I had the greatest
+difficulty in procuring a boat to take me on my mission, and only
+through the kindness of Mr. Flett, of the Hudson's Bay Company, at
+the Stone Fort, was I able to obtain even the loan of one as far as
+Berens River, from where I had to return it....
+
+I left the Stone Fort for the Grand Rapids, on the morning of the
+17th of August, and after a very fast, though rough and dangerous
+passage, reached the mouth of the Saskatchewan river, early on the
+morning of the 26th. I found, on entering the river, that the
+Indians were encamped near its mouth, on the south bank, where
+I landed, and arranged to meet them at noon that day. As the
+provisions were stored at the Hudson's Bay Company's post, about a
+mile and a half up the river, I decided to camp at the foot of the
+road leading across the four-mile Portage, and having done so, and
+in the meantime sent the provisions to the Indian camp, I returned
+there at the time agreed upon.
+
+The band having assembled, I stated to them the object of my
+mission--that I had been directed to pay them the annuity and
+deliver some of the tools and implements granted them by the
+treaty, and also to distribute amongst those that formerly had
+houses and gardens on the north bank of the river, and had moved to
+where they were then living, as stipulated in the treaty, the sum
+of five hundred dollars.
+
+To my surprise, the Chief at once expressed his astonishment at my
+saying that the treaty had been made last year, and said he had
+only a talk then with the Governor preliminary to making the treaty
+this year, and that they were only then prepared to be treated
+with. I explained to the band how I had been present myself when
+it was made, and that I would have it read to them. I accordingly
+requested Mr. Cochrane to do so, explaining it thoroughly; yet, it
+was only after a great deal of talking on their part, during which
+they made most unreasonable demands, and many explanations on my
+part, that the Indians were satisfied that a treaty had been made,
+when they requested me to go on with the payments; at the same time
+a number of them stated that they had been misled by one of the
+counsellors, Joseph Atkinson by name. I then paid the annuity,
+distributed the provisions, tools, implements, etc., and gave the
+Chief a copy of the treaty, and, arranging to meet them again on
+Monday the 28th, I returned to my camp at midnight.
+
+On Monday, I met them as agreed, and at once began and made
+inquiries as to who had houses and gardens on the north bank and
+had moved their houses to the south bank, and I found that all
+those that had formerly lived on the north bank had removed from
+there. I noticed that great feeling existed amongst them all as to
+the division of the five hundred dollars granted. All the band
+congregated round me and the large majority desired that the amount
+should be divided equally between them all, and claimed that every
+one belonging to the band was entitled to participate in the
+division; so I thought it best to leave it to themselves to decide
+how the amount should be distributed, and they only succeeded in
+doing so after a great deal of talking, and, I regret to say,
+quarrelling; but they at last arranged it, and I was requested by
+the Chief and Councillors to divide it amongst the whole band in
+such proportions as I thought right, so I proceeded at once to what
+turned out to be a long and troublesome undertaking; but having as
+I considered made a fair and equitable distribution of the amount,
+I paid the same, had the document witnessed by the Chief and
+Councillors, and only got back to my camp again at midnight. As I
+before said, all the Indians had removed to the south bank of the
+river, but had made no preparations to build, and were merely
+living in tents. Close to the encampment, at the mouth of the
+river, the Church Missionary Society have put up a large building
+to answer the purposes of a church and school-house. Care must be
+taken and strict watch kept over this band. Living as they do on
+the bank of a navigable river, where people are constantly passing,
+they can give great trouble and annoyance, and, I am sorry to say,
+are inclined to do so. Several complaints were made to me while
+there, and I spoke to the Indians regarding them. They promised me
+to abide faithfully by the terms of the treaty henceforth and not
+give any further annoyance.
+
+While occupied paying the Indians there, my crew were engaged in
+taking my boat and supplies across the Portage. They left the camp
+early on Monday morning, and with the assistance kindly rendered
+them by Mr. Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company, succeeded in
+reaching the north end of the Portage on Tuesday evening. That same
+afternoon I walked over the four-mile Portage and found there a
+number of buildings belonging to the Hudson's Bay Company. To this
+point the Saskatchewan River steamer Northcote descends and
+receives the supplies for the different posts belonging to the
+Company to the West and North-West.
+
+On Wednesday morning, the 30th, I left for the Pas. From the Grand
+Rapids to the Narrows, before entering Cedar Lake, a distance of
+eighteen or twenty miles, a continuous rapid extends, and it is
+only by tracking and poling simultaneously that you are at all able
+to ascend the river. The first day I made only nine miles on my way
+and camped at the Demi Charge, and it was late in the evening on
+the second day when I reached Cedar Lake. This lake is about
+thirty-five miles in length and is very shallow and dangerous in
+stormy weather. I was fortunate enough to have very calm weather,
+and, therefore, crossed it without any delay and entered the
+Saskatchewan again at the Che-ma-wa-win or "Seining place," early
+on Saturday morning, September 2nd. Noticing a large encampment of
+Indians there, I landed and found they were part of the Moose Lake
+band. They desired that I should treat with them where they were,
+and not bring them to the Pas, but upon my telling them that I
+could only treat with them at the appointed place of meeting, they
+readily assented to follow me up, and having given them some
+provisions to take them there, and secured the services of one of
+them to act as guide, I again started on my journey.
+
+I was then three days and two nights ascending the river, and on
+Tuesday morning, the 5th September, the day appointed for me to
+meet the Indians, I arrived at the Pas or Devon Mission, on my way
+up having been passed by the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win.
+
+On entering the river after leaving Cedar Lake the whole aspect of
+the country changes, and from there to the Pas, and, I understand,
+for fully one hundred miles above it, nothing but marsh can be
+seen; so much so that it was difficult along the bank of the river
+to find a spot dry enough to camp upon, and I was, consequently,
+obliged to eat and sleep in my boat. The dreariness of this voyage
+can hardly be realized, and it was with feelings of delight that I
+landed at the Mission at the Pas where the Rev. Mr. Cochrane
+received me.
+
+Mr. Cochrane had accompanied me from the Stone Fort and had been in
+my boat up to the night before I arrived, when, meeting some
+Indians that were on the look-out for us, he returned with them in
+their canoe and reached his home shortly before I arrived.
+
+The Pas or Devon Mission is situated on the south bank of the
+Saskatchewan, distant, I should say, one hundred and forty miles
+from Grand Rapids. The Church Missionary Society have a very nice
+church, school-house and parsonage there; and the Hudson's Bay
+Company one of their posts. There are also a large number of houses
+belonging to the Indians of the place; and on the other bank the
+firm of Kew, Stobart & Co., have erected a store for trading
+purposes. There are also several dwelling-houses on the north bank.
+Altogether, the appearance of the place, on my arrival, was most
+prepossessing. The banks were covered with Indians with their
+canoes, and immediately the boat rounded the point below the
+Mission and came in view a salute was fired, the like of which, I
+was subsequently told, had never been heard in the "Ratty Country".
+
+Having landed at the Mission, Mr. Cochrane informed me that he had,
+as I requested, summoned the Indians to meet in the school-house at
+three o'clock that afternoon, and when the hour arrived I proceeded
+there and found upwards of five hundred Indians gathered. I stated
+the object of my mission to them, and was at once assured of their
+desire to accept of, and their gratitude for, the Queen's bounty
+and benevolence.
+
+I found that the Pas and Cumberland bands of Indians had acknowledged
+Chiefs, but that the Moose Lake band had none, owing to a division
+amongst them. It appeared that the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win
+desired to be a distinct band and have their reserves where I had
+seen them at the entrance of the river from Cedar Lake; but noticing,
+on my way up, the unfitness of the locality for a reserve, and having
+learned that at Moose Lake, where part of the band desired to live,
+a most suitable locality could be had, I had decided before meeting
+them upon the course I should take, which was, not to encourage the
+division in the band, and allow only one Chief; and this I did, and
+succeeded, without much trouble, in getting the band to unite. I then
+requested all the Indians to meet in council and select their Chief
+and head men, and be prepared the following morning to present them
+to me, when I would be ready to speak to them.
+
+The next morning at eleven o'clock I met them and found they had
+done as I requested, and having been presented to the Chiefs and
+Councillors I proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty that I
+desired to receive their adhesion to. The Chiefs immediately stated
+that they wanted to make a treaty of their own, and it was only
+after great difficulty that I could make them understand that in
+reality it was not a new treaty they were about to make.
+
+They had heard of the terms granted the Indians at Carlton, and
+this acted most prejudicially at one time against the successful
+carrying out of my mission; but I at last made them understand the
+difference between their position and the Plain Indians, by
+pointing out that the land they would surrender would be useless to
+the Queen, while what the Plain Indians gave up would be of value
+to her for homes for her white children. They then agreed to accept
+the terms offered if I would agree to give them reserves where they
+desired; and to their demands I patiently listened, and having at
+last come to a satisfactory understanding I adjourned the meeting
+to the following day.
+
+Before proceeding further, I would draw your attention to the
+localities I granted for reserves, subject to the approval of the
+Government, and beg to inform you that I made every inquiry as to
+the extent of farming land in each locality mentioned.
+
+At the Narrows, at Moose Lake, there is considerable good land, and
+a suitable place for a reserve can be had for the Moose Lake band.
+
+For the Pas and Cumberland Indians I had to mention several
+localities. At the Pas all the land obtainable is now cultivated,
+and consists of a vegetable garden and one field attached to the
+Mission, and a few patches of potatoes here and there. A short
+distance from the river the marsh begins, and extends to the south
+for miles; and the same thing occurs to the north. In fact, on both
+banks of the river at this point, and from the Che-ma-wa-win up to
+it, one hundred and fifty acres of land fit for cultivation cannot
+be found; and about Cumberland the country in every respect is
+similar.
+
+The following day, Thursday the 7th, I met the Indians at three
+p.m., and had the adhesion read to them and signed. I then
+presented the medals and clothing to the Chiefs and Councillors,
+with which they were greatly pleased, and having congratulated them
+upon wearing the Queen's uniform, and having in return been
+heartily thanked by them for what had been done, I proceeded to pay
+them, and continued to do so up to seven o'clock, when the funds at
+my disposal being exhausted, I directed them to meet me again the
+following morning at nine o'clock, which they did, and I completed
+the payments the same evening at five o'clock. I then distributed
+the balance of provisions and the ammunition and twine. The
+implements and tools I had been unable to bring from Grand Rapids,
+my boat being very heavily laden; but Mr. Belanger, of the Hudson's
+Bay Company, kindly promised to have them brought up free of charge
+in a boat that was going to the Grand Rapids in a few days; I
+therefore gave the Chief of the Pas band an order for the chest of
+tools and the implements.
+
+The following day, Saturday, having again seen all the Chiefs and
+Councillors and received their thanks, and after many expressions
+of gratitude from the Indians gathered, I left the Pas at half-past
+two o'clock p.m., and with rowing and floating alternately during
+the afternoon and night, reached the Che-ma-wa-win on Sunday
+evening; crossed Cedar Lake on Monday, and landed at the head of
+Grand Rapids on Tuesday morning. I then ran the rapids and hoisted
+the sail at the mouth of the river at two p.m., having called upon
+Mr. Matheson and seen the Chief of the Indians there on my way
+down. I then made all haste to return here, but, owing to contrary
+winds, only succeeded in reaching the Stone Fort on the 20th
+September, yet, having made a very quick trip, unprecedented in
+fact, and in carrying out the mission entrusted to me, travelled in
+an open boat, thirteen hundred miles.
+
+I would now inform you that three out of the four bands of Indians
+I met on the Saskatchewan, viz., the Grand Rapids, Pas and
+Cumberland, are in a position to receive at once from the
+Government the grant allowed for the maintenance of schools of
+instruction; at the Grand Rapids a huge school-house is by this
+time entirely completed; and at the Pas and Cumberland, schools,
+under the charge of the Church Missionary Society, have been in
+existence some years. The Indians belonging to the bands I have
+named desired that the assistance promised should be given as soon
+as possible.
+
+I would now mention the very valuable services rendered the
+Government by the Rev. Mr. Cochrane, who acted as interpreter at
+the Dog Head, Berens River, Grand Rapids and the Pas, and who was
+at all times ready to give his advice and assistance; as well as by
+Mr. A. M. Muckle, who accompanied me and assisted in making the
+payments; and by Mr. Nursey, who took charge of the boat with
+supplies for the Pas. To Mr. Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company,
+Grand Rapids, and Mr. Belanger, of Cumberland House, I am deeply
+indebted, and take this opportunity of tendering these gentlemen my
+sincere thanks for the assistance rendered me and the many
+kindnesses I received from them. I enclose herewith the pay-sheet
+of the different bands I paid, a statement of the cash expenditure,
+and statements shewing quantities of provisions, implements, etc.,
+received and how distributed, with a statement of clothing, medals,
+etc., given to the Chiefs and Councillors, and a report I received
+from Mr. Bedson.
+
+And, trusting that the manner in which I have carried out the
+mission entrusted to my care, may meet with your approval,
+
+                  I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                            Your obedient servant,
+                                   THOMAS HOWARD,
+                                         Commissioner.
+
+
+
+FORT GARRY, July 14th, 1876.
+
+TO THE HON. THOS. HOWARD AND J. LESTOCK REID, ESQ.
+
+Dear sirs,--Under authority from the Minister of the Interior, I
+have to request you to proceed to Lake Winnipeg for the purpose
+of--on behalf of the Privy Council of Canada--securing the adhesion
+to Treaty Number Five of the Indians who have not yet been dealt
+with, and to make the necessary payments to the others.
+
+1st. You will, if possible, together proceed to or meet at the
+following places, being there on the days named, viz.: Dog Head
+Point, 25th July, and Berens River on the 5th August.
+
+2nd. Mr. Howard will then proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan,
+so as to reach there on the 25th of August, and then arrive at the
+Pas on the 5th of September.
+
+3rd. Mr. Reid will proceed from Berens River to Norway House, to
+arrive there on or before the 25th of August.
+
+4th. You or either of you will secure the adhesion of the Island
+Indians to the treaty after the form annexed, and will request them
+to select a Chief and three Councillors, and will be authorized to
+promise them a reserve of one hundred and sixty acres to each
+family of five, or that proportion for larger or smaller families,
+to be selected for them by the person chosen for that end by the
+Privy Council with their approval.
+
+5th. You or either of you will obtain the adhesion of the Indians
+of the Grand Rapids of Berens River to the treaty according to the
+form annexed. You will ask them to select a Chief and three
+Councillors. A similar provision will be made as to a reserve, but
+if necessary you can fix the locality at the Sandy Narrows above
+the rapids on the Berens River, reserving free navigation and
+access to the shores to all Her Majesty's subjects.
+
+6th. Mr. Reid will pay the Norway House and Cross Lake Indians, and
+will ascertain the intentions of the Norway House Indians as to the
+time of their removal to Fisher River, of which I am unadvised.
+
+7th. Mr. Howard will pay the Indians at the mouth of the
+Saskatchewan, and if the Indians have removed their houses, as
+agreed by the treaty, will pay them five hundred dollars, but if
+not and some have removed, will pay such their proportionate share
+of the five hundred dollars.
+
+8th. You will distribute the implements, tools, etc. sent among the
+Indians, as also the ammunition and twine. Cattle cannot be given
+till the Indians are sufficiently settled on the reserves to make
+it seem that they will be cared for. You will report any cases
+where you find this to be the case, for future action.
+
+9th. You will inform the Berens River Indians that their application
+for a hay reserve has been forwarded to the Privy Council by me, and
+that they will receive a reply hereafter.
+
+10th. Mr. Howard will secure the adhesion of the Indians at the
+Pas to the treaty providing that reserves of one hundred and sixty
+acres to each family of five will be granted at places selected for
+them by an officer of the Privy Council, with their approval; but
+it will probably be necessary to give them a reserve at the Pas
+where they reside, reserving carefully free navigation and access
+to the shores. As the extent of land there is very narrow, it may
+be desirable to indicate localities where farming reserves will be
+granted subject to the approval of the Privy Council.
+
+11th. The Moose Lake Indians are a distinct band, and will probably
+desire the recognition of two separate Chiefs and the allotment of
+separate reserves to them.
+
+12th. The Cumberland House Indians are another band, but very much
+scattered; the question of a reserve will have to be considered,
+and, in connection with it, as in other cases, respect for actual,
+bona fide, substantial improvements, and for the rights of
+settlers.
+
+13th. In all cases the places indicated for reserves to be subject
+to Her Majesty's approval in Council, and free navigation and
+access to the shores to be reserved.
+
+14th. In the case of new adhesions to the treaty, which are in fact
+new treaties, only five dollars is to be paid, but persons
+belonging to bands treated with last year are to receive last
+year's payment, if then absent, if necessary.
+
+15th. You will each take with you a suitable person, to be approved
+of by me, to assist you in the payment.
+
+             I have the honor to be,
+                      Your obedient servant,
+                             ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                  Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+C.
+
+WINNIPEG, October 14th 1876.
+
+TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                      Lieut.-Governor.
+
+Sir,--Referring to your letter of instructions under date of the
+14th of July, relative to the payment of the Norway House and Cross
+Lake bands of Indians, I have the honor to submit the following
+report:--
+
+Having, in co-operation with the Hon. Thomas Howard, paid the
+Indians of Berens River and successfully secured the adhesion of
+the Island and Upper Berens River bands of Indians to Treaty Number
+Five, on the morning of Saturday, the 5th of August, I left for
+Norway House, which place, owing to stormy weather and strong head
+winds, I did not succeed in reaching until the morning of the 12th.
+On the way I was met by Indians proceeding to inspect their reserve
+at Fisher's River, who brought a letter from the Chiefs of Norway
+House and Cross Lake, stating that the Indians were all assembled,
+and requesting to be paid at the earliest possible date.
+
+On reaching this place, Norway House, after having camp pitched at
+a short distance from the fort, I dispatched messengers to the
+several camps and villages, notifying the Indians of my arrival and
+desiring the Chiefs to meet me on the Monday morning following. On
+Sunday evening divine service was held within the fort by the Rev.
+Mr. Ruttan, Wesleyan missionary, at which a large number of Indians
+were present.
+
+On Monday morning, the Chiefs and most of the Indians of both bands
+having assembled at my camp, the Cross Lake band requested to be
+paid there, and the Norway House Chief asked that his people might
+he paid in the school-house in their village about two miles from
+the fort. On hearing that all the Indians that could come were
+assembled, I consented to pay them where they desired, and told the
+Cross Lake Chief to bring his people at noon to receive their
+gratuities, the payment which was satisfactorily completed the same
+day.
+
+The next day I crossed over to the Indian village and paid the
+Norway House bands their annuities....
+
+The following morning, Wednesday, August 16th, the Chiefs and
+Indians of the two bands having assembled at my camp, I distributed
+the provisions implements, &c., which were received with the
+greatest degree of gratification and satisfaction.
+
+On my inquiring of the Chief of Norway House when his band would be
+prepared to remove to their reserve at the Fisher River, he
+informed me that he had sent two of his people to that locality to
+report on the same, and that he could not say anything definite on
+the matter until their return. I might here state that, on my way
+back to Winnipeg I met these men returning from Fisher's River, who
+expressed themselves as highly pleased with the proposed location,
+and that the band in all probability would remove there in the
+spring.
+
+Whilst at Norway House I was waited upon by a Chief and four
+Councillors from the vicinity of Oxford House, who were anxious to
+know if the same bounties would be extended to them as were being
+extended to their brethren of Norway House and Cross Lake, and
+also whether they could obtain a reserve on Lake Winnipeg, as
+the country in which they were living was totally unfit for
+cultivation, and that they had the greatest difficulty in procuring
+a livelihood. I told them that I had no idea what were the
+intentions of the Government with regard to those Indians living
+north of the present Treaty, but that I would make known their
+requests to Your Excellency, and that they would be duly notified
+of any action the Government might take in the matter.
+
+I left Norway House on my return trip, on the morning of the 18th,
+arriving at Winnipeg on the afternoon of Saturday the 26th, having
+that morning paid my boat's crew off at Selkirk.
+
+I would here mention that previous to my departure from Norway
+House there was a very hearty and apparently sincere expression of
+gratitude, on the part of all the Indians present, for the
+liberality extended to them, and a general and spoken wish that
+their thanks be conveyed to the Queen's Representative in this
+Province for his kind interest in their welfare.
+
+I cannot conclude without bearing testimony to the kindness of Mr.
+Ross, Hudson's Bay Company's Factor, and the Rev. Mr. Ruttan,
+Wesleyan missionary, for services rendered during the few days
+occupied in my making the payments at Norway House.
+
+I enclose herewith statement of expenditure, &c., &c., with
+vouchers attached.
+
+           I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                       Your obedient servant,
+                                  J. LESTOCK REID,
+                                         Commissioner.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT
+
+
+The treaties made at Forts Carlton and Pitt in the year 1876, were
+of a very important character.
+
+The great region covered by them, abutting on the areas included in
+Treaties Numbers Three and Four, embracing an area of approximately
+120,000 square miles, contains a vast extent of fertile territory
+and is the home of the Cree nation. The Crees had, very early after
+the annexation of the North-West Territories to Canada, desired a
+treaty of alliance with the Government. So far back as the year
+1871, Mr. Simpson, the Indian Commissioner, addressing the
+Secretary of State in a despatch of date, the 3rd November, 1871,
+used the following language:
+
+"I desire also to call the attention of His Excellency to the state
+of affairs in the Indian country on the Saskatchewan. The
+intelligence that Her Majesty is treating with the Chippewa Indians
+has already reached the ears of the Cree and Blackfeet tribes. In
+the neighborhood of Fort Edmonton, on the Saskatchewan, there is a
+rapidly increasing population of miners and other white people, and
+it is the opinion of Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer in charge of
+the Saskatchewan District, that a treaty with the Indians of that
+country, or at least an assurance during the coming year that a
+treaty will shortly be made, is essential to the peace, if not the
+actual retention, of the country. I would refer His Excellency, on
+this subject, to the report of Lieut. Butler, and to the enclosed
+memoranda of Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer above alluded to."
+
+He also enclosed an extract of a letter from Mr. Christie, then
+Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and subsequently one of
+the Treaty Commissioners, in which, he forwarded the messages of
+the Cree Chiefs to Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, "our Great Mother's
+representative at Fort Garry, Red River Settlement." This extract
+and messages are as follows.
+
+EDMONTON HOUSE, 13th April, 1871.
+
+On the 13th instant (April) I had a visit from the Cree Chiefs,
+representing the Plain Crees from this to Carlton, accompanied by
+a few followers.
+
+The object of their visit was to ascertain whether their lands
+had been sold or not, and what was the intention of the Canadian
+Government in relation to them. They referred to the epidemic
+that had raged throughout the past summer, and the subsequent
+starvation, the poverty of their country, the visible diminution
+of the buffalo, their sole support, ending by requesting certain
+presents at once, and that I should lay their case before Her
+Majesty's representative at Fort Garry. Many stories have reached
+these Indians through various channels, ever since the transfer of
+the North-West Territories to the Dominion of Canada, and they were
+most anxious to hear from myself what had taken place.
+
+I told them that the Canadian Government had as yet made no
+application for their lands or hunting grounds, and when anything
+was required of them, most likely Commissioners would be sent
+beforehand to treat with them, and that until then they should
+remain quiet and live at peace with all men. I further stated that
+Canada, in her treaties with Indians, heretofore, had dealt most
+liberally with them, and that they were now in settled houses and
+well off, and that I had no doubt in settling with them the same
+liberal policy would be followed.
+
+As I was aware that they had heard many exaggerated stories about
+the troops in Red River, I took the opportunity of telling them why
+troops had been sent, and if Her Majesty sent troops to the
+Saskatchewan, it was as much for the protection of the red as the
+white man, and that they would be for the maintenance of law and
+order.
+
+They were highly satisfied with the explanations offered, and said
+they would welcome civilization. As their demands were complied
+with, and presents given to them, their immediate followers, and
+for the young men left in camp, they departed well pleased for the
+present tune, with fair promises for the future. At a subsequent
+interview with the Chiefs alone, they requested that I should write
+down their words, or messages to their Great Master in Red River. I
+accordingly did so, and have transmitted the messages as delivered.
+Copies of the proclamation issued, prohibiting the traffic in
+spirituous liquors to Indians or others, and the use of strychnine
+in the destruction of animal life, have been received, and due
+publicity given to them. But without any power to enforce these
+laws, it is almost useless to publish them here; and I take this
+opportunity of most earnestly soliciting, on behalf of the
+Company's servants, and settlers in this district, that protection
+be afforded to life and property here as soon as possible, and that
+Commissioners be sent to speak with the Indians on behalf of the
+Canadian Government.
+
+MEMORANDA:
+
+Had I not complied with the demands of the Indians--giving them
+some little presents--and otherwise satisfied them, I have no doubt
+that they would have proceeded to acts of violence, and once that
+had commenced, there would have been the beginning of an Indian
+war, which it is difficult to say when it would have ended.
+
+The buffalo will soon be exterminated, and when starvation comes,
+these Plain Indian tribes will fall back on the Hudson's Bay Forts
+and settlements for relief and assistance. If not complied with, or
+no steps taken to make some provision for them, they will most
+assuredly help themselves; and there being no force or any law up
+there to protect the settlers, they must either quietly submit to
+be pillaged, or lose their lives in the defence of their families
+and property, against such fearful odds that will leave no hope for
+their side.
+
+Gold may be discovered in paying quantities, any day, on the
+eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains. We have, in Montana, and in
+the mining settlements close to our boundary line, a large mixed
+frontier population, who are now only waiting and watching to hear
+of gold discoveries to rush into the Saskatchewan, and, without any
+form of Government or established laws up there, or force to
+protect whites or Indians, it is very plain what will be the
+result.
+
+I think that the establishment of law and order in the Saskatchewan
+District, as early as possible, is of most vital importance to the
+future of the country and the interest of Canada, and also the
+making of some treaty or settlement with the Indians who inhabit
+the Saskatchewan District.
+
+                W. J. CHRISTIE, Chief Factor,
+                        In charge of Saskatchewan District,
+                                        Hudson's Bay Company.
+
+
+
+Messages from the Cree Chiefs of the Plains, Saskatchewan, to His
+Excellency Governor Archibald, our Great Mother's representative at
+Fort Garry, Red River Settlement.
+
+1. The Chief Sweet Grass, The Chief of the country.
+
+GREAT FATHER,--I shake hands with you, and bid you welcome. We
+heard our lands were sold and we did not like it; we don't want to
+sell our lands; it is our property, and no one has a right to sell
+them.
+
+Our country is getting ruined of fur-bearing animals, hitherto our
+sole support, and now we are poor and want help--we want you to
+pity us. We want cattle, tools, agricultural implements, and
+assistance in everything when we come to settle--our country is no
+longer able to support us.
+
+Make provision for us against years of starvation. We have had
+great starvation the past winter, and the small-pox took away many
+of our people, the old, young, and children.
+
+We want you to stop the Americans from coming to trade on our
+lands, and giving firewater, ammunition and arms to our enemies the
+Blackfeet.
+
+We made a peace this winter with the Blackfeet. Our young men are
+foolish, it may not last long.
+
+We invite you to come and see us and to speak with us. If you can't
+come yourself, send some one in your place.
+
+We send these words by our Master, Mr. Christie, in whom we have
+every confidence.--That is all.
+
+2. Ki-he-win, The Eagle.
+
+GREAT FATHER,--Let us be friendly. We never shed any white man's
+blood, and have always been friendly with the whites, and want
+workmen, carpenters and farmers to assist us when we settle. I want
+all my brother, Sweet Grass, asks. That is all.
+
+3. The Little Hunter.
+
+You, my brother, the Great Chief in Red River, treat me as a
+brother, that is, as a Great Chief.
+
+4. Kis-ki-on, or Short Tail.
+
+My brother, that is coming close, I look upon you, as if I saw you;
+I want you to pity me, and I want help to cultivate the ground for
+myself and descendants. Come and see us.
+
+
+
+The North-West Council, as already elsewhere stated, had urged
+the making of treaties with these Indians, and the necessity
+of doing so, was also impressed upon the Privy Council, by the
+Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and Col. French,
+then in command of the Mounted Police therein. The Minister of the
+Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in his Report for the year 1876,
+thus alluded to this subject:
+
+"Official reports received last year from His Honor Governor Morris
+and Colonel French, the officer then in command of the Mounted
+Police Force, and from other parties, showed that a feeling of
+discontent and uneasiness prevailed very generally amongst the
+Assiniboines and Crees lying in the unceded territory between the
+Saskatchewan and the Rocky Mountains. This state of feeling, which
+had prevailed amongst these Indians for some years past, had been
+increased by the presence, last summer, in their territory of the
+parties engaged in the construction of the telegraph line, and
+in the survey of the Pacific Railway line, and also of a party
+belonging to the Geological Survey. To allay this state of feeling,
+and to prevent the threatened hostility of the Indian tribes to the
+parties then employed by the Government, His Honor Governor Morris
+requested and obtained authority to despatch a messenger to convey
+to these Indians the assurance that Commissioners would be sent
+this summer, to negotiate a treaty with them, as had already been
+done with their brethren further east.
+
+"The Rev. George McDougall, who had been resident as a missionary
+amongst these Indians for upwards of fourteen years, and who
+possessed great influence over them, was selected by His Honor to
+convey this intelligence to the Indians, a task which he performed
+with great fidelity and success: being able to report on his return
+that although he found the feeling of discontent had been very
+general among the Indian tribes, he had been enabled entirely to
+remove it by his assurance of the proposed negotiations during the
+coming year.
+
+"For the purpose of negotiating this treaty with the Indians, Your
+Excellency availed yourself of the services of His Honor Governor
+Morris, who had been formerly employed in negotiating Treaties
+Numbers Three, Four and Five. With him were associated the Hon.
+James McKay and W. J. Christie, Esq., both of whom had had
+considerable experience in such work, and possessed moreover an
+intimate acquaintance with the Indians of the Saskatchewan, their
+wants, habits and dialects."
+
+With reference to the Rev. George McDougall, [Footnote: This
+faithful missionary came to an untimely death on the plains during
+the succeeding winter. Having missed his way to his camp, he was
+found lying dead on the snow, and there in the lonely wilds was
+closed a most useful career.] I may here state, that when the
+application was made to him, to visit the Indians of the Plains, in
+the Sask atchewan Valley, he was on his way, with his family, to his
+distant mission, among the Assiniboines, near the Rocky Mountains,
+after a brief sojourn in the Province of Ontario, but on the
+request being made to him, to explain to the Indians the intentions
+of the Government, he at once undertook the duty, and leaving
+his family to follow him, went upon the long journey, which his
+mission involved, carrying with him a letter missive from the
+Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, promising the
+Indians, that Commissioners would visit them during the ensuing
+summer, to confer with them as to a treaty. The result of his
+tour, and of the tidings which he bore was very gratifying, as the
+Indians were at once tranquilized, and awaited in full confidence,
+the coming of the Commissioners. The way in which he discharged his
+important duties and the success which followed his exertions, will
+be best set forth by giving place to his Report, addressed to the
+Lieutenant-Governor, of the results of his arduous mission:
+
+                 MORLEYVILLE, BOW RIVER, ROCKY MOUNTAINS,
+                                     October 23rd, 1875.
+
+TO HIS HONOR LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR MORRIS.
+
+Sir,--In accordance with my instructions, I proceeded with as
+little delay as possible to Carlton, in the neighborhood of which
+place I met with forty tents of Crees. From these I ascertained
+that the work I had undertaken would be much more arduous than I
+had expected, and that the principal camps would be found on the
+south branch of the Saskatchewan and Red Deer Rivers. I was also
+informed by these Indians that the Crees and Plain Assiniboines
+were united on two points: 1st. That they would not receive any
+presents from Government until a definite time for treaty was
+stated. 2nd. Though they deplored the necessity of resorting to
+extreme measures, yet they were unanimous in their determination
+to oppose the running of lines, or the making of roads through
+their country, until a settlement between the Government and them
+had been effected. I was further informed that the danger of a
+collision with the whites was likely to arise from the officious
+conduct of minor Chiefs who were anxious to make themselves
+conspicuous, the principal men of the large camps being much more
+moderate in their demands. Believing this to be the fact, I
+revolved to visit every camp and read them your message, and in
+order that your Honor may form a correct judgment of their
+disposition towards the Government, I will give you a synopsis of
+their speeches after the message was read. Mistahwahsis, head Chief
+of the Carlton Indians, addressing the principal Chief of the
+Assiniboines and addressing me, said: "That is just it, that is all
+we wanted." The Assiniboines addressing me, said: "My heart is full
+of gratitude, foolish men have told us that the Great Chief would
+send his young men to our country until they outnumbered us, and
+that then he would laugh at us, but this letter assures us that the
+Great Chief will act justly toward us."
+
+Beardy, or the Hairy Man, Chief of the Willow Indians, said: "If I
+had heard these words spoken by the Great Queen I could not have
+believed them with more implicit faith than I do now." The Sweet
+Grass was absent from camp when I reached the Plain Crees, but
+his son and the principal men of the tribe requested me to convey
+to the Great Chief, at Red River, their thanks for the presents
+received, and they expressed the greatest loyalty to the government.
+In a word, I found the Crees reasonable in their demands, and
+anxious to live in peace with the white men. I found the Big Bear,
+a Saulteaux, trying to take the lead in their council. He formerly
+lived at Jack Fish Lake, and for years has been regarded as a
+troublesome fellow. In his speech he said: "We want none of the
+Queen's presents; when we set a fox-trap we scatter pieces of meat
+all round, but when the fox gets into the trap we knock him on the
+head; we want no bait, let your Chiefs come like men and talk to
+us." These Saulteaux are the mischief-makers through all this
+western country, and some of them are shrewd men.
+
+A few weeks since, a land speculator wished to take a claim at the
+crossing on Battle River and asked the consent of the Indians, one
+of my Saulteaux friends sprang to his feet, and pointing to the
+east, said: "Do you see that great white man (the Government)
+coming?" "No," said the speculator. "I do," said the Indian, "and I
+hear the tramp of the multitude behind him, and when he comes you
+can drop in behind him and take up all the land claims you want;
+but until then I caution you to put up no stakes in our country."
+It was very fortunate for me that Big Bear and his party were a
+very small minority in camp. The Crees said they would have driven
+them out of camp long ago, but were afraid of their medicines, as
+they are noted conjurers.
+
+The topics generally discussed at their council and which will be
+brought before the Commissioner are as follows in their own
+language. "Tell the Great Chief that we are glad the traders are
+prohibited bringing spirits into our country; when we see it we
+want to drink it, and it destroys us; when we do not see it we do
+not think about it. Ask for us a strong law, prohibiting the free
+use of poison (strychnine). It has almost exterminated the animals
+of our country, and often makes us bad friends with our white
+neighbors. We further request, that a law be made, equally
+applicable to the Half-breed and Indian, punishing all parties who
+set fire to our forest or plain. Not many years ago we attributed a
+prairie fire to the malevolence of an enemy, now every one is
+reckless in the use of fire, and every year large numbers of
+valuable animals and birds perish in consequence. We would farther
+ask that our chiefships be established by the Government. Of late
+years almost every trader sets up his own Chief and the result is
+we are broken up into little parties, and our best men are no
+longer respected." I will state in connection with this, some of
+the false reports I had to combat in passing through this country,
+all calculated to agitate the native mind. In the neighborhood of
+Carlton an interested party went to considerable trouble to inform
+the Willow Indians that I had $3,000 for each band, as a present
+from the Government, and nothing in my long journey gave me greater
+satisfaction than the manner in which these Indians received my
+explanation of the contents of my letter of instructions. At the
+Buffalo Lake I found both Indians and Half-breeds greatly agitated.
+A gentlemen passing through their country had told them that the
+Mounted Police had received orders to prevent all parties killing
+buffalo or other animals, except during three months in the year,
+and these are only samples of the false statements made by parties
+who would rejoice to witness a conflict of races.
+
+That your Honor's message was most timely, these are ample proofs.
+
+A report will have reached you before this time that parties have
+been turned back by the Indians, and that a train containing
+supplies for the telegraph contractors, when west of Fort Pitt,
+were met by three Indians and ordered to return. Now after
+carefully investigating the matter and listening to the statements
+of all parties concerned, my opinion is, that an old traveller
+amongst Indians would have regarded the whole affair as too trivial
+to be noticed. I have not met with a Chief who would bear with the
+responsibility of the act....
+
+Personally I am indebted both to the missionaries, and the Hudson's
+Bay Company's officials for their assistance at the Indian
+councils.
+
+Believing it would be satisfactory to your Honor and of service to
+the Commissioners, I have kept the number of all the tents visited
+and the names of the places where I met the Indians. [Footnote: The
+number of Indians, as estimated by Mr. McDougall, as being visited
+by him, was 3,976.]
+
+By reckoning eight persons to each tent, we will have a very close
+approximate to the number of Indians to be treated with at Carlton,
+and Fort Pitt. There may have been a few tents in the forest, and I
+have heard there are a few Crees at Lesser Slave Lake and Lac la
+Biche, but the number cannot exceed twenty tents.
+
+All of which is respectfully submitted.
+
+G. McDOUGALL.
+
+The Commissioners, in the discharge of their task, had to travel
+through the prairie district in going to their destination and
+returning to Winnipeg, a distance of over 1,800 miles. They
+first met the Indians in the vicinity of Fort Carlton, on the
+Saskatchewan, in the month of August, 1876, and eventually
+succeeded on the 23rd day of that month, in effecting a treaty with
+the Plain and Wood Crees, and on the 28th of the same month with
+the tribe of Willow Crees. The negotiations were difficult and
+protracted. The Hon. David Mills, then Minister of the Interior,
+in his Annual Report thus characterizes them:--"In view of the
+temper of the Indians of the Saskatchewan, during the past year,
+and of the extravagant demands which they were induced to prefer
+on certain points, it needed all the temper, tact, judgment and
+discretion, of which the Commissioners were possessed, to bring
+the negotiations to a satisfactory issue." The difficulties were
+encountered chiefly at Carlton: The main body of the Crees were
+honestly disposed to treat, and their head Chiefs, Mistowasis and
+Ah-tuk-uh-koop, shewed sound judgment, and an earnest desire to
+come to an understanding.
+
+They were embarrassed, however, by the action of the Willow Crees,
+who, under the guidance of one of their Chiefs, Beardy, interposed
+every obstacle to the progress of the treaty, and refused to attend
+the Council, unless it was held at the top of a hill some miles
+off, where the Chief pretended it had been revealed to him in a
+vision that the treaty was to be made. The Willow Crees were,
+moreover, under the influence of a wandering band of Saulteaux,
+the chief portion of whom resided within the limits of the other
+treaties, and who were disposed to be troublesome. Before the
+arrival of the Commissioners, the Saulteaux conceived the idea of
+forming a combination of the French Half-breeds, the Crees, and
+themselves, to prevent the crossing of the Saskatchewan by the
+Lieutenant-Governor, and his entrance into the Indian territories.
+They made the proposal first to the French Half-breeds, who
+declined to undertake it, and then to the Crees, who listened to it
+in silence. One of them at length arose, and pointing to the River
+Saskatchewan, said, "Can you stop the flow of that river?" The
+answer was, "No," and the rejoinder was "No more can you stop the
+progress of the Queen's Chief." When the Commissioners arrived at
+the Saskatchewan, a messenger from the Crees met them, proffering a
+safe convoy, but it was not needed. About a hundred traders' carts
+were assembled at the crossing, and Kissowayis, a native Indian
+trader, had the right of passage, which he at once waived, in
+favor of Messrs. Christie and Morris, the Commissioners. The other
+Commissioner, Mr. McKay, met them at Duck Lake next day, having
+proceeded by another route, and there they encountered Chief
+Beardy, who at once asked the Lieutenant-Governor to make the
+treaty at the hill, near the lake. On his guard, however, he
+replied, that he would meet the Cree nation wherever they desired,
+but must first go on and see them at Carlton, as he had appointed.
+An escort of Mounted Police also met the Commissioners at Duck
+Lake, having been sent from Carlton, in consequence of the
+information given by the Crees of the threatened interference
+with their progress. After several days' delay the Commissioners
+were obliged to meet the Crees without the Willow Crees. But after
+the conference had opened, the Beardy sent a message asking to
+be informed of the terms the Commissioners intended to offer in
+advance. The reply was that the messenger could sit with the other
+Indians, and report to his Chief what he heard, as it was his own
+fault that the Chief was not there to take part in the proceedings.
+The negotiations then went on quietly and deliberately, the
+Commissioners giving the Indians all the time they desired. The
+Indians were apprehensive of their future. They saw the food
+supply, the buffalo, passing away, and they were anxious and
+distressed. They knew the large terms granted to their Indians by
+the United States, but they had confidence in their Great Mother,
+the Queen, and her benevolence.
+
+They desired to be fed. Small-pox had destroyed them by hundreds
+a few years before, and they dreaded pestilence and famine.
+
+Eventually the Commissioners made them an offer. They asked this
+to be reduced to writing, which was done, and they asked time to
+consider it, which was of course granted. When the conference
+resumed, they presented a written counter-proposal. This the
+Commissioners considered, and gave full and definite answers of
+acceptance or refusal to each demand, which replies were carefully
+interpreted, two of the Commissioners, Messrs. Christie and McKay,
+being familiar with the Cree tongue, watching how the answers were
+rendered, and correcting when necessary. The food question, was
+disposed of by a promise, that in the event of a National famine or
+pestilence such aid as the Crown saw fit would be extended to them,
+and that for three years after they settled on their reserves,
+provisions to the extent of $1,000 per annum would be granted them
+during seed-time.
+
+The other terms were analogous to those of the previous treaties.
+The Crees accepted the revised proposals. The treaty was
+interpreted to them carefully, and was then signed, and the payment
+made in accordance therewith. After the conclusion of the treaty,
+the Commissioners were unwilling that the Willow Crees should
+remain out of the treaty, and sent a letter to them by a messenger,
+Pierre Levailler, that they would meet them half way, at the
+camp of the Hon. James McKay, and give them the opportunity of
+accepting the terms of the treaty already concluded. The letter
+was translated to the Indians by the Rev. Pere Andre, a Catholic
+missionary, who, as well as M. Levailler, urged the Indians to
+accede to the proposal made to them, which they agreed to do. The
+Commissioners met the Indians accordingly, at the place proposed,
+and received, after a full discussion, the adhesion of the three
+Chiefs and head men of the Willow Crees to the treaty, and the
+payments were then made to them.
+
+The Commissioners then prepared to leave for Fort Pitt, but having
+been apprised by the Rev. Mr. Scollan, a Catholic missionary, who
+had been sent by Bishop Grandin, to be present at the making of the
+treaty, that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of the Plain Crees,
+at Fort Pitt, was unaware of the place and time of meeting, they
+despatched a messenger to apprise him of them, and request him to
+be present.
+
+The Commissioners crossed the Saskatchewan and journeyed to Fort
+Pitt. Near it they were met by an escort of Mounted Police, who
+convoyed them to the fort.
+
+There they found a number of Indians assembled, and, during the
+day, Sweet Grass arrived. In the evening the Chief and head men
+waited upon the Commissioners. Delay was asked and granted before
+meeting. Eventually the conference was opened. The ceremonies which
+attended it were imposing. The national stem or pipe dance was
+performed, of which a full narrative will be found hereafter. The
+conference proceeded, and the Indians accepted the terms made at
+Carlton with the utmost good feeling, and thus the Indian title
+was extinguished in the whole of the Plain country, except a
+comparatively small area, inhabited by the Black Feet, comprising
+about 35,000 square miles, I regret to record, that the Chief Sweet
+Grass, who took the lead in the proceedings, met with an accidental
+death a few months afterwards, by the discharge of a pistol. The
+Indians, in these two treaties, displayed a strong desire for
+instruction in farming, and appealed for the aid of missionaries
+and teachers.
+
+The latter the Commissioners promised, and for the former they were
+told they must rely on the churches, representatives of whom were
+present from the Church of England, the Methodist, the Presbyterian
+and the Roman Catholic Church. The Bishop (Grandin) of the latter
+Church travelled from Edmonton to Fort Pitt and Battleford to see
+the Commissioners and assure them of his good will. After the
+conclusion of the treaty, the Commissioners commenced their long
+return journey by way of Battleford, and arrived at Winnipeg on the
+6th day of October, with the satisfaction of knowing that they had
+accomplished a work which, with the efficient carrying out of the
+treaties, had secured the good will of the Cree Nation, and laid
+the foundations of law and order in the Saskatchewan Valley.
+
+The officers of the Hudson's Bay Company, the missionaries of the
+various churches, Colonel McLeod of the Mounted Police Force, his
+officers and men, and the Half-breed population, all lent willing
+assistance to the commissioners, and were of substantial service.
+
+I now submit the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor, giving an
+account of the journey and of the negotiations attending the
+treaty, and I include a narrative of the proceedings taken down,
+day by day, by A. G. Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to the
+Commission, which has never before been published, and embraces an
+accurate account of the speeches of the Commissioners and Indians.
+It is satisfactory to be able to state, that Lieut.-Gov. Laird,
+officers of the police force and Mr. Dickieson have since obtained
+the adhesion to the treaty, of, I believe, all but one of the
+Chiefs included in the treaty area, viz.: The Big Bear, while the
+head men even of his band have ranged themselves under the
+provisions of the treaty.
+
+                        GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+                FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 4th. December, 1876.
+
+Sir,--I beg to inform you that in compliance with the request of
+the Privy Council that I should proceed to the west to negotiate
+the treaties which I had last year, through the agency of the late
+Rev. George McDougall, promised the Plain Crees, would be
+undertaken, I left Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 27th of July
+last, with the view of prosecuting my mission. I was accompanied by
+one of my associates, the Hon. J. W. Christie, and by A. G. Jackes,
+Esq., M.D., who was to act as secretary. I selected as my guide Mr.
+Pierre Levailler. The Hon. James McKay, who had also been
+associated in the commission, it was arranged, would follow me and
+meet me at Fort Carlton.
+
+On the morning of the 4th of August, I forded the Assiniboine about
+five miles from Fort Ellice, having accomplished what is usually
+regarded as the first stage of the journey to Fort Carlton, about
+two hundred and twenty miles. After crossing the river, I was
+overtaken by a party of the Sioux who have settled on the reserve
+assigned to them at Bird Tail Creek, and was detained the greater
+part of the day.
+
+I am sanguine that this settlement will prove a success, as these
+Sioux are displaying a laudable industry in cutting hay for their
+own use and for sale, and in breaking up ground for cultivation. I
+resumed my journey in the afternoon, but a storm coming on, I was
+obliged to encamp at the Springs, having only travelled eight miles
+in all during the day.
+
+On the 5th I left the Springs, and after traversing much fine
+country, with excellent prairie, good soil, clumps of wood,
+lakelets, and hay swamps, in the Little and Great Touchwood Hills
+and File Mountain region, I arrived at the South Saskatchewan, at
+Dumont's crossing, twenty miles from Fort Carlton, on the afternoon
+of the 14th of August.
+
+Here I found over one hundred carts of traders and freighters,
+waiting to be ferried across the river. The scow was occupied in
+crossing the carts and effects of Kis-so-wais, an enterprising
+Chippewa trader, belonging to the Portage la Prairie band, who at
+once came forward and gave up to me his right of crossing.
+
+I met, also, a young Cree who had been sent by the Crees to hand me
+a letter of welcome in the name of their nation.
+
+The reason of this step being taken was, that a few wandering
+Saulteaux or Chippewa, from Quill Lake, in Treaty Number Four, had
+come to the Crees and proposed to them to unite with them and
+prevent me from crossing the river and entering the Indian country.
+The Crees promptly refused to entertain the proposal, and sent a
+messenger, as above stated, to welcome me.
+
+I also received from their messenger a letter from Lawrence Clarke,
+Esq., Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company at Carlton, offering
+the Commissioners the hospitalities of the fort.
+
+I sent replies in advance, thanking the Crees for their action, and
+accepting the kind offer of Mr. Clarke, to the extent of the use of
+rooms in the fort.
+
+It was late in the evening before our party crossed the river, so
+that we encamped on the heights near it.
+
+On the morning of the 15th we left for Fort Carlton, Mr. Christie
+preceding me to announce my approaching arrival at Duck Lake. About
+twelve miles from Carlton I found the Hon. James McKay awaiting me,
+having travelled by way of Fort Pelly.
+
+Here also a Chief, Beardy of the Willow Crees, came to see me.
+
+He said that his people were encamped near the lake, and that as
+there were fine meadows for their horses they wished the treaty to
+be made there.
+
+I was at once on my guard, and replied to him, that after I reached
+Carlton, which was the place appointed, I would meet the Indians
+wherever the great body of them desired it.
+
+He then asked me to stop as I passed his encampment, and see his
+people. This I agreed to do, as I was leaving Duck Lake I met
+Captain Walker with his troop of mounted police, coming to escort
+me to Carlton which they did.
+
+When I arrived at Beardy's encampment, the men came to my carriage
+and holding up their right hands to the skies, all joined in an
+invocation to the deity for a blessing on the bright day which had
+brought the Queen's messenger to see them, and on the messenger and
+themselves; one of them shook hands with me for the others.
+
+The scene was a very impressive and striking one, but as will be
+seen hereafter, this band gave me great trouble and were very
+difficult to deal with.
+
+Leaving the Indian encampment I arrived at Fort Carlton, where Mr.
+Christie, Dr. Jackes and myself were assigned most comfortable
+rooms, Mr. McKay preferring to encamp about four miles from the
+fort.
+
+In the evening, Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the two head
+Chiefs of the Carlton Crees, called to pay their respects to me,
+and welcomed me most cordially.
+
+On the 16th the Crees sent me word that they wished the day to
+confer amongst themselves.
+
+I acceded to their request, learning that they desired to bring the
+Duck Lake Indians into the negotiations.
+
+I sent a messenger, Mr. Peter Ballenden, to Duck Lake to inform the
+Indians that I would meet them at the encampment of the Carlton
+Crees, about two miles from the fort.
+
+On the 17th, on his return, he informed me that the Chief said "He
+had not given me leave to meet the Indians anywhere except at Duck
+Lake, and that they would only meet me there." The Carlton Indians,
+however, sent me word, that they would be ready next morning at ten
+o'clock.
+
+On the 18th, as I was leaving for the Indian encampment, a
+messenger came to me from the Duck Lake Indians, asking for
+provisions. I replied, that Mr. Christie was in charge of the
+distribution of provisions, but that I would not give any to the
+Duck Lake Indians, in consequence of the unreasonableness of their
+conduct, and that provisions would only be given to the large
+encampment.
+
+I then proceeded to the Indian camp, together with my fellow
+Commissioners, and was escorted by Captain Walker and his troop.
+
+On my arrival I found that the ground had been most judiciously
+chosen, being elevated, with abundance of trees, hay marshes and
+small lakes. The spot which the Indians had left for my council
+tent overlooked the whole.
+
+The view was very beautiful: the hills and the trees in the
+distance, and in the foreground, the meadow land being dotted with
+clumps of wood, with the Indian tents clustered here and there to
+the number of two hundred.
+
+On my arrival, the Union Jack was hoisted, and the Indians at once
+began to assemble, beating drums, discharging fire-arms, singing
+and dancing. In about half an hour they were ready to advance and
+meet me. This they did in a semicircle, having men on horseback
+galloping in circles, shouting, singing and discharging fire-arms.
+
+They then performed the dance of the "pipe stem," the stem was
+elevated to the north, south, west and east, a ceremonial dance was
+then performed by the Chiefs and head men, the Indian men and women
+shouting the while.
+
+They then slowly advanced, the horsemen again preceding them on
+their approach to my tent. I advanced to meet them, accompanied by
+Messrs. Christie and McKay, when the pipe was presented to us and
+stroked by our hands.
+
+After the stroking had been completed, the Indians sat down in
+front of the council tent, satisfied that in accordance with their
+custom we had accepted the friendship of the Cree nation.
+
+I then addressed the Indians in suitable terms, explaining that I
+had been sent by the Queen, in compliance with their own wishes and
+the written promise I had given them last year, that a messenger
+would be sent to them.
+
+I had ascertained that the Indian mind was oppressed with vague
+fears; they dreaded the treaty; they had been made to believe that
+they would be compelled to live on the reserves wholly, and abandon
+their hunting and that in time of war, they would be placed in the
+front and made to fight.
+
+I accordingly shaped my address, so as to give them confidence in
+the intentions of the Government, and to quiet their apprehensions.
+I impressed strongly on them the necessity of changing their
+present mode of life, and commencing to make homes and gardens for
+themselves, so as to be prepared for the diminution of the buffalo
+and other large animals, which is going on so rapidly.
+
+The Indians listened with great attention to my address, and at
+its close asked an adjournment that they might meet in council to
+consider my words, which was of course granted.
+
+The Rev. C. Scollen, a Roman Catholic Missionary amongst the
+Blackfeet, arrived soon after from Bow River, and informed me that
+on the way he had learned that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of
+the Plain Crees, was out hunting and would not be at Fort Pitt,
+and that he was of opinion that his absence would be a great
+obstruction to a treaty.
+
+After consulting with my colleagues, I decided on sending a
+messenger to him, requesting his presence, and succeeded in
+obtaining, for the occasion, the services of Mr. John McKay, of
+Prince Albert, who had accompanied the Rev. George McDougall on his
+mission last year.
+
+In the evening, Lieut.-Col. Jarvis arrived with a reinforcement of
+the Mounted Police, and an excellent band, which has been
+established at the private cost of one of the troops.
+
+On the 19th, the Commissioners, escorted by the Mounted Police,
+headed by the band, proceeded to the Indian encampment.
+
+The Indians again assembled, following Mist-ow-as-is and
+Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the recognised leading Chiefs.
+
+I asked them to present their Chiefs; they then presented the two
+head Chiefs, and the minor ones.
+
+At this juncture, a messenger arrived from the Duck Lake Indians,
+asking that I should tell them the terms of the Treaty. I replied
+that if the Chiefs and people had joined the others they would have
+heard what I had to say, and that I would not tell the terms in
+advance, but that the messenger could remain and hear what I had to
+say. He expressed himself satisfied and took his seat with the
+others. I then fully explained to them the proposals I had to make,
+that we did not wish to interfere with their present mode of
+living, but would assign them reserves and assist them as was being
+done elsewhere, in commencing to farm, and that what was done would
+hold good for those that were away.
+
+The Indians listened most attentively, and on the close of my
+remarks Mist-ow-as-is arose, took me by the hand, and said that
+"when a thing was thought of quietly, it was the best way," and
+asked "this much, that we go and think of his words."
+
+I acquiesced at once, and expressed my hope that the Chiefs would
+act wisely, and thus closed the second day.
+
+The 20th being Sunday, the Rev. Mr. John McKay, of the Church of
+England, conducted divine service at the fort, which was largely
+attended; the Rev. Mr. Scollen also conducted service.
+
+At noon a messenger came from the Indian camp, asking that there
+should be a service held at their camp, which Mr. McKay agreed to
+do; this service was attended by about two hundred adult Crees.
+
+On Monday, 21st, the head Chiefs sent word that, as the previous
+day was Sunday, they had not met in council, and wished to have the
+day for consultation, and if ready would meet me on Tuesday
+morning. I cheerfully granted the delay from the reasonableness of
+the request; but I was also aware that the head Chiefs were in a
+position of great difficulty.
+
+The attitude of the Duck Lake Indians and of the few discontented
+Saulteaux embarrassed them, while a section of their own people
+were either averse to make a treaty or desirous of making
+extravagant demands. The head Chiefs were men of intelligence, and
+anxious that the people should act unitedly and reasonably.
+
+We, therefore, decided to give them all the time they might ask, a
+policy which they fully appreciated.
+
+On the 22nd the Commissioners met the Indians, when I told them
+that we had not hurried them, but wished now to hear their Chiefs.
+
+A spokesman, The Pond Maker, then addressed me, and asked
+assistance when they settled on the land, and further help as they
+advanced in civilization.
+
+I replied that they had their own means of living, and that we
+could not feed the Indians, but only assist them to settle down.
+The Badger, Soh-ah-moos, and several other Indians all asked help
+when they settled, and also in case of troubles unforeseen in the
+future. I explained that we could not assume the charge of their
+every-day life, but in a time of a great national calamity they
+could trust to the generosity of the Queen.
+
+The Honourable James McKay also addressed them, saying that their
+demands would be understood by a white man as asking for daily
+food, and could not be granted, and explained our objects, speaking
+with effect in the Cree tongue.
+
+At length the Indians informed me that they did not wish to be fed
+every day, but to be helped when they commenced to settle, because
+of their ignorance how to commence, and also in case of general
+famine; Ah-tuk-uk-koop winding up the debate by stating that
+they wanted food in the spring when they commenced to farm, and
+proportionate help as they advanced in civilization, and then
+asking for a further adjournment to consider our offers.
+
+The Commissioners granted this, but I warned them not to be
+unreasonable, and to be ready next day with their decision, while
+we on our part would consider what they had said.
+
+The whole day was occupied with this discussion on the food
+question, and it was the turning point with regard to the treaty.
+
+The Indians were, as they had been for some time past, full of
+uneasiness.
+
+They saw the buffalo, the only means of their support, passing
+away. They were anxious to learn to support themselves by
+agriculture, but felt too ignorant to do so, and they dreaded that
+during the transition period they would be swept off by disease or
+famine--already they have suffered terribly from the ravages of
+measles, scarlet fever and small-pox.
+
+It was impossible to listen to them without interest, they were not
+exacting, but they were very apprehensive of their future, and
+thankful, as one of them put it, "a new life was dawning upon
+them."
+
+On the 23rd the conference was resumed, an Indian addressed the
+people, telling them to listen and the interpreter, Peter Erasmus,
+would read what changes they desired in the terms of our offer.
+They asked for an ox and a cow each family; an increase in the
+agricultural implements; provisions for the poor, unfortunate,
+blind and lame; to be provided with missionaries and school
+teachers; the exclusion of fire water in the whole Saskatchewan; a
+further increase in agricultural implements as the band advanced in
+civilization; freedom to cut timber on Crown lands; liberty to
+change the site of the reserves before the survey; free passages
+over Government bridges or scows; other animals, a horse, harness
+and waggon, and cooking stove for each chief; a free supply of
+medicines; a hand mill to each band; and lastly, that in case of
+war they should not be liable to serve.
+
+Two spokesmen then addressed us in support of these modifications
+of the terms of the Treaty.
+
+I replied to them that they had asked many things some of which had
+been promised, and that the Commissioners would consult together
+about what they had asked that day and the day before, and would
+reply, but before doing so wished to know if that was the voice of
+the whole people, to which the Indians all assented.
+
+After an interval we again met them, and I replied, going over
+their demands and reiterating my statements as to our inability to
+grant food, and again explaining that only in a national famine did
+the Crown ever intervene, and agreeing to make some additions to
+the number of cattle and implements, as we felt it would be
+desirable to encourage their desire to settle.
+
+I closed by stating that, after they settled on the reserves, we
+would give them provisions to aid them while cultivating, to the
+extent of one thousand dollars per annum, but for three years only,
+as after that time they should be able to support themselves.
+
+I told them that we could not give them missionaries, though I was
+pleased with their request, but that they must look to the
+churches, and that they saw Catholic and Protestant missionaries
+present at the conference. We told them that they must help their
+own poor, and that if they prospered they could do so. With regard
+to war, they would not be asked to fight unless they desired to do
+so, but if the Queen did call on them to protect their wives and
+children I believed they would not be backward.
+
+I then asked if they were willing to accept our modified proposals.
+
+Ah-tuk-uk-koop then addressed me, and concluded by calling on the
+people, if they were in favour of our offers, to say so. This they
+all did by shouting assent and holding up their hands.
+
+The Pond Maker then rose and said he did not differ from his
+people, but he did not see how they could feed and clothe their
+children with what was promised. He expected to have received that;
+he did not know how to build a house nor to cultivate the ground.
+
+Joseph Toma, a Saulteaux, said he spoke for the Red Pheasant, Chief
+of the Battle River Crees, and made demands as follows: Men to
+build houses for them, increased salaries to the Chiefs and head
+men, etc. He said what was offered was too little; he wanted enough
+to cover the skin of the people, guns, and also ten miles of land
+round the reserves in a belt.
+
+I asked the Red Pheasant how it was that he was party to the
+requests of his people and how, when I asked if that was their
+unanimous voice he had assented, and yet had now put forward new
+and large demands.
+
+I said it was not good faith, and that I would not accede to the
+requests now made; that what was offered was a gift as they had
+still their old mode of living.
+
+The principal Chiefs then rose and said that they accepted our
+offers, and the Red Pheasant repudiated the demands and remarks of
+Toma, and stated that he had not authorized him to speak for him.
+
+Mist-ow-as-is then asked to speak for the Half-breeds, who wish to
+live on the reserves.
+
+I explained the distinction between the Half-breed people and the
+Indian Half-breeds who lived amongst the Indians as Indians, and
+said the Commissioners would consider the case of each of these
+last on its merits.
+
+The treaty was then signed by myself, Messrs. Christie and McKay,
+Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the head Chiefs, and by the other
+Chiefs and Councillors, those signing, though many Indians were
+absent, yet representing all the bands of any importance in the
+Carlton regions, except the Willow Indians.
+
+On the 24th the Commissioners again met the Indians, when I
+presented the Head Chiefs with their medals, uniforms and flags,
+and informed them that Mr. Christie would give the other Chiefs and
+Councillors the same in the evening.
+
+Some half a dozen of Saulteaux then came forward, of whom I found
+one was from Qu'Appelle, and had been paid there, and the others
+did not belong to the Carlton region. I told them that I had heard
+that they had endeavoured to prevent me crossing the river and to
+prevent a treaty being made, but that they were not wiser than the
+whole of their nation, who had already been treated with.
+
+They did not deny the charge, and their spokesman becoming
+insolent, I declined to hear them further, and they retired, some
+stating that they would go to Fort Pitt, which I warned them not to
+do.
+
+Besides these Saulteaux, there were others present who disapproved
+of their proceedings, amongst them being Kis-so-way-is, already
+mentioned, and Pecheeto, who was the chief spokesman at Qu'Appelle,
+but is now a Councillor of the Fort Ellice Band.
+
+I may mention here that the larger part of the Band to whom these
+other Saulteaux belonged, with the Chief Yellow Quill, gave in
+their adhesion to Treaty Number Four, at Fort Pelly about the time
+that their comrades were troubling me at Fort Carlton.
+
+Mr. Christie then commenced the payments, assisted by Mr. McKay, of
+Prince Albert, and was engaged in so doing during the 24th and
+25th. Amongst those paid were the few resident Saulteaux, who were
+accepted by the Cree Chiefs as part of their bands.
+
+The next morning, the 26th, the whole band, headed by their Chiefs
+and Councillors, dressed in their uniforms, came to Carlton House
+to pay their farewell visit to me.
+
+The Chiefs came forward in order, each addressing me a few remarks,
+and I replied briefly.
+
+They then gave three cheers for the Queen, the Governor, one for
+the Mounted Police, and for Mr. Lawrence Clarke, of Carlton House,
+and then departed, firing guns as they went.
+
+Considering it undesirable that so many Indians should be excluded
+from the treaty, as would be the case if I left the Duck Lake
+Indians to their own devices, I determined on sending a letter to
+them. I, therefore, prepared a message, inviting them to meet me at
+the Hon. Mr. McKay's encampment about three miles from the large
+Indian encampment about half way to Duck Lake, on Monday, the 28th,
+if they were prepared then to accept the terms of the treaty I had
+made with the Carlton Indians. My letter was entrusted to Mr.
+Levailler, who proceeded to Duck Lake.
+
+On entering the Indian Council room, he found they had a letter
+written to me by the Rev. Mr. Andre, offering to accept the terms
+of the treaty, if I came to Duck Lake.
+
+The Indians sent for Mr. Andre to read my letter to them, which was
+received with satisfaction; both he and Mr. Levailler urged them to
+accept my proposal, which they agreed to do, and requested Mr.
+Levailler to inform me that they would go to the appointed place.
+
+Accordingly, on the 28th, the Commissioners met the Willow Indians.
+
+After the usual handshaking, and short speeches from two of the
+Chiefs, I addressed them, telling them I was sorry for the course
+they had pursued, and that I did not go away without giving them
+this opportunity to be included in the treaty.
+
+Kah-mee-yes-too-waegs, the Beardy, spoke for the people. He said
+some things were too little. He was anxious about the buffalo.
+
+Say-sway-kees wished to tell our mother, the Queen, that they were
+alarmed about the buffalo. It appeared as if there was only one
+left.
+
+The Beardy again addressed me and said,--"You have told me what you
+have done with the others you will do with us. I accept the terms;
+no doubt it will run further, according to our numbers; when I am
+utterly unable to help myself I want to receive assistance."
+
+I replied to them, explaining, with regard to assistance that we
+could not support or feed the Indians, and all that we would do
+would be to help them to cultivate the soil.
+
+If a general famine came upon the Indians the charity of the
+Government would come into exercise. I admitted the importance of
+steps being taken to preserve the buffalo, and assured them that it
+would be considered by the Governor-General and Council of the
+North-West Territories, to see if a wise law could be framed such
+as could be carried out and obeyed.
+
+The three Chiefs and their head men then signed the treaty, and the
+medals and flags were distributed, when Mr. Christie intimated that
+he was ready to make the payments.
+
+They then asked that this should be done at Duck Lake, but Mr.
+Christie informed them that, as we had to leave for Fort Pitt, this
+was impossible; and that, moreover their share of the unexpended
+provisions and the clothing and presents were at the fort, where
+they would require to go for them.
+
+They then agreed to accept the payment, which was at once proceeded
+with.
+
+The persistency with which these Indians clung to their endeavor to
+compel the Commissioners to proceed to Duck Lake was in part owing
+to superstition, the Chief Beardy having announced that he had a
+vision, in which it was made known to him that the treaty would be
+made there.
+
+It was partly, also, owing to hostility to the treaty, as they
+endeavored to induce the Carlton Indians to make no treaty, and
+urge them not to sell the land, but to lend it for four years.
+
+The good sense and intelligence of the head Chiefs led them to
+reject their proposals, and the Willow Indians eventually, as I
+have reported, accepted the treaty.
+
+The 29th was occupied by Mr. Christie in settling accounts, taking
+stock of the clothing, and preparing for our departure.
+
+An application was made to me by Toma, the Saulteaux, who took part
+in the proceedings on the 23rd, to sign the treaty as Chief of the
+Saulteaux band.
+
+As I could not ascertain that there were sufficient families of
+these Indians resident in the region to be recognized as a distinct
+band, and as I had no evidence that they desired him to be their
+Chief, I declined to allow him to sign the treaty, but informed him
+that next year, if the Saulteaux were numerous enough, and
+expressed the wish that he should be Chief, he would be recognized.
+
+He was satisfied with this, and said that next year they would come
+to the payments.
+
+His daughter, a widow, with her family, was paid, but he preferred
+to remain until next year, as he did not wish to be paid except as
+a Chief.
+
+On the morning of the 31st, the previous day having been wet, Mr.
+Christie and I left for Fort Pitt, Mr. McKay having preceded us by
+the other road--that by way of Battle River.
+
+We arrived on the 5th September, the day appointed, having rested,
+as was our custom throughout the whole journey, on Sunday, the 3rd.
+
+About six miles from the fort we were met by Col. Jarvis and the
+police, with their band, as an escort, and also by Mr. McKay, the
+Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, who informed us that he had
+rooms ready for our occupation.
+
+We found over one hundred lodges of Indians already there, and
+received a message from them, that as their friends were constantly
+arriving, they wished delay until the 7th.
+
+On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, who had come in, in
+consequence of my message, accompanied by about thirty of the
+principal men, called to see me and express their gratification at
+my arrival.
+
+Their greeting was cordial, but novel in my experience, as they
+embraced me in their arms, and kissed me on both cheeks, a
+reception which they extended also to Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes.
+
+The Hon. James McKay arrived from Battle River in the evening, and
+reported that he had met there a number of Indians, principally
+Saulteaux, who had been camped there for some time. There had been
+about seventy lodges in all, but as the buffalo had come near, the
+poorer Indians had gone after them.
+
+They expressed good feeling, and said they would like to have
+waited until the 15th, the day named for my arrival there, to see
+me and accept the treaty, but that the buffalo hunt was of so much
+consequence to them that they could not wait so long.
+
+This band is a mixed one, composed of Crees and Saulteaux from Jack
+Fish Lake, their Chief being the Yellow Sky.
+
+On the 7th the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, which
+was pitched on the high plateau above the fort, commanding a very
+fine view, and facing the Indian encampment.
+
+They were accompanied by the escort of the police, with their band.
+
+The Indians approached with much pomp and ceremony, following the
+lead of Sweet Grass.
+
+The stem dance was performed as at Fort Carlton, but with much more
+ceremony, there being four pipes instead of one, and the number of
+riders, singers and dancers being more numerous. After the pipes
+were stroked by the Commissioners, they were presented to each of
+them to be smoked, and then laid upon the table to be covered with
+calico and cloth, and returned to their bearers.
+
+After the conclusion of these proceedings I addressed them, telling
+them we had come at their own request, and that there was now a
+trail leading from Lake Superior to Red River, that I saw it
+stretching on thence to Fort Ellice, and there branching off, the
+one track going to Qu'Appelle and Cypress Hills, and the other by
+Fort Pelly to Carlton, and thence I expected to see it extended, by
+way of Fort Pitt to the Rocky Mountains; on that road I saw all the
+Chippewas and Crees walking, and I saw along it gardens being
+planted and houses built.
+
+I invited them to join their brother Indians and walk with the
+white men on this road. I told them what we had done at Carlton,
+and offered them the same terms, which I would explain fully if
+they wished it.
+
+On closing Sweet Grass rose, and taking me by the hand, asked me to
+explain the terms of the treaty, after which they would all shake
+hands with me and then go to meet in council.
+
+I complied with this request, and stated the terms fully to them,
+both addresses having occupied me for three hours. On concluding
+they expressed satisfaction, and retired to their council.
+
+On the 8th the Indians asked for more time to deliberate, which was
+granted, as we learned that some of them desired to make exorbitant
+demands, and we wished to let them understand through the avenues
+by which we had access to them that these would be fruitless.
+
+On the 9th, the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, but
+the Indians were slow of gathering, being still in council,
+endeavoring to agree amongst themselves.
+
+At length they approached and seated themselves in front of the
+tent, I then asked them to speak to me. The Eagle addressed the
+Indians, telling them not to be afraid, and that I was to them as a
+brother, and what the Queen wished to establish was for their good.
+
+After some time had passed, I again called on them to tell me their
+minds and not to be afraid. Sweet Grass then rose and addressed me
+in a very sensible manner. He thanked the Queen for sending me; he
+was glad to have a brother and a friend who would help to lift them
+up above their present condition. He thanked me for the offer and
+saw nothing to be afraid of. He therefore accepted gladly, and took
+my hand to his heart. He said God was looking down on us that day,
+and had opened a new world to them. Sweet Grass further said, he
+pitied those who had to live by the buffalo, but that if spared
+until this time next year, he wanted, this my brother (i.e. the
+Governor), to commence to act for him in protecting the buffalo;
+for himself he would commence at once to prepare a small piece of
+land, and his kinsmen would do the same.
+
+Placing one hand over my heart, and the other over his own, he
+said: "May the white man's blood never be spilt on this earth. I am
+thankful that the white man and red man can stand together. When I
+hold your hand and touch your heart, let us be as one; use your
+utmost to help me and help my children so that they may prosper."
+
+The Chief's speech, of which the foregoing gives a brief outline in
+his own words, was assented to by the people with a peculiar
+guttural sound which takes with them the place of the British
+cheer.
+
+I replied, expressing my satisfaction that they had so unanimously
+approved of the arrangement I had made with the nation at Carlton,
+and promised that I would send them next year, as I had said to the
+Crees of Carlton, copies of the treaty printed on parchment.
+
+I said that I knew that some of the Chiefs were absent, but next
+year they would receive the present of money as they had done.
+
+The Commissioners then signed the treaty, as did Sweet Grass, eight
+other Chiefs and those of their Councillors who were present, the
+Chiefs addressing me before signing. James Senum, Chief of the
+Crees at White Fish Lake, said that he commenced to cultivate the
+soil some years ago.
+
+Mr. Christie, then chief factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, gave
+him a plough, but it was now broken. He had no cattle when he
+commenced, but he and his people drew the plough themselves, and
+made hoes of roots of trees. Mr. Christie also gave him a pit-saw
+and a grind-stone, and he was still using them. His heart was sore
+in spring when his children wanted to plough and had no implements.
+He asked for these as soon as possible, and referring to the
+Wesleyan mission at that place, he said by following what I have
+been taught it helps me a great deal.
+
+The Little Hunter, a leading Chief of the Plain Crees, said he was
+glad from his very heart; he felt in taking the Governor's hand as
+if it was the Queen's. When I hear her words that she is going to
+put this country to rights, it is the help of God that put it into
+her heart. He wished an everlasting grasp of her hand; he was
+thankful for the children who would prosper. All the children who
+were settling there, hoped that the Great Spirit would look down
+upon us as one. Other Chiefs expressed themselves similarly.
+
+Ken-oo-say-oo, or The Fish, was a Chippewayan or mountaineer, a
+small band of whom are in this region.
+
+They had no Chief, but at my request they had selected a Chief and
+presented the Fish to me. He said, speaking in Cree, that he
+thanked the Queen, and shook hands with me, he was glad for what
+had been done, and if he could have used his own tongue he would
+have said more.
+
+I then presented Sweet Grass his medal, uniform, and flag, the band
+playing "God Save the Queen" and all the Indians rising to their
+feet.
+
+The rest of the medals, flags, and uniforms, were distributed, as
+soon as possible, and Mr. Christie commenced to make the payments.
+
+On Sunday, the 10th, the Rev. Mr. McKay conducted the service for
+the police and others, who might attend, and in the afternoon the
+Rev. Mr. McDougall had a service in Cree; Bishop Grandin and the
+Rev. Mr. Scollen also had services for the Crees and Chippewayans.
+
+On Monday, the 11th, Mr. Christie completed the payments and
+distribution of provisions. The police commenced crossing the
+Saskatchewan, with a view to leaving on Tuesday, the 12th, for
+Battle River. We therefore sent our horses and carts across the
+river, and had our tents pitched with the view of commencing our
+return journey, early in the morning. Just as we were about to
+leave Port Pitt, however, the Great Bear, one of the three Cree
+Chiefs who were absent, arrived at the fort and asked to see me.
+The Commissioners met him, when he told me that he had been out on
+the plains hunting the buffalo, and had not heard the time of the
+meeting; that on hearing of it he had been sent in by the Crees and
+by the Stonies or Assiniboines to speak for them. I explained to
+him what had been done at Carlton and Pitt, he expressed regret
+that I was going away as he wished to talk to me. I then said we
+would not remove until the next day, which gratified him much.
+
+On the 13th, Sweet Grass and all the other Chiefs and Councillors
+came down to the fort with the Great Bear to bid me farewell.
+
+Sweet Grass told me the object of their visit. The Bear said the
+Indians on the plains had sent him to speak for them, and those who
+were away were as a barrier before what he would have to say.
+
+Sweet Grass said, addressing him, "You see the representative of
+the Queen here. I think the Great Spirit put it into their hearts
+to come to our help. Let there be no barrier, as it is with great
+difficulty that this was brought about. Say yes and take his hand."
+The White Fish spoke similarly.
+
+The Bear said, "Stop, my friends. I never saw the Governor before;
+when I heard he was to come, I said I will request him to save me
+from what I most dread--hanging; it was not given to us to have the
+rope about our necks." I replied, that God had given it to us to
+punish murder by death, and explained the protection the police
+force afforded the Indians.
+
+Big Bear still demanded that there should be no hanging, and I
+informed him that his request would not be granted. He then wished
+that the buffalo might be protected, and asked why the other Chiefs
+did not speak.
+
+The Fish, the Chippewayan replied, "We do not because Sweet Grass
+has spoken, and what he says we all say."
+
+I then asked the Bear to tell the other two absent Chiefs Short
+Tail and Sagamat, what had been done; that I had written him and
+them a letter, and sent it by Sweet Grass, and that next year they
+could join the treaty; with regard to the buffalo, the North-West
+Council were considering the question, and I again explained that
+we would not interfere with the Indian's daily life except to
+assist them in farming.
+
+I then said I never expected to see them again. The land was so
+large that another Governor was to be sent, whom I hoped they would
+receive as they had done me, and give him the same confidence they
+had extended to me. The Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with
+Sweet Grass, then shook hands with Mr. Christie and myself, each
+addressing me words of parting.
+
+The Bear remained sitting until all had shaken hands, he then took
+mine and holding it, said, "If he had known he would have met me
+with all his people. I am not an undutiful child, I do not throw
+back your hand, but as my people are not here I do not sign. I will
+tell them what I have heard, and next year I will come." The
+Indians then left, but shortly afterwards the Bear came to see me
+again, fearing I had not fully understood him, and assured me that
+he accepted the treaty as if he had signed it, and would come next
+year with all his people and accept it.
+
+We crossed the river, and left for Battle River in the afternoon,
+where we arrived on the afternoon of the 15th. We found no Indians
+there except Red Pheasant and his band, whom we had already met at
+Carlton.
+
+On the 16th, the Red Pheasant saw the Commissioners. He said he was
+a Battle River Indian; his fathers had lived there before him, but
+he was glad to see the Government coming there, as it would improve
+his means of living. He wished the claims of the Half-breeds who
+had settled there before the Government came to be respected, as
+for himself he would go away and seek another home, and though it
+was hard to leave the home of his people, yet he would make way for
+the white man, and surely, he said, "if the poor Indian acts thus,
+the Queen, when she hears of this, will help him." He asked, that a
+little land should be given him to plant potatoes in next spring,
+and they would remove after digging them, to their reserve, which
+he thought he would wish to have at the Eagle Hills.
+
+I expressed my satisfaction with their conduct and excellent
+spirit, and obtained the cheerful consent of Mr. Fuller, of the
+Pacific telegraph line, who is in occupation of a large cultivated
+field, that the band should use three acres within the fenced
+enclosure, and which, moreover, Mr. Fuller kindly promised to
+plough for them gratuitously.
+
+The 17th being Sunday we remained at our camp, and on Monday
+morning, the 18th, we commenced our long return journey, with the
+incidents of which I will not trouble you further than to state
+that, on arriving on the 4th of October at an encampment about
+thirty miles from Portage la Prairie, we found it necessary to
+leave our tents and carts to follow us leisurely (many of the
+horses having become completely exhausted with the long journey of
+sixteen hundred miles) and push on to the Portage; on the 5th we
+reached the Portage, where Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes remained,
+their horses being unable to go farther, and I went on to Poplar
+Point, forty-five miles from Fort Garry, where I found accommodation
+for the night from Mr. Chisholm, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post
+there.
+
+I arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 6th of October
+having been absent for over two months and a half. Mr. McKay,
+having taken another road, had arrived before me; Mr. Christie
+and Dr. Jackes reached here subsequently. Having thus closed the
+narrative of our proceedings, I proceed to deal with the results of
+our mission, and to submit for your consideration some reflections
+and to make some practical suggestions.
+
+1st. The Indians inhabiting the ceded territory are chiefly Crees,
+but there are a few Assiniboines on the plains and also at the
+slope of the mountains. There are also a small number of Saulteaux
+and one band of Chippewayans.
+
+2nd. I was agreeably surprised to find so great a willingness on
+the part of the Crees to commence to cultivate the soil, and so
+great a desire to have their children instructed. I requested Mr.
+Christie to confer with the Chief while the payments were going on,
+as to the localities where they would desire to have reserves
+assigned to them, and with few exceptions they indicated the
+places, in fact most of them have already commenced to settle.
+
+It is, therefore important that the cattle and agricultural
+implements should be given them without delay.
+
+I would, therefore, recommend that provision should be made for
+forwarding these as soon as the spring opens. I think it probable
+that cattle and some implements could be purchased at Prince Albert
+and thus avoid transportation.
+
+3rd. I would further represent that, though I did not grant the
+request, I thought the desire of the Indians, to be instructed in
+farming and building, most reasonable, and I would therefore
+recommend that measures be adopted to provide such instruction for
+them. Their present mode of living is passing away; the Indians are
+tractable, docile and willing to learn. I think that advantage
+should be taken of this disposition to teach them to become
+self-supporting, which can best be accomplished with the aid of a
+few practical farmers and carpenters to instruct them in farming
+and house building.
+
+The universal demand for teachers, and by some of the Indians for
+missionaries, is also encouraging. The former, the Government can
+supply; for the latter they must rely on the churches, and I trust
+that these will continue and extend their operations amongst them.
+The field is wide enough for all, and the cry of the Indian for
+help is a clamant one.
+
+4th. In connection with the aiding of the Indians to settle, I have
+to call attention to the necessity of regulations being made for
+the preservation of the buffalo. These animals are fast decreasing
+in numbers, but I am satisfied that a few simple regulations would
+preserve the herds for many years. The subject was constantly
+pressed on my attention by the Indians, and I promised that the
+matter would be considered by the North-West Council. The council
+that has governed the territories for the last four years was
+engaged in maturing a law for this purpose, and had our regime
+continued we would have passed a statute for their preservation. I
+commend the matter to the attention of our successors as one of
+urgent importance.
+
+5th. There is another class of the population in the North-West
+whose position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy
+Council. I refer to the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who
+are chiefly of French descent and live the life of the Indians.
+There are a few who are identified with the Indians, but there is a
+large class of Metis who live by the hunt of the buffalo, and have
+no settled homes. I think that a census of the numbers of these
+should be procured, and while I would not be disposed to recommend
+their being brought under the treaties, I would suggest that land
+should be assigned to them, and that on their settling down, if
+after an examination into their circumstances, it should be found
+necessary and expedient, some assistance should be given them to
+enable them to enter upon agricultural operations.
+
+If the measures suggested by me are adopted, viz., effective
+regulations with regard to the buffalo, the Indians taught to
+cultivate the soil, and the erratic Half-breeds encouraged to
+settle down, I believe that the solution of all social questions of
+any present importance in the North-West Territories will have been
+arrived at.
+
+In conclusion, I have to call your attention to the report made to
+me by the Hon. Mr. Christie, which I forward herewith; that
+gentleman took the entire charge of the payments and administration
+of matters connected with the treaty, and I have to speak in the
+highest terms of the value of his services.
+
+Accompanying his report will be found the pay sheets, statements of
+distribution of provisions and clothing, memoranda as to the
+localities of the reserves, suggestions as to the times and places
+of payment next year, and a general balance sheet.
+
+A credit of $60,000 was given to me, and I have placed as a refund
+to the credit of the Receiver-General, $12,730.55. This arises from
+the fact that owing to the proximity of the buffalo, many of the
+Indians did not come into the treaty.
+
+I have to acknowledge the benefit I derived from the services of
+the Hon. James McKay, camping as he did near the Indian encampment.
+He had the opportunity of meeting them constantly, and learning
+their views which his familarity with the Indian dialects enabled
+him to do. Dr. Jackes took a warm interest in the progress of our
+work, and kept a record of the negotiations, a copy of which I
+enclose and which I think ought to be published, as it will be of
+great value to those who will be called on to administer the
+treaty, showing as it does what was said by the negotiators and by
+the Indians, and preventing misrepresentations in the future. The
+Commissioners are under obligations to Lieut.-Colonel McLeod, and
+the other officers and men of the police force for their escort.
+
+The conduct of the men was excellent, and the presence of the force
+as an emblem and evidence of the establishment of authority in the
+North-West was of great value.
+
+I have to record my appreciation of the kindness of Messrs. Clarke,
+of Fort Carlton, and McKay of Fort Pitt, and of the other officials
+of the Hudson's Bay Company, and of the hearty assistance they
+extended towards the accomplishment of our mission. I have also to
+mention the interest taken in the negotiations by His Lordship
+Bishop Grandin, and by the various missionaries, Protestant and
+Catholic.
+
+On this occasion, as on others, I found the Half-breed population
+whether French or English generally using the influence of their
+relationship to the Indians in support of our efforts to come to a
+satisfactory arrangement with them.
+
+We also had the advantage of good interpreters, having secured the
+services of Messrs. Peter Ballendine and John McKay, while the
+Indians had engaged Mr. Peter Erasmus to discharge the same duty.
+The latter acted as chief interpreter, being assisted by the
+others, and is a most efficient interpreter.
+
+I transmit herewith a copy of the treaty, and have only in
+conclusion to express my hope that this further step in the
+progress of the work of the Dominion amongst the Indian tribes will
+prove beneficial to them, and of advantage to the realm.
+
+                   I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                             Your obedient servant,
+                                     ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                                              Lieut.-Governor.
+
+
+
+Narrative of the proceedings connected with the effecting of the
+treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt, in the year 1876, together with
+a report of the speeches of the Indians and Commissioners, by A. G.
+Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to the Commission.
+
+The expedition for the proposed Treaty Number Six, reached the
+South Saskatchewan on the afternoon of August 14th, where they were
+met by a messenger from the Cree Indians expressing welcome, also a
+messenger from Mr. L. Clarke, of Carlton House, offering to the
+Governor and party the hospitality of the Fort.
+
+The next morning, when about ten miles from Carlton, the
+Commissioners were met by a detachment of Mounted Police under
+Major Walker, who escorted them to the Fort; on the way the
+Commissioners passed an encampment of Crees whose Chief had
+previously seen the Governor at Duck Lake and asked him to make the
+treaty there; he replied that he could not promise, that he would
+meet the Indians where the greater number wished. These Crees
+joined in an invocation to the deity for a blessing on the
+Governor, and deputed one of their number to welcome him by shaking
+hands.
+
+Near the Fort were encamped about two hundred and fifty lodges of
+Crees, to whom the Commissioners at once served out two days'
+allowance of provisions.
+
+On the 16th the Crees reported that they wanted another day to
+confer amongst themselves, this was granted and the Governor
+requested them to meet him and the Commissioners on the 18th at 10
+a.m., to commence the business of the treaty.
+
+
+
+FIRST DAY
+
+August 18th.
+
+At half-past ten His Honor Lieut.-Gov. Morris, the Hon. W. J.
+Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay, accompanied by an escort of
+North-West Mounted Police, left the Fort for the camp of the Cree
+Indians, who had selected a site about a mile and a half from the
+Hudson's Bay Fort. There were about two hundred and fifty lodges,
+containing over two thousand souls. The Governor's tent was pitched
+on a piece of rising ground about four hundred yards from the
+Indian camp, and immediately facing it.
+
+As soon as the Governor and party arrived, the Indians who were to
+take part in the treaty, commenced to assemble near the Chief's
+tents, to the sound of beating drums and the discharge of small
+arms, singing, dancing and loud speaking, going on at the same
+time.
+
+In about half an hour they were ready to advance and meet the
+Governor; this they did in a large semi-circle; in their front
+were about twenty braves on horseback, galloping about in
+circles, shouting, singing and going through various picturesque
+performances. The semi-circle steadily advanced until within fifty
+yards of the Governor's tent, when a halt was made and further
+peculiar ceremonies commenced, the most remarkable of which was the
+"dance of the stem." This was commenced by the Chiefs, medicine
+men, councillors, singers and drum-beaters, coming a little to the
+front and seating themselves on blankets and robes spread for them.
+The bearer of the stem, Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote (the
+man you strike on the back), carrying in his hand a large and
+gorgeously adorned pipe stem, walked slowly along the semi-circle,
+and advancing to the front, raised the stem to the heavens, then
+slowly turned to the north, south, east and west, presenting the
+stem at each point; returning to the seated group he handed the
+stem to one of the young men, who commenced a low chant, at the
+same time performing a ceremonial dance accompanied by the drums
+and singing of the men and women in the background.
+
+This was all repeated by another of the young men, after which the
+horsemen again commenced galloping in circles, the whole body
+slowly advancing. As they approached his tent, the Governor,
+accompanied by the Hon. W. J. Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay,
+Commissioners, went forward to meet them and to receive the stem
+carried by its bearer. It was presented first to the Governor, who
+in accordance with their customs, stroked it several times, then
+passed it to the Commissioners who repeated the ceremony.
+
+The significance of this ceremony is that the Governor and
+Commissioners accepted the friendship of the tribe.
+
+The interpreter then introduced the Chiefs and principal men; the
+Indians slowly seating themselves in regular order in front of the
+tent. In a few minutes there was perfect quiet and order, when His
+Honor the Lieutenant-Governor addressed them as follows:
+
+"My Indian brothers, Indians of the plains, I have shaken hands
+with a few of you, I shake hands with all of you in my heart. God
+has given us a good day, I trust his eye is upon us, and that what
+we do will be for the benefit of his children.
+
+"What I say and what you say, and what we do, is done openly before
+the whole people. You are, like me and my friends who are with me,
+children of the Queen. We are of the same blood, the same God made
+us and the same Queen rules over us.
+
+"I am a Queen's Councillor, I am her Governor of all these
+territories, and I am here to speak from her to you. I am here now
+because for many days the Cree nation have been sending word that
+they wished to see a Queen's messenger face to face. I told the
+Queen's Councillors your wishes. I sent you word last year by a
+man who has gone where we will all go by and by, that a Queen's
+messenger would meet you this year. I named Forts Carlton and Pitt
+as the places of meeting, I sent a letter to you saying so, and my
+heart grew warm when I heard how well you received it.
+
+"As the Queen's chief servant here, I always keep my promises; the
+winter came and went but I did not forget my word, and I sent a
+messenger to tell you that I would meet you at Carlton on the 15th
+of August, and at Fort Pitt on the 5th of September.
+
+"During the winter I went to Ottawa to consult with the other
+Queen's Councillors about you amongst other matters, and they said
+to me, 'you promised a Queen's messenger to the Crees, you have
+been so much with the Indians, that we wish you to go yourself;'
+I said 'the journey is long and I am not a strong man, but when a
+duty is laid upon me I will do it, but,' I said, 'you must give
+with me two friends and councillors whom I can trust, to help me in
+the duty;' and now I have with me two friends whom you and I have
+known long; one of them is of your own blood, the other has been
+many years amongst you.
+
+"I will, in a short time, give you a message from the Queen, and my
+Councillors will tell you that the words are true. Before I do so,
+there are so many things I want to say to you that I scarcely know
+where to begin. I have been nearly four years Governor of Manitoba
+and these territories, and from the day I was sworn, I took the
+Indian by the hand, and those who took it have never let it go.
+
+"Three years ago I went to the north-west angle of Lake of the
+Woods, and there I met the Chippewa nation, I gave them a message
+and they talked with me and when they understood they took my hand.
+Some were away, next year I sent messengers to them and I made a
+treaty between the Queen and them; there are numbered of those
+altogether four thousand. I then went to Lake Qu'Appelle the year
+after, and met the Crees and Chippewas there, gave them my message,
+and they took my hand. Last summer I went to Lake Winnipeg and gave
+the Queen's message to the Swampy Crees and they and I, acting for
+the Queen, came together heart to heart; and now that the Indians
+of the east understand the Queen and her Councillors, I come to
+you. And why is all this done? I will tell you; it is because you
+are the subjects of the Queen as I am. She cares as much for one of
+you as she does for one of her white subjects. The other day a
+party of Iroquois Indians were taken to England across the ocean;
+the Queen heard of it and sent to them, saying, 'I want to see my
+red children,' took their hands and gave each of them her picture,
+and sent them away happy with her goodness.
+
+"Before I came here I was one of the Queen's Councillors at Ottawa.
+We have many Indians there as here, but for many years there has
+been friendship between the British, and the Indians. We respect
+the Indians as brothers and as men. Let me give you a proof it.
+Years ago there was war between the British and the Americans;
+there was a great battle; there were two brave Chief warriors on
+the British side, one wore the red coat, the other dressed as you
+do, but they fought side by side as brothers; the one was Brock and
+the other was Tecumseth whose memory will never die; the blood of
+both watered the ground; the bones of Tecumseth were hid by his
+friends; the remains of Brock by his, and now a great pile of stone
+stands up toward heaven in his memory. And now the white man is
+searching for the remains of Tecumseth, and when found they will
+build another monument in honour of the Indian.
+
+"I hope the days of fighting are over, but notwithstanding the
+whites are as much your friends in these days of peace, as in war.
+
+"The many Indians in the place that I have left are happy,
+prosperous, contented and growing in numbers. A meeting of the
+Grand Council of the Six Nation Indians was held a month ago; they
+now number six thousand souls. They met to thank the Queen and to
+say that they were content, and why are they content? Because many
+years ago the Queen's Councillors saw that the Indians that would
+come after, must be cared for, they saw that the means of living
+were passing away from the Indians, they knew that women and
+children were sometimes without food; they sent men to speak to the
+Indians, they said your children must be educated, they must be
+taught to raise food for themselves. The Indians heard them, the
+Councillors gave them seed, land, food, taught their children and
+let them feel that they were of one blood with the whites. Now,
+what we have found to work so well where I came from we want to
+have here in our territories, and I am happy to say that my heart
+is gladdened by the way the Indians have met me.
+
+"We are not here as traders, I do not come as to buy or sell horses
+or goods, I come to you, children of the Queen, to try to help you;
+when I say yes, I mean it, and when I say no, I mean it too.
+
+"I want you to think of my words, I want to tell you that what we
+talk about is very important. What I trust and hope we will do is
+not for to-day or to-morrow only; what I will promise, and what I
+believe and hope you will take, is to last as long as that sun
+shines and yonder river flows.
+
+"You have to think of those who will come after you, and it will be
+a remembrance for me as long as I live, if I can go away feeling
+that I have done well for you. I believe we can understand each
+other, if not it will be the first occasion on which the Indians
+have not done so. If you are as anxious for your own welfare as I
+am, I am certain of what will happen.
+
+"The day is passing. I thank you for the respectful reception you
+have given me. I will do here as I have done on former occasions. I
+hope you will speak your minds as fully and as plainly as if I was
+one of yourselves.
+
+"I wish you to think of what I have said. I wish you to present
+your Chiefs to me to-day if you are ready, if not then we will wait
+until to-morrow."
+
+Here the Indians requested an adjournment until next day in order
+that they might meet in council; this was granted, and the first
+day's proceedings terminated.
+
+Late in the evening the escort of Mounted Police was reinforced by
+a detachment, accompanied by their band, under command of Col.
+Jarvis, making a force of nearly one hundred men and officers.
+
+
+
+SECOND DAY
+
+August 19th.
+
+The Lieutenant-Governor and Commissioners, with the Mounted Police
+escort, headed by their band, proceeded to the camp to meet the
+Indians at 10:30 a.m. The Indians having assembled in regular order
+with their two leading Chiefs, Mis-tah-wah-sis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop
+seated in front, the Governor said:
+
+"My friends, we have another bright day before us, and I trust that
+when it closes our faces will continue as bright as the day before
+us. I spoke yesterday as a friend to friends, as a brother to
+brothers, as a father to his children. I did not want to hurry you,
+I wanted you to think of my words, and now I will be glad if you
+will do as I asked you then, present your Chiefs to me, and I shall
+be glad to hear the words of the Indians through the voice of their
+Chiefs, or whoever they may appoint."
+
+The head men then brought forward Mis-tah-wah-sis, of the Carlton
+Indians, representing seventy-six lodges. Ah-tuck-ah-coop, of the Wood
+Indians, representing about seventy lodges. These were acknowledged as
+the leading Chiefs, after them came James Smith, of the Fort-a-la-Corne
+Indians, fifty lodges. John Smith, of the Prince Albert and South
+Branch Indians, fifty lodges. The Chip-ee-wayan, of the Plain Indians,
+sixty lodges. Yah-yah-tah-kus-kin-un, of the Fishing or Sturgeon lake
+Indians, twenty lodges. Pee-yahan-kah-mihk-oo-sit, thirty lodges.
+Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote, of the River Indians, fifty
+lodges.
+
+Here a messenger came from the Indians under Chief Beardy, camped
+at Duck Lake, eight miles from the main camp. He shook hands with
+the Governor and said, "I am at a loss at this time what to say,
+for the Indians' mind cannot be all the same, that is why I came
+to tell the Governor the right of it; with a good heart I plead at
+this time, it is not my own work, I would like to know his mind
+just now and hear the terms of the treaty."
+
+The Governor said in reply: "If your Chief and his people had been
+in their places here, they would have heard with the rest what I
+had to say. You refused to meet me here, yet you sent and asked me
+to give you provisions, but I refused to do so unless you joined
+the others; and now I will not tell my message to this messenger
+until I tell all the rest; he can hear with the rest and take back
+my words to his chief." The messenger expressed himself satisfied,
+and took his seat with the others.
+
+On the Indians expressing themselves ready to hear the message, the
+Governor said:
+
+"First I wish to talk to you about what I regard as something
+affecting the lives of yourselves and the lives of your children.
+Often when I thought of the future of the Indian my heart was sad
+within me. I saw that the large game was getting scarcer and
+scarcer, and I feared that the Indians would melt away like snow in
+spring before the sun. It was my duty as Governor to think of them,
+and I wondered if the Indians of the plains and lakes could not do
+as their brothers where I came from did. And now, when I think of
+it, I see a bright sky before me. I have been nearly four years
+working among my Indian brothers, and I am glad indeed to find that
+many of them are seeking to have homes of their own, having gardens
+and sending their children to school.
+
+"Last spring I went to see some of the Chippewas, this year I went
+again and I was glad to see houses built, gardens planted and wood
+cut for more houses. Understand me, I do not want to interfere with
+your hunting and fishing. I want you to pursue it through the
+country, as you have heretofore done; but I would like your
+children to be able to find food for themselves and their children
+that come after them. Sometimes when you go to hunt you can leave
+your wives and children at home to take care of your gardens.
+
+"I am glad to know that some of you have already begun to build and
+to plant; and I would like on behalf of the Queen to give each band
+that desires it a home of their own; I want to act in this matter
+while it is time. The country is wide and you are scattered, other
+people will come in. Now unless the places where you would like to
+live are secured soon there might be difficulty. The white man
+might come and settle on the very place where you would like to be.
+Now what I and my brother Commissioners would like to do is this:
+we wish to give each band who will accept of it a place where they
+may live; we wish to give you as much or more land than you need;
+we wish to send a man that surveys the land to mark it off, so you
+will know it is your own, and no one will interfere with you. What
+I would propose to do is what we have done in other places. For
+every family of five a reserve to themselves of one square mile.
+Then, as you may not all have made up your minds where you would
+like to live, I will tell you how that will be arranged: we would
+do as has been done with happiest results at the North-West Angle.
+We would send next year a surveyor to agree with you as to the
+place you would like.
+
+"There is one thing I would say about the reserves. The land I name
+is much more than you will ever be able to farm, and it may be that
+you would like to do as your brothers where I came from did.
+
+"They, when they found they had too much land, asked the Queen to
+it sell for them; they kept as much as they could want, and the
+price for which the remainder was sold was put away to increase for
+them, and many bands now have a yearly income from the land.
+
+"But understand me, once the reserve is set aside, it could not be
+sold unless with the consent of the Queen and the Indians; as long
+as the Indians wish, it will stand there for their good; no one can
+take their homes.
+
+"Of course, if when a reserve is chosen, a white man had already
+settled there, his rights must be respected. The rights and
+interests of the whites and half-breeds are as dear to the Queen as
+those of the Indians. She deals justly by all, and I am sure my
+Indian brothers would like to deal with others as they would have
+others to deal with them. I think you can now understand the
+question of homes.
+
+"When the Indians settle on a reserve and have a sufficient number
+of children to be taught, the Queen would maintain a school.
+Another thing, that affects you all, some of you have temptations
+as the white men have, and therefore the fire-water which does so
+much harm will not be allowed to be sold or used in the reserve.
+Then before I leave the question of reserves I will tell you how we
+will help you to make your homes there. We would give to every
+family actually cultivating the soil the following articles, viz.,
+two hoes, one spade, one scythe, one axe, and then to help in
+breaking the land, one plough and two harrows for every ten
+families; and to help you to put up houses we give to each Chief
+for his band, one chest of carpenter's tools, one cross-cut saw,
+five hand saws, one pit saw and files, five augers and one
+grindstone. Then if a band settles on its reserves the people will
+require something to aid them in breaking the soil. They could not
+draw the ploughs themselves, therefore we will give to each Chief
+for the use of his band one or two yokes of oxen according to the
+number in the band. In order to encourage the keeping of cattle we
+would give each band a bull and four cows; having all these things
+we would give each band enough potatoes, oats, barley and wheat for
+seed to plant the land actually broken. This would be done once for
+all to encourage them to grow for themselves.
+
+"Chiefs ought to be respected, they ought to be looked up to by
+their people; they ought to have good Councillors; the Chiefs and
+Councillors should consult for the good of the people; the Queen
+expects Indians and whites to obey her laws; she expects them to
+live at peace with other Indians and with the white men; the Chiefs
+and Councillors should teach their people so, and once the Queen
+approves a Chief or Councillor he cannot be removed unless he
+behaves badly.
+
+"The Chiefs and head men are not to be lightly put aside. When a
+treaty is made they become servants of the Queen; they are to try
+and keep order amongst their people. We will try to keep order in
+the whole country.
+
+"A Chief has his braves; you see here the braves of our Queen, and
+why are they here? To see that no white man does wrong to the
+Indian. To see that none give liquor to the Indian. To see that the
+Indians do no harm to each other. Three years ago some Americans
+killed some Indians; when the Queen's Councillors heard of it they
+said, we will send men there to protect the Indians, the Queen's
+subjects shall not be shot down by the Americans; now you
+understand why the police force is in this country, and you should
+rejoice.
+
+"I have said a Chief was to be respected; I wear a uniform because
+I am an officer of the Queen, the officers of the police wear
+uniforms as servants of the Queen. So we give to Chiefs and
+Councillors good and suitable uniform indicating their office, to
+wear on these and other great days.
+
+"We recognize four head men to each large band and two to each
+small one.
+
+"I have always been much pleased when Indians came to me and showed
+me medals given to their grandfathers and transmitted to them; now
+we have with us silver medals that no Chief need be ashamed to
+wear, and I have no doubt that when the Chiefs are gone, they will
+be passed on to their children. In addition each Chief will be
+given a flag to put over his lodge to show that he is a Chief.
+
+"I told you yesterday that I and my brother Commissioners were not
+here as traders.
+
+"There is one thing I ought to have mentioned in addition to what I
+have already named, that is, if a treaty is made here and at Fort
+Pitt, we will give every year to the Indians included in it, one
+thousand five hundred dollars' worth of ammunition and twine.
+
+"You think only for yourselves, we have to think of the Indians all
+over the country, we cannot treat one better than another, it would
+not be just, we will therefore do this, and what I tell you now is
+the last.
+
+"When the treaty is closed, if it be closed, we will make a present
+to every man, woman and child, of twelve dollars, the money being
+paid to the head of a family for his wife, and children not
+married.
+
+"To each Chief, instead of twelve, we give twenty-five dollars, and
+to each head man fifteen dollars, their wives and children getting
+the same as the others. I told you also that what I was promising
+was not for to-day or to-morrow only, but should continue as long
+as the sun shone and the river flowed. My words will pass away and
+so will yours, so I always write down what I promise, that our
+children may know what we said and did. Next year I shall send
+copies of what is written in the treaty, printed on skin, so that
+it cannot rub out nor be destroyed, and one shall be given to each
+Chief so that there may be no mistakes.
+
+"Then I promise to do as we have done with all before from Cypress
+Hills to Lake Superior, the Queen will agree to pay yearly five
+dollars per head for every man, woman and child. I cannot treat you
+better than the others, but I am ready to treat you as well.
+
+"A little thing I had forgotten, and I have done. The Chiefs' and
+head men's coats will wear out, they are meant to be worn when it
+is necessary to show that they are officers of the Queen, and every
+third year they will be replaced by new ones.
+
+"And now, Indians of the plains, I thank you for the open ear you
+have given me; I hold out my hand to you full of the Queen's bounty
+and I hope you will not put it back. We hate no object but to
+discharge our duty to the Queen and towards you. Now that my hand
+is stretched out to you, it is for you to say whether you will take
+it and do as I think you ought--act for the good of your people.
+
+"What I have said has been in the face of the people. These things
+will hold good next year for those that are now away. I have done.
+What do you say?"
+
+MIS-TAH-WAH-SIS here came forward, shook hands with the Governor,
+and said:--"We have heard all he has told us, but I want to tell
+him how it is with us as well; when a thing is thought of quietly,
+probably that is the best way. I ask this much from him this day
+that we go and think of his words."
+
+The Governor and Commissioners agreed to the request and asked the
+Indians to meet them Monday morning at ten o'clock with as little
+delay as possible.
+
+Before parting, the Governor said to the Indians, "This is a great
+day for us all. I have proposed on behalf of the Queen what I
+believe to be for your good, and not for yours only, but for that
+of your children's children, and when you go away think of my
+words. Try to understand what my heart is towards you. I will trust
+that we may come together hand to hand and heart to heart again. I
+trust that God will bless this bright day for our good, and give
+your Chiefs and Councillors wisdom so that you will accept the
+words of your Governor. I have said."
+
+
+Sunday, August 20th.
+
+Divine service, which was largely attended, was held in the square
+of Fort Carlton, by the Rev. John McKay, at half-past ten a.m.
+
+At noon a message came from the encampment of Indians requesting
+the Rev. Mr. McKay to hold service with them, which he did in the
+afternoon, preaching in their own tongue to a congregation of over
+two hundred adult Crees.
+
+
+Monday, August 21st.
+
+The principal Chief sent a message that as the Indians had held no
+Council on Sunday, they wished to have Monday to themselves and
+would if ready meet the Commissioners on Tuesday morning.
+
+
+THIRD DAY
+
+August 22nd.
+
+The Governor and Commissioners having proceeded as usual to the camp,
+the Indians soon assembled in order, when the Lieutenant-Governor said:
+
+"Indian children of the Queen, it is now a week to-day since I came
+here on the day I said I would; I have to go still further after I
+leave here, and then a long journey home to Red River.
+
+"I have not hurried you, you have had two days to think; I have
+spoken much to you and now I wish to hear you, my ears are open and
+I wish to hear the voices of your principal Chiefs or of those
+chosen to speak for them. Now I am waiting."
+
+OO-PEE-TOO-KERAH-HAN-AP-EE-WEE-YIN (the Pond-maker) came forward
+and said:--"We have heard your words that you had to say to us as
+the representative of the Queen. We were glad to hear what you had
+to say and have gathered together in council and thought the words
+over amongst us, we were glad to hear you tell us how we might live
+by our own work. When I commence to settle on the lands to make a
+living for myself and my children, I beg of you to assist me in
+every way possible--when I am at a loss how to proceed I want the
+advice and assistance of the Government; the children yet unborn,
+I wish you to treat them in like manner as they advance in
+civilization like the white man. This is all I have been told to
+say now, if I have not said anything in a right manner I wish to be
+excused; this is the voice of the people."
+
+GOVERNOR:--"I have heard the voice of the people; I am glad to
+learn that they are looking forward to having their children
+civilized, that is the great object of the Government, as is proved
+by what I have offered. Those that come after us in the Government
+will think of your children as we think of you. The Queen's
+Councillors intend to send a man to look after the Indians, to be
+chief superintendent of Indian affairs, and under him there will be
+two or three others to live in the country, that the Queen's
+Councillors may know how the Indians are prospering.
+
+"I cannot promise however, that the Government will feed and support
+all the Indians; you are many, and if we were to try to do it, it
+would take a great deal of money, and some of you would never do
+anything for yourselves. What I have offered does not take away
+your living, you will have it then as you have now, and what I
+offer now is put on top of it. This I can tell you, the Queen's
+Government will always take a deep interest in your living."
+
+THE BADGER--"We want to think of our children; we do not want to be
+too greedy; when we commence to settle down on the reserves that we
+select, it is there we want your aid, when we cannot help ourselves
+and in case of troubles seen and unforeseen in the future."
+
+Sak-ah-moos and several other Indians in order repeated what The
+Badger had said.
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have told you that the money I have offered you would
+be paid to you and to your children's children. I know that the
+sympathy of the Queen, and her assistance, would be given you in
+any unforeseen circumstances. You must trust to her generosity.
+Last winter when some of the Indians wanted food because the crops
+had been destroyed by grasshoppers, although it was not promised
+in the treaty, nevertheless the Government sent money to buy them
+food, and in the spring when many of them were sick a man was sent
+to try and help them. We cannot foresee these things, and all I
+can promise is that you will be treated kindly, and in that
+extraordinary circumstances you must trust to the generosity of the
+Queen. My brother Commissioner, Mr. McKay, will speak to you in
+your own language."
+
+MR. McKAY--"My friends, I wish to make you a clear explanation of
+some things that it appears you do not understand. It has been said
+to you by your Governor that we did not come here to barter or
+trade with you for the land. You have made demands on the Governor,
+and from the way you have put them a white man would understand
+that you asked for daily provisions, also supplies for your hunt
+and for your pleasure excursions. Now my reasons for explaining to
+you are based on my past experience of treaties, for no sooner will
+the Governor and Commissioners turn their backs on you than some of
+you will say this thing and that thing was promised and the promise
+not fulfilled; that you cannot rely on the Queen's representative,
+that even he will not tell the truth, whilst among yourselves are
+the falsifiers. Now before we rise from here it must be understood,
+and it must be in writing, all that you are promised by the
+Governor and Commissioners, and I hope you will not leave until you
+have thoroughly understood the meaning of every word that comes
+from us. We have not come here to deceive you, we have not come
+here to rob you, we have not come here to take away anything that
+belongs to you, and we are not here to make peace as we would to
+hostile Indians, because you are the children of the Great Queen as
+we are, and there has never been anything but peace between us.
+What you have not understood clearly we will do our utmost to make
+perfectly plain to you."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have another word to say to the Indians on this
+matter: last year an unforeseen calamity came upon the people of
+Red River, the grasshoppers came and ate all their crops. There is
+no treaty between the people of Red River and the Queen except that
+they are her subjects. There was no promise to help them, but I
+sent down and said that unless help came some of the people would
+die from want of food, and that they had nothing wherewith to
+plant. The Queen's Councillors at once gave money to feed the
+people, and seed that they might plant the ground; but that was
+something out of and beyond every-day life, and therefore I say
+that some great sickness or famine stands as a special case. You
+may rest assured that when you go to your reserves you will be
+followed by the watchful eye and sympathetic hand of the Queen's
+Councillors."
+
+THE BADGER--"I do not want you to feed me every day; you must not
+understand that from what I have said. When we commence to settle
+down on the ground to make there our own living, it is then we want
+your help, and that is the only way that I can see how the poor can
+get along."
+
+GOVERNOR--"You will remember the promises which I have already
+made; I said you would get seed; you need not concern yourselves so
+much about what your grand-children are going to eat; your children
+will be taught, and then they will be as well able to take care of
+themselves as the whites around them."
+
+MIS-TAH-WAH-SIS (one of the leading Chiefs)--"It is well known that
+if we had plenty to live on from our gardens we would not still
+insist on getting more provision, but it is in case of any
+extremity, and from the ignorance of the Indian in commencing to
+settle that we thus speak; we are as yet in the dark; this is not a
+trivial matter for us.
+
+"We were glad to hear what the Governor was saying to us and we
+understood it, but we are not understood, we do not mean to ask for
+food for every day but only when we commence and in case of famine
+or calamity. What we speak of and do now will last as long as the
+sun shines and the river runs, we are looking forward to our
+children's children, for we are old and have but few days to live."
+
+AH-TAHK-AH-COOP (the other leading Chief)--"The things we have been
+talking about in our councils I believe are for our good. I think
+of the good Councillors of the Queen and of her Commissioners; I
+was told the Governor was a good man, and now that I see him I
+believe he is; in coming to see us, and what he has spoken, he has
+removed almost all obstacles and misunderstandings, and I hope he
+may remove them all. I have heard the good things you promise us,
+you have told us of the white man's way of living and mentioned
+some of the animals by which he gets his living, others you did
+not. We want food in the spring when we commence to farm; according
+as the Indian settles down on his reserves, and in proportion as he
+advances, his wants will increase."
+
+The Indians here asked for the afternoon to hold further council.
+To this the Governor said, "I grant the request of the Indians but
+I give them a word of warning, do not listen to every voice in your
+camp, listen to your wise men who know something of life, and do
+not come asking what is unreasonable, it pains me to have to say
+no, and I tell you again I cannot treat you with more favor than
+the other Indians. To-morrow, when we meet, speak out your minds
+openly, and I will answer, holding nothing back. Be ready to meet
+me to-morrow, as soon as my flag is raised, for remember I have
+a long journey before me and we ought to come to a speedy
+understanding. I trust the God who made you will give you wisdom
+in considering what you have to deal with."
+
+
+FOURTH DAY
+
+August 23rd.
+
+Shortly after the business had commenced, proceedings were
+interrupted by the loud talking of a Chippewa, who was addressing
+the Indians gathered in front of the tent. The Governor said,
+"There was an Indian, a Chippewa, stood and spoke to you, he did
+not speak to his Governor as he should have done: I am willing to
+hear what any band has to say, but they must speak to me. I have
+been talking to the Crees for several days. I wish to go on with
+the work; if the Chippewas want to talk with me I will hear them
+afterwards. They are a little handful of strangers from the east, I
+have treated with their whole nation, they are not wiser than their
+people.
+
+"There are many reasons why business should go on; I hear that the
+buffalo are near you and you want to be off to your hunt; there are
+many mouths here to feed and provisions are getting low; now my
+friends I am ready to hear you."
+
+TEE-TEE-QUAY-SAY--"Listen to me, my friends, all you who are
+sitting around here, and you will soon hear what the interpreter
+has to say for us."
+
+The interpreter then read a list of the things the Indians had
+agreed in council to ask, viz.:--One ox and cow for each family.
+Four hoes, two spades, two scythes and a whetstone for each family.
+Two axes, two hay forks, two reaping hooks, one plough and one
+harrow for every three families. To each Chief one chest of tools
+as proposed. Seed of every kind in full to every one actually
+cultivating the soil. To make some provision for the poor,
+unfortunate, blind and lame. To supply us with a minister and
+school teacher of whatever denomination we belong to. To prevent
+fire-water being sold in the whole Saskatchewan.
+
+As the tribe advances in civilization, all agricultural implements
+to be supplied in proportion.
+
+When timber becomes scarcer on the reserves we select for
+ourselves, we want to be free lo take it anywhere on the common. If
+our choice of a reserve does not please us before it is surveyed we
+want to be allowed to select another. We want to be at liberty to
+hunt on any place as usual. If it should happen that a Government
+bridge or scow is built on the Saskatchewan at any place, we want
+passage free. One boar, two sows, one horse, harness and waggon for
+each Chief. One cooking stove for each Chief. That we be supplied
+with medicines free of cost. That a hand-mill be given to each
+band. Lastly in case of war occurring in the country, we do not
+want to be liable to serve in it.
+
+TEE-TEE-QUAY-SAY then continued--"When we look back to the past we
+do not see where the Cree nation has ever watered the ground with
+the white man's blood, he has always been our friend and we his;
+trusting to the Giver of all good, to the generosity of the Queen,
+and to the Governor and his councillors, we hope you will grant us
+this request."
+
+WAH-WEE-KAH-NIHK-KAH-OO-TAH-MAH-HOTE (the man you strike in the
+back)--"Pity the voice of the Indian, if you grant what we request
+the sound will echo through the land; open the way; I speak for the
+children that they may be glad; the land is wide, there is plenty
+of room. My mouth is full of milk, I am only as a sucking child; I
+am glad; have compassion on the manner in which I was brought up;
+let our children be clothed; let us now stand in the light of day
+to see our way on this earth; long ago it was good when we first
+were made, I wish the same were back again. But now the law has
+come, and in that I wish to walk. What God has said, and our mother
+here (the earth), and these our brethren, let it be so."
+
+To this the Governor replied--"Indians, I made you my offer. You
+have asked me now for many things, some of which were already
+promised. You are like other Indians I have met, you can ask very
+well. You are right in asking, because you are saying what is in
+your minds. I have had taken down a list of what you have asked,
+and I will now consult with my brother Commissioners and give you
+my answer in a little while."
+
+After consultation, the Governor again had the Indians assembled,
+and said--"I am ready now to answer you, but understand well, it is
+not to be talked backwards and forwards. I am not going to act like
+a man bargaining for a horse for you. I have considered well what
+you have asked for, and my answer will be a final one. I cannot
+grant everything you ask, but as far as I can go I will, and when
+done I can only say you will be acting to your own interests if you
+take my hand.
+
+"I will speak of what you asked yesterday and to-day. I told you
+yesterday that if any great sickness or general famine overtook
+you, that on the Queen being informed of it by her Indian agent,
+she in her goodness would give such help as she thought the Indians
+needed. You asked for help when you settled on your reserves during
+the time you were planting. You asked very broadly at first. I
+think the request you make now is reasonable to a certain extent;
+but help should be given after you settle on the reserve for three
+years only, for after that time you should have food of your own
+raising, besides all the things that are given to you; this
+assistance would only be given to those actually cultivating the
+soil. Therefore, I would agree to give every spring, for three
+years, the sum of one thousand dollars to assist you in buying
+provisions while planting the ground. I do this because you seem
+anxious to make a living for yourselves, it is more than has been
+done anywhere else; I must do it on my own responsibility, and
+trust to the other Queen's councillors to ratify it.
+
+"I will now answer what you had written down and asked to-day. I
+expect you to be reasonable, none of us get all our own way. You
+asked first for four hoes, two spades, two scythes and whetstone,
+two axes, two hay forks and two reaping hooks for every family. I
+am willing to give them to every family actually cultivating the
+soil, for if given to all it would only encourage idleness. You ask
+a plough and harrow for every three families; I am willing to give
+them on the same conditions. The carpenters' tools, as well as the
+seed grain, were already promised. I cannot undertake the
+responsibility of promising provision for the poor, blind and lame.
+In all parts of the Queen's dominions we have them; the poor whites
+have as much reason to be helped as the poor Indian; they must be
+left to the charity and kind hearts of the people. If you are
+prosperous yourselves you can help your unfortunate brothers.
+
+"You ask for school teachers and ministers. With regard to
+ministers I cannot interfere. There are large societies formed for
+the purpose of sending the gospel to the Indians. The Government
+does not provide ministers anywhere in Canada. I had already
+promised you that when you settled down, and there were enough
+children, schools would be maintained. You see missionaries here on
+the ground, both Roman Catholic and Protestant; they have been in
+the country for many years. As it has been in the past, so it will
+be again, you will not be forgotten.
+
+"The police force is here to prevent the selling or giving of
+liquor to the Indians. The Queen has made a strong law against the
+fire-water; and the councillors of the country have made a law
+against the use of poison for animals.
+
+"You can have no difficulty in choosing your reserves; be sure to
+take a good place so that there will be no need to change; you
+would not be held to your choice until it was surveyed.
+
+"You want to be at liberty to hunt as before. I told you we did not
+want to take that means of living from you, you have it the same as
+before, only this, if a man, whether Indian or Half-breed, had a
+good field of grain, you would not destroy it with your hunt. In
+regard to bridges and scows on which you want passage free, I do
+not think it likely that the Government will build any, they prefer
+to leave it to private enterprise to provide these things.
+
+"In case of war you ask not to be compelled to fight. I trust there
+will be no war, but if it should occur I think the Queen would
+leave you to yourselves. I am sure she would not ask her Indian
+children to fight for her unless they wished, but if she did call
+for them and their wives and children were in danger they are not
+the men I think them to be, if they did not come forward to their
+protection.
+
+"A medicine chest will be kept at the house of each Indian agent,
+in case of sickness amongst you. I now come to two requests
+which I shall have to change a little, you have to think only of
+yourselves, we have to think of all the Indians and of the way in
+which we can procure the money to purchase all these things the
+Indians require. The Queen's Councillors will have to pay every
+year to help the Indians a very large sum of money.
+
+"I offered you to each band, according to size, two or four oxen,
+also one bull and four cows, and now you ask for an ox and a cow
+for each family. I suppose in this treaty there will be six hundred
+families, so it would take very much money to grant these things,
+and then all the other Indians would want them, so we cannot do
+it: but that you may see it that we are anxious to have you raise
+animals of your own we will give you for each band four oxen, one
+bull, six cows, one boar and two pigs. After a band has settled on
+a reserve and commenced to raise grain, we will give them a
+hand-mill.
+
+"At first we heard of only two Chiefs, now they are becoming many.
+You ask a cooking-stove for each, this we cannot give; he must find
+a way of cooking for himself. And now, although I fear I am going
+too far, I will grant the request that each Chief be furnished with
+a horse, harness, and waggon.
+
+"I have answered your requests very fully, and that there may be no
+mistake as to what we agree upon, it will be written down, and I
+will leave a copy with the two principal Chiefs, and as soon as it
+can be properly printed I will send copies to the Chiefs so that
+they may know what is written, and there can be no mistake.
+
+"It now rests with you, my friends, and I ask you without any
+hesitation to take what I have offered you."
+
+AH-TUCK-AH-COOP--"I never sent a letter to the Governor; I was
+waiting to meet him, and what we have asked we considered would be
+for the benefit of our children. I am not like some of my friends
+who have sent their messages down, even stretched out their hands
+to the Queen asking her to come; I have always said to my people
+that I would wait to see the Governor arrive, then he would ask
+what would benefit his children; now I ask my people, those that
+are in favour of the offer, to say so."
+
+They all assented by holding up their hands and shouting.
+
+OO-PEE-TOO-KORAH-HAIR-AP-EE-WEE-YIN (The Pond-maker)--"I do not
+differ from my people, but I want more explanation. I heard what
+you said yesterday, and I thought that when the law was established
+in this country it would be for our good. From what I can hear and
+see now, I cannot understand that I shall be able to clothe my
+children and feed them as long as sun shines and water runs. With
+regard to the different Chiefs who are to occupy the reserves, I
+expected they would receive sufficient for their support, this is
+why I speak. In the presence of God and the Queen's representative
+I say this, because I do not know how to build a house for myself,
+you see how naked I am, and if I tried to do it my naked body would
+suffer; again, I do not know how to cultivate the ground for
+myself, at the same time I quite understand what you have offered
+to assist us in this."
+
+JOSEPH THOMA proposed to speak for The Red Pheasant, Chief of
+Battle River Indians--"This is not my own desire that I speak now,
+it is very hard we cannot all be of one mind. You know some were
+not present when the list of articles mentioned was made, there are
+many things overlooked in it; it is true that what has been done
+this morning is good. What has been overlooked I will speak about.
+The one that is next to the Chief (first head man) should have had
+a horse as well. I want the Governor to give us somebody to build
+our houses, we cannot manage it ourselves, for my own part you see
+my crippled hand. It is true the Governor says he takes the
+responsibility on himself in granting the extra requests of the
+Indians, but let him consider on the quality of the land he has
+already treated for. There is no farming land whatever at the
+north-west angle, and he goes by what he has down there. What I
+want, as he has said, is twenty-five dollars to each Chief and to
+his head men twenty dollars. I do not want to keep the lands nor do
+I give away, but I have set the value. I want to ask as much as
+will cover the skin of the people, no more nor less. I think what
+he has offered is too little. When you spoke you mentioned
+ammunition, I did not hear mention of a gun; we will not be able to
+kill anything simply by setting fire to powder. I want a gun for
+each Chief and head man, and I want ten miles around the reserve
+where I may be settled. I have told the value I have put on my
+land."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I have heard what has been said on behalf of the Red
+Pheasant. I find fault that when there was handed me a list from
+the Indians, the Red Pheasant sat still and led me to believe he
+was a party to it. What I have offered was thought of long before I
+saw you; it has been accepted by others more in number than you
+are. I am glad that so many are of our mind. I am surprised you are
+not all. I hold out a full hand to you, and it will be a bad day
+for you and your children if I have to return and say that the
+Indians threw away my hand. I cannot accede to the requests of the
+Red Pheasant. I have heard and considered the wants of Mist-ow-asis
+and Ah-tuck-ah-coop, and when the people were spoken to I
+understood they were pleased. As for the little band who are not of
+one mind with the great body, I am quite sure that a week will not
+pass on leaving this before they will regret it. I want the Indians
+to understand that all that has been offered is a gift, and they
+still have the same mode of living as before."
+
+Here the principal Chiefs intimated the acceptance of the proposal
+of the Commissioners, the Red Pheasant repudiating the demands and
+remarks of Joseph Thoma.
+
+GOVERNOR--"I am happy at what we have done; I know it has been a
+good work; I know your hearts will be glad as the days pass. This
+will be the fourth time that I have done what we are going to do
+to-day. I thank you for your trust in me. I have had written down
+what I promised. For the Queen and in her name I will sign it,
+likewise Mr. McKay and Mr. Christie. Then I will ask the Chiefs and
+their head men to sign it in the presence of the witnesses, whites
+and Metis, around us, some of whom I will also ask to sign. What we
+have done has been done before the Great Spirit and in the face of
+the people.
+
+"I will ask the interpreter to read to you what has been written,
+and before I go away I will have a copy made to leave with the
+principal Chiefs. The payments will be made to-morrow, the suits of
+clothes, medals and flags given also, besides which a present of
+calicoes, shirts, tobacco, pipes and other articles will be given
+to the Indians."
+
+MIS-TOW-ASIS--"I wish to speak a word for some Half-breeds who wish
+to live on the reserves with us, they are as poor as we are and
+need help."
+
+GOVERNOR--"How many are there?"
+
+MIS-TOW-ASIS--"About twenty."
+
+GOVERNOR--"The Queen has been kind to the Half-breeds of Red River
+and has given them much land; we did not come as messengers to the
+Half-breeds, but to the Indians. I have heard some Half-breeds want
+to take lands at Red River and join the Indians here, but they
+cannot take with both hands. The Half-breeds of the North-West
+cannot come into the Treaty. The small class of Half-breeds who
+live as Indians and with the Indians, can be regarded as Indians by
+the Commissioners, who will judge of each case on its own merits as
+it comes up, and will report their action to the Queen's
+Councillors for their approval."
+
+The treaty was then signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, Hon. James
+McKay, Hon. W. J. Christie, Mist-ow-asis, Ah-tuck-ah-coop, and the
+remainder of the Chiefs and the Councillors.
+
+
+August 24th.
+
+Immediately on meeting at ten a.m., the Governor called up
+Mis-tow-asis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop, the two principal Chiefs, and
+presented their uniforms, medals and flags; after them the lesser
+Chiefs, their medals and flags, and told them they and their
+Councillors would get their uniforms in the evening from the
+stores. The Governor then told them that Mr. Christie would
+commence payments as soon as he had finished talking with the few
+Saulteaux; he expected the Chiefs and Councillors to assist in
+every way possible; if any of the Chiefs had decided where they
+would like to have their reserves, they could tell Mr. Christie
+when they went to be paid. "Now, I have only to say farewell; we
+have done a good work; we will never all of us meet again face to
+face, but I go on to my other work, feeling that I have, in the
+Queen's hands, been instrumental to your good. I pray God's
+blessing upon you to make you happy and prosperous, and I bid you
+farewell."
+
+The Indians intimated their pleasure by a general shout of
+approval, and thus broke up the conference which resulted in the
+Treaty with the Carlton Crees.
+
+The Lieutenant-Governor then met the few Chippewas who came
+forward, and told them that they must be paid at the place where
+they belonged, that they could not be paid at Fort Pitt, and said,
+"If what I have heard is true I shall not be well pleased. I am
+told you are of a bad mind; you proposed to prevent me from
+crossing the river; [Footnote: South Saskatchewan.] if you did it
+was very foolish; you could no more stop me than you could the
+river itself. Then I am told you tried to prevent the other Indians
+from making the treaty. I tell you this to your faces so if it is
+not true you can say so; but whether it is or not it makes no
+difference in my duty. The Queen has made treaties with the whole
+Chippewa nation except two or three little wandering bands such as
+you; you have heard all that has been said and done these many
+days; I would like to see you helped as well as the other Indians;
+I do not think you are wiser than the Chippewas from Lake Superior
+to the North-West Angle; I went there with Mr. McKay, and we made a
+treaty with twenty Chiefs and four thousand Chippewas."
+
+NUS-WAS-OO-WAH-TUM--"When we asked the Cree bands what they
+intended to do with regard to the treaty they would not come to us;
+it is true we told them 'do not be in a hurry in giving your
+assent;' you ought to be detained a little while; all along the
+prices have been to one side, and we have had no say. He that made
+us provided everything for our mode of living; I have seen this all
+along, it has brought me up and I am not tired of it, and for you,
+the white man, everything has been made for your maintenance, and
+now that you come and stand on this our earth (ground) I do not
+understand; I see dimly to-day what you are doing, and I find fault
+with a portion of it; that is why I stand back; I would have been
+glad if every white man of every denomination were now present to
+hear what I say; through what you have done you have cheated my
+kinsmen."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I will not sit here and hear such words from the
+Chippewas. Who are you? You come from my country and you tell me
+the Queen has cheated you; it is not so. You say we have the best
+of the bargains; you know it is not so. If you have any requests to
+make in a respectful manner I am ready to hear."
+
+CHIPPEWA--"The God that made us and who alone is our master, I am
+afraid of Him to deviate from his commandment."
+
+The Chippewas, about half a dozen in all, being from Quill Lake
+chiefly, left, and Mr. Christie proceeded with the payments, which
+occupied the remainder of the 24th and all the 25th. He paid in
+all, Chiefs, 13; head men, 44; men, 262; women, 473; boys, 473;
+girls, 481; from Treaty Number Four, 41; total, 1,787. A large
+number of the tribe absent at the hunt will be paid next year.
+
+Next morning, the 26th, the whole Cree camp, headed by their Chiefs
+and head men, wearing their uniforms and medals, came to Carlton
+House and assembled in the square to pay their farewell visit to
+the Governor; the Chiefs came forward in order and shook hands,
+each one making a few remarks expressive of their gratitude for the
+benefits received and promised, and of their good will to the white
+man.
+
+The Governor briefly replied, telling them that he was much
+gratified with the manner in which they had behaved throughout the
+treaty; he had never dealt with a quieter, more orderly and
+respectful body of Indians; he was pleased with the manner in which
+they had met him and taken his advice; he was glad to hear that
+they were determined to go to work and help themselves: he hoped
+their Councils would always be wisely conducted, and that they
+would do everything in their power to maintain peace amongst
+themselves and with their neighbors; he hoped the Almighty would
+give them wisdom and prosper them. They then gave three cheers for
+the Queen, the Governor, the mounted police and Mr. Lawrence
+Clarke, of Carlton House.
+
+On the 27th a message was received from Duck Lake from the Willow
+Indians, the band which had hitherto held aloof, in reply to a
+message sent to them by the Governor, that they would meet the
+Governor and Commissioners at the place designated by the Governor,
+the camp of the Hon. James McKay, about five miles from Carlton
+House. Accordingly, the next morning the Commissioners met them,
+and after the usual ceremonial hand-shaking,
+
+SAY-SWAY-PUS--"God has given us a beautiful day for which I feel
+very grateful. In grasping your hand I am grasping that of our
+Mother, the Queen. If it is your intention to honor me with a
+Chief's clothing, I wish you would give me one that would
+correspond with the sky above. I hope we will be able to understand
+each other."
+
+CHIN-UN-US-KUT (The Stump)--"I feel very grateful that I am spared
+by the Great Spirit to see this day of his, may we be blessed in
+whatever we do this day."
+
+GOVERNOR--"Crees, my brother children of the Great Queen, I am glad
+to meet you here to-day. I say as you said the first day I saw you,
+'it is a bright day and I hope God will bless us.' I have been
+sorry for you for many days. I took you by the hand on the first
+day, but a wall rose up between us, it seemed as if you were trying
+to draw away but I would not let your hand go. I talked for many
+days with the great body of the Indians here but you refused to
+meet me; the others and I understood each other. I was going away
+to-day, but I thought pity of you who had not talked with me. I was
+sent here to make you understand the Queen's will. I received your
+letter last night and was glad to learn that you wanted to accept
+the terms I had offered, and which had been accepted by the other
+Indians. Before I received your letter I had sent you one asking
+you to meet me here where we are now, and I am glad you have come,
+as I could not otherwise have met you.
+
+"One of you made a request that if he were accepted as a Chief, he
+should have a blue coat. I do not yet know who the Chiefs are. To
+be a Chief he must have followers. One man came forward as a Chief
+and I had to tell him unless you have twenty tents you cannot
+continue as a Chief.
+
+"The color of your Chief's coat is perhaps a little thing; red is
+the color all the Queen's Chiefs wear. I wear this coat, but it is
+only worn by those who stand as the Queen's Councillors; her
+soldiers and her officers wear red, and all the other Chiefs of the
+Queen wear the coats we have brought, and the good of this is that
+when the Chief is seen with his uniform and medal every one knows
+he is an officer of hers. I should be sorry to see you different
+from the others, and now that you understand you would not wish
+it."
+
+KAH-MEE-YIS-TOO-WAYS (The Beardy)--"I feel grateful for this day,
+and I hope we will be blessed. I am glad that I see something that
+will be of use; I wish that we all as a people may be benefitted by
+this. I want that all these things should be preserved in a manner
+that they might be useful to us all; it is in the power of man to
+help each other. We should not act foolishly with the things that
+are given us to live by. I think some things are too little, they
+will not be sufficient for our wants. I do not want very much more
+than what has been promised, only a little thing. I will be glad
+if you will help me by writing my request down; on account of the
+buffalo I am getting anxious. I wish that each one should have an
+equal share, if that could be managed; in this I think we would be
+doing good. Perhaps this is not the only time that we shall see
+each other. Now I suppose another can say what he wishes."
+
+SAY-SWAY-KUS--"What my brother has said, I say the same, but I want
+to tell him and our mother the Queen, that although we understand
+the help they offer us, I am getting alarmed when I look at the
+buffalo, it appears to me as if there was only one. I trust to the
+Queen and to the Governor, it is only through their aid we can
+manage to preserve them. I want to hear from the Governor himself
+an answer to what I have said, so I may thoroughly understand."
+
+THE BEARDY--"Those things which the Almighty has provided for the
+sustenance of his children may be given us as well; where our
+Father has placed the truth we wish the same to be carried out
+here, I do not set up a barrier to any road that my children may
+live by: I want the payment to exist as long as the sun shines and
+the river runs: if we exercise all our good, this surely will
+happen: all of our words upon which we agree, I wish to have a copy
+written on skin as promised; I want my brother to tell me where I
+can get this. He has said, 'what I have done with the others I will
+do with you:' I accept the terms, no doubt it will run further
+according to our number. When I am utterly unable to help myself I
+want to receive assistance. I will render all the assistance I can
+to my brother in taking care of the country. I want from my brother
+a suit of clothing in color resembling the sky so that he may be
+able when he sees me to know me; I want these two (sitting by him)
+to be Chiefs in our place with me and to have six Councillors (two
+each) in all."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I will speak to you in regard to food as I have spoken
+to the other Indians; we cannot support or feed the Indians every
+day, further than to help them to find the means of doing it for
+themselves by cultivating the soil. If you were to be regularly fed
+some of you would do nothing at all for your own support; in this
+matter we will do as we have agreed with the other Indians, and no
+more. You will get your share of the one thousand dollars' worth of
+provisions when you commence to work on your reserves.
+
+"In a national famine or general sickness, not what happens in
+every day life, but if a great blow comes on the Indians, they
+would not be allowed to die like dogs.
+
+"What occurred in Red River last year from the destruction of crops
+by the grasshoppers, affected our whole people, and without being
+bound to do anything, the charity and humanity of the Government
+sent means to help them.
+
+"I cannot give the Chief a blue coat: he must accept the red one
+and he must not suffer so small a matter as the color of a coat to
+stand between us. I accept the three Chiefs with two Councillors
+for each. With regard to the preservation of the buffalo, it is a
+subject of great importance, it will be considered by the
+Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the North-West Territories to
+see if a wise law can be passed, one that will be a living law that
+can be carried out and obeyed. If such a law be passed it will be
+printed in Cree as well as in English and French; but what the law
+will be I cannot tell--you held councils over the treaty, you did
+not know before the councils closed what you would decide as to the
+treat--no more can I tell what the North-West Council will decide."
+
+A request was then made that the treaty should include the
+Half-breeds, to which the Governor replied: "I have explained to
+the other Indians that the Commissioners did not come to the
+Half-breeds: there were however a certain class of Indian
+Half-breeds who had always lived in the camp with the Indians and
+were in fact Indians, would be recognized, but no others."
+
+The Chiefs and head men then signed the treaty in the presence of
+witnesses, the medals and flags were distributed, payments and
+distribution of clothing proceeded with and finished, and the
+conference came to an end.
+
+The Lieutenant-Governor and party started from Carlton House on the
+31st of August at noon, for Fort Pitt, and when within about six
+miles of that post came up with a detachment of Mounted Police
+under Inspectors Jarvis and Walker, who escorted them to the fort,
+arriving on the day appointed (5th September) at an early hour.
+
+There were already assembled near the fort and on the banks of the
+Saskatchewan over one hundred lodges, and as more were immediately
+expected they requested postponement of negotiations until the 7th
+September.
+
+On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, one of the oldest and most
+respected of the Cree Chiefs, with about thirty of his chief men,
+who had left their hunt and come in to Fort Pitt purposely to
+attend the treaty negotiations, called on the Governor to express
+their satisfaction at his coming and their pleasure in seeing him;
+the greeting which was certainly affectionate, consisted in the
+embrace of both arms about the neck and a fraternal kiss on either
+cheek; after a short conversation the Governor told them he
+expected them to be ready to meet him at his tent in the morning;
+time was rapidly passing and he had a long journey yet before him;
+he trusted their Councils would be wise and the results would be
+beneficial to them.
+
+The Hon. Jas. McKay arrived from Battle River in the evening, and
+reported that he had met there a number of Indians, principally
+Saulteaux, who had been in camp at that place for some time. They
+said there had been about seventy lodges altogether, but as the
+buffalo were coming near, the poorer ones had started out to hunt,
+leaving only about ten lodges there. The remaining ones expressed
+good feeling and said they would like to have waited until the time
+appointed (September 15th) to meet the Governor and take the
+treaty, yet as the buffalo hunt was of so much importance to them
+they could not afford to lose the time, knowing that the Governor
+had to go to Fort Pitt and return before they could see him,
+consequently the whole band went out to the plains. This band was
+composed, it was afterwards ascertained, of the Saulteaux of Jack
+Fish Lake and of some Crees under the Yellow Sky Chief, and were
+favorably disposed though unable to remain. They numbered in all
+sixty-seven tents.
+
+September 7th.
+
+At ten in the morning the Governor and Commissioners, escorted by
+the Mounted Police, proceeded to the treaty tent a short distance
+from the fort. About eleven o'clock the Indians commenced to
+gather, as at Carlton, in a large semi-circle. In front were the
+young men, galloping about on their horses, then the Chiefs and
+head men, followed by the main body of the band to the number of
+two or three hundred. As they approached the manoeuvres of the
+horsemen became more and more excited and daring, racing wildly
+about so rapidly as to be barely distinguishable; unfortunately,
+from some mischance, two horses and their riders came into
+collision with such tremendous force as to throw both horses and
+men violently to the ground; both horses were severely injured and
+one of the Indians had his hip put out of joint; fortunately, Dr.
+Kittson of the police, was near by and speedily gave relief to the
+poor sufferer. The ceremonies, however, still went on; four
+pipe-stems were carried about and presented to be stroked in token
+of good feeling and amity (during this performance the band of the
+Mounted Police played "God save the Queen"), blessings invoked on
+the whole gathering, the dances performed by the various bands, and
+finally the pipes of peace smoked by the Governor and Commissioners
+in turn. The stems, which were finely decorated, were placed with
+great solemnity on the table in front of the Governor, to be
+covered for the bearers with blue cloth.
+
+The Chiefs and head men now seated themselves in front of the tent,
+when the Governor addressed them:
+
+"Indians of the plains, Crees, Chippewayans, Assiniboines and
+Chippewas, my message is to all. I am here to-day as your Governor
+under the Queen. The Crees for many days have sent word that they
+wanted to see some one face to face. The Crees are the principal
+tribe of the plain Indians, and it is for me a pleasant duty to be
+here to-day and receive the welcome I have from them. I am here
+because the Queen and her Councillors have the good of the Indian
+at heart, because you are the Queen's children and we must think of
+you for to-day and to-morrow; the condition of the Indians and
+their future has given the Queen's Councillors much anxiety. In the
+old provinces of Canada from which I came we have many Indians,
+they are growing in numbers and are as a rule happy and prosperous;
+for a hundred years red and white hands have been clasped together
+in peace. The instructions of the Queen are to treat the Indians as
+brothers, and so we ought to be. The Great Spirit made this earth
+we are on. He planted the trees and made the rivers flow for the
+good of all his people, white and red; the country is very wide and
+there is room for all. It is six years since the Queen took back
+into her own hands the government of her subjects, red and white,
+in this country; it was thought her Indian children would be better
+cared for in her own hand. This is the seventh time in the last
+five years that her Indian children have been called together for
+this purpose; this is the fourth time that I have met my Indian
+brothers, and standing here on this bright day with the sun above
+us, I cast my eyes to the East down to the great lakes and I see a
+broad road leading from there to the Red River, I see it stretching
+on to Ellice, I see it branching there, the one to Qu'Appelle and
+Cypress Hills, the other by Pelly to Carlton; it is a wide and
+plain trail. Anyone can see it, and on that road, taking for the
+Queen, the hand of the Governor and Commissioners I see all the
+Indians. I see the Queen's Councillors taking the Indian by the
+hand saying we are brothers, we will lift you up, we will teach
+you, if you will learn, the cunning of the white man. All along
+that road I see Indians gathering, I see gardens growing and houses
+building; I see them receiving money from the Queen's Commissioners
+to purchase clothing for their children; at the same time I see
+them enjoying their hunting and fishing as before, I see them
+retaining their old mode of living with the Queen's gift in
+addition.
+
+"I met the Crees at Carlton, they heard my words there, they read
+my face, and through that my heart, and said my words were true,
+and they took my hand on behalf of the Queen. What they did I wish
+you to do; I wish you to travel on the road I have spoken of, a
+road I see stretching out broad and plain to the Rocky Mountains. I
+know you have been told many stories, some of them not true; do not
+listen to the bad voices of men who have their own ends to serve,
+listen rather to those who have only your good at heart. I have
+come a long way to meet you; last year I sent you a message that
+you would be met this year, and I do not forget my promises.
+
+"I went to Ottawa, where the Queen's Councillors have their council
+chamber, to talk, amongst other things, about you.
+
+"I have come seven hundred miles to see you. Why should I take all
+this trouble? For two reasons, first, the duty was put upon me as
+one of the Queen's Councillors, to see you with my brother
+Commissioners, Hon. W. J. Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay. The other
+reason is a personal one, because since I was a young man my heart
+was warm to the Indians, and I have taken a great interest in them;
+for more than twenty-five years I have studied their condition in
+the present and in the future. I have been many years in public
+life, but the first words I spoke in public were for the Indians,
+and in that vision of the day I saw the Queen's white men
+understanding their duty; I saw them understanding that they had no
+right to wrap themselves up in a cold mantle of selfishness, that
+they had no right to turn away and say, 'Am I my brother's keeper?'
+On the contrary, I saw them saying, the Indians are our brothers,
+we must try to help them to make a living for themselves and their
+children. I tell you, you must think of those who will come after
+you. As I came here I saw tracks leading to the lakes and
+water-courses, once well beaten, now grown over with grass; I saw
+bones bleaching by the wayside; I saw the places where the buffalo
+had been, and I thought what will become of the Indian. I said to
+myself, we must teach the children to prepare for the future; if we
+do not, but a few suns will pass and they will melt away like snow
+before the sun in spring-time. You know my words are true; you see
+for yourselves and know that your numbers are lessening every year.
+Now the whole burden of my message from the Queen is that we wish
+to help you in the days that are to come, we do not want to take
+away the means of living that you have now, we do not want to tie
+you down; we want you to have homes of your own where your children
+can be taught to raise for themselves food from the mother earth.
+You may not all be ready for that, but some, I have no doubt, are,
+and in a short time others will follow. I am here to talk plainly,
+I have nothing to hide; I am here to tell you what we are ready to
+do. Your tribe is not all here at the present time, some of the
+principal Chiefs are absent, this cannot be avoided, the country is
+wide and when the buffalo come near you must follow them; this does
+not matter, for what I have to give is for the absent as well as
+for the present. Next year if the treaty is made, a Commissioner
+will be sent to you, and you will be notified of the times and
+places of meeting, so that you will not have long journeys; after
+that, two or three servants of the Queen will be appointed to live
+in the country to look after the Indians, and see that the terms of
+the treaty are carried out.
+
+"I have not yet given you my message. I know you have heard what
+your brothers did at Carlton, and I expect you to do the same here,
+for if you do not you will be the first Indians who refused to take
+my hand. At Carlton I had a slight difficulty; one of the Chiefs
+dreamt that instead of making the treaty at the camp of the great
+body of the Indians, I made it at his, and so his people stood
+aside. I was sorry for him and his people. I did not wish to go and
+leave them out. I sent him word after I had made the treaty, and
+brought him in with the others. When I went to North-West Angle I
+met the Chippewa nation; they were not all present, but the absent
+ones were seen the next year. I told them the message from the
+Queen, and what she wished to do for them; in all four thousand
+Indians accepted the Treaty, and now, I am glad to say, many of
+them have homes and gardens of their own. The next year I went to
+Qu'Appelle and saw the Crees and Chippewas, and there five thousand
+understood us and took our hands. Last summer I went with Mr. McKay
+to Lake Winnipeg, and there all the Swampy Crees accepted the
+Queen's terms. Now I have stroked the pipe with your brothers at
+Carlton as with you.
+
+"Three years ago a party of Assiniboines were shot by American
+traders; men, women and children were killed; we reported the
+affair to Ottawa; we said the time has come when you must send the
+red-coated servants of the Queen to the North-West to protect the
+Indian from fire-water, from being shot down by men who know no
+law, to preserve peace between the Indians, to punish all who break
+the law, to prevent whites from doing wrong to Indians, and they
+are here to-day to do honor to the office which I hold. Our Indian
+Chiefs wear red coats, and wherever they meet the police they will
+know they meet friends. I know that you have been told that if war
+came you would be put in the front, this is not so. Your brothers
+at Carlton asked me that they might not be forced to fight, and I
+tell you, as I assured them, you will never be asked to fight
+against your will; and I trust the time will never come of war
+between the Queen and the great country near us.
+
+"Again, I say, all we seek is your good; I speak openly, as brother
+to brother, as a father to his children, and I would give you a
+last advice, hear my words, come and join the great band of Indians
+who are walking hand-in-hand with us on the road I spoke of when I
+began--a road, I believe in my heart, will lead the Indian on to a
+much more comfortable state than he is in now. My words, when they
+are accepted, are written down, and they last, as I have said to
+the others, as long as the sun shines and the river runs. I expect
+you are prepared for the message I have to deliver, and I will wait
+to see if any of the Chiefs wish to speak before I go further."
+
+Sweet Grass, the principal Cree Chief, rose, and taking the
+Governor by the hand, said, "We have heard what the Governor has
+said, and now the Indians want to hear the terms of the treaty,
+after which they will all shake hands with the Governor and
+Commissioners, we then want to go to our camp to meet in council."
+
+The Governor then very carefully and distinctly explained the terms
+and promises of the treaty as made at Carlton; this was received by
+the Indians with loud assenting exclamations.
+
+On the 8th the Indians sent a message that they required further
+time for deliberation, and the meeting was put off until the 9th.
+
+On the morning of the 9th the Indians were slow in gathering, as
+they wished to settle all difficulties and misunderstandings
+amongst themselves before coming to the treaty tent, this was
+apparently accomplished about eleven a.m., when the whole body
+approached and seated themselves in good order, when the Governor
+said:--
+
+"Indian children of the Great Queen, we meet again on a bright day;
+you heard many words from me the other day; I delivered you my
+message from the Queen; I held out my hand in the Queen's name,
+full of her bounty. You asked time to consult together; I gave it
+to you very gladly, because I did not come here to surprise you. I
+trust the Great Spirit has put good thoughts into your hearts, and
+your wise men have found my words good. I am now ready to hear
+whether you are prepared to do as the great body of the Indian
+people have done; it is now for the Indians to speak through those
+whom they may choose; my heart is warm to you, and my ears are
+open."
+
+Ku-ye-win (The Eagle) addressed the Indians, telling them not to be
+afraid, that the Governor was to them as a brother; that what the
+Queen wished to establish through him was for their good, and if
+any of them wished to speak to do so.
+
+After waiting some time the Governor said, "I had hoped the Indians
+would have taken me at my word, and taken me as a brother and a
+friend. True, I am the Queen's Governor; that I am here to-day
+shows me to be your friend. Why can you not open your hearts to me?
+I have met many Indians before, but this is the first time I have
+had all the talking to do myself. Now, cast everything behind your
+backs, and speak to me face to face. I have offered as we have done
+to the other Indians. Tell me now whether you will take my hand and
+accept it; there is nothing to be ashamed of, nothing to be afraid
+of; think of the good of your children and your children's
+children. Stand up now like wise men and tell me if you will take
+what I offered. I cannot believe it to be possible that you would
+throw my hand back. Speak and do not be afraid or ashamed."
+
+WEE-KAS-KOO-KEE-SAY-YIN (Sweet Grass)--"I thank you for this day,
+and also I thank you for what I have seen and heard, I also thank
+the Queen for sending you to act for our good. I am glad to have a
+brother and friend in you, which undoubtedly will raise us above
+our present condition. I am glad for your offers, and thank you
+from my heart. I speak this in the presence of the Divine Being. It
+is all for our good, I see nothing to be afraid of, I therefore
+accept of it gladly and take your hand to my heart, may this
+continue as long as this earth stands and the river flows. The
+Great King, our Father, is now looking upon us this day, He regards
+all the people equal with one another; He has mercy on the whole
+earth; He has opened a new world to us. I have pity on all those
+who have to live by the buffalo. If I am spared until this time
+next year I want this my brother to commence to act for me,
+thinking thereby that the buffalo may be protected. It is for that
+reason I give you my hand. If spared, I shall commence at once to
+clear a small piece of land for myself, and others of my kinsmen
+will do the same. We will commence hand in hand to protect the
+buffalo. When I hold your hand I feel as if the Great Father were
+looking on us both as brothers. I am thankful. May this earth here
+never see the white man's blood spilt on it. I thank God that we
+stand together, that you all see us; I am thankful that I can raise
+up my head, and the white man and red man can stand together as
+long as the sun shines. When I hold your hands and touch your
+heart, as I do now (suiting his action to the words), let us be as
+one. Use your utmost to help me and help my children, so that they
+may prosper."
+
+The Chief's remarks were assented to by the Indians by loud
+ejaculations.
+
+GOVERNOR--"I rise with a glad heart; we have come together and
+understood each other. I am glad that you have seen the right way.
+I am glad you have accepted so unanimously the offer made. I will
+tell the Queen's Councillors what good hearts their Indian children
+have; I will tell them that they think of the good of their
+children's children.
+
+"I feel that we have done to-day a good work; the years will pass
+away and we with them, but the work we have done to-day will stand
+as the hills. What we have said and done has been written down; my
+promises at Carlton have been written down and cannot be rubbed
+out, so there can be no mistake about what is agreed upon. I will
+now have the terms of the treaty fully read and explained to you,
+and before I go away I will leave a copy with your principal Chief.
+
+"After I and the Commissioners, for the Queen, have signed the
+treaty, I will call upon your Chief and Councillors to do the same;
+and before the payments are made by Mr. Christie, I will give the
+Chiefs the medals of the Queen and their flags.
+
+"Some of your Chiefs and people are away; next year we will send
+men near to where their bands live, notice will be given, and those
+who are away now will receive the present of money we are going to
+give you, the same as if they had been here, and when you go back
+to the plains I ask you to tell your brothers what we have done."
+
+The Governor and Commissioners then signed the treaty on the part
+of the Queen, and nine Chiefs and as many of their Councillors as
+were with them signed on behalf of the Indians.
+
+James Seenum, Chief of White Fish Lake Crees, said that when he
+commenced to cultivate the soil some years ago, Mr. Christie, then
+chief factor of the Hudson Bay Company, gave him a plough that he
+had used but it was now broken. When he commenced he and his
+brothers drew the plough themselves, and they pulled up roots and
+used them for hoes. Mr. Christie also gave me a pit-saw and a
+grindstone, and I am using them yet. I feel my heart sore in the
+spring when my children want to plough--when they have no
+implements to use, that is why I am asking them now to have them
+sent as soon as possible. By following what I have been taught I
+find it helps me a great deal.
+
+THE LITTLE HUNTER--"I am here alone just now; if I am spared to see
+next spring, then I will select my Councillors, those that I think
+worthy I will choose. I am glad from my very heart. I feel in
+taking the Governor's hand as if I was taking the Queen's. When I
+hear her words that she is going to put to rights this country, it
+is the help of God that has put it in her heart to come to our
+assistance. In sending her bounty to us I wish an everlasting grasp
+of her hand, as long as the sun moves and the river flows. I am
+glad that the truth and all good things have been opened to us. I
+am thankful for the children for they will prosper. All the
+children who are sitting here hope that the Great Spirit will look
+down upon us as one."
+
+SEE-KAHS-KOOTCH (The Cut Arm)--"I am glad of the goodness of the
+great Queen. I recognize now that this that I once dreaded most is
+coming to my aid and doing for me what I could not do for myself."
+
+TUS-TUK-EE-SKUAIS--"I am truly glad that the Queen has made a new
+country for me. I am glad that all my friends and children will not
+be in want of food hereafter. I am glad that we have everything
+which we had before still extended to us."
+
+PEE-QUAY-SIS--"I need not say anything; I have been well pleased
+with all that I have heard, and I need not speak as we are all
+agreed."
+
+KIN-OO-SAY-OO (The Fish), Chief of the Chippewayans--"I shake hands
+with the Queen, and I am glad for what she is doing and what she is
+to do for us. If I could have used my own language I would then be
+able to say more."
+
+The Governor then called on Sweet Grass and placed the Queen's
+medal around his neck, the band of the Police playing "God save the
+Queen." The rest of the Chiefs' medals, flags and uniforms were
+given as soon as possible, and Mr. Christie proceeded to make the
+payments and distribute the presents.
+
+
+September 13th.
+
+The Chiefs and head men came to pay their respects to the
+Commissioners in the morning, at Fort Pitt.
+
+SWEET GRASS--"We are all glad to see you here, and we have come to
+say good-bye before you leave."
+
+THE BIG BEAR--"I find it difficult to express myself, because some
+of the bands are not represented. I have come off to speak for the
+different bands that are out on the plains. It is no small matter
+we were to consult about. I expected the Chiefs here would have
+waited until I arrived. The different bands that are out on the
+plains told me that I should speak in their stead; the Stony
+Indians as well. The people who have not come, stand as a barrier
+before what I would have had to say; my mode of living is hard."
+
+SWEET GRASS, to Big Bear--"My friend, you see the representative of
+the Queen here, who do you suppose is the maker of it. I think the
+Great Spirit put it into their hearts to come to our help; I feel
+as if I saw life when I see the representative of the Queen; let
+nothing be a barrier between you and him; it is through great
+difficulty this has been brought to us. Think of our children and
+those to come after, there is life and succor for them, say yes and
+take his hand."
+
+The White Fish Lake Chief said, "We have all taken it, and we think
+it is for our good."
+
+BIG BEAR--"Stop, stop, my friends, I have never seen the Governor
+before; I have seen Mr. Christie many times. I heard the Governor
+was to come and I said I shall see him; when I see him I will make
+a request that he will save me from what I most dread, that is: the
+rope to be about my neck (hanging), it was not given to us by the
+Great Spirit that the red man or white man should shed each other's
+blood."
+
+GOVERNOR--"It was given us by the Great Spirit, man should not shed
+his brother's blood, and it was spoken to us that he who shed his
+brother's blood, should have his own spilt.
+
+"No good Indian has the rope about his neck. If a white man killed
+an Indian, not in self defence, the rope would be put around his
+neck. He saw red-coats, they were here to protect Indians and
+whites.
+
+"If a man tried to kill you, you have a right to defend; but no man
+has a right to kill another in cold blood, and we will do all we
+can to punish such. The good Indian need never be afraid; their
+lives will be safer than ever before. Look at the condition of the
+Blackfeet. Before the red-coats went, the Americans were taking
+their furs and robes and giving them whiskey--we stopped it, they
+have been able to buy back two thousand horses--before that, robes
+would have gone to Americans for whiskey."
+
+BIG BEAR--"What we want is that we should hear what will make our
+hearts glad, and all good peoples' hearts glad. There were plenty
+things left undone, and it does not look well to leave them so."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I do not know what has been left undone!"
+
+BIG BEAR said he would like to see his people before he acted. "I
+have told you what I wish, that there be no hanging."
+
+GOVERNOR--"What you ask will not be granted, why are you so anxious
+about bad men?
+
+"The Queen's law punishes murder with death, and your request
+cannot be granted."
+
+BIG BEAR--"Then these Chiefs will help us to protect the buffalo,
+that there may be enough for all. I have heard what has been said,
+and I am glad we are to be helped; but why do these men not speak?"
+
+The Chief of the Chippewayans said, "We do not speak, because Sweet
+Grass has spoken for us all. What he says, we all say."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I wish the Bear to tell Short Tail and See-yah-kee-maht,
+the other Chiefs, what has been done, and that it is for them, as
+if they had been here. Next year they and their people can join the
+treaty and they will lose nothing. I wish you to understand fully
+about two questions, and tell the others. The North-West Council is
+considering the framing of a law to protect the buffaloes, and when
+they make it, they will expect the Indians to obey it. The
+Government will not interfere with the Indian's daily life, they
+will not bind him. They will only help him to make a living on the
+reserves, by giving him the means of growing from the soil, his
+food. The only occasion when help would be given, would be if
+Providence should send a great famine or pestilence upon the whole
+Indian people included in the treaty. We only looked at something
+unforseen and not at hard winters or the hardships of single bands,
+and this, both you and I, fully understood.
+
+"And now I have done, I am going away. The country is large,
+another Governor will be sent in my place; I trust you will receive
+him as you have done me, and give him your confidence. He will live
+amongst you. Indians of the plains, I bid you farewell. I never
+expect to see you again, face to face. I rejoice that you listened
+to me, and when I go back to my home beyond the great lakes, I will
+often think of you and will rejoice to hear of your prosperity. I
+ask God to bless you and your children. Farewell."
+
+The Indians responded by loud ejaculations of satisfaction, and the
+Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with Sweet Grass, each shook
+hands with the Governor, and addressed him in words of parting,
+elevating his hand, as they grasped it, to heaven, and invoking the
+blessings of the Great Spirit.
+
+The Bear remained sitting until all had said good-bye to the
+Governor, and then he rose and taking his hand, said, "I am glad to
+meet you, I am alone; but if I had known the time, I would have
+been here with all my people. I am not an undutiful child, I do not
+throw back your hand; but as my people are not here, I do not sign.
+I will tell them what I have heard, and next year I will come."
+About an hour afterwards the Big Bear came to the Fort Pitt House
+to see the Governor, and again repeated that he accepted the treaty
+as if he had signed it, and would come next year, with all his
+people, to meet the Commissioners and accept it.
+
+The Governor and party left Fort Pitt for Battle River, on the 13th
+at one o'clock, and arrived there on the 15th. There were no
+Indians there, except the Red Pheasant's band, who had been treated
+with at Battle River.
+
+On the 16th the Red Pheasant and his Councillors came to see the
+Governor and the Commissioners, with the following result:
+
+THE RED PHEASANT--"I am a Battle River Indian, and I have chosen
+this place before, and I am glad to see the Government here too, as
+I know there is a chance of living. I want the Half-breed claims at
+Battle River to be respected, and I do not wish to turn out any
+white man; but I wish to return to my former mode of life.
+
+"Ever since my grandfather lived at Battle River, it has been my
+home. Our houses were swept off by a flood two years ago, and after
+that we repaired some old houses that were built by outsiders
+(other Indians), and we had fenced in the buildings; but a short
+time ago some Canadians arrived, knocked down the fences, and built
+inside the enclosure."
+
+WAH-TAH-NEE--"We had chosen a point about a mile from the spot
+where we are now speaking, and got out logs for fences and houses,
+and when we returned from the plains we found they had all been
+taken away. There are now twenty families, and ten more to come in
+from the plains.
+
+"We wish to be remembered to the Queen, and we are thankful to see
+the Queen's soldiers coming to make their homes on the land that we
+have been brought up on. I hope that the Queen will look upon our
+poverty when she hears that we are poor Indians and have welcomed
+her people to live amongst us. This is my country where I have
+lived. I want to make way for the Queen's men, and I ask her in
+return to keep me from want. Next spring I want to plant here,
+wherever I can get a piece of ground. By that time I may have
+selected a spot for my reserve. The reason I want to select my
+reserve is, that I do not want to be cramped up by settlers. In the
+meantime I do not want any white men to settle on the Eagle Hills.
+
+"When I see that we are numerous, it will be the Eagle Hills I will
+select as our reserve, although I am very reluctant to leave the
+place I have been brought up on. If I see that we are not likely to
+be numerous, I may select some other place across the Saskatchewan
+River. This man, Peter Ballendine, knows that it is not because
+settlers are coming here that we speak of this place, Battle River,
+but because we were here from of old. I wish that the Governor
+should give us some advice to think over during the winter."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I am glad to give you a word of advice. Next summer,
+Commissioners will come to make payments here, so that you may not
+have so far to go, and also that other Indians we have not seen,
+should come here also, to whom it may be convenient, and I hope
+that then you will be able to talk with them where you want your
+reserve. I will speak to you frankly, as if I was talking to my own
+children; the sooner you select a place for your reserve the
+better, so that you can have the animals and agricultural
+implements promised to you, and so that you may have the increase
+from the animals, and the tools to help you build houses, &c. When
+you are away hunting and fishing, the heat of the sun and the rain
+is making your crops to grow. I think you are showing wisdom in
+taking a place away from here, although it has been your home. It
+is better for the Indian to be away a little piece from the white
+man. You will be near enough to bring your furs to a good market,
+and by and by I hope you will have more potatoes than you require,
+and have some to dispose of. I am very anxious that you should
+think over this, and be able to tell the Commissioner next year
+where you want your reserve.
+
+"I have asked Mr. Fuller to let you have three acres of land to
+plant your potatoes next spring, and he has replied that he will be
+very happy to let you do so, and to plough it for you as well, in
+the field he has enclosed.
+
+"I am much pleased with the conduct of the Battle River Crees, and
+will report it to the Queen's Councillors. I hope you will be
+prosperous and happy."
+
+This closed the interview.
+
+The Commissioners left Battle River on the 19th of September. The
+Lieutenant-Governor arrived at Fort Garry on the 6th of October.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+TREATY NUMBER SEVEN; OR THE BLACKFEET TREATY
+
+
+The making of this treaty, which completed the series of treaties,
+extending from Lake Superior to the slopes of the Rocky Mountains,
+was entrusted, by the Privy Council, to the Hon. David Laird (who,
+after the effecting of the Carlton and Fort Pitt Treaties, had, in
+1876, been appointed Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West
+Territories, subsequently to the erection of these territories into
+a distinct Government) and Lieut.-Col. McLeod, of the Mounted
+Police Force. The necessity which had arisen for making the treaty
+is thus stated by the Hon. the Minister of the Interior, the Hon.
+David Mills, in his Annual Report for 1877:
+
+"The conclusion, in 1876, of the treaty with the Crees, Assiniboine
+and Saulteaux Indians (being the sixth of the series of treaties up
+to that time negotiated with the Indians of the North-West) left
+but a small portion of the territory lying between the boundary
+line and the 54th parallel of latitude unsurrendered.
+
+"The unsurrendered portion of the territory, including about fifty
+thousand square miles, lies at the south-west angle of the
+territories, north of the boundary line, east of the Rocky
+Mountains, south of Red River (Treaty Number Six) and west of the
+Cypress Hills, or Treaty Number Four. This portion of the
+North-West is occupied by the Blackfeet, Blood, and Sarcees or
+Piegan Indians, some of the most warlike and intelligent but
+intractable bands of the North-West. These bands have for years
+past been anxiously expecting to be treated with, and have been
+much disappointed at the delay of negotiations.
+
+"In last year's report I stated that His Honor Lieut.-Gov. Morris,
+very strongly recommended that no further delay should take place
+in entering into negotiations with these Indians. His Honor
+reported, in effect, "that there was a general consent of opinion
+amongst the missionaries settled in that territory, and others who
+are acquainted with these Indians, as to the desirableness of
+having such a treaty made at the earliest possible date, with a
+view to preserving the present friendly disposition of these
+tribes, which might easily give place to feelings of an unfriendly
+or hostile nature, should the treaty negotiations be much longer
+delayed."
+
+"In view of these facts, and in order to satisfy these important
+tribes, and to prevent the difficulties which might hereafter arise
+through the settlement of whites, who are already flocking into
+Fort McLeod and other portions of this territory, Your Excellency
+decided that these Indians should be treated with this year, and
+the Indians were notified accordingly.
+
+"His Honor Mr. Laird, the Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West
+Territories, and Lieut.-Col. James F. McLeod, C.M.G., were selected
+by Your Excellency to negotiate the treaty. The former of these
+gentlemen, had assisted in 1874 in negotiating Treaty Number Four,
+with the Cree and Saulteaux Indians, and the latter, during his
+residence for some years past at Fort McLeod, as Commandant of the
+Mounted Police Force, had acquired the entire confidence and good
+will of the Indian tribes proposed to be dealt with."
+
+Besides all this, the Chiefs of the Blackfeet, in 1876, sent to the
+Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, a letter, with
+regard to a treaty, and also by a messenger, in whom they had
+confidence, a message, to a similar effect. The Blackfeet Indians
+are a bold and warlike race. When the Sioux war with the United
+States was about being initiated, the Sioux invited them to join in
+the war, but they promptly refused. They are unlikely to become
+farmers, but as the country they inhabit presents unusual
+facilities for that industry, they may be induced to adopt a
+pastoral life. They already possess large herds of horses, and may
+be taught to raise cattle also.
+
+I requested the Rev. C. Scollen, who had for many years been a
+missionary among the Plain Crees, and latterly, for several years,
+among the Blackfeet, to make a report to me of the character,
+habits and condition of this nation, with which request he
+willingly complied. I now give place to this report, which gives a
+vivid view of the character of this bold and warlike race, and
+shews the benefits they had, so far back as 1876, derived from the
+presence of the Mounted Police, the prohibition of liquor, and the
+establishment of law and order in the North-West Territories, under
+Canadian rule. I may here remark, that another great benefit has
+resulted from the judicious steps taken by the Canadian Government,
+and that is the cessation of warfare between the various tribes,
+which was before of constant occurrence. An intelligent Ojibbeway
+Indian trader told me, that the change was wonderful. "Before," he
+said, "the Queen's Government came, we were never safe, and now,"
+he said, "I can sleep in my tent anywhere, and have no fear. I can
+go to the Blackfeet, and Cree camps, and they treat me as a
+friend." The report of Mr. Scollen is as follows:
+
+FORT PITT, September 8th, 1876.
+
+TO HIS EXCELLENCY THE GOVERNOR OF MANITOBA.
+
+EXCELLENT GOVERNOR,--Having had some years of experience as a
+missionary amongst the Cree and Blackfeet Indians of the North-West
+Territory, I humbly undertake to submit to your consideration a few
+details regarding the latter tribe of Her Majesty's Indian
+subjects. I do this with all the more confidence as the successful
+way in which you conducted the treaty with the Carlton Indians (a
+treaty including no small difficulties), has convinced me of your
+thorough knowledge of the character of this people. But, although
+the general character of all the tribes may be nearly the same, yet
+in their social dispositions they sometimes materially differ, and
+this, I think, will be found to be the case with the Crees and
+Blackfeet when compared on that point. The Crees have always looked
+upon the white man as a friend, or, to use their own language, as a
+brother. They have never been afraid of him, nor have they given
+him any cause to be afraid of them. The Blackfeet have acted
+somewhat differently; they have regarded the white man as a
+demi-god, far superior to themselves in intelligence, capable of
+doing them good or evil, according as he might be well or ill
+disposed towards them, unscrupulous in his dealings with others,
+and consequently a person to be flattered, feared and shunned, and
+even injured, whenever this could be done with impunity. I am not
+now describing the Blackfeet of the present day, but those of
+fifteen years ago, when I first saw them. They were then a proud,
+haughty, numerous people (perhaps ten thousand on the British side
+of the line), having a regular politico-religious organization by
+which their thirst for blood and their other barbarous passions
+were constantly fired to the highest pitch of frenzy. Since that
+time their number has decreased to less than one half, and their
+systematic organizations have fallen into decay; in fact they have
+been utterly demoralized as a people. This sudden decadence was
+brought on by two causes: 1. About ten years ago the Americans
+crossed the line and established themselves on Pelly River, where
+they carried on to an extraordinary extent the illicit traffic in
+intoxicating liquor to the Blackfeet. The fiery water flowed as
+freely, if I may use the metaphor, as the streams running from the
+Rocky Mountains, and hundreds of the poor Indians fell victims to
+the white man's craving for money, some poisoned, some frozen to
+death whilst in a state of intoxication, and many shot down by
+American bullets. 2. Then in 1870 came that disease so fatal to
+Indians, the small-pox which told upon the Blackfeet with terrible
+effect, destroying between six hundred and eight hundred of them.
+Surviving relatives went more and more for the use of alcohol; they
+endeavoured to drown their grief in the poisonous beverage. They
+sold their robes and their horses by the hundred for it, and now
+they began killing one another, so that in a short time they were
+divided into several small parties, afraid to meet. Fortunately for
+them the Government were aware of the state of affairs in the
+country and did not remain indifferent to it; and, as I have heard
+yourself explain to the Indians, Her Gracious Majesty has at heart
+the welfare of even the most obscure of her subjects. In the summer
+of 1874, I was travelling amongst the Blackfeet. It was painful to
+me to see the state of poverty to which they had been reduced.
+Formerly they had been the most opulent Indians in the country, and
+now they were clothed in rags, without horses and without guns. But
+this was the year of their salvation; that very summer the Mounted
+Police were struggling against the difficulties of a long journey
+across the barren plains in order to bring them help. This noble
+corps reached their destination that same fall, and with magic
+effect put an entire stop to the abominable traffic of whiskey with
+the Indians. Since that time the Blackfeet Indians are becoming
+more and more prosperous. They are now well clothed and well
+furnished with horses and guns. During the last two years I have
+calculated that they have bought two thousand horses to replace
+those they had given for whiskey. They are forced to acknowledge
+that the arrival of the Red Coats has been to them the greatest
+boon. But, although they are externally so friendly to the Police
+and other strangers who now inhabit their country, yet underneath
+this friendship remains hidden some of that dread which they have
+always had of the white man's intention to cheat them; and here,
+excellent Governor, I will state my reasons for believing that a
+treaty should be concluded with them also at the earliest possible
+date.
+
+1st. The Blackfeet are extremely jealous of what they consider
+their country, and never allowed any white men, Half-breeds, or
+Crees to remain in it for any length of time; the only reason that
+they never drove the Americans off, apart from their love for
+whiskey, was their dread of the Henri rifle.
+
+2nd. They have an awful dread of the future. They think that the
+Police are in the country not only to keep out whiskey traders, but
+also to protect white people against them, and that this country
+will be gradually taken from them without any ceremony. This I can
+certify, for although they may not say so to others yet they do not
+hide it from me.
+
+3rd. Numbers of people are settling around Fort McLeod and Fort
+Calgary in order to farm, raise stock, etc. This will probably
+drive the buffalo away through time from the ordinary hunting
+grounds, and if so, the Blackfeet, being the most helpless Indians
+in the country, and unaccustomed to anything else but hunting
+buffalo, would suffer extremely.
+
+4th. The settlers also are anxious that a treaty be made as soon as
+possible, so that they may know what portions of land they can hold
+without fear of being molested.
+
+5th. The Blackfeet themselves are expecting to have a mutual
+understanding with the Government, because they have been told of
+it by several persons, and namely by Gen. Smythe last year.
+
+Such are the principal reasons which occur to my mind for making a
+treaty with the Blackfeet. It remains for you, excellent Governor,
+to weigh their value. Of course you would find the same prejudices
+amongst the Blackfeet that you have found amongst the Crees, but
+you would have no greater difficulty in dispelling them. You would
+have four clans to treat with, viz.: the Blackfeet, Bloods, and
+Piegans, all of the same tribe, and the Sarcees, a branch of the
+Peace River Indians called Beavers. As to the place of rendezvous
+there would be no difficulty whatever; the Blackfeet live in large
+camps under their respective Chiefs, and could go to any point
+after due notice.
+
+It remains for me now, excellent Governor, to beg you to excuse the
+many defects of this communication, and to accept the assurance of
+sincere esteem and profound respect of
+
+                Your most humble servant,
+                        CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN,
+                                Priest, O.U.I.
+
+P.S.--I am also aware that the Sioux Indians, now at war with the
+Americans, have sent a message to the Blackfeet tribe, asking them
+to make an alliance offensive and defensive against all white
+people in the country.
+
+C. SCOLLEN.
+
+In order to effect a treaty, Lieut.-Gov. Laird, and Lieut.-Col.
+James F. McLeod, met the Blackfeet, at the Blackfoot crossing, on
+the Bow River on the 17th day of September, 1877, which day had
+been selected for the time of meeting. Gov. Laird proceeded from
+the temporary seat of the Government of the North-West Territories
+at Swan River, and Col. McLeod from Fort McLeod, the head quarters
+of the Mounted Police, to the appointed rendezvous.
+
+The Commissioners met the Indians on that day, and after five days
+of tedious negotiations, the treaty was satisfactorily concluded,
+and signed by the Chiefs and head men present.
+
+The total number of the Indians, represented at the making of the
+treaty, and who were paid the gratuity under it, was four thousand
+three hundred and ninety-two. The terms of the treaty, were
+substantially the same as those contained in the North-West Angle
+and Qu'Appelle treaties, except that as some of the bands were
+disposed to engage in pastoral pursuits, it was arranged to give
+them cattle instead of agricultural implements. The Minister of the
+Interior well observes in his report "that the conclusion of this
+treaty with these warlike and intractable tribes, at a time when
+the Indian tribes, immediately across the border, were engaged in
+open hostilities with the United States troops, is certainly a
+conclusive proof of the just policy of the Government of Canada
+toward the aboriginal population," and, I add, of the confidence of
+the Indians in the promises and just dealing of the servants of the
+British Crown, in Canada, a confidence that can only be kept up by
+the strictest observance of the stipulations of the treaties.
+
+I now append the interesting despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Laird, giving
+a detailed account of the negotiation of the treaty, and a report
+of the speeches of the Commissioners and Indians, extracted from a
+report in the Globe newspaper, dated October 4th, 1877, which,
+though not authentic, I believe, gives a general view of what
+passed during the negotiations.
+
+                GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
+           BATTLEFORD, NORTH-WEST TERRITORY.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on the 4th August I
+received at Swan River your telegram dated on the first of that
+month.
+
+It notified me that a Commission appointing Lieut.-Col. James F.
+McLeod, C.M.G., and myself, Commissioners to negotiate a treaty
+with the Blackfeet and other Indians of the unsurrendered parts of
+the North-West Territories adjoining the United States boundary,
+had been forwarded to Fort McLeod.
+
+I immediately made preparations for the journey. These occupied me
+a week, as arrangements had to be made for the removal of furniture
+and other property to Battle River, where the Government House for
+the territories, in course of construction, would probably be ready
+for occupation on my return from the treaty negotiations. On the
+11th August I left Swan River for Fort McLeod, via Battleford,
+proposing to go from the latter place by Cypress Hills to my
+destination. I took the Quill Lake trail and came to the telegraph
+line, about four miles from Big Stone Lake. Thence I followed
+that line until I came to the trail at the elbow of the North
+Saskatchewan leading to Battle River. Where the telegraph crosses
+the South Saskatchewan I found an excellent ferry scow, and a
+ferryman placed there by the Public Works Department. I arrived at
+the ferry about noon on the 20th, and though a high wind rendered
+it difficult to manage the scow, the horses, with the vehicles and
+their contents, were safely ferried before sunset. On the following
+evening I reached the Elbow, and the morning thereafter before
+leaving camp, Inspector Walker, of Battleford, drove up, on his
+way to Carlton, to arrange for the distribution of certain of the
+articles intended for the Indians of Treaty Number Six, which had
+not arrived when he paid the annuities at that post in the early
+part of the month. Some of the Indians had not dispersed since
+they received their payments, and interested parties were causing
+dissatisfaction among them by reporting that the provisions
+intended for them, while assembled to receive their annuities,
+having now arrived, should be distributed to them, as well as the
+agricultural implements and other articles promised.
+
+I advised Inspector Walker to distribute to those Indians still
+around Carlton their share of the presents, and to give them a
+small quantity of provisions from the Government supplies, to
+enable them to proceed without delay to their hunting grounds. I
+then continued my journey to Battleford, which I reached on Monday,
+the 24th, at noon. Here I was happy to meet Major Irvine, who
+had come straight from Fort McLeod, across the Great Plains, to
+conduct me on my journey, and to inform me that for satisfactory
+reasons adduced by Crowfoot, the leading chief of the Blackfeet,
+Lieut.-Col. McLeod, my associate Commissioner, had consented that
+the meeting of the treaty should be held at the Blackfoot crossing
+of the Bow River, instead of at Fort McLeod. Major Irvine had
+reached Battleford only a few hours before me, and having a
+Blackfoot Indian as guide, I abandoned my intention of going to
+Fort McLeod by Cypress Hills, and resolved to take the more direct
+and much shorter course by which that officer came.
+
+On Friday I had interviews with several parties on business, among
+whom were Red Pheasant, the Chief of the Battle River Crees, and
+a portion of his band. He desired explanations about the articles
+promised in the treaty of last year, and the reason they were so
+late in being forwarded. I explained that the unusually heavy rains
+in Manitoba and the eastern portion of the territories had made the
+travelling so bad that the freighters had not been able to overtake
+the journey in the time which they expected; that the Government
+were very sorry at the disappointment, as it was their desire to
+faithfully carry out all their promises. The officers here had done
+their best to meet the difficulty and satisfy the Indians, though
+at no little expense to the country.
+
+The Chief appeared to be quite satisfied with the explanation, and
+after some further conversation about the reserve, which he desires
+to be located at Eagle Hills, he and his companions retired to
+their lodges, situated for the present close to the south side of
+Battle River, under the bank in front of Government House.
+
+Inspector Walker having kindly given instructions to the
+non-commissioned officer in charge of the Mounted Police in his
+absence, that every assistance in his power was to be afforded to
+me for continuing my journey, I was enabled to leave Battleford for
+Fort McLeod with Major Irvine, on the 25th August. Besides us two,
+the party consisted of four police constables, my personal servant
+and the guide.
+
+For the first day we followed a trail leading southward, but
+afterwards our course was across the trackless plains until we
+approached near our destination. On the third day out we first
+sighted buffalo, and every day subsequently that we travelled,
+except the last, we saw herds of the animals. Most of the herds,
+however, were small, and we remarked with regret that very few
+calves of this season were to be seen. We observed portions of many
+buffalo carcasses on our route, from not a few of which the
+peltries had not been removed. From this circumstance, as well as
+from the fact that many of the skins are made into parchments and
+coverings for lodges, and are used for other purposes, I concluded
+that the export of buffalo robes from the territories does not
+indicate even one-half the number of those valuable animals
+slaughtered annually in our country.
+
+Antelope, though not very abundant, are widely scattered over the
+plains. The numerous lakelets abound with water fowl. Some of the
+pools contain alkali, but we experienced no inconvenience on the
+journey from scarcity of fresh water. The grass in many places is
+short and thin, but in the hollows feed for horses is easily
+obtained. Altogether, though the plains are perfectly treeless, not
+even a shrub being visible, a journey across them in fine weather,
+such as we experienced, when the "buffalo chips" are sufficiently
+dry to make a good camp fire, is not disagreeable.
+
+On the afternoon of the 29th we reached the lowest ford of the Red
+Deer River, one hundred and sixty-eight miles, by our course, from
+Battleford. On the north side of the river at this ford there is
+quicksand. The water too, in mid-stream, was deep enough to flow
+over the side-boards of our waggons, and at one place the current
+was dangerously rapid. After repeated trials by some of the men on
+horseback to find the best footing, we made the attempt, and the
+whole party got safely across by night-fall. On Saturday evening,
+the 1st of September, we arrived at the Blackfoot crossing of the
+Bow River, one hundred and eighteen miles from where we forded the
+Red Deer River. The Bow River is a noble stream. The current is
+pretty rapid, but at this "ridge under the water" (which is the
+literal translation of the Blackfoot name for the ford) the bed of
+the river is pebbly and the footing consequently good. Though we
+found the water almost as deep as at the Red Deer River, yet under
+the guidance of Mr. French, a small trader who lives near the ford,
+we, without almost any delay, crossed bravely over and camped until
+Monday morning on the south bank of the river.
+
+At this crossing, where the Indians had latterly been notified to
+assemble for the treaty, there is a beautiful river bottom on the
+south side of the river. It extended about one mile back from the
+river, and is some three miles in length. The river, as far as the
+eye can reach, is skirted close to the water by a narrow belt of
+cotton-wood and other trees.
+
+When I surveyed the clear waters of the stream, the fuel and
+shelter which the wood afforded, the excellent herbage on hill and
+dale, and the Indians camped in the vicinity crossing and
+re-crossing the river on the "ridge" with ease and safety, I was
+not surprised that the Blackfeet were attached to the locality, and
+desired that such an important event in their history as concluding
+a treaty with Her Majesty's Commissioners should take place at this
+spot.
+
+On Saturday evening and Sunday several of the Indians called to
+shake hands with me, among whom was the Rainy Chief of the North
+Bloods. Here also I met Monsieur Jean L. Heureux, a French
+Canadian, who had spent nearly twenty years of his life among the
+Blackfeet. From him I obtained much valuable information respecting
+the numbers and wishes of the Indians, together with an elaborate
+list of the different Chiefs and minor Chiefs of the Blackfeet,
+Bloods, Piegans, and Sarcees, with the principal families of
+their respective tribes and clans of divisions. This list the
+Commissioners found very useful in enabling them to understand the
+relative influence of the several Chiefs and the strength of their
+bands.
+
+On our journey, while within the limits of Treaty Number Six, we
+met scarcely any Indians, but after we crossed Red Deer River we
+met a few Crees and Half-breeds, and several hunting parties of
+Blackfeet. The former generally use carts in travelling, but the
+Blackfeet and their associates are always on horseback.
+
+The Crees appeared friendly, but were not so demonstrative as the
+Blackfeet, who always rode up at once with a smile on their
+countenances and shook hands with us. They knew the uniform of the
+Mounted Police at a distance, and at once recognized and approached
+them as their friends.
+
+We resumed our journey on Monday and arrived at Fort McLeod on the
+Old Man's River, on Tuesday the 4th September. The distance between
+the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River and the Fort is about
+seventy-nine miles, thus making the length of our journey from
+Battleford three hundred and sixty-five miles as measured by Major
+Irvine's odometer.
+
+A few miles from Fort McLeod I was met by the Commissioners of the
+Mounted Police and a large party of the Force, who escorted me into
+the Fort, while a salute was fired by the artillery company from
+one of the hills overlooking the line of march. The men, whose
+horses were in excellent condition, looked exceedingly well, and
+the officers performed their duties in a most efficient manner. The
+villagers presented me with an address of welcome, and altogether
+my reception at Fort McLeod was such as to satisfy the most
+fastidious lover of display, and more than enough to satisfy the
+writer.
+
+At Fort McLeod, on my arrival, I received your despatch of first
+August, covering the Commission relating to the Treaty and a copy
+of the Order in Council of 12th July, in terms of which the
+commission was issued. Also your letter of 27th July informing me
+that it had been thought desirable to place the services of the
+Rev. Father Lacombe at the disposal of the Commissioners while
+negotiating the treaty. A few days afterwards I was sorry to learn
+by telegraph that the reverend gentleman had been taken by illness
+on the journey and would be unable to be present at the meeting
+with the Indians. Here, however I was happy to meet Rev. Father
+Scollen, a Roman Catholic missionary, who has labored for some
+years among the Crees and Blackfeet in the western portion of the
+territories. He kindly furnished me such information as he
+possessed, and afterwards went to the treaty, where his assistance
+was of some value, particularly in dealing with the Crees present.
+
+While at the fort I had interviews with several of the Blood
+Chiefs, who called upon me to inquire if they could not be treated
+with there instead of at Bow River. I explained that hereafter the
+Government would endeavor to pay them their annuities at places
+most convenient for them, but that on the occasion of making a
+treaty it was desirable that the several Chiefs and their principal
+head men should meet together to talk over the matter, so that all
+might feel that they had been consulted as to the terms of the
+agreement. They went away satisfied, said they would do as the
+Great Father advised, and go to Bow River.
+
+I cannot speak too highly of the kind manner in which the officers
+and men of the Mounted Police at Fort McLeod treat their Indian
+visitors. Though the red man is somewhat intrusive, I never heard a
+harsh word employed in asking him to retire. The beneficial effects
+of this treatment, of the exclusion of intoxicants from the
+country, and of impartially administering justice to whites and
+Indians alike, were apparent in all my interviews with the Indians.
+They always spoke of the officers of the Police in the highest
+terms, and of the Commander of the Force, Lieut.-Col. McLeod,
+especially as their great benefactor. The leading Chiefs of the
+Blackfeet and kindred tribes, declared publicly at the treaty that
+had it not been for the Mounted Police they would have all been
+dead ere this time.
+
+Having rested a week after my tedious journey of over seven hundred
+miles, I then occupied myself for a few days in viewing the
+surrounding country. In the village I found some excellent stores,
+supplied with almost every article of dry goods, hardware and
+groceries, that any inland community requires. Notably among these
+were the stores of J. G. Baker & Co. and Messrs. T. C. Power & Bro.
+There is also a good blacksmith's shop in the village in which coal
+is used from the Pelly River, at a place some twenty miles distant
+from Fort McLeod. I was told by the proprietor of the shop that the
+coal answers tolerably well for blacksmithing purposes, and in the
+fort it is extensively used for fuel. It burns nearly as well in a
+stove as some varieties of Pictou coal.
+
+The land around the fort, and indeed for almost the whole distance
+between the Bow and Old Man's Rivers, is well adapted for grazing;
+and where cultivation has been fairly attempted this season, grain
+and vegetables have been a success. In short, I have very little
+doubt that this portion of the territories, before many years, will
+abound in herds of cattle, and be dotted with not a few comfortable
+homesteads.
+
+Lieut.-Col. McLeod having attended to forwarding the supplies to
+Bow River, which had been previously delivered at the fort, left
+for the Blackfoot crossing with some eighty officers and men of
+the Police Force, on Wednesday, the 12th September. I followed on
+Friday, and reached Bow River on Sunday morning. The Police having
+arrived on Saturday, the Commissioners were fully prepared for
+business on Monday, the 17th, the day which I had from the first
+appointed for the opening of the treaty negotiations.
+
+The Commissioners were visited by Crowfoot, the principal Chief of
+the Blackfeet, shortly after their arrival. He desired to know when
+he and his people might meet us. We ascertained that most of the
+Indians on the ground were Blackfeet and Assiniboines or Stonies,
+from the upper part of Bow River. But as the 17th was the day
+named, the Commissioners determined to adhere to the appointment,
+and sent a messenger early in the morning to invite the Indians
+camped around to meet them at the council tent at two o'clock, p.m.
+
+Half an hour before the time appointed a gun was fired as a signal
+for the Indians to assemble. The meeting was well attended. The
+Chiefs came forward first and were introduced to the Commissioners,
+and their followers, on being invited, sat up close to the tent.
+
+I addressed them, stating that the Queen's Government had last year
+promised that they would this year be visited by Commissioners to
+invite them to make a treaty. That months ago I had named this very
+day to meet them, and that in accordance with the promises made,
+the Commissioners were now here to discuss the terms of a treaty.
+Yet as we had learned that very few of the Bloods, Sarcees or
+Piegans had arrived, we would not unduly press forward the
+negotiations, but wait until Wednesday to give the others time to
+arrive.
+
+The Indians listened attentively to what was said, and several of
+the Chiefs expressed their satisfaction at not being asked to meet
+us on the morrow. The Commissioners then told them there were
+rations provided for them by the Government, and that those who
+were in need of provisions might apply to certain of the Police
+officers detailed to see to their proper distribution.
+
+The Stonies and one Blood Chief applied for flour, tea, sugar and
+tobacco, but said they were not then in need of beef. Crowfoot and
+some other Chiefs under his influence would not accept any rations
+until they would hear what terms the Commissioners were prepared to
+offer them. He appeared to be under the impression that if the
+Indians were fed by the bounty of the Government they would be
+committed to the proposals of the Commissioners, whatever might be
+their nature. Though I feared this refusal did not augur well for
+the final success of the negotiations, yet I could not help wishing
+that other Indians whom I have seen, had a little of the spirit in
+regard to dependence upon the Government exhibited on this occasion
+by the great Chief of the Blackfeet.
+
+Among the visitors at the treaty I was pleased to meet the Rev.
+John McDougall, Wesleyan missionary at Morley Ville, and son of the
+late lamented Rev. George McDougall, so well and favourably known
+in connection with Indian affairs in the North-West. Mr. McDougall
+was present at the first interview the Commissioners held with
+the Indians, and acted as interpreter for the Stonies, who do not
+understand the Blackfoot language. He, as well as the Rev. C.
+Scollen, rendered the Commissioners all the assistance in their
+power. Traders, with large supplies of goods, were arriving on the
+ground. They desired to erect buildings of logs to protect their
+property, but as some of the Indian Chiefs objected to the trees
+along the river being cut down for such a purpose until after
+the treaty, the Commissioners deemed it prudent, to prevent
+complications, to ask the traders to erect only temporary
+stanchions sufficient to support canvas coverings. They complied
+with our wishes, and the Indians gave us no further trouble on the
+subject.
+
+On the evening of Monday I also received a message from Bobtail, a
+Cree Chief, who, with the larger portion of the band, had come to
+the treaty grounds. He represented that he had not been received
+into any treaty. He, however, had not attended the meeting that
+day, because he was uncertain whether the Commissioners would be
+willing to receive him along with the Blackfeet. I asked him and
+his band to meet the Commissioners separate from the other Indians
+on the following day.
+
+On Tuesday, at two o'clock, the Cree Chief and his band assembled
+according to appointment. The Commissioners ascertained from him
+that he had frequented for some time the Upper Bow River country,
+and might fairly be taken into the present treaty, but he expressed
+a wish to have his reserve near Pigeon Lake, within the limits of
+Treaty Number Six, and from what we could learn of the feelings of
+the Blackfeet toward the Crees, we considered it advisable to keep
+them separate as much as possible. We therefore informed the Chief
+that it would be most expedient for him to give in his adhesion to
+the treaty of last year, and be paid annually, on the north of Red
+Deer River, with the other Cree Chiefs. He consented. We then told
+him that we could not pay him until after the Blackfeet had been
+dealt with, as it might create jealousy among them, but that in the
+meantime his band could receive rations. He said it was right that
+he should wait until we had settled with the Blackfeet, and agreed
+to come and sign his adhesion to Treaty Number Six at any time I
+was prepared to receive him.
+
+During Tuesday, several parties of Indians came in, but the
+principal Blood Chiefs had not yet arrived. According to
+appointment, however, the Commissioners met the Indians at two
+o'clock on Wednesday. An outline was given of the terms proposed
+for their acceptance. We also informed them we did not expect an
+answer that day, but we hoped to hear from them to-morrow.
+
+That day we again intimated to the Indians that rations would be
+delivered to such as applied for them. We told them the provisions
+were a present, and their acceptance would not be regarded as
+committing the Chiefs to the terms proposed by the Commissioners.
+Most of the Chiefs at once applied for flour, tea, sugar and
+tobacco, and in a day or two they also asked for meat. Even
+Crowfoot, at last thankfully accepted his share of the rations, and
+the beef cattle began to decrease rapidly.
+
+On Tuesday we met the Indians at the usual hour. We further
+explained the terms outlined to them yesterday, dwelling especially
+upon the fact that by the Canadian Law their reserves could not be
+taken from them, occupied or sold, without their consent. They were
+also assured that their liberty of hunting over the open prairie
+would not be interfered with, so long as they did not molest
+settlers and others in the country.
+
+We then invited the Chiefs to express their opinions. One of the
+minor Blood Chiefs made a long speech. He told us the Mounted
+Police had been in the country for four years, and had been
+destroying a quantity of wood. For this wood he asked the
+Commissioners should make the Indians a present payment of fifty
+dollars a head to each Chief, and thirty dollars a head to all
+others. He said the Blackfeet, Bloods, Sarcees and Piegans were all
+one; but he asked that the Crees and Half-breeds should be sent
+back to their own country. The Queen, he remarked, had sent the
+police to protect them; they had made it safe for Indians to sleep
+at night, and he hoped she would not soon take these men away.
+
+Crowfoot said he would not speak until to-morrow. Old Sun, another
+influential Blackfoot Chief, said the same. Eagle Tail, the head
+Chief of the Piegans, remarked that he had always followed the
+advice the officers of the Mounted Police gave him. He hoped the
+promise which the Commissioners made would be secured to them as
+long as the sun shone and water ran. The Stony Chiefs unreservedly
+expressed their willingness to accept the terms offered.
+
+Fearing that some of the Indians might regard the demands of the
+Blood Chief who had spoken, if not promptly refused, as agreed to,
+I told them he had asked too much. He had admitted the great
+benefit the Police had been to the Indians, and yet he was so
+unreasonable as to ask that the Government should pay a large
+gratuity to each Indian for the little wood their benefactors had
+used. On the contrary, I said, if there should be any pay in the
+matter it ought to come from the Indians to the Queen for sending
+them the Police. Hereupon, Crowfoot and the other Chiefs laughed
+heartily at the Blood orator of the day.
+
+I also said the Commissioners could not agree to exclude the Crees
+and Half-breeds from the Blackfoot country; that they were the
+Great Mother's children as much as the Blackfeet and Bloods, and
+she did not wish to see any of them starve. Of course the Crees and
+Half-breeds could be prosecuted for trespassing on their reserves.
+In this the Indian Act secured them. The Local Government had
+passed a law to protect the buffalo. It would have a tendency to
+prevent numbers from visiting their country in the close season.
+But to altogether exclude any class of the Queen's subjects, as
+long as they obeyed the laws, from coming into any part of the
+country, was contrary to the freedom which she allowed her people,
+and the Commissioners would make no promise of the kind.
+
+On the following morning there was a rumor that the Indians in
+their own Councils could not agree, that a small party was opposed
+to making a treaty. The opposition, however, could not have been
+very formidable. The principal Chiefs seemed fully to understand
+the importance of accepting some terms. About noon, Crowfoot, with
+Mr. L'Heureux, as interpreter, came to my tent and asked for
+explanations on some points, which I cheerfully gave him. During
+the forenoon a large party of Bloods came in, among whom was Bad
+Head, an aged minor Blood Chief, of considerable influence, who
+attended the meeting in the afternoon.
+
+When the Commissioners intimated that they were ready to hear what
+the Chiefs had to say, Crowfoot was the first to speak. His remarks
+were few, but he expressed his gratitude for the Mounted Police
+being sent to them, and signified his intention to accept the
+treaty. The Blood Chief who made the large demands on the previous
+day said he would agree with the other Chiefs. Old Sun, head Chief
+of the North Blackfeet, said Crowfoot spoke well. We are not going
+to disappoint the Commissioners. He was glad they were all agreed
+to the same terms. They wanted cattle, guns, ammunition, tobacco,
+axes and money. Bull's Head, the principal Chief of the Sarcees,
+said, we are all going to take your advice. Eagle Head, the Piegan
+head Chief remarked, "I give you my hand. We all agree to what
+Crowfoot says." Rainy Chief, head of the North Bloods, said he
+never went against the white man's advice. Some of the minor Chiefs
+spoke to the same effect.
+
+The Commissioners expressed their satisfaction at the unanimity
+among the Indians, and said they would prepare the treaty and bring
+it to-morrow for signature. The only difficult matter then to be
+arranged was the reserves. The Commissioners thought it would take
+unnecessary time to discuss this question in open meeting, and
+resolved that one of them should visit the head Chiefs at their
+camps, and consult them separately as to the localities they might
+desire to select. Lieut.-Col. McLeod undertook this duty, while I
+attended to the preparation of the draft treaty. He succeeded so
+well in his mission that we were able to name the places chosen in
+the treaty.
+
+On Saturday, 22nd September, we met the Indians to conclude the
+treaty. Mekasto, or Red Crow the great Chief of the South Bloods,
+had arrived the previous evening, or morning, on the ground, and
+being present, came forward to be introduced to the Commissioners.
+
+The assemblage of Indians was large. All the head Chiefs of the
+several tribes were now present; only two Blackfeet and two Blood
+minor Chiefs were absent. The representation was all that could be
+expected.
+
+The Commissioners had previously informed the Indians that they
+would accept the Chiefs whom they acknowledged, and now close in
+front of the tent sat those who had been presented to the
+Commissioners as the recognized Chiefs of the respective bands.
+
+The conditions of the treaty having been interpreted to the
+Indians, some of the Blood Chiefs, who bad said very little on the
+previous day, owing to Red Crow's absence, now spoke, he himself in
+a few kind words agreeing to accept the treaty. Crowfoot then came
+forward and requested his name to be written to the treaty. The
+Commissioners having first signed it, Mr. L'Heureux, being familiar
+with the Blackfoot language, attached the Chiefs' names to the
+document at their request and witnessed to their marks.
+
+While the signing was being proceeded with, a salute was fired from
+the field guns in honor of the successful conclusion of the
+negotiations.
+
+I may mention, in this connection, that on Saturday also I was
+waited upon by a deputation of Half-breeds, who presented me with a
+petition, expressing the hope that the buffalo law might not be
+stringently enforced during the approaching winter, and praying
+that they might receive some assistance to commence farming. With
+respect to the buffalo ordinance, I told them that the notice
+having been short, the law would not be very strictly enforced for
+the first winter, and in regard to their prayer for assistance to
+farm, I said I would make it known at Ottawa.
+
+On Monday, the 24th, the Commissioners met the Indians at ten a.m.
+Some minor Chiefs who had not remained until the close of the
+proceedings on Saturday signed the treaty this morning. The Chiefs
+were then asked to stand up in a body, their names were read over
+and the Indians once more asked to say whether they were their
+recognized Chiefs. Heavy Shield, a brother of Old Sun, at the request
+of the latter, took the place of head Chief of his band. It was,
+however, ascertained that this arrangement caused dissatisfaction,
+and Old Sun was restored to his position, and the band adhering to
+his brother, was called the "Middle Blackfoot Band."
+
+After their names were called over, I gave the head Chiefs of the
+Blackfeet, Blood, Piegans, and Sarcees their flags and uniforms,
+and invested them with their medals.
+
+While I was shaking hands with them, acknowledging their Chiefs in
+the name of the Great Mother, the band played "God Save the Queen."
+The payments were then immediately begun by the officers of the
+Mounted Police, one party taking the Blackfeet, and another the
+Bloods, while a third was detailed to pay the Assiniboines, or
+Stonies, near their encampment some two miles up the river.
+
+The Commissioners went in the afternoon with the latter party, and
+before the payments were commenced, presented the Chiefs with their
+medals, flags and uniforms. The Stonies received us with quite
+a demonstration. They are a well-behaved body of Indians. The
+influence of the Christian missionary in their midst is apparent,
+polygamy being now almost wholly a thing of the past.
+
+On Tuesday I took the adhesion of Bobtail, the Cree Chief, and his
+band, to Treaty Number Six, and they were paid out of the funds
+which I had brought with me from Swan River.
+
+On the invitation of the Blackfeet, Blood, and kindred Chiefs, the
+Commissioners went on Wednesday to the Council tent to receive an
+address of thanks. A large number of Indians were present. Mr.
+L'Heureux spoke on their behalf, and expressed their gratitude
+to the Commissioners generally for the kind manner in which they
+conducted the negotiations, to me personally for having come so far
+to meet them, and to Lieut.-Col. McLeod for all that he and the
+Mounted Police had done for them since their arrival in the
+country.
+
+To this address the Commissioners feelingly replied, and expressed
+their confidence that the Indians before them would not regret
+having agreed to the treaty.
+
+The Cree Chief and his band also waited upon us in the evening at
+my tent, and through Father Scollen, as interpreter, thanked us for
+the manner in which we had treated them. The presents sent for the
+Indians were distributed to each band, after payment. On Wednesday
+also the Commissioners drove to see the coal seam about five miles
+east of the Blackfoot crossing. Under the guidance of Mr. French,
+they found an outcrop of the seam at a coulee some three miles
+south of the river. The seam there is from three to ten feet in
+thickness, and the coal, some of which was burned every day in the
+officers' mess tent at the treaty, is of a very fair quality.
+
+About noon on Friday the payments were completed, and the
+Commissioners proceeded to close the accounts. They found that the
+number of Indians paid, who had accepted the terms of the new
+treaty was as follows:--
+
+  Head Chiefs                         10 at $25    $250
+  Minor Chiefs and Councillors        40 at  15     600
+  Men, women and children          4,342 at  12  52,104
+                                   -----         ------
+               Total               4,392        $52,954
+
+The Crees who gave in their adhesion to Treaty Number Six were only
+paid the gratuity, this year's annuity being still due them. These
+were paid from the funds of Treaty Number Six as follows:--
+
+  Chief                             1 at $25     $25
+  Councillors                       2 at  15      30
+  Men, women and children         429 at  12   5,148
+                                  ---          -----
+               Total              432         $5,203
+
+The officers of the Police Force who conducted the payments,
+discharged this duty in a most efficient manner. Not in regard to
+the payments alone were the services of the officers most valuable.
+With respect to the whole arrangements, Lieut.-Col. McLeod, my
+associate Commissioner, both in that capacity and as Commander of
+the Police, was indefatigable in his exertions to bring the
+negotiations to a successful termination. The same laudable efforts
+were put forth by Major Irvine and the other officers of the Force,
+and their kindness to me, personally I shall never fail to
+remember. The volunteer band of the Police at Fort McLeod deserve
+more than a passing notice, as they did much to enliven the whole
+proceedings.
+
+The Commissioners at first had not a good interpreter of the
+Blackfoot language, but on Wednesday they secured the services
+of Mr. Bird, a brother of the late Dr. Bird, of Winnipeg. He has
+been many years among the Piegans and Blackfeet and is a very
+intelligent interpreter. Mr. L'Heureux also rendered good service
+in this respect.
+
+The accounts being closed and certified to by the Commissioners, I
+commenced my return journey on the evening of the 28th September. I
+came by a crossing of the Red Deer River some fifteen miles east of
+the Hand Hills, travelled across the prairies further west than my
+former route, and arrived at Battleford on the evening of Saturday
+the 6th of October.
+
+I transmit herewith the treaty as signed by the Commissioners and
+Chiefs, and also the adhesion of the Cree Chief to Treaty Number
+Six.
+
+In conclusion I beg to offer a few observations on the treaty, and
+subjects connected therewith.
+
+1. With respect to the reserves, the Commissioners thought it
+expedient to settle at once their location subject to the approval
+of the Privy Council. By this course it is hoped that a great deal
+of subsequent trouble in selecting reserves will be avoided. The
+object of the ten years' reserve on the south side of Bow River is
+to keep hunters from building winter shanties on the river bottom.
+This practice has a tendency to alarm the buffalo, and keep them
+from their feeding grounds on the lower part of the river. After
+ten years it is feared the buffalo will have become nearly extinct,
+and that further protection will be needless. At any rate by that
+time the Indians hope to have herds of domestic cattle. The country
+on the upper part of the Bow River is better adapted for settlement
+than most of that included in the Blackfeet reserve, consequently
+the Commissioners deemed it advisable to agree that a belt on the
+south side of the river should be exempt from general occupation
+for ten years, particularly as the Indians set great value on the
+concession.
+
+2. The articles promised in addition to the money payments may to
+some appear excessive. The Stonies are the only Indians adhering to
+this treaty who desired agricultural implements and seed. The
+promises, therefore, respecting these things may be understood as
+merely applicable to that tribe. The Blackfeet and Bloods asked for
+nothing of this kind; they preferred cattle, and the Commissioners
+being fully of opinion that such were likely to be much more
+serviceable to them than seed and implements, encouraged them in
+their request. The number of cattle promised may appear large; but
+when it is considered that cows can be readily purchased at Fort
+McLeod for twenty or twenty-five dollars per head, and their
+delivery to the Indians will cost an inconsiderable sum, the total
+expense of supplying the articles promised by this treaty will, I
+am convinced, cost less than those under either Treaty number Four
+or Number Six.
+
+3. I would urge that the officers of the Mounted Police be
+entrusted to make the annual payments to the Indians under this
+treaty. The Chiefs themselves requested this, and I said I believed
+the Government would gladly consent to the arrangement. The Indians
+have confidence in the Police, and it might be some time before
+they would acquire the same respect for strangers.
+
+4. The organization of the Blackfeet bands is somewhat different
+from that of the Saulteaux and Crees. They have large bands with
+head and minor Chiefs, and as they preferred that this arrangement
+should remain unchanged, the Commissioners gladly acceded to their
+desire, as expense would be saved to the Government in clothing,
+were councillors and head men not named. The Stonies, however asked
+to be allowed councillors, and their request was granted to the
+extent of two to each Chief.
+
+5. Copies of the treaty printed on parchment should be forwarded to
+Fort McLeod in good time to be delivered to each head and minor
+Chief at next year's payment of annuities.
+
+                I have the honour to be, Sir,
+                             Your obedient servant,
+                                        DAVID LAIRD,
+                    Lieut.-Gov., and Special Indian Commissioner.
+
+
+
+Report from correspondence in The Globe newspaper, Toronto.
+
+FORT McLEOD, October 4, 1877.
+
+The treaty with the Blackfeet nation has been concluded
+satisfactorily, and was signed by the Chiefs of the Blackfeet,
+Blood, Piegan and Sarcee tribes, in the presence of the
+Commissioners--Governor Laird and Col. McLeod, C.M.G., and of Major
+Irvine, Assistant Commissioner, North-West Mounted Police, and
+officers of the Police Force, at the Council House, near "Ridge
+under the Water," or "The Blackfoot Crossing" the Great Bow River,
+on the 22nd September last.
+
+On the morning of the 4th of September, Col. McLeod received
+information from the ubiquitous Indian that the Queen's father
+(Lieut.-Gov. Laird) was at Little Bow River, thirty miles north
+from McLeod, and was accompanied by the "Buffalo Bull" (Major
+Irvine), and that they would arrive before the sun sank below the
+western horizon. At three p.m. the Commissioner left Fort McLeod,
+accompanied by a guard of honor of one hundred mounted men, to meet
+and escort the representative of Vice-Royalty to the first white
+settlement in the Blackfeet country. The Governor was met three
+miles north of Willow Creek, and expressed his surprise and
+pleasure at the splendid appearance of the well-mounted,
+well-equipped, well-drilled body of men who formed the guard of
+honour. When the head of the column forming the escort wound
+round the bend of Willow Creek, and the extensive wooded valley on
+which McLeod is built appeared in view, the guns, which had been
+unlimbered and placed in position on the highest of the bluffs
+which girdle the north side of Old Man's River, fired a salute of
+thirteen guns. On the arrival of the cortege at the upper or south
+end of the village, the police band took the lead and welcomed
+the Governor with its lively music. The whole white, Half-breed
+and Indian population of McLeod turned out to obtain a view of
+the great man who had arrived. At the request of the leading
+inhabitants of McLeod the carriage of the Governor was halted in
+the centre of the village, and the following neatly worded address
+was read and presented to His Honor by Mr. John C. Bell:
+
+TO THE HONORABLE DAVID LAIRD,
+                Lieutenant-Governor, N.-W. T.
+
+We, the citizens of Fort McLeod, beg to welcome you to this little
+village, one of the pioneer settlements of this great North-West.
+
+To have so distinguished a visitor in our midst is an honor we all
+appreciate, as in that visit we feel an assurance of your interest
+in our welfare and prosperity, which had its dawn with the advent
+of the Mounted Police in the North-West, and which, through their
+vigilance and care, has continued to this time.
+
+We trust that your visit here will be as pleasant to you as it will
+be long remembered by us.
+
+    CHAS. E. CONRAD,
+    THOMAS J. BOGY,
+    DANIEL SAMPLE,
+    LIONEL E. MANNING,
+    JOHN C. BELL.
+
+To which the Governor replied--
+
+GENTLEMEN,--I thank you for your kind address, and for the hearty
+welcome you have extended to me on my first visit to this pioneer
+settlement of the Canadian North-West. After roughing it for the
+last twenty-four days on the broad unsettled prairies, you have
+surprised me by a reception which betokens all the elements of
+civilization.
+
+It affords me unfeigned pleasure to learn that the advent of the
+Mounted Police in this country has been fraught with such
+advantages to you as a community.
+
+Permit me to express the conviction that in return for that
+diligence and care on the part of the Police Force which you so
+highly and justly value, you will always be found conducting
+yourselves as becomes worthy subjects of that illustrious Sovereign
+whom I have the distinguished honour to represent in these
+territories.
+
+In conclusion, I would remark that you have taken me so
+unexpectedly by your address that I feel unequal to making an
+appropriate reply; but the agreeableness of the surprise will tend
+to heighten the pleasure of my visit, as well as to render abiding
+the interest which I undoubtedly feel in your welfare and
+prosperity.
+
+During his stay at Fort McLeod, which extended to the 14th of
+the month, the Lieutenant-Governor reviewed the garrison, which
+consisted of troops C and D, and two divisions of artillery. They
+deployed past at a walk, trot and gallop, and His Honor expressed
+his unqualified admiration of the splendid form of the men. He was
+especially pleased with the artillery, whose horses and equipments
+were in beautiful condition, and requested Col. McLeod to convey to
+the officers and men his surprise and pleasure at finding the force
+at this post so perfectly drilled and acquainted with their duties.
+
+On the 12th the two troops and the artillery, accompanied by a
+baggage train of six light waggons, left Fort McLeod en route for
+the scene of the treaty. The Commissioner took command of the
+detachment, and the Assistant Commissioner remained behind to
+accompany the Governor on the 14th.
+
+The force accomplished the march in three days, and pitched the
+tents on ground previously laid out for the encampment by Inspector
+Crozier, at the head of a magnificently wooded valley, of about a
+mile in width and extending for several miles along the Big Bow. It
+is a lovely spot, this "Ridge under the Water," and has always been
+a favorite camping ground of the Blackfeet nation.
+
+
+Monday, 17th October.
+
+This was the day appointed for the opening of the Treaty, but as a
+number of the Indian Chiefs, who had a long distance to come, were
+absent, it was deferred until the following Wednesday. The
+Governor, however, addressed a number of the Chiefs who were
+assembled at the Council House. He said, "Last year a message was
+sent to you by the Councillors of the Great Mother that they would
+meet you at an early date, and as her Councillors always keep their
+promises, they have appointed Col. McLeod and myself to meet you
+here now. We appointed this day, and I have come a very long
+distance to keep my promise, and have called you together to
+discover if you all have responded to my summons, and if any Chiefs
+are now absent, to learn when they shall arrive. You say that some
+of the Blood Chiefs are absent, and as it is our wish to speak to
+them as well as to you, and as they have a very long way to come to
+reach this place, we shall give them until next Wednesday to come
+in. On that day, I will deliver to you the Queen's message, but if
+any of the Chiefs would desire to speak now, we will be glad to
+listen to them. I would tell you now, that while you remain,
+provisions will be issued for the use of those who wish to accept
+them."
+
+CROWFOOT--"I am glad to see the Queen's Chief and Stamixotokon (Col
+McLeod), who is a great Chief and our friend. I will wait and hold
+a council with my own children (the Blackfeet), and be ready on
+Wednesday to hear the Great Mother's message."
+
+PIEGAN CHIEF--"My children (the North Piegans) have looked long for
+the arrival of the Great Mother's Chief; one day, we did not look
+for him, and he passed us; we have travelled after him for fourteen
+nights, and now are glad to see and shake hands with the Great
+Chief."
+
+BEAR'S PAW (Stony Chief)--"We have been watching for you for many
+moons now, and a long time has gone by since I and my children
+first heard of your coming. Our hearts are now glad to see the
+Chief of the Great Mother, and to receive flour and meat and
+anything you may give us. We are all of one mind, and will say what
+we think on Wednesday."
+
+On Wednesday the Commissioners met the Chiefs at the great Council
+House. A guard of honor of fifty mounted men accompanied them,
+commanded by Major Irvine. The Police band received them, and at
+one o'clock the guns fired a salute as the Governor and Col. McLeod
+took their seats. There were present at the opening of the treaty,
+a number of ladies and gentlemen who had come long distances to
+witness this novel spectacle. Mrs. McLeod, Mrs. Winder, Mrs.
+Shurtleff, and a number of other ladies from Morleyville and
+Edmonton, also the Rev. Messrs. Scollen and McDougall, Mr. De
+L'Hereux, Mr. Conrad, Mr. Bogy, and the whole white population of
+Fort McLeod. Nearly all of the Chiefs and minor Chiefs of the
+Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Stony, and Sarcee tribes were seated
+directly in front of the Council House; and forming a semicircle of
+about one-third of a mile beyond the Chiefs, about four thousand
+men, women, and children were squatted on the grass, watching with
+keen interest the commencement of the proceedings. Lieut.-Gov.
+Laird delivered the following speech:
+
+"The Great Spirit has made all things--the sun, the moon, and the
+stars, the earth, the forests, and the swift running rivers. It is
+by the Great Spirit that the Queen rules over this great country
+and other great countries. The Great Spirit has made the white man
+and the red man brothers, and we should take each other by the
+hand. The Great Mother loves all her children, white man and red
+man alike; she wishes to do them all good. The bad white man and
+the bad Indian she alone does not love, and them she punishes for
+their wickedness. The good Indian has nothing to fear from the
+Queen or her officers. You Indians know this to be true. When bad
+white men brought you whiskey, robbed you, and made you poor, and,
+through whiskey, quarrel amongst yourselves, she sent the Police to
+put an end to it. You know how they stopped this and punished the
+offenders, and how much good this has done. I have to tell you how
+much pleased the Queen is that you have taken the Police by the
+hands and helped them, and obeyed her laws since the arrival of the
+Police. She hopes that you will continue to do so, and you will
+always find the Police on your side if you keep the Queen's laws.
+The Great Mother heard that the buffalo were being killed very
+fast, and to prevent them from being destroyed her Councillors have
+made a law to protect them. This law is for your good. It says that
+the calves are not to be killed, so that they may grow up and
+increase; that the cows are not to be killed in winter or spring,
+excepting by the Indians when they are in need of them as food.
+This will save the buffalo, and provide you with food for many
+years yet, and it shews you that the Queen and her Councillors wish
+you well.
+
+"Many years ago our Great Mother made a treaty with the Indians far
+away by the great waters in the east. A few years ago she made a
+treaty with those beyond the Touchwood Hills and the Woody
+Mountains. Last year a treaty was made with the Crees along the
+Saskatchewan, and now the Queen has sent Col. McLeod and myself to
+ask you to make a treaty. But in a very few years the buffalo will
+probably be all destroyed, and for this reason the Queen wishes to
+help you to live in the future in some other way. She wishes you to
+allow her white children to come and live on your land and raise
+cattle, and should you agree to this she will assist you to raise
+cattle and grain, and thus give you the means of living when the
+buffalo are no more. She will also pay you and your children money
+every year, which you can spend as you please. By being paid in
+money you cannot be cheated, as with it you can buy what you may
+think proper.
+
+"The Queen wishes us to offer you the same as was accepted by the
+Crees. I do not mean exactly the same terms, but equivalent terms,
+that will cost the Queen the same amount of money. Some of the
+other Indians wanted farming implements, but these you do not
+require, as your lands are more adapted to raising cattle, and
+cattle, perhaps, would be better for you. The Commissioners will
+give you your choice, whether cattle or farming implements. I have
+already said we will give you money, I will now tell you how much.
+If you sign the treaty every man, woman and child will get twelve
+dollars each; the money will be paid to the head of each family for
+himself, women and children; every year, for ever, you, your women
+and your children will get five dollars each. This year Chiefs and
+Councillors will be paid a larger sum than this; Chiefs will get a
+suit of clothes, a silver medal, and flag, and every third year
+will get another suit. A reserve of land will be set apart for
+yourselves and your cattle, upon which none others will be
+permitted to encroach; for every five persons one square mile will
+be allotted on this reserve, on which they can cut the trees and
+brush for firewood and other purposes. The Queen's officers will
+permit no white man or Half-breed to build or cut the timber on
+your reserves. If required roads will be cut through them. Cattle
+will be given to you, and potatoes, the same as are grown at Fort
+McLeod. The Commissioners would strongly advise the Indians to take
+cattle, as you understand cattle better than you will farming for
+some time, at least as long as you continue to move about in
+lodges.
+
+"Ammunition will be issued to you each year, and as soon as you
+sign the treaty one thousand five hundred dollars' worth will be
+distributed amongst the tribes, and as soon as you settle, teachers
+will be sent to you to instruct your children to read books like
+this one (the Governor referred to a Bible), which is impossible so
+long as you continue to move from place to place. I have now
+spoken. I have made you acquainted with the principal terms
+contained in the treaty which you are asked to sign.
+
+"You may wish time to talk it over in your council lodges; you may
+not know what to do before you speak your thoughts in council. Go,
+therefore, to your councils, and I hope that you may be able to
+give me an answer to-morrow. Before you leave I will hear your
+questions and explain any matter that may not appear clear to you."
+
+A few questions by the Chiefs were answered, and the council was
+closed for the day.
+
+
+Thursday, October 19th.
+
+The Governor, on arriving at the Council House, where all the
+Chiefs were awaiting him, said that he was glad to see them all
+there, and that he had only a few words to say to them. He said, "I
+expect to listen to what you have to say to-day, but, first, I
+would explain that it is your privilege to hunt all over the
+prairies, and that should you desire to sell any portion of your
+land, or any coal or timber from off your reserves, the Government
+will see that you receive just and fair prices, and that you can
+rely on all the Queen's promises being fulfilled. Your payments
+will be punctually made. You all know the Police; you know that no
+promise of theirs to you has ever been broken; they speak and act
+straight. You have perfect confidence in them, and by the past
+conduct of the Police towards you, you can judge of the future. I
+think I have now said all, and will listen to you and explain
+anything you wish to know; we wish to keep nothing back."
+
+BUTTON CHIEF--"The Great Spirit sent the white man across the great
+waters to carry out His (the Great Spirit's) ends. The Great
+Spirit, and not the Great Mother, gave us this land, The Great
+Mother sent Stamixotokon (Col. McLeod) and the Police to put an end
+to the traffic in fire-water. I can sleep now safely. Before the
+arrival of the Police, when I laid my head down at night, every
+sound frightened me; my sleep was broken; now I can sleep sound and
+am not afraid. The Great Mother sent you to this country, and we
+hope she will be good to us for many years. I hope and expect to
+get plenty; we think we will not get so much as the Indians receive
+from the Americans on the other side; they get large presents of
+flour, sugar, tea, and blankets. The Americans gave at first large
+bags of flour, sugar, and many blankets; the next year it was only
+half the quantity, and the following years it grew less and less,
+and now they give only a handful of flour. We want to get fifty
+dollars for the Chiefs and thirty dollars each for all the others,
+men, women, and children, and we want the same every year for the
+future. We want to be paid for all the timber that the Police and
+whites have used since they first came to our country. If it
+continues to be used as it is, there will soon be no firewood left
+for the Indians. I hope, Great Father, that you will give us all
+this that we ask."
+
+CROWFOOT--"Great Father, what do you think now, what do you say to
+that? What I have to say will be spoken to-morrow. My brother
+Chiefs will speak now."
+
+EAGLE TAIL--"Great Father, from our Great Mother, Stamixotokon and
+officers of the Police, the advice and help I received from the
+Police I shall never forget as long as the moon brightens the
+night, as long as water runs and the grass grows in spring, and I
+expect to get the same from our Great Mother. I hope she will
+supply us with flour, tea, tobacco and cattle, seed and farming
+implements. I have done at present."
+
+OLD SUN--"Father and sons, I shall speak to-morrow."
+
+GOVERNOR--"I fear Button Chief is asking too much. He has told us
+of the great good the Police have done for him and his tribe and
+throughout the country by driving away the whiskey traders, and now
+he wants us to pay the Chiefs fifty dollars and others thirty
+dollars per head, and to pay him for the timber that has been used.
+Why, you Indians ought to pay us rather, for sending these traders
+in fire-water away and giving you security and peace, rather than
+we pay you for the timber used. (Here the Indians indulged in a
+general hearty laugh at this proposition.) We cannot do you good
+and pay you too for our protection. Button Chief wants us to
+prevent the Crees and Half-breeds from coming in and killing the
+buffalo. They too are the Queen's children, as well as the
+Blackfeet and Crees. We have done all we can do in preventing the
+slaying of the young buffalo, and this law will preserve the
+buffalo for many years. Button Chief wishes to get the same every
+year as this year; this we cannot promise. We cannot make a treaty
+with you every year. We will give you something to eat each year,
+but not so much as you will receive now. He says the Americans at
+first gave the Indians many large sacks of flour, and now they only
+receive a handful. From us you receive money to purchase what you
+may see fit; and as your children increase yearly, you will get the
+more money in the future, as you are paid so much per head.
+
+"(To the Stony Chiefs)--When your reserves will be allotted to you
+no wood can be cut or be permitted to be taken away from them
+without your own consent. The reserve will be given to you without
+depriving you of the privilege to hunt over the plains until the
+land be taken up."
+
+Bear's Paw said that he was pleased with the treaty, the Police,
+and the prospect of getting provisions and money, and hoped that
+the Commissioners would give his tribe (the Stonies) as much as
+possible, and that as speedily as possible. This Chief appeared by
+his speech to be of a mercenary bent of mind.
+
+
+Friday, October 20th.
+
+On this day the Indians accepted the terms of the treaty, and
+several of the Chiefs made speeches. The first speaker was
+Crowfoot.
+
+CROWFOOT--"While I speak, be kind and patient. I have to speak for
+my people, who are numerous, and who rely upon me to follow that
+course which in the future will tend to their good. The plains are
+large and wide. We are the children of the plains, it is our home,
+and the buffalo has been our food always. I hope you look upon the
+Blackfeet, Blood, and Sarcees as your children now, and that you
+will be indulgent and charitable to them. They all expect me to
+speak now for them, and I trust the Great Spirit will put into
+their breasts to be a good people--into the minds of the men, women
+and children, and their future generations. The advice given me and
+my people has proved to be very good. If the Police had not come to
+the, country, where would we be all now? Bad men and whiskey were
+killing us so fast that very few, indeed, of us would have been
+left to-day. The Police have protected us as the feathers of the
+bird protect it from the frosts of winter. I wish them all good,
+and trust that all our hearts will increase in goodness from this
+time forward. I am satisfied. I will sign the treaty."
+
+BUTTON CHIEF--"I must say what all the people say, and I agree with
+what they say. I cannot make new laws. I will sign."
+
+RED CROW--"Three years ago, when the Police first came to the
+country, I met and shook hands with Stamixotokon (Col. McLeod) at
+Pelly River. Since that time he made me many promises. He kept them
+all--not one of them was ever broken. Everything that the police
+have done has been good. I entirely trust Stamixotokon, and will
+leave everything to him. I will sign with Crowfoot."
+
+FATHER OF MANY CHILDREN--"I have come a long way, and far behind
+the rest of the bands. I have travelled with these traveaux that
+you now see outside there with my women and children. I cannot
+speak much now, but I agree with Crowfoot, and will sign."
+
+OLD SUN--"Crowfoot speaks well. We were summoned to meet the Great
+Mother's Chiefs here, and we would not disappoint them; we have
+come, and will sign the treaty. During the past Crowfoot has been
+called by us our Great Father. The Great Mother's Chief (Governor
+Laird) will now be our Great Father. Everything you say appears to
+me to be very good, and I hope that you will give us all we
+ask--cattle, money, tobacco, guns, and axes, and that you will not
+let the white man use poison on the prairies. It kills horses and
+buffalo as well as wolves, and it may kill men. We can ourselves
+kill the wolves, and set traps for them. We all agree with
+Crowfoot."
+
+The remainder of the day was consumed by about a dozen other chiefs
+speaking in favour of the treaty. On the following day all the
+chiefs and counsellors signed their names under the signatures of
+the Commissioners, and a salute of thirteen guns announced the
+final conclusion of the last treaty with the Indians of the
+North-West.
+
+On Sunday afternoon the Indians fought a sham battle on horseback.
+They only wore the breech-cloths. They fired off their rifles in
+all directions, and sent the bullets whistling past the spectators
+in such close proximity as to create most unpleasant feelings. I
+was heartily glad when they defiled past singly on the way back to
+their lodges, and the last of their unearthly yells had died away
+in the distance.
+
+Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday were occupied in paying off the
+different tribes. They were paid by Inspector Winder, Sub-Inspector
+Denny, and Sub-Inspector Antrobus, each assisted by a constable of
+the Force. It was hard work to find out the correct number of each
+family. Many after receiving their money would return to say that
+they had made a wrong count; one would discover that he had another
+wife, another two more children, and others that they had blind
+mothers and lame sisters. In some cases they wanted to be paid for
+the babies that were expected to come soon.
+
+On Wednesday the Chiefs presented an address to the Commissioners,
+expressing the entire satisfaction of the whole nation with the
+treaty, and to the way in which the terms had been carried out.
+They tendered their well wishes to the Queen, the Governor, Col.
+McLeod, and the Police Force. They spoke in the most flattering and
+enthusiastic manner of the Commissioner, Assistant-Commissioner,
+officers, and the Force in general, and said that it was their firm
+determination to adhere to the terms of the treaty, and abide by
+the laws of the Great Mother. Potts, the interpreter at Fort
+McLeod, said he never heard Indians speak out their minds so freely
+in his life before.
+
+In reply, the Lieutenant-Governor said he was much pleased to
+receive this address from the Chiefs of the great Blackfeet nation,
+which in fact was to the Great Mother, as the Commissioners were
+merely acting for her, and carrying out her wishes. He was certain
+she would be gratified to learn of the approval of the Chiefs and
+their acceptance of her offers. In return the Great Mother only
+required of them to abide by her laws.
+
+Lieut.-Col. McLeod said in reply:--"The Chiefs all here know what I
+said to them three years ago, when the Police first came to the
+country--that nothing would be taken away from them without their
+own consent. You all see to-day that what I told you then was true.
+I also told you that the Mounted Police were your friends, and
+would not wrong you or see you wronged in any way. This also you
+see is true. The Police will continue to be your friends, and be
+always glad to see you. On your part you must keep the Queen's
+laws, and give every information to them in order that they may see
+the laws obeyed and offenders punished. You may still look to me as
+your friend, and at any time when I can do anything for your
+welfare, I shall only be too happy to do so. You say that I have
+always kept my promises. As surely as my past promises have been
+kept, so surely shall those made by the Commissioners be carried
+out in the future. If they were broken I would be ashamed to meet
+you or look you in the face; but every promise will be solemnly
+fulfilled as certainly as the sun now shines down upon us from the
+heavens. I shall always remember the kind manner in which you have
+to-day spoken of me."
+
+After this there was a great shaking of hands, and the Great
+Council ended.
+
+On Thursday afternoon the Lieutenant-Governor departed for
+Battleford. On leaving the grounds the usual honors were paid to
+him. The Commissioner left the following day for Fort Walsh to
+attend the Commission that was to meet the Sitting Bull.
+
+The traders were notified that they were to cease trading and move
+off the reservation not later than the following Tuesday, at ten
+p.m. By this hour they had all departed, and at noon on the same
+day the Force commenced its return journey to McLeod, which was
+accomplished in two days and a half. All were glad to get back to
+headquarters, as the weather had been for some days intensely cold
+and the prairies covered with snow.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE SIOUX IN THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES
+
+
+Much interest has been awakened with regard to this warlike race,
+owing to recent events; namely, the war between them and the United
+States, the destruction by them of Captain Custer's command, and
+their subsequent flight into British territory, and now prolonged
+sojourn therein.
+
+Prior, however, to this irruption, a portion of the Sioux tribe of
+American Indians, took refuge in the Red River settlement, after
+the massacre of the whites by the Indians in Minnesota, in the year
+1862. Their arrival caused great consternation in the settlement.
+The main body took up a position at Sturgeon Creek, about six miles
+from Fort Garry, now the City of Winnipeg, and others, at Poplar
+Point, and the Turtle Mountain. The Governor and Council of
+Assiniboia then governed the Province of Assiniboia, under the
+Hudson's Bay Company, and was composed of representative men.
+Their deliberations were grave and anxious. In December, 1863,
+the Governor-in-Chief, Mr. Dallas, reported to the Council, that
+he had visited the principal camp of the Sioux at Sturgeon Creek,
+and found there about five hundred men, women and children,
+and more had since arrived; that he had found them in great
+destitution and suffering, from want of food and clothing, and
+that after consultation with Governor Mactavish, of the Province
+of Assiniboia, he had offered sufficient provisions to enable them
+to remove to such a distance from the settlement as would place
+it beyond all danger and apprehension, and also offered to have
+the provisions conveyed for them, and ammunition supplied them to
+procure game, but they had positively refused to go away--giving
+as a reason the inability of the old men, women and children, to
+travel in the winter. The Governor was in consequence authorized
+by the Council, to offer them the means of transport, for those
+who were unable to walk. The Indians then removed to White Horse
+Plains, a distance of twenty miles only from Fort Garry, and camped
+there. A supply of food was given them, but no ammunition. The
+United States military authorities in December, 1863, sent an envoy
+to see the Governor-in-Chief of Rupert's Land, and the North-West
+Territories, with a view to ordering the Sioux to return to United
+States territory. The Governor was assured, that, though the
+American authorities would punish such of the Sioux as had actually
+been engaged in the massacre, they would furnish the innocent with
+all needful supplies of food and clothing for the winter, in the
+event of giving themselves up peaceably. The Council, on hearing
+this statement, authorized the granting permission to the American
+authorities to enter into negotiations with the Sioux in the
+territories, on condition that they adopted no aggressive measures
+against them, and that in the event of the Americans accepting the
+proposed permission, they should protect themselves by a sufficient
+guard to preclude the danger of attack from the Indians, and to
+ensure the preservation of peace.
+
+In January, 1864, the Council considered a despatch from Major
+Hatch, in command of the American forces, representing that on the
+approach of spring, he apprehended a renewal of the barbarous
+scenes of 1862 and 1863, and asked authority to cross the national
+boundaries and pursue and capture the murderers, wherever they
+might be found. The Council accorded the permission asked, but it
+was never acted on. It is not likely that a permission to cross our
+borders in pursuit of a flying enemy would ever again be granted.
+It was conceded in exceptional circumstances by an irresponsible
+Government, but the growth of the Dominion of Canada has been such,
+and its relations to the empire have become so intimate, that it
+would not in my judgment be granted, if at all, except in concert
+with the Imperal Government. The Governor also reported to the
+Council, that the main body of the Sioux on the Missouri in the
+United States had sent him a message asking his advice as to making
+peace with the Americans, and expressing a desire to visit Red
+River in spring, and that he had advised the Sioux to make peace
+with the Americans, as otherwise, the war would be renewed with
+increased vigor next summer. He had also counselled them not to
+visit the Red River country. The Council warned the Sioux not to
+visit the settlement, but in the summer of 1866, the advice was
+disregarded. A band of Sioux came to Fort Garry and were leaving
+quietly, with a number of Saulteaux, but when about a mile from the
+Fort they were attacked by a band of Red Lake Saulteaux Indians,
+who had just come into the settlement from the United States and
+five of them were shot. The remainder fled for their lives.
+
+The Council apprehended that the Sioux might congregate in force,
+and a collision take place between the Sioux and the Saulteaux, and
+therefore authorized the formation of a body of from fifty to one
+hundred mounted armed men from among the settlers, to prevent the
+Sioux from coming into the settlement. Fortunately they did not
+return and a collision was avoided.
+
+In 1866, the American authorities again opened up communications
+with the Governor and Council of Assiniboia, through Colonel Adams,
+who intimated that he had been authorized by Brevet Major-General
+Corse, commanding the District of Minnesota, "to use every possible
+means to induce the hostile Sioux to surrender themselves at Fort
+Abercrombie, and to grant them protection and entire absolution for
+all past offences in the event of giving themselves up," and asking
+the aid of the Council, to endeavor to influence the Sioux to
+accede to the proposals he made. The Council accordingly authorized
+Judge Black and Mr. McClure to communicate to the Chiefs of the
+Sioux, the letter of Colonel Adams, and endeavor to induce them to
+accept of it, and to supply them with what provisions might be
+necessary to carry the Sioux to Fort Abercrombie.
+
+All efforts having that end in view failed, and the Sioux remained,
+some in the Province of Assiniboia, and others in the territories
+beyond. As time went on, in 1870, the country passed under the rule
+of Canada, and when the Government of Canada was established in the
+Province of Manitoba, which included the district of Assiniboia,
+the Sioux were found living quietly in tents, in the parishes of
+Poplar Point, High Bluff, and Portage la Prairie, in what became
+the new Province of Manitoba. Immigrants from Ontario, had begun to
+settle in that section of the Province, and the settlement rapidly
+increased.
+
+The Sioux were found very useful, and were employed as labourers,
+cutting grain, making fence-rails, and ploughing for the settlers.
+They also endeavored to gain a subsistence, by killing game and
+fur-bearing animals, and by fishing. They frequently applied to
+Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, to be allowed to settle on a reserve, where
+they might support themselves by farming, a step which that officer
+favored. In 1873, they renewed the application to his successor,
+Lieut.-Gov. Morris, who having obtained authority to do so,
+promised to give them a reserve; upwards of one hundred of these
+Sioux, resident within Manitoba, having waited upon him, and
+represented "that they had no homes or means of living," and asked
+for land and agricultural implements.
+
+They were informed, that the case was exceptional, and that what
+would be done, would be as a matter of grace and not of right,
+which they admitted. They were also told that the reserve would be
+for themselves alone, and that the Sioux now in the States must
+remain there. A reserve was proposed to them on Lake Manitoba, but
+they were unwilling to go there, being afraid of the Saulteaux, and
+especially the Red Lake Saulteaux.
+
+It is satisfactory to state, that after the treaty at the
+North-West Angle, the Saulteaux having become bound to live at
+peace with all people under Canadian authority, sent the aged Chief
+Kou-croche to see the Lieutenant-Governor at Fort Garry, to
+acquaint him of their desire to make peace with the Sioux. The
+Chief said the words he had heard at the Angle were good, he had
+promised to live at peace with all men, and he now wished to make
+friends with the Sioux. The distrust between the two tribes had
+been great, owing to past events. At the Angle, but for the
+presence of the troops, the Chippewas would have fled, it having
+been circulated among them, that the Sioux were coming to attack
+them. Permission was given to the Chief to pay his visit to the
+Sioux, and messengers were sent to them, in advance, to explain the
+object of his visit.
+
+The result of the interview was satisfactory, and the ancient feud
+was buried. In 1874, two reserves were allotted the Sioux, one on
+the Assiniboine River, at Oak River, and another still further
+west, at Bird Tail Creek. These reserves were surveyed, the former
+containing eight thousand and the latter seven thousand acres.
+
+Settlements, were commenced, on both reserves, and cattle, seed and
+agricultural implements were supplied to them. In 1875, the
+Lieutenant-Governor finding that a large number still continued
+their nomadic life, in the vicinity of Poplar Point and Portage la
+Prairie, visited them, and obtained their promise to remove to the
+reserves--which the majority eventually did. Kenneth Mackenzie,
+Esq., M.P.P., a very successful farmer from Ontario, who had
+largely employed Sioux laborers, kindly agreed to visit the
+Assiniboine reserve and direct them from time to time as to the
+agricultural operations. The Church of England undertook the
+establishment of a mission and erected buildings there, while the
+Presbyterians opened a mission at Bird Tail Creek, and obtained the
+services of a native ordained Sioux minister, from the Presbytery
+of Dakotah. The number of these Sioux is estimated at about fifteen
+hundred. Both settlements give promise of becoming self-sustaining,
+and in view of the rapid settlement of the country, some disposition
+of them had become necessary.
+
+During their sojourn of thirteen years on British territory, these
+Indians have on the whole, been orderly, and there was only one
+grave crime committed among them, under peculiar circumstances--the
+putting to death of one of their number, which was done under their
+tribal laws. An indictment was laid before the Grand Jury of
+Manitoba, and a true bill found against those concerned in this
+affair, but the chief actors in the tragedy fled. Had they been
+tried, their defence would probably have been that the act was
+committed in self-defence. The slain man having, as the Chief
+represented, killed one of the tribe, cruelly assaulted another,
+and threatened the lives of others. When the war broke out between
+the Sioux and the American Government, the American Sioux,
+endeavored to induce those in Canadian territory to join them,
+but they refused. Precautionary measures were however taken, and
+messengers sent to them, by the Lieutenant-Governor, to warn
+them against taking any part. They disclaimed all intention to
+do so, and said they meant to live peacefully, being grateful
+for the kindness with which they had been treated. Besides these
+Manitoban Sioux, there were two other bands in the North-West
+Territories--one at Turtle Mountains, and another large party
+in the bounds of the Qu'Appelle Treaty. In 1876 the latter sent
+their Chiefs to see Lieut.-Gov. Morris and the Hon. Mr. Laird, at
+Qu'Appelle, and asked to be assigned a home. They were told that
+their case would be represented to the Canadian authorities. In
+1877, the Sioux at the Turtle Mountains, sent two deputations to
+the Lieutenant-Governor, to ask for a reserve in that region. They
+said they had lived for fifteen years in British territory, they
+wanted land to be given them and implements to cultivate the soil,
+and seed to sow, and scythes and sickles to reap their grain, and
+some cattle.
+
+They were told that they had no claim on the Queen, as they were
+not British Indians, unless she chose to help them out of her
+benevolence. This they cheerfully admitted, but hoped that they
+would be helped. They were further informed, that if a reserve was
+granted them, it could not be near the boundary line as they
+wished, and that they must avoid all interference with the American
+trouble with their nation. This they willingly promised and said
+"they had already taken care to have nothing to do with the
+matter." These Sioux were very intelligent and superior Indians,
+and were well dressed. A reserve was subsequently allotted to them
+in the year 1876, in the vicinity of Oak Lake, about fifty miles
+due north of Turtle Mountains, allowing them the same quantity of
+land, which had been given the Manitoba Sioux, viz., 80 acres to
+each band of five persons, and they will doubtless follow the
+example of their brethren on the other two reserves. With regard to
+the Sioux to whom reserves have been assigned, the then Minister of
+the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, thus reported in 1877: "The
+report of the Deputy Superintendent-General in 1877 gives some
+details respecting the operations of the Manitoba Sioux on their
+reserves, during the past year. He says: 'Upon the whole, they
+appear to have made fair progress in cultivating the land, and
+their prospects for the future, had they the advice and assistance
+of some good farmers, for a few years, would be encouraging.
+Indeed, the Sioux generally, who are resident in Canada, appear to
+be more intelligent, industrious, and self-reliant, than the other
+Indian bands in the North West.'"
+
+While the authorities were thus successfully dealing with the
+problem of how to provide a future for these wandering Sioux, a
+grave difficulty presented itself by the incursion into the
+North-West Territories of a large body of American Sioux (supposed
+to be under the lead of what is now an historic name, the Sitting
+Bull), who had fled from the American troops. The Minister of the
+Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in 1877, thus alluded to this
+difficult subject:
+
+"The presence of Sitting Bull and his warriors in Canada is a
+source of anxiety both to the Government of Canada and the United
+States. These Indians harbor feelings of fierce hostility towards,
+and thorough distrust of, the United States people and Government.
+These feelings may be traced to two principal causes, the
+dishonesty of Indian agents and the failure of the Federal
+authorities to protect the Indian reservations from being taken
+possession of by an adventurous and somewhat lawless white
+population. The officers of the North-West Mounted Police have been
+instructed to impress upon Sitting Bull and his warriors the
+necessity of keeping the peace towards the people of the United
+States, and there is no reason for supposing they will not heed the
+warnings which have been given them. It is not, however, desirable
+to encourage them to remain on Canadian territory, and Col. McLeod
+has been accordingly instructed to impress them with their probable
+future hardships after the failure of the buffalo, should they
+elect to remain in Canada; that the President of the United States
+and his Cabinet are upright men, willing and anxious to do justice
+to the Indians; and should they return peacefully they will be
+properly cared for, and any treaty made with them will be honestly
+fulfilled. It is desirable that as wards of the United States they
+should return to that country, upon the Government of which morally
+devolves the burden and the responsibility of their civilization."
+
+The Sioux have since continued within the borders of Canada, and
+the Minister of the Interior, Sir John Macdonald, reported in 1878,
+"That it is only just to them to say, that they have behaved
+remarkably well ever since they crossed into Canada." Their
+presence in the North-West Territories has, however, been attended
+and will be followed, in any event, by serious consequences. The
+natural food supply of our Canadian Indians, the Crees, Chippewas,
+Assiniboines and Blackfeet, of the Plain Country, viz., the
+buffalo, was rapidly diminishing, and the advent of so large a body
+of foreign Indians has precipitated its diminution, so that the
+final extinction of the buffalo is fast drawing near. Already the
+Government of Canada, in the discharge of a national obligation,
+which has ever been recognized by all civilized authorities, has
+been obliged to come to the aid of the Blackfeet and other Indians
+to avert the danger and suffering from famine. The Sioux are
+already feeling the hardships of their position, and it will tax
+the skill and energies of the Government of Canada to provide a
+remedy. Already, at the instance of the Hon. David Mills, then
+Minister of the Interior (who visited Washington for the purpose),
+an effort was made by the American Government to induce the Sioux
+to return to their homes. Envoys were sent to them from the United
+States, but they declined to accept the overtures made to them. On
+the previous occasion of the flight into our territories of the
+Sioux, the American Government, as has been before recited, after
+an interval of nearly four years, offered them protection on their
+return journey from British territory to their homes in the United
+States and "entire absolution for all past offences". This forms a
+precedent which should be invoked and would doubtless be accepted
+by the Sioux if they can be induced to believe in the good faith of
+the American Government towards them. Every effort should be made
+to bring about so desirable a result, and the subject will
+doubtless engage in the future, as it has done in the past, the
+anxious consideration and wise action of the Canadian Government,
+who have a right to appeal to the President of the United States
+and his advisers, to relieve them from the incubus of the presence
+in our territories of so many of the wards of that Government, and
+who are without the means or opportunities of obtaining a
+livelihood for themselves.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE TREATIES--THE HALF-BREEDS--THE FUTURE
+OF THE INDIAN TRIBES
+
+
+Having placed before my readers, a history of the treaties of
+Canada with the Indian tribes, of Manitoba, the North-West
+Territories and Kee-wa-tin, I now proceed, in conclusion, to deal
+with the administration of these treaties and to consider the
+future of these interesting aboriginal races. I remark in the first
+place that the provisions of these treaties must be carried out
+with the utmost good faith and the nicest exactness. The Indians of
+Canada have, owing to the manner in which they were dealt with for
+generations by the Hudson's Bay Company, the former rulers of these
+vast territories, an abiding confidence in the Government of the
+Queen, or the Great Mother, as they style her. This must not, at
+all hazards, be shaken. It can be easily and fully maintained. The
+treaties are all based upon the models of that made at the Stone
+Fort in 1871 and the one made in 1873 at the north-west angle of
+the Lake of the Woods with the Chippewa tribes, and these again are
+based, in many material features, on those made by the Hon. W. B.
+Robinson with the Chippewas dwelling on the shores of Lakes Huron
+and Superior in 1860.
+
+These may be summarized thus:
+
+1. A relinquishment, in all the great region from Lake Superior to
+the foot of the Rocky Mountains, of all their right and title to
+the lands covered by the treaties, saving certain reservations for
+their own use, and
+
+2. In return for such relinquishment, permission to the Indians to
+hunt over the ceded territory and to fish in the waters thereof,
+excepting such portions of the territory as pass from the Crown
+into the occupation of individuals or otherwise.
+
+3. The perpetual payment of annuities of five dollars per head to
+each Indian--man, woman and child. The payment of an annual salary
+of twenty-five dollars to each Chief, and of fifteen dollars to
+each Councillor, or head man, of a Chief (thus making them in a
+sense officers of the Crown), and in addition, suits of official
+clothing for the Chiefs and head men, British flags for the Chiefs,
+and silver medals. These last are given both in the United States
+and in Canada, in conformity with an ancient custom, and are much
+prized and cherished by the Chiefs and their families. Frequently
+the Indians have exhibited to me with pride, old medals issued,
+with the likeness of the King before the American war of
+Independence, and which have passed down as heirlooms of their
+families. On one occasion a young Chief, who had come of age and
+aspired to be recognized as a Chief, was decorated in my presence
+with the old King George silver medal, by one of the band, to whom
+it had been entrusted for safe keeping by the young man's father,
+who was a Chief, with the charge that on the boy's coming of age,
+it would be delivered over to him. The Chieftainships were at first
+partly hereditary, partly won by deeds of daring and of leadership
+against the foe. They are now generally elected, though the
+tendency to hereditary succession still largely exists. The power
+of the Chiefs has been much broken of late, and I am of opinion
+that it is of importance to strengthen the hands of the Chiefs
+and Councillors by a due recognition of their offices and respect
+being shewn them. They should be strongly impressed with the belief
+that they are officers of the Crown, and that it is their duty
+to see that the Indians of their tribes obey the provisions of
+the treaties. The importance of upholding the Chiefs, may be
+illustrated by an incident which occurred near Fort Ellice, after
+the making of the treaty. A party composed of three men and the
+wife of one of them, were travelling as freighters; two of the
+men were Half-breeds, the other a Canadian. One night, one of the
+Half-breeds shot the Canadian, and attempted to kill the other
+Half-breed, who fled to an Indian camp in the vicinity. The Chief
+of the band was there, and he at once took his young men with him,
+proceeded to the scene of the murder, and after making the offender
+a prisoner, took him to the nearest police station and delivered
+him to the authorities. The culprit was subsequently tried in
+Manitoba, convicted of murder and hanged. For this action the Chief
+received the thanks of His Excellency the Earl of Dufferin, then
+Governor-General of Canada. This case affords an illustration of
+the value of the recognition of the Chiefs of the various bands,
+and shews of how much advantage, it is to the Crown to possess so
+large a number of Indian officials, duly recognized as such, and
+who can be inspired with a proper sense of their responsibility to
+the Government and to their bands, as well as to others. In all the
+negotiations for treaties, the Chiefs took a controlling part, and
+generally exhibited great common sense and excellent judgment. It
+is therefore of the utmost importance to retain their confidence
+and cause their office to be recognized and respected by both
+whites and Indians.
+
+4. The allotment of lands to the Indians, to be set aside as
+reserves for them for homes and agricultural purposes, and which
+cannot be sold or alienated without their consent, and then only
+for their benefit; the extent of lands thus set apart being
+generally one section for each family of five. I regard this
+system as of great value. It at once secures to the Indian tribes
+tracts of land, which cannot be interfered with, by the rush of
+immigration, and affords the means of inducing them to establish
+homes and learn the arts of agriculture. I regard the Canadian
+system of allotting reserves to one or more bands together, in the
+localities in which they have had the habit of living, as far
+preferable to the American system of placing whole tribes, in large
+reserves, which eventually become the object of cupidity to the
+whites, and the breaking up of which, has so often led to Indian
+wars and great discontent even if warfare did not result. The
+Indians, have a strong attachment to the localities, in which they
+and their fathers have been accustomed to dwell, and it is
+desirable to cultivate this home feeling of attachment to the soil.
+Moreover, the Canadian system of band reserves has a tendency to
+diminish the offensive strength of the Indian tribes, should they
+ever become restless, a remote contingency, if the treaties are
+carefully observed. Besides, the fact of the reserves being
+scattered throughout the territories, will enable the Indians to
+obtain markets among the white settlers, for any surplus produce
+they may eventually have to dispose of. It will be found desirable,
+to assign to each family parts of the reserve for their own use, so
+as to give them a sense of property in it, but all power of sale or
+alienation of such lands should be rigidly prohibited. Any
+premature enfranchisement of the Indians, or power given them to
+part with their lands, would inevitably lead to the speedy breaking
+up of the reserves, and the return of the Indians to their
+wandering mode of life, and thereby to the re-creation of a
+difficulty which the assignment of reserves was calculated to
+obviate. There is no parallel between the condition of the
+North-Western Indians, and that of the Indians who have so long
+been under the fostering care of the Government in the older
+Provinces of Ontario and Quebec.
+
+5. A very important feature of all the treaties, is the giving to
+the Indian bands, agricultural implements, oxen, cattle (to form
+the nuclei of herds), and seed grain.
+
+The Indians are fully aware that their old mode of life is passing
+away. They are not "unconscious of their destiny;" on the contrary,
+they are harassed with fears as to the future of their children and
+the hard present of their own lives. They are tractable, docile,
+and willing to learn. They recognize the fact that they must seek
+part of their living from "the mother earth," to use their own
+phraseology. A Chief at Fort Pitt said to me,--"I got a plough from
+Mr. Christie of the Company twelve years ago. I have no cattle; I
+put myself and my young men in front of it in the spring, and drag
+it through the ground. I have no hoes; I make them out of the roots
+of trees. Surely, when the Great Mother hears of our needs, she
+will come to our help." [Footnote: This band a year ago raised
+sufficient farm produce to support themselves without hunting.]
+Such a disposition as this should be encouraged. Induce the Indians
+to erect houses on their farms, and plant their "gardens" as they
+call them, and then while away on their hunts, their wives and
+children will have houses to dwell in, and will care for their
+patches of corn and grain and potatoes. Then, too, the cattle given
+them will expand into herds. It is true that the number assigned
+to each band is comparatively limited, and the Government are
+not bound to extend the number. This was done advisedly, by the
+successive Governments of Canada, and the Commissioners, acting
+under their instructions; for it was felt, that it was an
+experiment to entrust them with cattle, owing to their inexperience
+with regard to housing them and providing fodder for them in
+winter, and owing, moreover, to the danger of their using them for
+food, if short of buffalo meat or game. Besides, it was felt, that
+as the Indian is, and naturally so, always asking, it was better,
+that if the Government saw their way safely to increase the number
+of cattle given to any band, it should be, not as a matter of
+right, but of grace and favor, and as a reward for exertion in
+the care of them, and as an incentive to industry. Already, the
+prospect of many of the bands turning their attention to raising
+food from the soil is very hopeful. In the reserve of St. Peter's,
+in Manitoba, the Church of England has for many years had a church
+and mission, and long before the advent of Canada as ruler of the
+lands, the Indians of the Indian settlement had their houses and
+gardens, the produce of which, went to supplement the results of
+fishing and hunting. And so on the shores and islands of the Lake
+of the Woods and on Rainy Lake, the Indians had their gardens.
+Since the treaties, the Indians are turning their attention
+much more to cultivating the soil. The Indian district agent in
+the Qu'Appelle region, reported in November, 1878, that of the
+twenty-four bands in this treaty, eleven are gradually turning
+their attention to farming, and of these Chief Cote, of Swan River,
+is the most advanced, having harvested that year two hundred and
+eighty bushels of barley, over three thousand bushels of potatoes,
+and a large quantity of other vegetables. The increase from the
+four cows he received two years since is eleven head. This may
+appear large, but such is the fact.
+
+Lieut.-Gov. Laird reported in 1877, "That some of the bands within
+the limits of Treaties Numbers Four and Six sowed grain and
+potatoes with good results that year, one band having about one
+hundred acres under cultivation." He also states that the Indians
+are very desirous of farming, and that he has hopes that a much
+larger quantity of seed will be sown next year (1879). He also
+states that the band at White Fish Lake, raised enough that year to
+maintain themselves without going to hunt. The Superintendent also
+reported that in the Manitoba superintendency "a general desire to
+be taught farming, building and other civilized arts exists, and
+some of the Indians in Treaty Number Three, living in the vicinity
+of Fort Francis, are said to evince enterprise and progress in
+their farming operations." At Lac Seule, also in this treaty, the
+progress of the Indians is quite marked. They have established two
+villages in order to have the benefit of schools.
+
+The Indian agent in the Lake Manitoba district makes a similar
+statement. One band has eighteen small farms of one hundred acres
+in all, on which they raise potatoes, Indian corn and garden
+vegetables. They have twenty-nine houses, twenty-four horses, and
+thirty-six head of cattle, of their own. Another built during the
+year a good school-house, nineteen new houses, and had one hundred
+and twenty-five acres under cultivation. Another had just begun
+farming, built six houses, two stables and a barn, and possess
+seven head of cattle. Still another had twenty-three houses and one
+hundred and fifty acres under tillage, raising barley, wheat,
+potatoes and vegetables, and having thirty-six head of cattle. It
+is unnecessary to multiply instances, of the aptitude, the Indians
+are exhibiting, within so recent a period after the completion of
+the treaties, to avail themselves of obtaining their subsistence
+from the soil. Their desire to do so, should be cultivated to the
+fullest extent. They are, of course, generally ignorant of the
+proper mode of farming. In the year 1876, I reported to the
+Minister of the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, after my return
+from the negotiation of the treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt,
+"that measures ought to be taken to instruct the Indians in farming
+and building."
+
+I said "that their present mode of living is passing away; the
+Indians are tractable, docile and willing to learn. I think that
+advantage should be taken of this disposition to teach them to
+become self-supporting, which can best be accomplished by the aid
+of a few practical farmers and carpenters to instruct them in
+farming and house-building."
+
+This view was corroborated by my successor, Lieutenant-Governor
+Laird, who in 1878 reported from Battleford "that if it were
+possible to employ a few good, practical men to aid and instruct
+the Indians at seed time, I am of opinion that most of the bands on
+the Saskatchewan would soon be able to raise sufficient crops to
+meet their most pressing wants."
+
+It is satisfactory to know, that the Government of Canada, decided
+to act on these suggestions, at least in part, and have during the
+past summer sent farm instructors into the Plain country. It is to
+be hoped, that this step may prove as fruitful of good results, as
+the earnest desire of the Indians to farm would lead us to believe
+it may be.
+
+SCHOOLS
+
+6. The treaties provide for the establishment of schools, on the
+reserves, for the instruction of the Indian children. This is a
+very important feature, and is deserving of being pressed with the
+utmost energy. The new generation can be trained in the habits and
+ways of civilized life--prepared to encounter the difficulties with
+which they will be surrounded, by the influx of settlers, and
+fitted for maintaining themselves as tillers of the soil. The
+erection of a school-house on a reserve will be attended with
+slight expense, and the Indians would often give their labour
+towards its construction.
+
+7. The treaties all provide for the exclusion of the sale of
+spirits, or "fire-water," on the reserves. The Indians themselves
+know their weakness. Their wise men say, "If it is there we will
+use it, give us a strong law against it." A general prohibitory
+liquor law, originally enacted by the North-West Council and
+re-enacted by the Parliament of Canada, is in force in the
+North-West Territories and has been productive of much benefit, but
+will, in the near future, be difficult of enforcement owing to the
+vast extent of the territory.
+
+Such are the main features of the treaties between Canada and the
+Indians, and, few as they are, they comprehend the whole future of
+the Indians and of their relations to the Dominion.
+
+MACHINERY OF GOVERNMENT
+
+To carry them out, the treaty area has been divided into two
+Superintendencies, that of Manitoba, including Treaties Numbers
+One, Two, Three and Four, and that of the North-West Territories,
+including Treaties Numbers Five, Six and Seven. Mr. Dewdney, late
+a Member of the House of Commons from British Columbia, has
+recently been appointed to the latter Superintendency as Chief
+Superintendent, and has spent the summer among the Indian tribes.
+He has had large experience among Indians, and will prove, I have
+no doubt, an efficient and able officer. His residence will be
+in his Superintendency, and he will be able to meet the Indians
+and supervise his deputies. Under the Superintendents are agents
+having charge of particular districts and the bands within them,
+who reside among them. The Chief Superintendents and agents are
+officers of the Department of the Interior, and are directed by and
+report to the Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs at Ottawa,
+Lawrence Vankoughnet, Esq., who has had long experience of Indian
+management in the older Provinces, and his superior, Col. Dennis,
+Deputy Minister of the Interior, who had a large practical
+acquaintance with the North-West, and the head of the Department,
+now the Premier of the Dominion, the Right Hon. Sir John Macdonald.
+The system of management is thus a complete one, and doubtless, day
+by day, its mode of management, will be perfected and adapted to
+the growing exigencies and wants of the native population.
+
+THE HALF-BREEDS
+
+Ere passing from the subject, I cannot refrain from alluding to the
+Half-breed population of the North-West Territories. Those people
+are mainly of French Canadian descent, though there are a few of
+Scotch blood in the territories. Their influence with the Indian
+population is extensive. In Manitoba there is a large population of
+French Metis and Scotch Half-breeds, and they are proud of their
+mixed blood. This race is an important factor with regard to all
+North-West questions. His Excellency the Earl of Dufferin, with his
+keen appreciation of men and facts, astutely seized the position
+and thus referred to them in his speech at a banquet in his honor,
+given by the citizens of the whilome hamlet, and now city of
+Winnipeg, on the occasion of his visit to the Province of Manitoba
+in the year 1877.
+
+"There is no doubt that a great deal of the good feeling thus
+subsisting between the red men and ourselves is due to the
+influence and interposition of that invaluable class of men the
+Half-breed settlers and pioneers of Manitoba, who, combining as
+they do the hardihood, the endurance and love of enterprise
+generated by the strain of Indian blood within their veins, with
+the civilization, the instruction, and the intellectual power
+derived from their fathers, have preached the Gospel of peace and
+good will, and mutual respect, with equally beneficent results to
+the Indian chieftain in his lodge and to the British settler in the
+shanty. They have been the ambassadors between the east and the
+west; the interpreters of civilization and its exigencies to the
+dwellers on the prairie as well as the exponents to the white men
+of the consideration justly due to the susceptibilities, the
+sensitive self-respect, the prejudices, the innate craving for
+justice, of the Indian race. In fact they have done for the colony
+what otherwise would have been left unaccomplished and have
+introduced between the white population and the red man a
+traditional feeling of amity and friendship which but for them it
+might have been impossible to establish."
+
+For my own part, I can frankly say, that I always had the
+confidence, support and active co-operation of the Half-breeds of
+all origins, in my negotiations with the Indian tribes, and I owe
+them this full acknowledgment thereof. The Half-breeds in the
+territories are of three classes--1st, those who as at St. Laurent,
+near Prince Albert, the Qu'Appelle Lakes and Edmonton, have their
+farms and homes; 2nd, those who are entirely identified with the
+Indians, living with them, and speaking their language; 3rd, those
+who do not farm, but live after the habits of the Indians, by the
+pursuit of the buffalo and the chase.
+
+As to the first class, the question is an easy one. They will, of
+course, be recognized as possessors of the soil, and confirmed by
+the Government in their holdings, and will continue to make their
+living by farming and trading.
+
+The second class have been recognized as Indians, and have passed
+into the bands among whom they reside.
+
+The position of the third class is more difficult. The loss of the
+means of livelihood by the destruction of the buffalo, presses upon
+them, as upon our Indian tribes; and with regard to them I reported
+in 1876, and I have seen no reason to change my views, as follows:
+
+"There is another class of the population in the North-West whose
+position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy Council. I
+refer to the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who are chiefly
+of French descent and live the life of the Indians. There are a few
+who are identified with the Indians, but there is a large class of
+Metis who live by the hunt of the buffalo, and have no settled
+homes. I think that a census of the numbers of these should be
+procured, and while I would not be disposed to recommend their
+being brought under the treaties, I would suggest that land should
+be assigned to them, and that on their settling down, if after an
+examination into their circumstances, it should be found necessary
+and expedient, some assistance should be given them to enable them
+to enter upon agricultural operations."
+
+FUTURE OF THE INDIANS
+
+And now I come, to a very important question, What is to be the
+future of the Indian population of the North-West? I believe it to
+be a hopeful one. I have every confidence in the desire and ability
+of the present administration, as of any succeeding one, to carry
+out the provisions of the treaties, and to extend a helping hand to
+this helpless population. That, conceded, with the machinery at
+their disposal, with a judicious selection of agents and farm
+instructors, and the additional aid of well-selected carpenters,
+and efficient school teachers, I look forward to seeing the
+Indians, faithful allies of the Crown, while they can gradually be
+made an increasing and self-supporting population.
+
+They are wards of Canada, let us do our duty by them, and repeat in
+the North-west, the success which has attended our dealings with
+them in old Canada, for the last hundred years.
+
+But the Churches too have their duties to fulfil. There is a common
+ground between the Christian Churches and the Indians, as they all
+believe as we do, in a Great Spirit. The transition thence to the
+Christian's God is an easy one.
+
+Many of them appeal for missionaries, and utter the Macedonian cry,
+"come over and help us." The Churches have already done and are
+doing much. The Church of Rome has its bishops and clergy, who have
+long been laboring assiduously and actively. The Church of England
+has its bishops and clergy on the shores of the Hudson's Bay, in
+the cold region of the Mackenzie and the dioceses of Rupert's Land
+and Saskatchewan. The Methodist Church has its missions on Lake
+Winnipeg, in the Saskatchewan Valley, and on the slopes of the
+Rocky Mountains. The Presbyterians have lately commenced a work
+among the Chippewas and Sioux. There is room enough and to spare,
+for all, and the Churches should expand and maintain their work.
+Already many of the missionaries have made records which will live
+in history: among those of recent times, Archbishop Tache, Bishop
+Grandin, Pere Lacombe, and many others of the Catholic Church;
+Bishops Machray, Bompas, Archdeacons Cochran and Cowley of the
+Church of England; Revs. Messrs. Macdougall of the Wesleyan and
+Nisbet of the Presbyterian Churches, have lived and labored, and
+though some of them have gone to their rest, they have left and
+will leave behind them a record of self-denial, untiring zeal, and
+many good results. Let the Churches persevere and prosper.
+
+And now I close. Let us have Christianity and civilization to
+leaven the mass of heathenism and paganism among the Indian tribes;
+let us have a wise and paternal Government faithfully carrying out
+the provisions of our treaties, and doing its utmost to help and
+elevate the Indian population, who have been cast upon our care,
+and we will have peace, progress, and concord among them in the
+North-West; and instead of the Indian melting away, as one of them
+in older Canada, tersely put it, "as snow before the sun," we will
+see our Indian population, loyal subjects of the Crown, happy,
+prosperous and self-sustaining, and Canada will be enabled to feel,
+that in a truly patriotic spirit, our country has done its duty by
+the red men of the North-West, and thereby to herself. So may it
+be.
+
+[Illustration: NOTE.--The foregoing represents a copy of the
+signatures of the contracting parties to the Selkirk Treaty, the
+Indians signing by their own distinctive marks, and also affixing
+their signs opposite the tracts of country claimed by them.]
+
+
+
+APPENDIX
+
+TEXTS OF TREATIES AND SUPPLEMENTARY ADHESIONS THERETO
+
+
+THE SELKIRK TREATY
+
+This indenture, made on the eighteenth day of July, in the
+fifty-seventh year of the reign of our Sovereign Lord King George
+the Third, and in the year of our Lord eighteen hundred and
+seventeen, between the undersigned Chiefs and warriors of the
+Chippeway or Saulteaux Nation and of the Killistine or Cree Nation,
+on the one part, and the Right Honorable Thomas Earl of Selkirk, on
+the other part:
+
+Witnesseth, that for and in consideration of the annual present or
+quit rent hereinafter mentioned, the said Chiefs have given,
+granted and confirmed, and do, by these presents, give, grant and
+confirm unto our Sovereign Lord the King all that tract of land
+adjacent to Red River and Ossiniboyne River, beginning at the mouth
+of Red River and extending along same as far as Great Forks at the
+mouth of Red Lake River, and along Ossiniboyne River, otherwise
+called Riviere des Champignons, and extending to the distance of
+six miles from Fort Douglas on every side, and likewise from Fort
+Doer, and also from the Great Forks and in other parts extending in
+breadth to the distance of two English statute miles back from the
+banks of the said rivers, on each side, together with all the
+appurtenances whatsoever of the said tract of land, to have and to
+hold forever the said tract of land and appurtenances to the use of
+the said Earl of Selkirk, and of the settlers being established
+thereon, with the consent and permission of our Sovereign Lord the
+King, or of the said Earl of Selkirk. Provided always, and these
+presents are under the express condition that the said Earl, his
+heirs and successors, or their agents, shall annually pay to the
+Chiefs and warriors of the Chippeway or Saulteaux Nation, the
+present or quit rent consisting of one hundred pounds weight of
+good and merchantable tobacco, to be delivered on or before the
+tenth day of October at the forks of Ossiniboyne River--and to
+the Chiefs and warriors of the Killistine or Cree Nation, a like
+present or quit rent of one hundred pounds of tobacco, to be
+delivered to them on or before the said tenth day of October, at
+Portage de la Prairie, on the banks of Ossiniboyne River. Provided
+always that the traders hitherto established upon any part of
+the above-mentioned tract of land shall not be molested in the
+possession of the lands which they have already cultivated and
+improved, till His Majesty's pleasure shall be known.
+
+In witness whereof the Chiefs aforesaid have set their marks, at
+the Forks of Red River on the day aforesaid.
+
+                   (Signed) SELKIRK.
+                            MACHE WHESEAB,       His x mark.
+                                 Le Sonnant.
+                            MECHKADDEWIKONAIE,    "  x  "
+                                 La robe noire.
+                            KAYAJIESKEBINOA,      "  x  "
+                                 L'Homme Noir.
+                            PEGOWIS.              "  x  "
+                            OUCKIDOAT,            "  x  "
+                                 Le Premier.
+Signed in presence of
+  THOMAS THOMAS.
+  JAMES BIRD.
+  F. MATTHEY,
+       Captain.
+  P. D. ORSONNENS,
+       Captain.
+  MILES MACDONELL.
+  J. BTE. CHARLES DE LORIMIER.
+  LOUIS NOLIN,
+       Interpreter.
+
+
+
+INDENTURE OF SALE FROM THE HUDSON'S BAY COMPANY TO THE EARL OF SELKIRK
+
+This indenture, made the twelfth day of June, in the fifty-first
+year of the reign of Our Sovereign Lord George the Third, by the
+grace of God, of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland,
+King, Defender of the Faith, and in the year of our Lord one
+thousand eight hundred and eleven, between the Governor and Company
+of Adventurers of England, trading into Hudson's Bay, of the one
+part, and the Right Honorable Thomas Earl of Selkirk, of the other
+part:
+
+Whereas the said Governor and Company are seized to them and their
+successors in fee simple, as absolute lords and proprietors of all
+the lands and territories situate upon the coasts and confines of
+the seas, streights, bays, lakes, rivers, creeks, and sounds,
+within the entrance of the streights commonly called Hudson's
+Streights, in the north-west part of America, and which lands and
+territories are reputed as one of the plantations or colonies
+belonging or annexed to the United Kingdom of Great Britain and
+Ireland, and are called Rupert's Land.
+
+And whereas the said Governor and Company have, for divers good and
+valuable causes and considerations them thereunto moving, agreed to
+convey and assure a certain tract or parcel of the said lands and
+territories hereinafter described, unto and to the use of the said
+Earl of Selkirk, his heirs and assigns, under and subject to
+certain conditions hereinafter expressed and contained. Now,
+therefore, this indenture witnesseth, that in pursuance of such
+agreement, and in consideration of the sum of ten shillings of
+lawful money of Great Britain to the said Governor and Company,
+well and truly paid by the said Earl of Selkirk, at or before the
+execution of these presents (the receipt whereof is hereby
+acknowledged), and for divers good and other valuable causes and
+considerations, them, the said Governor and Company hereunto
+moving, the said Governor and Company have given, granted, aliened,
+enfeoffed and confirmed, and by these presents do give, grant,
+alien, enfeoff, and confirm unto the said Earl of Selkirk, his
+heirs and assigns, all that tract of land or territory, being
+within and forming part of the aforesaid lands and territories of
+the said Governor and Company, bounded by an imaginary line running
+as follows, that is to say: beginning on the western shore of the
+Lake Winnipie, otherwise Winnipey, at a point in fifty-two degrees,
+and thirty north latitude, and thence running due west to the Lake
+Winnipegoos, otherwise called Little Winnipey, then in a southerly
+direction through the said lake so as to strike its western shore
+in latitude fifty-two degrees, then due west to the place where the
+parallel of fifty-two degrees north latitude intersects the western
+branch of Red River, otherwise called Assiniboyne River, then due
+south from that point of intersection to the height of land which
+separates the waters running into Hudson's Bay, from those of the
+Missouri and Mississippi, then in an easterly direction along the
+said height of land to the source of the River Winnipie, or
+Winnipey (meaning by such last named river, the principal branch of
+the waters which unite in Lake Saginagus), thence along the main
+stream of these waters and the middle of the several lakes through
+which they flow to the mouth of the Winnipie River, and thence in a
+northerly direction through the middle of Lake Winnipie to the
+place of beginning.
+
+In witness whereof the said parties to these presents have hereunto
+set their hands and seals the day and year first above written.
+
+    (Signed) SELKIRK.        [L. S.]
+             ALEXANDER LEAN, [L. S.]
+    Secretary of the Hudson's Bay Company.
+
+Indorsed.--Sealed under the common seal of the within mentioned
+Governor and Company, and signed and delivered by Alexander Lean,
+their Secretary, pursuant to their order and appointment, and
+signed, sealed and delivered by the within mentioned Thomas, Earl
+of Selkirk (being first duly stamped), in the presence of
+
+    ALEXANDER MUNDELL,
+        Parliament Street, Westminster.
+    EDWARD ROBERTS,
+        Hudson's Bay House.
+
+Suit l'attestation ecrite et assermentie du premier de ces deux
+temoins, Alex. Mundell, en presence du Maire de Londres.
+
+Sworn at the Mansion House,
+  London, this twenty-third day     (Signed) ALEXANDER MUNDELL.
+  of April, 1819, before me,
+                                             JOHN AIKINS,   [L. S.]
+                                                 Mayor.
+
+Puis, Attestation notariee, in testimonium veritatis.
+
+                                    (Signed) WILLIAM DUFF,
+                                                 Notary Public.
+
+Be it remembered that on the fourth day of September, in the year
+1812, at the Forks of Red River, peaceable possession of the land
+and hereditaments by the within written indenture, granted and
+enfeoffed, or otherwise assured or expressed, and intended so to
+be, was taken, had and delivered, by the within named William
+Hillier, one of the attorneys for that purpose appointed, unto the
+within named Miles Macdonell, Esquire, who was duly authorized to
+receive the same, to and for the use of the within named Earl of
+Selkirk, his heirs and assigns according to the form and effect of
+the within written indenture in the presence of
+
+    (Signed) JOHN McLEOD,
+             RODERICK McKENZIE.
+
+
+
+THE ROBINSON SUPERIOR TREATY
+
+This agreement, made and entered into on the seventh day of
+September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+fifty, at Sault Ste. Marie, in the Province of Canada, between
+the Honorable William Benjamin Robinson, of the one part, on
+behalf of Her Majesty the Queen, and Joseph Peandechat, John
+Iuinway, Mishe-Muckqua, Totomencie, Chiefs, and Jacob Warpela,
+Ahmutchiwagabou, Michel Shelageshick, Manitoshainse, and Chiginans,
+principal men of the Ojibewa Indians inhabiting the Northern
+Shore of Lake Superior, in the said Province of Canada, from
+Batchewananng Bay to Pigeon River, at the western extremity of said
+lake, and inland throughout the extent to the height of land which
+separates the territory covered by the charter of the Honorable the
+Hudson's Bay Company from the said tract, and also the islands in
+the said lake within the boundaries of the British possessions
+therein, of the other part, witnesseth:
+
+That for and in consideration of the sum of two thousand pounds of
+good and lawful money of Upper Canada, to them in hand paid, and
+for the further perpetual annuity of five hundred pounds, the same
+to be paid and delivered to the said Chiefs and their tribes at
+a convenient season of each summer, not later than the first day
+of August at the Honorable the Hudson's Bay Company's Posts of
+Michipicoton and Fort William, they the said Chiefs and principal
+men do freely, fully and voluntarily surrender, cede, grant and
+convey unto Her Majesty, Her heirs and successors forever, all
+their right, title and interest in the whole of the territory
+above described, save and except the reservations set forth in
+the schedule hereunto annexed, which reservations shall be held
+and occupied by the said Chiefs and their tribes in common, for
+the purposes of residence and cultivation,--and should the said
+Chiefs and their respective tribes at any time desire to dispose
+of any mineral or other valuable productions upon the said
+reservations, the same will be at their request sold by order of
+the Superintendent-General of the Indian Department for the time
+being, for their sole use and benefit, and to the best advantage.
+
+And the said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part, on behalf
+of Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, hereby promises
+and agrees to make the payments as before mentioned; and further to
+allow the said Chiefs and their tribes the full and free privilege
+to hunt over the territory now ceded by them, and to fish in the
+waters thereof as they have heretofore been in the habit of doing,
+saving and excepting only such portions of the said territory
+as may from time to time be sold or leased to individuals, or
+companies of individuals, and occupied by them with the consent of
+the Provincial Government. The parties of the second part further
+promise and agree that they will not sell, lease, or otherwise
+dispose of any portion of their reservations without the consent of
+the Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs being first had and
+obtained; nor will they at any time hinder or prevent persons from
+exploring or searching for minerals or other valuable productions
+in any part of the territory hereby ceded to Her Majesty as before
+mentioned. The parties of the second part also agree that in case
+the Government of this Province should before the date of this
+agreement have sold, or bargained to sell, any mining locations or
+other property on the portions of the territory hereby reserved for
+their use and benefit, then and in that case such sale, or promise
+of sale, shall be perfected, if the parties interested desire it,
+by the Government, and the amount accruing therefrom shall be paid
+to the tribe to whom the reservation belongs. The said William
+Benjamin Robinson on behalf of Her Majesty, who desires to deal
+liberally and justly with all her subjects, further promises and
+agrees that in case the territory hereby ceded by the parties of
+the second part shall at any future period produce an amount which
+will enable the Government of this Province without incurring loss
+to increase the annuity hereby secured to them, then, and in that
+case, the same shall be augmented from time to time, provided that
+the amount paid to each individual shall not exceed the sum of one
+pound provincial currency in any one year, or such further sum
+as Her Majesty may be graciously pleased to order; and provided
+further that the number of Indians entitled to the benefit of this
+treaty shall amount to two-thirds of their present numbers (which
+is twelve hundred and forty) to entitle them to claim the full
+benefit thereof, and should their numbers at any future period not
+amount to two-thirds of twelve hundred and forty, the annuity shall
+be diminished in proportion to their actual numbers.
+
+Schedule of Reservations made by the above named and subscribing
+Chiefs and principal men.
+
+First--Joseph Pean-de-chat and his tribe, the reserve to commence
+about two miles from Fort William (inland), on the right bank of
+the River Kiministiquia; thence westerly six miles, parallel to the
+shores of the lake; thence northerly five miles, thence easterly to
+the right bank of the said river, so as not to interfere with any
+acquired rights of the Honorable Hudson's Bay Company.
+
+Second--Four miles square at Gros Cap, being a valley near the
+Honorable Hudson's Bay Company's post of Michipicoton, for
+Totominai and tribe.
+
+Third--Four miles square on Gull River, near Lake Nipigon, on both
+sides of said river, for the Chief Mishimuckqua and tribe.
+
+      (Signed)  W. B. ROBINSON.
+                JOSEPH PEAN-DE-CHAT.   His x mark. [L. S.]
+                JOHN MINWAY.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                MISHE-MUCKQUA.          "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                TOTOMINAI.              "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                JACOB WAPELA.           "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                AH-MUTCHINAGALON.       "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                MICHEL SHELAGESHICK.    "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                MANITOU SHAINSE.        "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                CHIGINANS.              "  x  "    [L. S.]
+
+Signed, sealed and delivered at Sault Ste. Marie, the day and year
+first above written, in presence of--
+
+(Signed) GEORGE IRONSIDE,
+             S. I. Affairs.
+         ASTLEY P. COOPER,
+             Capt. Com. Rifle Brig.
+         H. M. BALFOUR,
+             2nd Lieut. Rifle Brig.
+         JOHN SWANSTON,
+             C. F. Hon. Hud. Bay Co.
+         GEORGE JOHNSTON,
+             Interpreter.
+         F. W. KEATING.
+
+
+
+THE ROBINSON HURON TREATY
+
+This agreement, made and entered into this ninth day of September,
+in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and fifty, at
+Sault Ste. Marie, in the Province of Canada, between the Honorable
+William Benjamin Robinson, of the one part, on behalf of Her Majesty
+the Queen, and Shinguacouse Nebenaigoching, Keokouse, Mishequonga,
+Tagawinini, Shabokishick, Dokis, Ponekeosh, Windawtegowinini,
+Shawenakeshick, Namassin, Naoquagabo, Wabakekik, Kitchepossigun,
+by Papasainse, Wagemaki, Pamequonaisheung, Chiefs; and John Bell,
+Paqwatchinini, Mashekyash, Idowekesis, Waquacomick, Ocheek,
+Metigomin, Watachewana, Minwawapenasse, Shenaoquom, Oningegun,
+Panaissy, Papasainse, Ashewasega, Kageshewawetung, Shawonebin; and
+also Chief Maisquaso (also Chiefs Muckata, Mishoquet, and Mekis),
+and Mishoquetto and Asa Waswanay and Pawiss, principal men of the
+Ojibewa Indians, inhabiting and claiming the eastern and northern
+shores of Lake Huron, from Penetanguishene to Sault Ste. Marie, and
+thence to Batchewanaung Bay, on the northern shore of Lake Superior,
+together with the Islands in the said Lakes, opposite to the shores
+thereof, and inland to the height of land which separates the
+territory covered by the charter of the Honorable Hudson's Bay
+Company from Canada; as well as all unconceded lands within the
+limits of Canada West to which they have any just claim, of the
+other part, witnesseth:
+
+That for and in consideration of the sum of two thousand pounds of
+good and lawful money of Upper Canada, to them in hand paid, and
+for the further perpetual annuity of six hundred pounds of like
+money, the same to be paid and delivered to the said Chiefs and
+their tribes at a convenient season of each year, of which due
+notice will be given, at such places as may be appointed for that
+purpose, they the said Chiefs and principal men, on behalf of their
+respective tribes or bands, do hereby fully, freely and voluntarily
+surrender, cede, grant, and convey unto Her Majesty, her heirs and
+successors forever, all their right, title, and interest to, and in
+the whole of, the territory above described, save and except the
+reservations set forth in the schedule hereunto annexed; which
+reservations shall be held and occupied by the said Chiefs and
+their tribes in common, for their own use and benefit.
+
+And should the said Chiefs and their respective tribes at any time
+desire to dispose of any such reservations, or of any mineral or
+other valuable productions thereon, the same will be sold or leased
+at their request by the Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs
+for the time being, or other officer having authority so to do, for
+their sole benefit, and to the best advantage.
+
+And the said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part, on behalf of
+Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, hereby promises and
+agrees to make, or cause to be made, the payments as before mentioned;
+and further to allow the said Chiefs and their tribes the full and free
+privilege to hunt over the territory now ceded by them, and to fish
+in the waters thereof, as they have heretofore been in the habit of
+doing; saving and excepting such portions of the said territory as may
+from time to time be sold or leased to individuals or companies of
+individuals, and occupied by them with the consent of the Provincial
+Government.
+
+The parties of the second part further promise and agree that they
+will not sell, lease or otherwise dispose of any portion of their
+Reservations without the consent of the Superintendent-General of
+Indian Affairs, or other officer of like authority, being first had
+and obtained. Nor will they at any time hinder or prevent persons
+from exploring or searching for minerals, or other valuable
+productions, in any part of the territory hereby ceded to Her
+Majesty, as before mentioned. The parties of the second part also
+agree, that in case the Government of this Province should before
+the date of this agreement have sold, or bargained to sell, any
+mining locations, or other property, on the portions of the
+territory hereby reserved for their use; then and in that case such
+sale, or promise of sale, shall be perfected by the Government, if
+the parties claiming it shall have fulfilled all the conditions
+upon which such locations were made, and the amount accruing
+therefrom shall be paid to the tribe to whom the Reservation
+belongs.
+
+The said William Benjamin Robinson, on behalf of Her Majesty, who
+desires to deal liberally and justly with all her subjects, further
+promises and agrees, that should the territory hereby ceded by the
+parties of the second part at any future period produce such an
+amount as will enable the Government of this Province, without
+incurring loss, to increase the annuity hereby secured to them,
+then and in that case the same shall be augmented from time to
+time, provided that the amount paid to each individual shall not
+exceed the sum of one pound Provincial currency in any one year, or
+such further sum as Her Majesty may be graciously pleased to order;
+and provided further that the number of Indians entitled to the
+benefit of this treaty shall amount to two-thirds of their present
+number, which is fourteen hundred and twenty-two, to entitle them
+to claim the full benefit thereof. And should they not at any
+future period amount to two-thirds of fourteen hundred and
+twenty-two, then the said annuity shall be diminished in proportion
+to their actual numbers.
+
+The said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part further
+agrees, on the part of Her Majesty and the Government of this
+Province, that in consequence of the Indians inhabiting French
+River and Lake Nipissing having become parties to this treaty, the
+further sum of one hundred and sixty pounds Provincial currency
+shall be paid in addition to the two thousand pounds above
+mentioned.
+
+Schedule of Reservations made by the above-named subscribing Chiefs
+and Principal Men.
+
+First--Pamequonaishcung and his band, a tract of land to commence
+seven miles, from the mouth of the River Maganetawang, and
+extending six miles east and west by three miles north.
+
+Second--Wagemake and his band, a tract of land to commence at a
+place called Nekickshegeshing, six miles from east to west, by
+three miles in depth.
+
+Third--Kitcheposkissegan (by Papasainse), from Point Grondine
+westward, six miles inland, by two miles in front, so as to include
+the small Lake Nessinassung--a tract for themselves and their
+bands.
+
+Fourth--Wabakekik, three miles front, near Shebawenaning, by five
+miles inland, for himself and band.
+
+Fifth--Namassin and Naoquagabo and their bands, a tract of land
+commencing near Quacloche, at the Hudson Bay Company's boundary;
+thence westerly to the mouth of the Spanish River; then four miles
+up the south bank of said river, and across to the place of
+beginning.
+
+Sixth--Shawenakishick and his band, a tract of land now occupied by
+them, and contained between two rivers, called Whitefish River, and
+Wanabitaseke, seven miles inland.
+
+Seventh--Windawtegawinini and his band, the Peninsula east of Serpent
+River, and formed by it, now occupied by them.
+
+Eighth--Ponekeosh and his band, the land contained between the
+River Mississaga and the River Penebewabecong, up to the first
+rapids.
+
+Ninth--Dokis and his band, three miles square at Wanabeyakokaun,
+near Lake Nipissing and the Island near the Fall of Okickandawt.
+
+Tenth--Shabokishick and his band, from their present planting
+grounds on Lake Nipissing to the Hudson Bay Company's post, six
+miles in depth.
+
+Eleventh--Tagawinini and his band, two miles square at Wanabitibing,
+a place about forty miles inland, near Lake Nipissing.
+
+Twelfth--Keokouse and his band, four miles front from Thessalon
+River eastward, by four miles inland.
+
+Thirteenth--Mishequanga and his band, two miles on the lake shore
+east and west of Ogawaminang, by one mile inland.
+
+Fourteenth--For Shinguacouse and his band, a tract of land
+extending from Maskinonge Bay, inclusive, to Partridge Point, above
+Garden River on the front, and inland ten miles, throughout the
+whole distance; and also Squirrel Island.
+
+Fifteenth--For Nebenaigoching and his band, a tract of land
+extending from Wanabekineyunnung west of Gros Cap to the boundary
+of the lands ceded by the Chiefs of Lake Superior, and inland ten
+miles throughout the whole distance, including Batchewanaunng Bay;
+and also the small island at Sault Ste. Marie used by them as a
+fishing station.
+
+Sixteenth--For Chief Mekis and his band, residing at Wasaquesing
+(Sandy Island), a tract of land at a place on the main shore
+opposite the Island; being the place now occupied by them for
+residence and cultivation, four miles square.
+
+Seventeenth--For Chief Muckatamishaquet and his band, a tract of
+land on the east side of the River Naishconteong, near Pointe aux
+Barils, three miles square; and also a small tract in Washauwenega
+Bay--now occupied by a part of the band--three miles square.
+
+   (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON.
+            SHINGUACOUSE.         His x mark. [L. S.]
+            NEBENAIGOCHING.        "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            KEOKOUSE.              "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MISHEQUONGA.           "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            TAGAWININI.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            SHABOKESHICK.          "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            DOKIS.                 "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            PONEKEOSH.             "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            WINDAWTEGOWININI.      "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            SHAWENAKESHICK.        "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            NAMASSIN.              "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MUCKATA MISHAQUET.     "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MEKIS.                 "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MAISQUASO.             "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            NAOQUAGABO.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            WABOKEKICK.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            KITCHEPOSSEGUN         "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                  (by Papasainse).
+            WAGEMAKE.              "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            PAMEQUONAISHCUNG.      "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            JOHN BELL.             "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            PAQWATCHININI.         "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MASHEKYASH.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            IDOWEKESIS.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            WAQUACOMICK.           "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MISHOQUETTO.           "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            ASA WASWANAY.          "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            PAWISS.                "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            OCHEEK.                "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            METIGOMIN.             "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            WATACHEWANA.           "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            MIMEWAWAPENASSE.       "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            SHENAOQUM.             "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            ONINGEGUN.             "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            PANAISSY.              "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            PAPASAINSE.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            ASHEWASEGA.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+            KAGISHEWAWETUNG        "  x  "    [L. S.]
+                  (by Baboncung).
+            SHAWONEBIN.            "  x  "    [L. S.]
+
+Signed, sealed and delivered at Sault Ste. Marie, the day and year
+first above written, in presence of
+
+(Signed) ASTLEY P. COOPER,
+             Capt. Rifle Brig.
+         GEORGE IRONSIDE,
+             S. I. Affairs.
+         F. W. BALFOUR,
+             Lieut. Rifle Brig.
+         ALLAN MACDONELL.
+         GEO. JOHNSON,
+             Interpreter.
+         LOUIS CADOTT.
+         J. B. ASSIKINACK.
+         T. W. KEATING.
+         JOS. WILSON.
+
+Witnesses to signatures of Muckata Mishaquet, Mekis, Mishoquetto,
+Asa Waswanay, and Pawiss--
+
+    T. G. ANDERSON, S. I. A.
+    W. B. HAMILTON.
+    W. SIMPSON.
+    ALFRED A. THOMPSON.
+
+
+
+THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY
+
+Articles of agreement and convention made and concluded at
+Manitowaning, on the Great Manitoulin Island, in the Province of
+Canada, the sixth day of October, Anno Domini 1862, between the
+Hon. William McDougall, Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs,
+and William Spragge, Esquire, Deputy Superintendent of Indian
+Affairs, on the part of the Crown and Government of said Province,
+of the first part, and Mai-she-quong-gai, Oke-mah-be-ness, J. B.
+Assiginock, Benjamin Assiginock, Mai-be-nesse-ma, She-no-tah-gun,
+George Ah-be-tos-o-wai, Paim-o-quo-waish-gung, Abence, Tai-bose-gai,
+Ato-wish-cosh, Nai-wan-dai-ge-zhik, Wan-kan-o-say, Keesh-kewan-bik,
+Chiefs and principal men of the Ottawa, Chippewa, and other Indians
+occupying the said Island, on behalf of the said Indians, of the
+second part:
+
+Whereas, the Indian title to said Island was surrendered to the
+Crown on the ninth August, Anno Domini 1836, under and by virtue of
+a treaty made between Sir Francis Bond Head, then Governor of Upper
+Canada, and the Chiefs and principal men of the Ottawas and
+Chippewas then occupying and claiming title thereto, in order that
+the same might "be made the property (under their Great Father's
+control) of all Indians whom he should allow to reside thereon;"
+
+And whereas, but few Indians from the mainland whom it was intended
+to transfer to the Island, have ever come to reside thereon;
+
+And whereas, it has been deemed expedient (with a view to the
+improvement of the condition of the Indians, as well as the
+settlement and improvement of the country), to assign to the
+Indians now upon the Island certain specified portions thereof, to
+be held by patent from the Crown, and to sell the other portions
+thereof fit for cultivation to settlers, and to invest the proceeds
+thereof, after deducting the expenses of survey and management, for
+the benefit of the Indians;
+
+And whereas, a majority of the Chiefs of certain bands residing on
+that portion of the Island easterly of Heywood Sound and the
+Manitoulin Gulf have expressed their unwillingness to accede to
+this proposal as respects that portion of the Island, but have
+assented to the same as respects all other portions thereof; and
+whereas the Chiefs and principal men of the bands residing on the
+Island westerly of the said Sound and Gulf have agreed to accede to
+the said proposal:
+
+Now this agreement witnesseth that in consideration of the sum of
+seven hundred dollars now in hand paid (which sum is to be
+hereafter deducted from the proceeds of lands sold to settlers),
+the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, and in further
+consideration of such sums as may be realized from time to time as
+interest upon the purchase money of the lands to be sold for their
+benefit as aforesaid, the parties hereto of the second part have
+and hereby do release, surrender and give up to Her Majesty the
+Queen, all the right, title, interest and claim of the parties of
+the second part, and of the Ottawa, Chippewa and other Indians in
+whose behalf they act, of, in and to the Great Manitoulin Island,
+and also of, in and to the Islands adjacent, which have been deemed
+or claimed to be appertinent or belonging thereto, to have and to
+hold the same and every part thereof to Her Majesty, her heirs and
+successors forever.
+
+And it is hereby agreed by and between the parties hereto as
+follows:
+
+Firstly--A survey of the said Manitoulin Island shall be made as
+soon as conveniently may be, under the authority of the Department
+of Crown Lands.
+
+Secondly--The Crown will, as soon as conveniently may be, grant by
+deed for the benefit of each Indian being the head of a family and
+residing on the said Island, one hundred acres of land; to each
+single person over twenty-one years of age, residing as aforesaid,
+fifty acres of land; to each family of orphan children under
+twenty-one years of age, containing two or more persons, one
+hundred acres of land; and to each single orphan child under
+twenty-one years of age, fifty acres of land; to be selected and
+located under the following rules and conditions: Each Indian
+entitled to land under this agreement may make his own selection of
+any land on the Great Manitoulin Island:
+
+Provided, 1st. That the lots selected shall be contiguous or
+adjacent to each other, so that Indian settlements on the Island
+may be as compact as possible. 2nd. That if two or more Indians
+claim the same lot of land, the matter shall be referred to the
+Resident Superintendent, who shall examine the case and decide
+between them. 3rd. That selections for orphan children may be made
+by their friends, subject to the approval of the Resident
+Superintendent. 4th. Should any lot or lots, selected as aforesaid,
+be contiguous to any bay or harbor, or any stream of water, upon
+which a mill site shall be found, and should the Government be of
+opinion that such lot or lots ought to be reserved for the use of
+the public, or for village or park lots, or such mill site be sold
+with a view to the erection of a mill thereon, and shall signify
+such its opinion through its proper agent, then the Indian who has
+selected, or who wishes to select such lot, shall make another
+selection; but if he has made any improvements thereon, he shall be
+allowed a fair compensation therefor. 5th. The selections shall all
+be made within one year after the completion of the survey, and
+for that purpose plans of the survey shall be deposited with
+the Resident Superintendent as soon as they are approved by the
+Department of Crown Lands, and shall be open to the inspection of
+all Indians entitled to make selections as aforesaid.
+
+Thirdly--The interests which may accrue from the investment of the
+proceeds of sales of lands as aforesaid, shall be payable annually,
+and shall be apportioned among the Indians now residing westerly of
+the said Sound and Gulf, and their descendants per capita, but
+every Chief lawfully appointed shall be entitled to two portions.
+
+Fourthly--So soon as one hundred thousand acres of the said land is
+sold, such portion of the salary of the Resident Superintendent,
+and of the expenses of his office as the Government may deem
+equitable, shall become a charge upon the said fund.
+
+Fifthly--The deeds or patents for the lands to be selected as
+aforesaid, shall contain such conditions for the protection of the
+grantees as the Governor in Council may, under the law, deem
+requisite.
+
+Sixthly--All the rights and privileges in respect to the taking of
+fish in the lakes, bays, creeks and waters within and adjacent to
+the said Island, which may be lawfully exercised and enjoyed by the
+white settlers thereon, may be exercised and enjoyed by the
+Indians.
+
+Seventhly--That portion of the Island easterly of Heywood Sound and
+Manitoulin Gulf, and the Indians now residing there, are exempted
+from the operation of this agreement as respects survey, sale of
+lots, granting deeds to Indians, and payment in respect of moneys
+derived from sales in other parts of the Island. But the said
+Indians will remain under the protection of the Government as
+formerly, and the said easterly part or division of the Island will
+remain open for the occupation of any Indians entitled to reside
+upon the Island as formerly, subject, in case of dispute, to the
+approval of the Government.
+
+Eighthly--Whenever a majority of the Chiefs and principal men at a
+council of the Indians residing easterly of the said Sound and
+Gulf, to be called and held for the purpose, shall declare their
+willingness to accede to the present agreement in all respects and
+portions thereof, and the Indians there shall be entitled to the
+same privileges in every respect from and after the date of such
+approval by the Government, as those residing in other parts of the
+Island.
+
+Ninthly--This agreement shall be obligatory and binding on the
+contracting parties as soon as the same shall be approved by the
+Governor in Council.
+
+In witness whereof the said Superintendent-General of Indian
+affairs, and Deputy Superintendent, and the undersigned Chiefs and
+principal men of the Ottawa, Chippewa and other Indians have hereto
+set their hands and seals at Manitowaning, the sixth day of
+October, in the year first above written.
+
+     (Signed)  WM. McDOUGALL.          [L. S.]
+               WM. SPRAGGE             [L. S.]
+               J. B. ASSIGINACK.       [L. S.]
+               MAISHEGUONG-PAI.        [L. S.]
+               OKEMAHBENESS.           [L. S.]
+               BENJAMIN ASSIGINACK.    [L. S.]
+               WAIBENESSIENNE.         [L. S.]
+               SHEWETOGUN.             [L. S.]
+               GEORGE WEBETOOSOWN.     [L. S.]
+               PAIMOQUONAISHKING.      [L. S.]
+               ABENCE.                 [L. S.]
+               TAIBOSEGAI.             [L. S.]
+               ATOWISHCOSTE.           [L. S.]
+               WETCOWSAI.              [L. S.]
+               KUSHKEWABIE.            [L. S.]
+               BAIBONISAI.             [L. S.]
+               KEGHIKGODONESS.         [L. S.]
+               PALTAHDOGINSHKING.      [L. S.]
+
+Executed in the presence of (having been first read, translated and
+explained):
+
+(Signed) GEORGE IRONSIDE,
+             S. I. Affairs.
+         S. PHILLIPS DAY.
+         WM. GIBBARD.
+         DAVID S. LAYTON.
+         JOSEPH WILSON. [L. S.]
+         JOHN H. McDOUGALL.
+         F. ASSICKINACK.
+         PETER JACOBS,
+             Church of England Mission.
+         McGREGOR IRONSIDE.
+
+The undersigned is one of the Chiefs of the Wequainorekong band,
+and appends his signature in testimony of his general approval and
+his assent as an individual to all the terms of the above
+agreement.
+
+      (Signed) SIHKUMMEH.              [L. S.]
+               RUNIC SAHLENG.          [L. S.]
+
+MANITOWANING, October 6th, 1862.
+
+Memorandum from Captain Ironside of Indian settlements on the
+Manitoulin Island:
+
+  Man-a-to-wan-ning.           She-she-gwan-a-sing.
+  She-qui-ain-dand.            Min-de-moo-ya-se-be.
+  Y-a-be-je-wong.              Che-to-wai-e-gun-ning (West).
+  Me-che-co-wed-e-nong.        Weg-wai-me-kong.
+  Mai-mon-a-ke-kong.           Weg-wai-me-kos-ing.
+  She-she-gwan-ning.           Ohe-to-wai-e-gun-ning (East).
+
+
+
+TREATIES IN MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN
+
+
+TREATY NUMBER ONE
+
+Articles of a treaty, made and concluded this third day of
+August, in the year of our Lord, one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-one, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of
+Great Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioner Wemyss M. Simpson,
+Esquire, of the one part, and the Chippewa and Swampy Cree
+Tribes of Indians, inhabitants of the country within the limits
+hereinafter defined and described by their Chiefs, chosen and named
+as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part:
+
+Whereas, all the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant
+to an appointment made by the said Commissioner, been convened at
+the Stone Fort, otherwise called Lower Fort Garry, to deliberate
+upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty of
+the one part, and to the said Indians of the other; and whereas the
+said Indians have been notified and informed by Her Majesty's said
+Commissioner, that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open up to
+settlement and immigration a tract of country bounded and described
+as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her
+Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract and to make a treaty and
+arrangements with them, so that there may be peace and good will
+between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and be assured
+of what allowance they are to count upon and receive, year by year,
+from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence.
+
+And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in
+Council as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said
+Commissioner to name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be
+authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations, and sign
+any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her
+Majesty for the faithful performance, by their respective bands,
+of such obligations as should be assumed by them the said Indians,
+have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose,
+that is to say: Mis-koo-kenew, or Red Eagle, (Henry Prince);
+Ka-ke-ka-penais, or Bird for ever; Na-sha-ke-penais, or Flying down
+Bird; Na-na-wa-nana, or Centre of Bird's Tail; Ke-we-tayash, or
+Flying round; Wa-ko-wash, or Whip-poor-Will; Oo-za-we-kwun, or
+Yellow Quill; and thereupon, in open Council, the different bands
+have presented their respective Chiefs to His Excellency the
+Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba, and of the
+North-West Territory, being present at such Council, and to the
+said Commissioner, as the Chiefs and head men for the purposes
+aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the
+said District, hereinafter described; and whereas the said
+Lieutenant-Governor and the said Commissioner, then and there
+received and acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs
+and head men, for the purpose aforesaid; and whereas the said
+Commissioner has proceeded to negotiate a treaty with the said
+Indians, and the same has finally been agreed upon and concluded as
+follows, that is to say:
+
+The Chippewa and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, and all other the
+Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined,
+do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to Her Majesty
+the Queen, and her successors for ever, all the lands included
+within the following limits, that is to say: Beginning at the
+International boundary line near its junction with the Lake of the
+Woods, at a point due north from the centre of Roseau Lake, thence
+to run due north to the centre of Roseau Lake; thence northward to
+the centre of White Mouth Lake, otherwise called White Mud Lake;
+thence by the middle of the lake and the middle of the river
+issuing therefrom, to the mouth thereof in Winnipeg River; thence
+by the Winnipeg River to its mouth; thence westwardly, including
+all the islands near the south end of the lake, across the lake to
+the mouth of the Drunken River; thence westwardly, to a point on
+Lake Manitoba, half way between Oak Point and the mouth of Swan
+Creek; thence across Lake Manitoba, on a line due west to its
+western shore; thence in a straight line to the crossing of the
+Rapids on the Assiniboine; thence due south to the International
+boundary line, and thence easterly by the said line to the place of
+beginning; to have and to hold the same to Her said Majesty the
+Queen, and her successors for ever; and Her Majesty the Queen,
+hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside and reserve for the sole
+and exclusive use of the Indians, the following tracts of land,
+that is to say: For the use of the Indians belonging to the band of
+which Henry Prince, otherwise called Mis-koo-ke-new, is the Chief,
+so much of land on both sides of the Red River, beginning at the
+south line of St. Peter's Parish, as will furnish one hundred and
+sixty acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for
+larger or smaller families; and for the use of the Indians of whom
+Na-sha-ke-penais, Na-na-wa-nanan, Ke-we-tayash, and Wa-ko-wush,
+are the Chiefs, so much land on the Roseau River, as will furnish
+one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that
+proportion for larger or smaller families, beginning from the
+mouth of the river; and for the use of the Indians, of which
+Ka-ke-ka-penais is the Chief, so much land on the Winnipeg River,
+above Fort Alexander, as will furnish one hundred and sixty
+acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger
+or smaller families, beginning at a distance of a mile or
+thereabout above the Fort; and for the use of the Indians, of whom
+Oo-za-we-Kwun is Chief, so much land on the south and east side
+of the Assiniboine, about twenty miles above the Portage, as will
+furnish one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in
+that proportion for larger or smaller families, reserving also a
+further tract enclosing said reserve, to comprise an equivalent to
+twenty-five square miles of equal breadth, to be laid out round the
+reserve; it being understood, however, that if at the date of the
+execution of this treaty, there are any settlers within the bounds
+of any lands reserved by any band, Her Majesty reserves the right
+to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just, so as not to
+diminish the extent of land allotted to the Indians.
+
+And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the
+behaviour and good conduct of her Indians, parties to this treaty,
+she hereby, through her Commissioner, makes them a present of three
+dollars for each Indian man, woman and child belonging to the bands
+here represented.
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school on each
+reserve hereby made, whenever the Indians of the reserve should
+desire it.
+
+Within the boundary of Indian Reserves, until otherwise enacted by
+the proper legislative authority, no intoxicating liquor shall be
+allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force or
+hereafter to be enacted to preserve Her Majesty's Indian subjects,
+inhabiting the reserves or living elsewhere, from the evil
+influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall be strictly
+enforced.
+
+Her Majesty's Commissioner shall, as soon as possible after the
+execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an accurate census
+of all the Indians inhabiting the district above described,
+distributing them in families, and shall in every year ensuing the
+date hereof, at some period during the month of July in each year,
+to be duly notified to the Indians, and at or near the respective
+reserves, pay to each Indian family of five persons the sum of
+fifteen dollars Canadian currency, or in like proportion for a
+larger or smaller family, such payment to be made in such articles
+as the Indians shall require of blankets, clothing, prints
+(assorted colors), twine or traps, at the current cost price in
+Montreal, or otherwise, if Her Majesty shall deem the same
+desirable in the interests of Her Indian people, in cash.
+
+And the undersigned Chiefs do hereby bind and pledge themselves and
+their people strictly to observe this treaty, and to maintain
+perpetual peace between themselves and Her Majesty's white
+subjects, and not to interfere with the property or in any way
+molest the persons of Her Majesty's white or other subjects.
+
+In witness whereof Her Majesty's said Commissioner and the said
+Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hand and seal,
+at the Lower Fort Garry, this day and year herein first above
+mentioned.
+
+(Signed) WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,                             [L. S.]
+                    Indian Commissioner.
+         MIS-KOO-KE-NEW (or Red Eagle)               His x mark.
+              (Henry Prince).
+         KA-KE-KA-PENAIS (or Bird Forever)            "  x  "
+              (William Pennefather).
+         NA-SHA-KE-PENAIS (or Flying down Bird).      "  x  "
+         NA-NA-WA-NANAN (or Centre of Bird's Tail).   "  x  "
+         KE-WE-TAY-ASH (or Flying Round).             "  x  "
+         WA-KO-WUSH (or Whip-poor-will).              "  x  "
+         OO-ZA-WE-KWUN (or Yellow Quill).             "  x  "
+
+Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of (the same having
+been first read and explained)--
+
+(Signed) ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD,
+             Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, and the N.-W. Territories.
+         JAMES McKAY, P.L.C.
+         A. G. IRVINE,
+             Major.
+         ABRAHAM COWLEY.
+         DONALD GUNN, M.L.C.
+         THOMAS HOWARD.
+         HENRY COCHRANE.
+         JAMES McARRISTER.
+         HUGH McARRISTER.
+         E. ALICE ARCHIBALD.
+         HENRY BOUTHILLIER.
+
+
+
+TREATY NUMBER TWO
+
+Articles of a treaty made and concluded this twenty-first day of
+August, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-one, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great
+Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioner, Wemyss M. Simpson,
+Esquire, of the one part, and the Chippewa tribe of Indians,
+inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter defined
+and described by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter
+mentioned, of the other part:
+
+Whereas, all the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant
+to an appointment made by the said Commissioner, been convened at a
+meeting at Manitoba Post, to deliberate upon certain matters of
+interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty of the one part, and to the
+said Indians of the other; and whereas the said Indians have been
+notified and informed by Her Majesty's said Commissioner, that it
+is the desire of Her Majesty to open up to settlement and
+immigration a tract of country bounded and described as hereinafter
+mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects
+inhabiting the said tract, and to make a treaty and arrangement
+with them, so that there may be peace and good will between them
+and Her Majesty, and that they may know and be assured of what
+allowance they are to count upon and receive from Her Majesty's
+bounty and benevolence.
+
+And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in
+Council as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said
+Commissioner to name certain Chiefs and head men who should be
+authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations and sign
+any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her
+Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of
+such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have
+thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that is to
+say:
+
+For the Swan Creek and Lake Manitoba Indians, Sou-sonse, or Little
+Long Ears; for the Indians of Fairford and the neighboring
+localities, Ma-sah-kee-yash, or, He who flies to the bottom, and
+Richard Woodhouse, whose Indian name is Ke-wee-tah-quun-na-yash,
+or, He who flies round the feathers; for the Indians of Waterhen
+River and Crane River and the neighboring localities, Francois, or,
+Broken Fingers; and for the Indians of Riding Mountains and Dauphin
+Lake, and the remainder of the territory hereby ceded, Mekis (the
+Eagle), or, Giroux. And thereupon, in open Council, the different
+bands have presented their respective Chiefs to His Excellency the
+Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and of the North-West Territory,
+being present at such Council, and to the said Commissioner, as the
+Chiefs and head men for the purposes aforesaid of the respective
+bands of Indians inhabiting the said district hereinafter
+described; and whereas the said Lieutenant-Governor and the said
+Commissioner then and there received and acknowledged the persons
+so presented as Chiefs and head men, for the purpose aforesaid, of
+the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district
+hereinafter described; and whereas the said Commissioner has
+proceeded to negotiate a treaty with the said Indians, and the same
+has finally been agreed upon and concluded as follows, that is to
+say:--
+
+The Chippewa tribe of Indians, and all other the Indians inhabiting
+the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede,
+release, surrender and yield up to Her Majesty the Queen, and her
+successors forever, all the lands included within the following
+limits, that is to say:--All that tract of country lying partly to
+the north and partly to the west of a tract of land ceded to Her
+Majesty the Queen by the Indians inhabiting the Province of
+Manitoba, and certain adjoining localities, under the terms of a
+treaty made at Lower Fort Garry, on the third day of August last
+past, the land now intended to be ceded and surrendered, being
+particularly described as follows, that is to say:--Beginning at
+the mouth of Winnipeg River, on the north line of the lands ceded
+by said treaty, thence running along the eastern shore of Lake
+Winnipeg, northwardly as far as the mouth of Berens River; thence
+across said lake to its western shore at the north bank of the
+mouth of the Little Saskatchewan or Dauphin River; thence up said
+stream and along the northern and western shores thereof, and of
+St. Martin's Lake and along the north bank of the stream flowing
+into St. Martin's Lake from Lake Manitoba by the general course of
+such stream to such last mentioned lake; thence by the eastern and
+northern shores of Lake Manitoba to the mouth of the Waterhen
+River; thence by the eastern and northern shores of said river up
+stream to the northernmost extremity of a small lake known as
+Waterhen Lake; thence in a line due west to and across Lake
+Winnepegosis; thence in a straight line to the most northerly
+waters forming the source of the Shell River; thence to a point
+west of the same, two miles distant from the river, measuring at
+right angles thereto; thence by a line parallel with the Shell
+River to its mouth and then crossing the Assiniboine River and
+running parallel thereto and two miles distant therefrom and to the
+westward thereof to a point opposite Fort Ellice; thence in a
+southwesterly course to the northwestern point of the Moose
+Mountains; thence by a line due south to the United States
+frontier; thence by the frontier eastwardly to the westward line of
+said tract ceded by treaty as aforesaid; thence bounded thereby, by
+the west, north-west and north lines of said tract to the place of
+beginning at the mouth of Winnipeg River; to have and to hold the
+same to Her Majesty the Queen and her successors for ever, and Her
+Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside and
+reserve, for the sole and exclusive use of the Indians inhabiting
+the said tract, the following lots of land, that is to say:
+
+For the use of the Indians belonging to the band of which Mekis is
+Chief, so much land between Turtle River and Valley River on the
+south side of Lake Dauphin as will make one hundred and sixty acres
+for each family of five persons, or in the same proportion for a
+greater or smaller number of persons. And for the use of the
+Indians belonging to the band of which Francois, or Broken Fingers,
+is Chief, so much land on Crane River running into Lake Manitoba as
+will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five
+persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller number
+of persons. And for the use of the band of Indians belonging to the
+bands of which Ma-sah-kee-yash and Richard Woodhouse are Chiefs, so
+much land on the river between Lake Manitoba and St. Martin's
+Lake,--known as "Fairford River," and including the present Indian
+Mission grounds,--as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each
+family of five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or
+smaller number of persons. And for the use of the Indians of whom
+Son-sense is Chief, so much land on the east side of Lake Manitoba
+to be laid off north of the creek near which a fallen elm tree now
+lies, and about half-way between Oak Point and Manitoba Post, so
+much land as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family
+of five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller
+number of persons. Saving, nevertheless, the rights of any white or
+other settler now in occupation of any land within the lines of any
+such reserve.
+
+And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the
+behaviour and good conduct of her Indians, parties to this treaty,
+she hereby, through her Commissioner makes them a present of three
+dollars for each Indian--man, woman, and child belonging to the
+bands here represented.
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school in each
+reserve hereby made, whenever the Indians of the reserve shall
+desire it.
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the
+boundary of Indian reserves, until otherwise enacted by the proper
+legislative authority, no intoxicating liquors shall be allowed to
+be introduced or sold; and all laws now in force or hereafter to be
+enacted to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves or
+living elsewhere within her North-West Territories, from the evil
+influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall be strictly
+enforced.
+
+And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioner shall, as soon as
+possible after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an
+accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above
+described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year
+ensuing the date hereof, at some period during the month of August
+in each year, to be duly notified to the Indians, and at or near
+the respective reserves, pay to each Indian family of five persons,
+the sum of fifteen dollars, Canadian currency; or in like
+proportion for a larger or smaller family; such payment to be made
+in such articles as the Indians shall require of blankets,
+clothing, prints (assorted colors), twine or traps, at the current
+cash price in Montreal, or otherwise, if Her Majesty shall deem the
+same desirable in the interest of her Indian people, in cash.
+
+And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf, and on behalf of
+all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby
+solemnly promise and engage, to strictly observe this treaty, and
+also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of
+Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and engage that they will, in
+all respects, obey and abide by the law; that they will maintain
+peace and good order between each other and also between themselves
+and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves and others of
+Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now inhabiting,
+or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the said ceded tract; and that
+they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitants of
+such ceded tract; or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or
+interfere with or trouble any person passing or travelling through
+the said tract or any part thereof; and that they will aid and
+assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing to justice and
+punishment any Indian offending against the stipulations of this
+treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the country so ceded.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioner and the said
+Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at
+Manitoba Post, this day and year first above named.
+
+  (Signed) WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
+                  Indian Commissioner.
+           MEKIS.             His x Mark.
+           SON-SENSE.          "  x  "
+           MA-SAH-KEE-YASH.    "  x  "
+           FRANCOIS.           "  x  "
+           RICHARD WOODHOUSE.
+
+Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following
+witnesses (the same having been first read and explained)--
+
+(Signed)
+   ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD,
+           Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba and the N.-W. Territories.
+   JAMES McKAY, P.C.C.
+   MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN.
+   E. A. ARCHIBALD.
+   LILY ARCHIBALD.
+   HENRI BOUTHILLIER.
+   PAUL DE LARONDE.
+   DONALD McDONALD.
+   ELIZA McDONALD.
+   ALEXANDER MUIR, SR.
+
+
+
+THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY, NUMBER THREE
+
+Articles of a Treaty made and concluded this third day of
+October, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-three, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great
+Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Hon. Alexander
+Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the
+North West Territories, Joseph Albert Norbert Provencher and Simon
+James Dawson, of the one part, and the Saulteaux tribe of the
+Ojibbeway Indians, inhabitants of the country within the limits
+hereinafter defined and described, by their Chiefs, chosen and
+named as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part:
+
+Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to
+an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at
+a meeting at the North-West angle of the Lake of the Woods, to
+deliberate upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious
+Majesty, of the one part, and the said Indians of the other;
+
+And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her
+Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty
+to open up for settlement, immigration, and such other purposes
+as to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and
+described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent
+thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to
+make a treaty and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and
+good will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and
+be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and receive
+from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence:
+
+And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in Council, as
+aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioners to
+name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized on their
+behalf to conduct such negotiations, and sign any treaty to be founded
+thereon, and to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful
+performance by their respective bands of such obligations as shall be
+assumed by them, the said Indians have thereupon named the following
+persons for that purpose, that is to say:--Kee-tak-pay-pi-nais (Rainy
+River), Kitihi-gay-lake (Rainy River), Note-na-qua-hung (North-West
+Angle), Mawe-do-pe-nais (Rainy River), Pow-wa-sang (North-West Angle),
+Canda-com-igo-wi-ninie (North-West Angle), Pa-pa-ska-gin (Rainy River),
+May-no-wah-tau-ways-kung (North-West Angle), Kitchi-ne-ka-be-han (Rainy
+River), Sah-katch-eway (Lake Seul), Muka-day-wah-sin (Kettle Falls),
+Me-kie-sies (Rainy Lake, Fort Francis), Oos-con-na-geist (Rainy Lake),
+Wah-shis-kince (Eagle Lake), Rab-kie-y-ash (Flower Lake), Go-bay (Rainy
+Lake), Ka-me-ti-ash (White Fish Lake), Nee-sho-tal (Rainy River),
+Kee-gee-go-kay (Rainy River), Sha-sha-gance (Shoal Lake),
+Shah-win-na-bi-nais (Shoal Lake), Ay-ash-a-wash (Buffalo Point),
+Pay-ah-be-wash (White Fish Bay), Rah-tay-tay-pa-o-cutch (Lake of the
+Woods).
+
+And thereupon in open council the different bands having presented
+their Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men
+for the purposes aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians
+inhabiting the said district hereinafter described.
+
+And whereas the said Commissioners then and there received and
+acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men for
+the purposes aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians
+inhabiting the said district hereinafter described;
+
+And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a
+treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed
+upon and concluded as follows, that is to say:
+
+The Saulteaux tribe of the Ojibbeway Indians, and all other the
+Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined,
+do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government
+of the Dominion of Canada, for Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever, all their rights, titles and privileges
+whatsoever to the lands included within the following limits, that
+is to say:
+
+Commencing at a point on the Pigeon River route where the
+international boundary line between the territories of Great
+Britain and the United States intersects the height of land
+separating the waters running to Lake Superior from those flowing
+to Lake Winnipeg thence northerly, westerly and easterly, along the
+height of land aforesaid, following its sinuosities, whatever their
+course may be, to the point at which the said height of land meets
+the summit of the water-shed from which the streams flow to Lake
+Nepigon, thence northerly and westerly, or whatever may be its
+course along the ridge separating the waters of the Nepigon and the
+Winnipeg to the height of land dividing the waters of the Albany
+and the Winnipeg, thence westerly and north-westerly along the
+height of land dividing the waters flowing to Hudson's Bay by the
+Albany or other rivers from those running to English River and
+the Winnipeg to a point on the said height of land bearing north
+forty-five degrees east from Fort Alexander at the mouth of the
+Winnipeg; thence south forty-five degrees west to Fort Alexander at
+the mouth of the Winnipeg; thence southerly along the eastern bank
+of the Winnipeg to the mouth of White Mouth River, thence southerly
+by the line described as in that part forming the eastern boundary
+of the tract surrendered by the Chippewa and Swampy Cree tribes of
+Indians to Her Majesty on the third of August, one thousand eight
+hundred and seventy-one, namely, by White Mouth River to White
+Mouth Lake and thence on a line having the general bearing of White
+Mouth River to the forty-ninth parallel of north latitude; thence
+by the forty-ninth parallel of north latitude to the Lake of the
+Woods, and from thence by the international boundary line to the
+place of beginning.
+
+The tract comprised within the lines above described embracing an
+area of fifty-five thousand square miles, be the same more or less.
+
+To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever.
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside
+reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at
+present cultivated by the said Indians, and also to lay aside and
+reserve for the benefit of the said Indians, to be administered and
+dealt with for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of
+Canada, in such a manner as shall seem best, other reserves of land
+in the said territory hereby ceded, which said reserves shall be
+selected and set aside where it shall be deemed most convenient and
+advantageous for each band or bands of Indians, by the officers of
+the said Government appointed for that purpose, and such selection
+shall be so made after conference with the Indians: Provided,
+however, that such reserve whether for farming or other purposes
+shall in nowise exceed in all one square mile for each family of
+five, or in that proportion for larger or smaller families, and
+such selection shall be made if possible during the course of next
+summer or as soon thereafter as may be found practicable, it being
+understood, however, that if at the time of any such selection of
+any reserves as aforesaid, there are any settlers within the bounds
+of the lands reserved by any band, Her Majesty reserves the right
+to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just, so as not to
+diminish the extent of land allotted to Indians; and provided also
+that the aforesaid reserves of lands or any interest or right
+therein or appurtenant thereto, may be sold, leased or otherwise
+disposed of by the said Government for the use and benefit of the
+said Indians, with the consent of the Indians entitled thereto
+first had and obtained.
+
+And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the
+behavior and good conduct of her Indians, she hereby, through her
+Commissioners, makes them a present of twelve dollars for each man,
+woman and child belonging to the bands here represented, in
+extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred.
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction
+in such reserves hereby made as to her Government of her Dominion
+of Canada may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve
+shall desire it.
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the
+boundary of Indian reserves, until otherwise determined by the
+Government of the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall
+be allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force,
+or hereafter to be enacted to preserve her Indian subjects
+inhabiting the reserves, or living elsewhere within her North-West
+Territories, from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating
+liquors shall be strictly enforced.
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that they,
+the said Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations
+of hunting and fishing throughout the tract surrendered as
+hereinbefore described, subject to such regulations as may from
+time to time be made by her Government of her Dominion of Canada,
+and saving and excepting such tracts as may from time to time be
+required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or other
+purposes, by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by
+any of the subjects thereof duly authorized therefor by the said
+Government.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians that
+such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be
+required for public works or buildings, of what nature soever, may
+be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the
+Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made for the value of
+any improvements thereon.
+
+And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as
+possible, after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an
+accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above
+described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year
+ensuing the date hereof at some period in each year, to be duly
+notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed
+for that purpose within the territory ceded, pay to each Indian
+person the sum of five dollars per head yearly.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that
+the sum of fifteen hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and
+every year expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition,
+and twine for nets for the use of the said Indians.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that
+the following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said
+Indians who are now actually cultivating the soil, or who shall
+hereafter commence to cultivate the land, that is to say--two hoes
+for every family actually cultivating; also one spade per family
+as aforesaid; one plough for every ten families as aforesaid; five
+harrows for every twenty families as aforesaid; one scythe for
+every family as aforesaid; and also one axe and one cross-cut saw,
+one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone, one
+auger for each band, and also for each Chief for the use of his
+band, one chest of ordinary carpenter's tools; also for each band,
+enough of wheat, barley, potatoes and oats to plant the land
+actually broken up for cultivation by such band; also for each
+band, one yoke of oxen, one bull and four cows; all the aforesaid
+articles to be given once for all for the encouragement of the
+practice of agriculture among the Indians.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that
+each Chief, duly recognized as such, shall receive an annual salary
+of twenty-five dollars per annum, and each subordinate officer, not
+exceeding three for each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per
+annum; and each such Chief and subordinate officer as aforesaid
+shall also receive, once in every three years, a suitable suit of
+clothing; and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the
+closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal.
+
+And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf and on behalf of
+all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby
+solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and
+also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects
+of Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and engage that they will,
+in all respects obey and abide by the law; that they will maintain
+peace and good order between each other, and also between
+themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves and
+others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now
+inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded
+tract; and that they will not molest the person or property of any
+inhabitant of such ceded tract, or the property of Her Majesty
+the Queen, or interfere with or trouble any person passing or
+travelling through the said tract or any part thereof; and that
+they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing
+to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the
+stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in
+the country so ceded.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said
+Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the
+north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, this day and year herein
+first above-named.
+
+    (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,                 [L. S.]
+                 Lieutenant-Governor.
+             J. A. N. PROVENCHER,
+                 Indian Commissioner.
+             S. J. DAWSON,
+                 Indian Commissioner.
+             KEE-TA-KAY-PI-NAIS.       His x mark.
+             KITIHI-GAY-KAKE.           "  x  "
+             NO-TE-NA-QUA-HUNG.         "  x  "
+             MAWE-DO-PE-NAIS.           "  x  "
+             POW-WA-SANG.               "  x  "
+             CANDA-COM-IGO-WI-NINIE.    "  x  "
+             PA-PA-SKA-GIN.             "  x  "
+             MAY-NO-WAH-TAU-WAYS-KUNG.  "  x  "
+             KITCHI-NE-KA-BE-HAN.       "  x  "
+             SAH-KATCH-EWAY.            "  x  "
+             MUKA-DAY-WAH-SIN.          "  x  "
+             ME-KIE-SIES.               "  x  "
+             OOS-CON-NA-GEIST.          "  x  "
+             WAH-SHIS-KINCE.            "  x  "
+             RAH-KIE-Y-ASH.             "  x  "
+             GO-BAY.                    "  x  "
+             KA-ME-TI-ASH.              "  x  "
+             NEE-SHO-TAL.               "  x  "
+             KEE-JEE-GO-KAY.            "  x  "
+             SHA-SHA-GANCE.             "  x  "
+             SHAH-WIN-NA-BI-NAIS.       "  x  "
+             AY-ASH-A-WASH.             "  x  "
+             PAY-AH-BEE-WASH.           "  x  "
+             RAH-TAY-TAY-PA-O-CUTCH.    "  x  "
+
+Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following
+witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by the
+Honorable James McKay:--
+
+(Signed) JAMES McKAY.
+         MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN.
+         ROBERT PITHER.
+         CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS.
+         CHARLES NOLIN.
+         A. McDONALD,
+             Captain commanding escort to
+                 Lieutenant-Governor.
+         JAMES F. GRAHAM.
+         JOSEPH NOLIN.
+         A. McLEOD.
+         GEORGE McPHERSON, SEN.
+         SEDLEY BLANCHARD.
+         W. FRED. BUCHANAN.
+         FRANK G. BECHER.
+         ALFRED CODD, M.D.
+         GORDON S. CORBAULT.
+         PIERRE LEVIELLER.
+         NICHOLAS CHATELAINE.
+
+We hereby certify that the foregoing is a true copy of the original
+articles of treaty of which it purports to be a copy.
+
+    (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                 Lieutenant-Governor.
+             J. A. N. PROVENCHER,
+                 Indian Commissioner.
+             S. J. DAWSON,
+                 Indian Commissioner.
+
+We having had communication of the treaty, certified copy whereof
+is hereto annexed, but not having been at the Councils held at the
+north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, between Her Majesty's
+Commissioners, and the several Indian Chiefs and others therein
+named, at which the articles of the said treaty were agreed upon,
+hereby, for ourselves and the several bands of Indians which we
+represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty
+being extended to us and the said bands which we represent,
+transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her
+heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Dominion of Canada,
+all our right, title and privilege whatsoever, which we, the said
+Chiefs, and the said bands which we represent, have held, or enjoy,
+of, in and to the territory, described and fully set out in the
+said articles of treaty and every part thereof, to have and to hold
+the same unto the use of Her said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and
+successors for ever.
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and
+reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise
+and engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the stipulations,
+obligations and conditions therein contained, on the part of the
+said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be observed and performed,
+and in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as
+if we our selves, and the bands which we represent had been
+originally contracting parties thereto, and had been present and
+attached our signatures to the said treaty.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said
+Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, this
+thirteenth day of October, in the year of Our Lord one thousand
+eight hundred and seventy-three.
+
+For and on behalf of the Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander
+Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West
+Territories, Joseph Albert Norbert Provencher, Esq., and the
+undersigned:
+
+                      (Signed)   S. J. DAWSON,
+                                        Commissioner.
+                                 PAY-BA-MA-CHAS.        His x mark.
+                                 RE-BA-QUIN.             "  x  "
+                                 ME-TAS-SO-QUE-NE-SKANK. "  x  "
+
+Signed by S. J. Dawson, Esq., one of Her Majesty's said
+Commissioners, for and on behalf, and with the authority and
+consent of the Honorable Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of
+Manitoba and the North-West Territories, and J. A. N. Provencher,
+Esq., the remaining two Commissioners, and himself, and by the
+Chiefs within named on behalf of themselves and the several bands
+which they represent, the same and the annexed certified copy of
+articles of treaty having been first read and explained in presence
+of the following witnesses:
+
+(Signed) THOS. A. P. TOWERS.
+         JOHN AITKEN.
+         A. J. McDONALD.
+         UNZZAKI.
+         JAS. LOGANOSH, His x mark,
+         PINLLSISE.
+
+
+
+REPORT OF COMMISSIONER DAWSON
+
+OTTAWA, 26th December, 1873.
+
+Sir,--I beg leave to inform you that, after the treaty had been
+concluded with certain bands of the Saulteaux tribe of the
+Ojibbeway Indians, at the north-west angle of the Lake of the
+Woods, by arrangements made with my associate Commissioners, His
+Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West
+Territories, and Mr. Provencher, I came eastward and convened the
+leading people of the remaining bands at Shebandowan where they
+also, through their Chiefs, accepted and signed the treaty.
+
+I have much satisfaction in saying that these Indians were most
+friendly in their bearing, and desired me to convey to the
+Government their cordial expressions of loyalty to their Great
+Mother, Her Majesty the Queen.
+
+They took some time to deliberate over the provisions of the treaty
+and asked me occasionally to explain certain passages, more
+especially those in relation to the reserves.
+
+Before signing it they comprehended perfectly the nature of the
+obligations into which they were about to enter, that the surrender
+of their territorial rights would be irrevocable, and that they
+were to stand forever afterwards in new relations to the white man.
+
+This, the Chiefs themselves stated with great solemnity to their
+people, in short but impressive speeches, as they each in turn
+advanced to touch the pen.
+
+One cause of delay at the Lake of the Woods arose from the
+circumstance of there being a number of aspirants to the office of
+Chief; but at Shebandowan I had no such difficulty, for the whole
+of the bands east of the narrows of Rainy Lake, are under three
+principal Chiefs, whose authority is unquestioned.
+
+The names of these Chiefs and their respective districts are as
+follows:
+
+Pay-ba-ma-chas, Chief of the country intervening between the
+narrows of Rainy Lake and Sturgeon Falls, and of the region drained
+by the River Seine and its tributary streams, between the latter
+place (Sturgeon Falls) and Lac des Mille Lacs. This is a very
+extensive district, and in it are many valuable groves of pine.
+
+Ke-ba-quin, Chief of the region intervening between the present
+line of the Red River route and the United States boundary line,
+east of Rainy Lake and west of the height of land. The gold bearing
+country is in this Chief's district.
+
+Metas-so-que-nes-hauk, Chief of Lac des Mille Lacs and the district
+to the north, lying along the height of land between that lake and
+the waters of the Nipegon and Lac Seul. This Chief is a very
+intelligent man, and has already begun, to make his people clear
+land and grow crops.
+
+Each of these three principal Chiefs will have a staff of
+Lieutenants or subordinate Chiefs, not exceeding three to their
+respective bands, as provided for in the treaty but they preferred
+not to name them at once, saying that the selection was a matter of
+some delicacy to them, and requiring a little time.
+
+In regard to the reserves provided for in the treaty, I shall
+as soon as possible submit a scheme which I think will meet
+the circumstances, and at the same time draw attention to some
+experience gained in negotiating with these Indians, which may
+be of use in similar negotiations in the future.
+
+[Footnote: In 1874 Mr. Dawson and Mr. Pither were appointed to meet
+the Indians and arrange the position of the reserves, which they
+did; but subsequently, the Indians claiming that they had not fully
+understood the exact location or extent of some of the reserves,
+Colonel Dennis, then Surveyor-General, now Deputy Minister of the
+Interior, was instructed to visit the Indians comprised in Treaty
+Number Three, and finally adjust the question of reserves. Colonel
+Dennis undertook this duty in 1875 and satisfactorily arranged a
+scheme of reserves for the different bands of the Lake of the Woods.
+Colonel Dennis submitted a comprehensive report of the results of
+his mission, and suggested the appointment of sub-agents, the fixing
+of a specific day for payment to the Indians of their annuities in
+each agency district, that the necessary funds and the articles for
+distribution should be provided and in the agents' hands in good time.
+He advised that the local agents should have some practical knowledge
+of agriculture, as he believed that the Indians would succeed in
+raising quantities of stock, though the character of the country
+prevented their general success as farmers. He suggested further the
+erection of halls at each agency and the employment of young Indians
+by the builders entrusted with their construction, "as they are so
+quick in perception and handy in the use of tools that they would
+speedily become very expert." The author regrets that he did not
+obtain communication of this valuable report until this work had
+advanced too far to admit of its being incorporated with it.]
+
+The copy of the treaty signed by these Chiefs is enclosed herewith
+and to it is attached a document signed by the Lieutenant-Governor
+of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, and Mr. Provencher,
+empowering me to act for them in their absence, in their capacity
+of Indian Commissioners.
+
+           I have the honor to be, Sir,
+                         Your obedient servant,
+                           (Signed) S. J. DAWSON.
+THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR,
+                                       Ottawa.
+
+
+ADHESION OF LAC SEUL INDIANS
+
+LAC SEUL, 9th June, 1874.
+
+We, the Chiefs and Councillors of Lac Seul, Seul, Trout and
+Sturgeon Lakes, subscribe and set our marks, that we and our
+followers will abide by the articles of the treaty made and
+concluded with the Indians at the north-west angle of the Lake of
+the Woods, on the third day of October, in the year of our Lord one
+thousand eight hundred and seventy-three, between Her Most Gracious
+Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioners,
+Hon. Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the
+North-West Territories, Joseph Albert, N. Provencher and Simon J.
+Dawson, of the one part, and the Saulteaux tribes of Ojibewa Indians,
+inhabitants of the country as defined by the Treaty aforesaid.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's Indian Agent and the Chiefs and
+Councillors have hereto set their hands at Lac Seul, on the 9th day
+of June, 1874.
+
+            (Signed) R. J. N. PITHER,
+                               Indian Agent.
+                     JOHN CROMARTY,     His x mark.
+                               Chief.
+                     ACKEMENCE,          "  x  "
+                     MAINEETAINEQUIRE,   "  x  "
+                     NAH-KEE-JECKWAHE,   "  x  "
+                               Councillors.
+
+The whole treaty explained by R. J. N. Pither.
+
+Witnesses:
+(Signed) JAMES McKENZIE.
+         LOUIS KITTSON.
+         NICHOLAS CHATELAN. His x mark.
+
+
+
+THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, NUMBER FOUR
+
+Articles of a treaty made and concluded this fifteenth day of
+September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-four, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great
+Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander
+Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the
+North-West Territories, the Honorable David Laird, Minister of the
+Interior, and William Joseph Christie Esq., of Brockville, Ontario,
+of the one part; and the Cree, Saulteaux and other Indians,
+inhabitants of the territory within the limits hereinafter defined
+and described, by their Chiefs and head men, chosen and named as
+hereinafter mentioned, of the other part;
+
+Whereas, the Indians inhabiting the said territory have, pursuant
+to an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at
+a meeting at Qu'Appelle Lakes, to deliberate upon certain matters
+of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part and the
+said Indians of the other:
+
+And whereas, the said Indians have been notified and informed, by
+Her Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her
+Majesty to open up for settlement, immigration, trade and such
+other purposes as to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country
+bounded and described as hereinafter mentioned; and to obtain the
+consent thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract;
+and to make a treaty and arrange with them so that there may be
+peace and good-will between them and Her Majesty, and between them
+and Her Majesty's other subjects; and that her Indian people may
+know and be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and
+receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence;
+
+And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in
+councils as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said
+Commissioners to name certain Chiefs and head men who should be
+authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations, and sign
+any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her
+Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of
+such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have
+thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that is to
+say: Ka-ki-sha-way, or Loud Voice (Qu'Appelle River); Pis-qua, or
+The Plain (Leech Lake); Kea-wez-auce, or The Little Boy (Leech
+Lake); Ka-ke-na-wup, or One that sits like an Eagle (Upper
+Qu'Appelle Lakes); Kus-kee-tew-mus-coo-mus-qua, or Little Black
+Bear (Cypress Hills); Ka-ne-on-us-ka-tew, or One that walks on four
+claws (Little Touchwood Hills); Can-ah-ha-cha-pew, or Making ready
+the Bow (south side of the south branch of the Saskatchewan);
+Kii-si-can-ah-chuck, or Day Star (south side of the south branch of
+the Saskatchewan); Ka-wa-ca-toose, or The Poor Man (Touchwood Hills
+and Qu'Appelle Lakes); Ka-ku-wis-ta-haw, or Him that flies round
+(towards the Cypress Hills); Cha-ca-chas (Qu'Appelle River);
+Wah-pii-moose-too-siis, or White Calf, or Pus-coos (Qu'Appelle
+River); Gabriel Cote, or Mee-may, or The Pigeon (Fort Pelly);
+
+And thereupon in open council the different bands having presented
+the men of their choice to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and
+head men for the purpose aforesaid of the respective bands of
+Indians inhabiting the said district hereinafter described;
+
+And whereas, the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a
+treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed
+upon and concluded as follows, that is to say:
+
+The Cree and Saulteaux tribes of Indians, and all other the Indians
+inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, do
+hereby cede, release, surrender and yield up to the Government of
+the Dominion of Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors
+forever, all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the
+lands included within the following limits, that is to say:
+
+Commencing at a point on the United States frontier due south of
+the north-western point of the Moose Mountains, thence due north to
+said point of said Mountains, thence in a north-easterly course to
+a point two miles due west of Fort Ellice, thence in a line
+parallel with, and two miles westward from, the Assiniboine River
+to the mouth of the Shell River, thence parallel to the said river,
+and two miles distant therefrom, to its source; thence in a
+straight line to a point on the western shore of Lake Winnipegoosis
+due west from the most northern extremity of Waterhen Lake, thence
+east to the centre of Lake Winnipegoosis, thence northwardly
+through the middle of the said lake (including Birch Island) to the
+mouth of Red Deer River, thence westwardly and south-westwardly
+along and including the said Red Deer River and its lakes, Red Deer
+and Etoimami, to the source of its western branch, thence in a
+straight line to the source of the northern branch of the
+Qu'Appelle, thence along and including said streams to the forks
+near Long Lake, thence along and including the valley of the west
+branch of the Qu'Appelle, thence along and including said river to
+the mouth of Maple Creek; thence southwardly along said creek to a
+point opposite the western extremity of the Cypress Hills; thence
+due south to the international boundary; thence east along said
+boundary to the place of commencement. Also all their rights,
+titles and privileges whatsoever to all other lands wheresoever
+situated within Her Majesty's North-West Territories, or any of
+them, to have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever.
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees, through the said
+Commissioners, to assign reserves for said Indians, such reserves
+to be selected by officers of Her Majesty's Government of the
+Dominion of Canada appointed for that purpose, after conference
+with each band of the Indians, and to be of sufficient area to
+allow one square mile for each family of five, or in that
+proportion for larger or smaller families.
+
+Provided, however, that it be understood that if, at the time of
+the selection of any reserves as aforesaid there are any settlers
+within the bounds of the lands reserved for any band, Her Majesty
+retains the right to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just
+so as not to diminish the extent of lands allotted to the Indians;
+and provided further that the aforesaid reserves of land, or any
+part thereof, or any interest or right therein, or appurtenant
+thereto, may be sold, leased or otherwise disposed of by the said
+Government for the use and benefit of the said Indians, with the
+consent of the Indians entitled thereto first had and obtained, but
+in no wise shall the said Indians, or any of them, be entitled to
+sell or otherwise alienate any of the lands allotted to them as
+reserves.
+
+In view of the satisfaction with which the Queen views the ready
+response which Her Majesty's Indian subjects have accorded to the
+invitation of her said Commissioners to meet them on this occasion;
+and also in token of their general good conduct and behavior, she
+hereby, through Her Commissioners, makes the Indians of the bands
+here represented, a present--For each Chief, of twenty-five dollars
+in cash, a coat, and a Queen's silver medal for each head man not
+exceeding four in each band, fifteen dollars in cash, and a coat,
+and for every other man, woman and child, twelve dollars in cash
+and for those here assembled some powder, shot, blankets, calicoes
+and other articles.
+
+As soon as possible after the execution of this treaty, Her Majesty
+shall cause a census to be taken of all the Indians inhabiting the
+tract hereinbefore described, and shall next year, and annually
+afterwards, forever, cause to be paid, in cash, at some suitable
+season to be duly notified to the Indians, and at a place or places
+to be appointed for that purpose within the territory ceded; each
+Chief, twenty-five dollars; each head man, not exceeding four to a
+band, fifteen dollars; and to every other Indian, man, woman and
+child, five dollars per head; such payment to be made to the heads
+of families for those belonging thereto, unless for some special
+reason it be found objectionable.
+
+Her Majesty also agrees that each Chief, and each head man, not to
+exceed four in each band, once in every three years during the term
+of their office, shall receive a suitable suit of clothing, and
+that yearly and every year, she will cause to be distributed among
+the different bands included in the limits of this treaty, powder,
+shot, ball and twine, in all to the value of seven hundred and
+fifty dollars, and each Chief shall receive hereafter, in
+recognition of the closing of the treaty, a suitable flag.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that
+the following articles shall be supplied to any band thereof who
+are now actually cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter
+settle on these reserves and commence to break up the land, that
+is to say--two hoes, one spade, one scythe, and one axe for every
+family so actually cultivating; and enough seed, wheat, barley,
+oats and potatoes to plant such lands as they have broken up; also
+one plough and two harrows for every ten families so cultivating
+as aforesaid; and also to each Chief, for the use of his band
+as aforesaid, one yoke of oxen, one bull, four cows, a chest of
+ordinary carpenter's tools, five hand-saws, five augers, one
+cross-cut saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, and one grindstone;
+all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all, for the
+encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians.
+
+Further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school in the reserve,
+allotted to each band, as soon as they settle on said reserve, and
+are prepared for a teacher.
+
+Further, Her Majesty agrees that within the boundary of the Indian
+reserves, until otherwise determined by the Government of the
+Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquors shall be allowed to be
+introduced or sold; and all laws now in force, or hereafter to be
+enacted to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves, or
+living elsewhere within the North-West Territories, from the evil
+effects of intoxication, shall be strictly enforced.
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees that her said Indians shall have
+right to pursue their avocations of hunting, trapping and fishing
+throughout the tract surrendered, subject to such regulations as
+may from time to time be made by the Government of the country
+acting under the authority of Her Majesty, and saving and excepting
+such tracts as may be required or taken up from time to time for
+settlement, mining or other purposes under grant, or other right
+given by Her Majesty's said Government.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indian
+subjects that such sections of the reserves above indicated as may
+at any time be required for public works or buildings, of whatever
+nature, may be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's
+Government of the Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made
+to the Indians for the value of any improvements thereon, and an
+equivalent in land or money for the area of the reserve so
+appropriated.
+
+And the undersigned Chiefs and head men on their own behalf, and on
+behalf of all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do
+hereby solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty,
+and also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal
+subjects of Her Majesty the Queen.
+
+They promise and engage that they will, in all respects, obey and
+abide by the law: that they will maintain peace and good order
+between each other, and between themselves and other tribes of
+Indians, and between themselves and others of Her Majesty's
+subjects, whether Indians, Half-breeds or whites, now inhabiting,
+or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the said ceded tract; and that
+they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitant of
+such ceded tract, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or
+interfere with or trouble any person passing or travelling through
+the said tract or any part thereof: and that they will assist the
+officers of Her Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any
+Indian offending against the stipulations of this treaty, or
+infringing the laws in force in the country so ceded.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners, and the said
+Indian Chiefs and head men, have hereunto subscribed and set their
+hands at Qu'Appelle, this day and year herein first-above written.
+
+    (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                 Lieut.-Gov. N.-W. Territories.
+             DAVID LAIRD,
+                 Indian Commissioner.
+             WILLIAM J. CHRISTIE.
+             KA-KII-SHI-WAY.                His x mark.
+             PIS-QUA.                        "  x  "
+             KA-WE-ZAUCE.                    "  x  "
+             KA-KEE-NA-WUP.                  "  x  "
+             KUS-KEE-TEW-MUS-COO-MUS-QUA.    "  x  "
+             KA-NE-ON-US-KA-TEW.             "  x  "
+             CAN-AH-HA-CHA-PEW.              "  x  "
+             KII-SI-CAW-AH-CHUCK.            "  x  "
+             KA-RA-CA-TOOSE.                 "  x  "
+             KA-KII-NIS-TA-HAW.              "  x  "
+             CHA-CA-CHAS.                    "  x  "
+             WA-PII-MOOSE-TOO-SUS.           "  x  "
+             GABRIEL COTE, or MEE-MAY.       "  x  "
+
+Signed by the Chiefs and head men within named in presence of the
+following witnesses, the same having been first read and explained
+by Charles Pratt:
+
+(Signed) W. OSBORNE SMITH, C.M.G.,
+             Lieut.-Col. D.A.G.,
+                   Commanding Dominion Forces in North-West.
+         PASCAL BRELAND.
+         EDWARD McKAY.
+         CHARLES PRATT.
+         PIERRE POITRAS.
+         BAPTIST DAVIS.     His x mark.
+         PIERRE DENOMME.     "  x  "
+         JOSEPH McKAY.
+         DONALD McDONALD.
+         A. McDONALD,
+             Captain Prov. Batt. Infantry.
+         G. W. W. STREET,
+             Ensign Prov. Batt. Infantry.
+         ALFRED CODD, M.D.,
+             Surgeon Prov. Batt. Infantry.
+         W. M. HERCHMER,
+             Captain.
+         C. DE CAZES,
+             Ensign.
+         JOSEPH POITRON.
+         M. G. DICKIESON,
+             Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior.
+         PETER LAPIERRE.
+         HELEN H. McLEAN.
+         FLORA GARRIOCH.
+         JOHN COTTON,
+             Lieutenant Canadian Artillery.
+         JOHN ALLAN,
+             Lieutenant Prov. Batt. Infantry.
+
+
+ADHESION OF THE FORT ELLICE SAULTEAUX INDIANS
+
+We, members of the Saulteaux tribe of Indians, having had
+communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the 15th day of
+September instant, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree and
+Saulteaux Indians and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but not
+having been present at the councils held at the Qu'Appelle Lakes
+between Her Majesty's Commissioners and the several Indian Chiefs
+and others therein named, at which the articles of the said treaty
+were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves and the band which we
+represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty
+being extended to us and the said band which we represent,
+transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her
+heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Government of her
+Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever
+which we and the said bands which were present have held or enjoy
+of, in, and to the territory described and fully set out in the
+said articles of treaty and every part thereof; also all our right,
+title, and privileges whatsoever to all other lands wherever
+situated, whether within the limit of any treaty formerly made, or
+hereafter to be made, with the Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe
+of Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West territories, or any
+of them, to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of her
+said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, forever.
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and
+reserves of the said treaty, signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as
+therein stated, and solemnly promise, and engage to abide by, carry
+out and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions
+therein contained, on the part of the said Chiefs and Indians
+therein named to be observed and performed, and in all things to
+conform to the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves and
+the band which we represent had been originally contracting parties
+thereto, and had been present and attached our signatures to the
+said treaty.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said
+Indian Chief and head man, have hereunto subscribed and set their
+hands at Fort Ellice this twenty-first day of September, in the
+year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-four.
+
+    (Signed)   ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                   Lieut.-Gov. N.-W. Territories.
+               DAVID LAIRD,
+                   Indian Commissioner.
+               W. J. CHRISTIE,
+                   Indian Commissioner.
+               WA-WA-SE-CAPOW (or The man
+                 proud of standing upright).     His x mark.
+               OTA-MA-KOO-EWIN (or Shapous-e-tung's
+                 first son--The man
+                 who stands on the earth).        "  x  "
+
+Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by
+Joseph Robillard:
+
+(Signed) ARCH. McDONALD.
+         GEORGE FLETT.
+         A. MAXWELL.
+         DAVID ARMIT.
+         HENRY McKAY.
+         ELLEN McDONALD.
+         MARY ARMIT.
+
+
+ADHESION OF SAULTEAUX AND ASSINIBOINE INDIANS
+
+The members of the Saulteaux and Stoney tribes of Indians, having
+had communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the 15th
+day of September last, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree
+and Saulteaux Indians and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but
+not having been present at the Councils held at the Qu'Appelle
+Lakes, between Her Majesty's Commissioners and the several Indian
+Chiefs and others therein named, at which the articles of the said
+treaty were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves, and the bands which
+we represent in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty
+having been extended to us, and the said bands which we represent,
+transfer, surrender, and relinquish, to Her Majesty the Queen, her
+heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Government of her
+Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever
+which we and the said bands which we represent, have, hold or enjoy
+of, in, and to the territory described and fully set out in the
+said articles of treaty and every part thereof; also, all our
+right, title and privileges whatsoever to all other lands wherever
+situated, whether within the limit of any treaty formerly made or
+hereafter to be made with the Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe of
+Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West Territories, or any of
+them, to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of her said
+Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever.
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and
+reserves of the said treaty, signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as
+therein stated, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry
+out and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions
+therein contained on the part of said Chiefs and Indians therein
+named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform to
+the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves and the bands
+which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto,
+and had been present and attached our signatures to the said
+treaty.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's Commissioners and the said Indian
+Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Qu'Appelle
+Lakes this eighth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one
+thousand eight hundred and seventy-five.
+
+    (Signed)  W. J. CHRISTIE,
+                  Indian Commissioner.
+              M. G. DICKIESON,
+                  Acting Indian Commissioner.
+              W. F. WRIGHT.
+              CHEECUCK.             His x mark.
+
+Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been explained to the Indians by William
+the Second McKay:--
+
+(Signed) WILLIAM S. McKAY.
+         A. McDONALD.
+         PASCAL BRELAND.
+         WILLIAM WAGNER.
+
+
+ADHESION OF CREE, SAULTEAUX AND ASSINIBOINE INDIANS
+
+We, members of the Cree, Saulteaux, and Stonie tribes of Indians,
+having had communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the
+fifteenth day of September last, between Her Majesty the Queen and
+the Cree and Saulteaux Indians, and other Indians at Qu'Appelle
+Lakes, but not having been present at the councils held at the
+Qu'Appelle Lakes, between Her Majesty's Commissioners, and the
+several Indian Chiefs and others therein named, at which the
+articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves,
+and the bands which we represent in consideration of the provisions
+of the said treaty having been extended to us, and the said bands
+which we represent, transfer, surrender and relinquish, to Her
+Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, to and for the use of
+her Government, of her Dominion of Canada, all our right, title,
+and privileges whatsoever which we and the said bands which we
+represent, have, hold or enjoy of, in, and to the territory
+described and fully set out in the said articles of treaty and
+every part thereof, also, all our right, title and privileges
+whatsoever to all other lands wherever situated whether within the
+limit of any treaty formerly made, or hereafter to be made with the
+Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe of Indians inhabiting Her
+Majesty's North-West Territories, or any of them. To have and to
+hold the same, unto and to the use of her said Majesty the Queen,
+her heirs and successors forever.
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments, and
+reserves of the said treaty signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as
+therein stated, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry
+out, and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations, and conditions
+therein contained on the part of said Chiefs and Indians therein
+named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform to
+the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves and the bands
+which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto,
+and had been present and attached our signatures to the said
+treaty.
+
+In witness whereof Her Majesty's Commissioners and the said Indian
+Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Qu'Appelle
+Lakes, this ninth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one
+thousand eight hundred and seventy-five.
+
+    (Signed)  W. J. CHRISTIE,
+                  Indian Commissioner.
+              M. G. DICKIESON,
+                  Acting Indian Commissioner.
+              W. J. WRIGHT.
+              WAH-PEE-MAKWA,            His x mark.
+                  (The White Bear).
+              O'KANES,                   "  x  "
+              PAYEPOT,                   "  x  "
+              LE-CROUP-DE-PHEASANT,      "  x  "
+              KITCHI-KAH-ME-WIN,         "  x  "
+
+Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by
+Charles Pratt.
+
+(Signed)  CHARLES PRATT.
+          A. McDONALD.
+          JOS. READER.
+          PASCAL BRELAND.
+
+
+
+REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO
+
+Copy of a report of a Committee of the Honorable the Privy Council,
+approved by His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, on the
+30th April, 1875.
+
+On a memorandum dated 27th April, 1875, from the Honorable the
+Minister of the Interior, bringing under consideration the very
+unsatisfactory state of affairs arising out of the so called
+"outside promises" in connection with the Indian Treaties Numbers
+One and Two--Manitoba and North-West Territories--concluded, the
+former on the 3rd August, 1871, and the latter on 21st of the same
+month, and recommending for the reasons stated:
+
+1st. That the written memorandum attached to Treaty Number One be
+considered as part of that treaty and of Treaty Number Two, and
+that the Indian Commissioner be instructed to carry out the
+promises therein contained in so far as they have not yet been
+carried out, and that the Commissioner be advised to inform the
+Indians that he has been authorized so to do.
+
+2nd. That the Indian Commissioner be instructed to inform the
+Indians, parties to Treaties Numbers One and Two, that, while the
+Government cannot admit their claim to anything which is not set
+forth in the treaty and in the memorandum attached thereto, which
+treaty is binding alike upon the Government and upon the Indians,
+yet, as there seems to have been some misunderstanding between the
+Indian Commissioner and the Indians in the matter of Treaties
+Numbers One and Two, the Government out of good feeling to the
+Indians and as a matter of benevolence, is willing to raise the
+annual payment to each Indian under Treaties Numbers One and Two
+from three dollars to five dollars per annum, and make payment over
+and above such sum of five dollars, of twenty dollars each and
+every year to each Chief, and a suit of clothing every three years
+to each Chief and each head man, allowing two head men to each
+band; on the express understanding, however, that each Chief or
+other Indian who shall receive such increased annuity or annual
+payment shall be held to abandon all claim whatever against the
+Government in connection with the so called "outside promises"
+other than those contained in the memorandum attached to the
+treaty.
+
+The committee submit the foregoing recommendation for Your
+Excellency's approval.
+
+          (Signed) W. A. HIMSWORTH,
+                       Clerk, Privy Council.
+Certified:
+    W. A. HIMSWORTH,
+        Clerk, Privy Council.
+
+
+ACCEPTANCES THEREOF BY LAKE MANITOBA INDIANS AND THE OTHER BANDS
+
+We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of Indian bands
+representing bands of Indians who were parties to the Treaties
+Numbers One and Two mentioned in the report of a Committee of the
+Queen's Privy Council of Canada above printed, having had
+communication thereof and fully understanding the same, assent
+thereto and accept the increase of annuities therein mentioned on
+the condition therein stated and with the assent and approval of
+their several bands, it being agreed, however, with the Queen's
+Commissioners, that the number of braves and councillors for each
+Chief shall be four as at present, instead of two as printed 1875.
+(Treaty Number Two, 23rd August, 1875.)
+
+Representing East Manitoba or Elm Point:
+    (Signed)  SON-SONSE,              His x mark.
+                  Chief.
+              NA-KA-NA-WA-TANY.        "  x  "
+              PA-PA-WE-GUN-WA-TAK,     "  x  "
+                  Councillors.
+Representing Fairford Prairie:
+              MA-SAH-REE-YASH,        His x mark.
+                  Chief.
+              DAVID MARSDEN,           "  x  "
+              JOSEPH SUMNER,           "  x  "
+                  Councillors.
+Representing Fairford Mission:
+              RICHARD WOODHOUSE,      His x mark.
+                  Chief.
+              JOHN ANDERSON,           "  x  "
+              JOHN THOMPSON,           "  x  "
+                  Councillors.
+Representing (formerly Crane River and now) Ebb and Flow Lake:
+              OENAISE,                His x mark.
+                  Chief.
+              BAPTISTE                 "  x  "
+                  (son of deceased Broken Finger).
+              KA-NEE-GUA-NASH,         "  x  "
+                  Councillors.
+Representing Waterhen band:
+              KA-TAH-KAK-WA-NA-YAAS,  His x mark.
+                  Chief.
+              WA-WAH-RON-WEK-AH-PON,   "  x  "
+                  Councillor.
+Representing the Turtle and Valley Rivers, and Riding Mountain:
+              KEE-SICK-KOO-WE-NIN     His x mark.
+                  (in place of Mekis, dead),
+                  Chief.
+              KEE-SAY-KEE-SICK,        "  x  "
+                  Councillor.
+              NOS-QUASH,               "  x  "
+              BAPTISTE,
+                  Braves.
+Representing the St. Peter's band:
+              MIS-KOO-KE-NEU          His x mark.
+                  (or Red Eagle).
+              MA-TWA-KA-KE-TOOH.       "  x  "
+              I-AND-EVAYWAY.           "  x  "
+              MA-KO-ME-WE-KEM.         "  x  "
+              AS-SHO-AH-MEY.           "  x  "
+In presence of the following:
+
+(Signed)  ALEX. MORRIS,
+              Lieut.-Governor.
+          JAMES McKAY.
+          JAMES F. GRAHAM.
+          ISAAC COWIE.
+          FRANCIS FIELD.
+          JOHN A. DAVIDSON.
+          CHARLES WOOD.
+
+We, the undersigned, Chiefs and head men of Indian bands
+representing bands of Indians who were parties to the Treaties
+Numbers One and Two, mentioned in the report of a Committee of the
+Queen's Privy Council of Canada, "as printed on the other side of
+this parchment," having had communication thereof, and fully
+understanding the same, assent thereto and accept the increase of
+annuities therein mentioned on the condition therein stated, and
+with the assent and approval of their several bands, it being
+agreed, however, with the Queen's Commissioners, that the number of
+braves and councillors for each Chief shall be four, as at present,
+instead of two as printed, 1875.
+
+Signed near Fort Alexander, on the Indian reserve, the twenty-third
+day of August, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred
+and seventy-five.
+
+              KA-KE-KE-PENOIS              His x mark.
+                   (William Pennefather).
+              JOSEPH KENT.                  "  x  "
+              PETANAQUAQE
+                   (Henry Vane).            "  x  "
+              PETER HENDERSON.              "  x  "
+              KAY-PAYAHSINISK.              "  x  "
+
+Witnesses:
+(Signed)  J. A. N. PROVENCHER,
+              Indian Commissioner.
+          J. DUBUC.
+          A. DUBUC.
+          JOS. MONKMAN,
+              Interpreter.
+          WILLIAM LEUNT.
+
+Signed at Broken Head River, the twenty-eighth day of August, in
+the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five.
+
+    (Signed)  J. A. N. PROVENCHER,
+                  Indian Commissioner.
+              NASHA-KE-PE-NOIS.       His x mark.
+              AH-KEE-SEEK-WAS-KEMG.    "  x  "
+              NAYWA-BE-BEE-KEE-SIK.    "  x  "
+              MAY-JAH-KEE-GEE-QUAN.    "  x  "
+              PAY-SAUGA.               "  x  "
+
+Witnesses:
+(Signed)  J. DUBUC.
+          H. S. REYNOLDS.
+          DANIEL DEVLIN.
+          H. COOK.
+
+Signed on the Reserve at Roseau River, eighth day of September, in
+the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five.
+
+    (Signed)  J. A. N. PROVENCHER,
+                  Indian Commissioner.
+              NA-NA-WA-NA-NAN                 His x mark.
+                  (or, Centre of Bird's Tail),
+              KE-WE-SAY-ASH                    "  x  "
+                  (or, Flying Round),
+              WA-KO-WASH (or, Whippoorwill),   "  x  "
+                  Chiefs.
+              OSAH-WEE-KA-KAY,                 "  x  "
+              OSAYS-KOO-KOON,                  "  x  "
+              SHAY-WAY-ASH,                    "  x  "
+              SHE-SKE-PENSE,                   "  x  "
+              MA-MEH-TAH-CUM-E-CUP,            "  x  "
+              PAH-TE-CU-WEE-NIUN,              "  x  "
+                  Councillors.
+              KAK-KA-QUIN-IASH,                "  x  "
+              ANA-WAY-WEE-TIN,                 "  x  "
+              TIBIS-QUO-QE-SICK,               "  x  "
+              WE-SHO-TA,                       "  x  "
+              NAT-TEE-KEE-GET,                 "  x  "
+                  Braves.
+Witness:
+(Signed)  JAMES F. GRAHAM.
+
+
+
+THE LAKE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE
+
+Articles of a treaty made and concluded at Berens River the
+twentieth day of September, and at Norway House the twenty-fourth
+day of September in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred
+and seventy-five, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of
+Great Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable
+Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba
+and the North-West Territories, and the Honorable James McKay, of
+the one part, and the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians,
+inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter defined
+and described by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter
+mentioned, of the other part:
+
+Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to
+an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at
+meetings at Berens River and Norway House, to deliberate upon
+certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the
+one part, and the said Indians of the other;
+
+And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her
+Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty
+to open up for settlement, immigration, and such other purposes as
+to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and
+described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent
+thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to
+make a treaty and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and
+good will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and
+be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and receive
+from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence;
+
+And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in
+council as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said
+Commissioners to name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be
+authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations and sign
+any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her
+Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of
+such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have
+thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that is to
+say:--For the Indians within the Berens River region and their
+several bands:
+
+Nah-wee-kee-sick-quah-yash, Chief; Kah-nah-wah-kee-wee-nin and
+Nah-kee-quan-nay-yash, Councillors, and Pee-wah-noo-wee-nin, of
+Poplar River, Councillor; for the Indians within the Norway House
+region and their several bands, David Rundle, Chief; James
+Cochrane, Harry Constatag and Charles Pisequinip, Councillors; and
+Ta-pas-ta-num, or Donald William Sinclair Ross, Chief; James
+Garriock and Proud McKay, Councillors;
+
+And thereupon in open council, the different bands having presented
+their Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men,
+for the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians
+inhabiting the said district hereinafter described;
+
+And whereas, the said Commissioners then and there received and
+acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men, for
+the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians
+inhabiting the said district hereinafter described;
+
+And whereas, the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a
+treaty with the said Indians and the same has been finally agreed
+upon and concluded as follows, that is to say:
+
+The Saulteaux and Swampy Cree tribes of Indians and all other the
+Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined,
+do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government
+of the Dominion of Canada, for Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever, all their rights, titles and privileges
+whatsoever to the lands included within the following limits, that
+is to say:
+
+Commencing at the north corner or junction of Treaties Numbers One
+and Three, thence easterly along the boundary of Treaty Number
+Three to the height of land at the north-east corner of the said
+treaty limits, a point dividing the waters of the Albany and
+Winnipeg Rivers, thence due north along the said height of land to
+a point intersected by the 53 degrees of north latitude and thence
+north-westerly to Favourable Lake, thence following the east shore
+of said lake to its northern limit, thence north-westerly to the
+north end of Lake Winnipegosis, thence westerly to the height of
+land called "Robinson's Portage," thence north-westerly to the
+east end of Cross Lake, thence north-westerly crossing Fox's Lake,
+thence north-westerly to the north end of Split Lake, thence
+south-westerly to Pipestone Lake, on Burntwood River, thence
+south-westerly to the western point of John Scott's Lake,
+thence south-westerly to the north shore of Beaver Lake, thence
+south-westerly to the west end of Cumberland Lake, thence due south
+to the Saskatchewan River, thence due south to the north-west
+corner of the northern limits of Treaty Number Four, including all
+territory within the said limits, and all islands on all lakes
+within the said limits as above described, and it being also
+understood that in all cases where lakes form the treaty limits,
+ten miles from the shore of the lake should he included in the
+treaty;
+
+And also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to all
+other lands wherever situated in the North-West Territories, or in
+any other Province or portion of Her Majesty's Dominions situated
+and being within the Dominion of Canada;
+
+The tract comprised within the lines above described embracing an
+area of one hundred thousand square miles, be the same, more or
+less;
+
+To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever.
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside
+reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at
+present cultivated by the said Indians, and other reserves for
+the benefit of the said Indians to be administered and dealt with
+for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada;
+provided all such reserves shall not exceed in all one hundred
+and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that proportion
+for larger or smaller families in manner following, that is to
+say:--For the band of Saulteaux in the Berens River region now
+settled, or who may within two years settle therein, a reserve
+commencing at the outlet of Berens River into Lake Winnipeg, and
+extending along the shores of said lake and up said river and into
+the interior behind said lake and river, so as to comprehend one
+hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, a reasonable
+addition being, however, to be made by Her Majesty to the extent of
+the said reserve for the inclusion in the tract so reserved of
+swamps, but reserving the free navigation of the said lake and
+river, and free access to the shores and waters thereof for Her
+Majesty and all her subjects, and excepting thereout such land as
+may have been granted to or stipulated to be held by the Hudson's
+Bay Company, and also such land as Her Majesty or her successors
+may in her good pleasure see fit to grant to the mission
+established at or near Berens River by the Methodist Church of
+Canada, for a church, school-house, parsonage, burial ground and
+farm, or other mission purposes; and to the Indians residing at
+Poplar River, falling into Lake Winnipeg north of Berens River, a
+reserve not exceeding one hundred and sixty acres to each family of
+five, respecting as much as possible their present improvements;
+and inasmuch as a number of the Indians now residing in and about
+Norway House, of the band of whom David Rundle is Chief, are
+desirous of removing to a locality where they can cultivate the
+soil, Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees to lay aside a reserve on
+the west side of Lake Winnipeg, in the vicinity of Fisher River, so
+as to give one hundred acres to each family of five, or in that
+proportion for larger or smaller families, who shall remove to the
+said locality within "three years," it being estimated that ninety
+families or thereabout will remove within the said period, and that
+a reserve will be laid aside sufficient for that or the actual
+number; and it is further agreed that those of the band who remain
+in the vicinity of "Norway House" shall retain for their own use
+their present gardens, buildings and improvements until the same be
+departed with by the Queen's Government, with their consent first
+had and obtained for their individual benefit, if any value can be
+realized therefor; and with regard to the band of Wood Indians of
+whom Ta-pas-ta-num or Donald William Sinclair Ross is Chief, a
+reserve at Otter Island on the west side of Cross Lake of one
+hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that
+proportion for smaller families, reserving however to Her Majesty,
+her successors, and her subjects, the free navigation of all lakes
+and rivers, and free access to the shores thereof; Provided,
+however, that Her Majesty reserves the right to deal with any
+settlers within the bounds of any lands reserved for any band as
+she shall deem fit, and also that the aforesaid reserves of land,
+or any interest therein, may be sold or otherwise disposed of by
+Her Majesty's Government for the use and benefit of the said
+Indians entitled thereto, with their consent first had and
+obtained; and with a view to shew the satisfaction of Her Majesty
+with the behavior and good conduct of her Indians she hereby
+through her Commissioners makes them a present of five dollars for
+each man, woman and child belonging to the bands here represented,
+in extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred;
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction
+in such reserves hereby made as to her Government of the Dominion
+of Canada may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve
+shall desire it;
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the
+boundary of Indian reserves until otherwise determined by her
+Government of the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall
+be allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force, or
+hereafter to be enacted, to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting
+the reserves or living elsewhere within her North-West Territories,
+from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall
+be strictly enforced;
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that they,
+the said Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations
+of hunting and fishing throughout the tract surrendered as
+hereinbefore described, subject to such regulations as may from
+time to time be made by her Government of her Dominion of Canada,
+and saving and excepting such tracts as may from time to time be
+required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or other
+purposes by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by
+any of the subjects thereof duly authorized therefor by the said
+Government;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians, that
+such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be
+required for public works or buildings, of what nature soever, may
+be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the
+Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made for the value of
+any improvement thereon;
+
+And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as
+possible after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an
+accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above
+described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year
+ensuing the date hereof, at some period in each year, to be duly
+notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed
+for that purpose within the territory ceded, pay to each Indian
+person the sum of five dollars per head yearly;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that
+the sum of five hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and every
+year expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition and
+twine for nets for the use of the said Indians in manner following,
+that is to say:--In the reasonable discretion as regards the
+distribution thereof among the Indians inhabiting the several
+reserves or otherwise included herein, of Her Majesty's Indian
+Agent having the supervision of this treaty;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that
+the following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said
+Indians who are now cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter
+commence to cultivate the land, that is to say:--Two hoes for
+every family actually cultivating; also one spade per family as
+aforesaid; one plough for every ten families as aforesaid; five
+harrows for every twenty families as aforesaid; one scythe
+for every family as aforesaid; and also one axe; and also one
+cross-cut saw; one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one
+grindstone, and one auger for each band; and also for each Chief
+for the use of his band, one chest of ordinary carpenter's tools;
+also, for each band, enough of wheat, barley, potatoes and oats to
+plant the land actually broken up for cultivation by such band;
+also, for each band, one yoke of oxen, one bull, and four cows:
+all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all for the
+encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians.
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that
+each Chief, duly recognized as such, shall receive an annual salary
+of twenty-five dollars per annum, and each subordinate officer, not
+exceeding three for each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per
+annum; and each such Chief and subordinate officer as aforesaid
+shall also receive, once every three years, a suitable suit of
+clothing; and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the
+closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal.
+
+And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf, and on behalf of
+all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby
+solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and
+also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of
+Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and engage that they will, in
+all respects, obey and abide by the law, and they will maintain
+peace and good order between each other, and also between
+themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves and
+others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now
+inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded
+tracts; and that they will not molest the person or property of any
+inhabitant of such ceded tracts, or the property of Her Majesty
+the Queen, or interfere with or trouble any person passing or
+travelling through the said tracts or any part thereof: and that
+they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing
+to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the
+stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in
+the country so ceded.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said
+Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at
+Berens River, this twentieth day of September, A.D. 1875, and at
+Norway House, on the twenty-fourth day of the month and year herein
+first above named.
+
+(Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,                   [L. S.]
+            Lieut.-Governor.
+         JAMES McKAY,                        [L. S.]
+         NAH-WEE-KEE-SICK-QUAH-YASH          His x mark.
+             (otherwise Jacob Berens),
+                   Chief.
+         KAH-WAH-NAH-KEE-WEE-NIN              "  x  "
+             (otherwise Antoine Gouin),
+         NAH-KEE-QUAN-NAY-YAH,                "  x  "
+         PEE-WAH-ROO-WEE-NIN,                 "  x  "
+                   Councillors.
+
+Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following
+witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by the
+Honorable James McKay:
+
+(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD.
+         A. G. JACKES, M.D.
+         CHRISTINE MORRIS.
+         E. C. MORRIS.
+         ELIZABETH YOUNG.
+         EGERTON RYERSON YOUNG.
+         WILLIAM McKAY.
+         JOHN McKAY.
+
+Signed at Norway House by the Chiefs and Councillors hereunto
+subscribing in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, the same
+having been first read and explained, by the Honorable James McKay:
+
+       (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,             [L.S.]
+                    Lieut.-Governor.
+                JAMES McKAY.                  [L.S.]
+                DAVID RUNDLE,
+                    Chief.
+                JAMES COCHRANE,                His x mark.
+                HARRY CONSTATAG,                "  x  "
+                CHARLES PISEQUINIP,             "  x  "
+                    Councillors.
+                TA-PAS-TA-NUM                   "  x  "
+                    (or Donald William
+                     Sinclair Ross),
+                    Chief.
+                GEORGE GARRIOCK,
+                PROUD McKAY,                    "  x  "
+                    Councillors.
+Witnesses:
+(Signed) RODERICK ROSS.
+         JOHN H. RUTTAN,
+              Methodist Minister.
+         O. GERMAN,
+              Methodist Minister.
+         D. C. McTAVISH.
+         ALEXANDER SINCLAIR.
+         L. C. McTAVISH.
+         CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS.
+         E. C. MORRIS.
+         A. G. JACKES, M.D.
+         THOMAS HOWARD.
+
+
+ADHESION OF SASKATCHEWAN INDIANS
+
+We the band of the Saulteaux tribe of Indians, residing at the
+mouth of the Saskatchewan River, on both sides thereof, having had
+communication of the foregoing treaty, hereby, and in consideration
+of the provisions of the said treaty being extended to us,
+transfer, surrender, and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her
+heirs and successors, to and for the use of the Government of
+Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever, which we
+have or enjoy in the territory described in the said treaty, and
+every part thereof, to have and, to bold to the use of Her Majesty
+the Queen, and her heirs and successors forever.
+
+And Her Majesty agrees, through the said Commissioners, to assign a
+reserve of sufficient area to allow one hundred and sixty acres to
+each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or smaller
+families--such reserves to be laid off and surveyed next year, on
+the south side of the River Saskatchewan.
+
+And having regard to the importance of the land where the said
+Indians are now settled, in respect of the purposes of the
+navigation of the said river, and transport in connection
+therewith, and otherwise, and in view of the fact that many of the
+said Indians have now houses and gardens on the other side of the
+river, and elsewhere, which they will abandon, Her Majesty agrees,
+through her said Commissioners, to grant a sum of five hundred
+dollars to the said band, to be paid in equitable proportions to
+such of them as have houses, to assist them in removing their
+houses to the said reserve, or building others. And the said
+Indians represented herein by their Chief and Councillors,
+presented as such by the band, do hereby agree to accept the
+several provisions, payments, and other benefits as stated in the
+said treaty, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry out
+and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions therein
+contained, on the part of the said Chiefs and Indians therein
+named, to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform
+to the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves had been
+originally contracting parties thereto.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said
+Indian Chief and Councillors have hereunto subscribed and set their
+hands, at the Grand Rapids, this twenty-seventh day of September,
+in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five.
+
+      (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,        [L.S.]
+                    Lieut.-Governor.
+               JAMES McKAY.             [L.S.]
+               PETER BEARDY,            His x mark.
+                    Chief.
+               JOSEPH ATKINSON,          "  x  "
+               ROBERT SANDERSON,         "  x  "
+                    Councillors.
+
+Signed by the parties in the presence of the undersigned witnesses,
+the same having been first explained to the Indians by the
+Honorable James McKay:
+
+(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD.
+         RODERICK ROSS.
+         E. C. MORRIS.
+         A. G. JACKES, M.D.
+         ALEXANDER MATHESON.
+         JOSEPH HOUSTON.
+         CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS.
+
+Memorandum.
+
+The Queen's Indian Commissioners having met Thickfoot and a portion
+of the Islands band of Indians at Wapang or Dog Head Island, on the
+twenty-eighth day of September A.D. 1875, request him to notify the
+Island Indians and those of Jack Head Point, to meet at Wapang an
+Indian agent next summer, to receive payments under the treaty,
+which they have made with the Indians of Norway House, Berens
+River, Grand Rapids and Lake Winnipeg, and in which they are
+included, at a time of which they will be notified, and to be
+prepared then to designate their Chief and two Councillors. The
+Commissioners have agreed to give some of the Norway House Indians
+a reserve at Fisher Creek, and they will give land to the Island
+Indians at the same place.
+
+Given at Wapang, this 28th day of September, A.D. 1875, under our
+hands.
+
+                ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                     Lieut.-Governor.
+                JAMES McKAY.
+
+I accept payments under the treaty for myself and those who may
+adhere to me, and accept the same and all its provisions, as a
+principal Indian, and agree to notify the Indians as above written.
+
+  Wapang, September 28th, 1875.
+                                (Signed) THICKFOOT.  His x mark.
+Witness:
+(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD.
+         RODERICK ROSS.
+
+Note--In 1876 Messrs. Howard and Reid obtained the adhesions to the
+Winnipeg Treaty of the Indians of the Dog Head, Bloodvein River,
+Big Island, and Jack Fish Head bands on Lake Winnipeg, and of the
+Island and Grand Rapids of the Berens River band, and of the Pas,
+Cumberland and Moose Lake bands on the Saskatchewan River, as will
+be found stated in Chapter VIII.
+
+
+
+THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT, NUMBER SIX
+
+Articles of a treaty made and concluded near Carlton, on the
+twenty-third day of August, and on the twenty-eighth day of said
+month, respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of
+September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-six, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great
+Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander
+Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the
+North-West Territories, and the Honorable James McKay and the
+Honorable William Joseph Christie, of the one part, and the Plain
+and the Wood Cree Tribes of Indians, and the other Tribes of
+Indians, inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter
+defined and described, by their Chiefs, chosen and named as
+hereinafter mentioned, of the other part.
+
+Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to
+an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at
+meetings at Fort Carlton, Fort Pitt and Battle River, to deliberate
+upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of
+the one part, and the said Indians of the other;
+
+And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her
+Majesty's said Commissioners that it is the desire of Her Majesty
+to open up for settlement, immigration and such other purposes as
+to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country, bounded and
+described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent
+thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to
+make a treaty and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and
+good will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and
+be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and receive
+from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence;
+
+And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council
+as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's Commissioners to
+name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized, on
+their behalf, to conduct each negotiations and sign any treaty
+to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her Majesty
+for the faithful performance by their respective bands of such
+obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have
+thereupon named for that purpose, that is to say:--representing
+the Indians who make the treaty at Carlton, the several Chiefs
+and Councillors who have subscribed hereto, and representing the
+Indians who make the treaty at Fort Pitt, the several Chiefs and
+Councillors who have subscribed hereto;
+
+And thereupon, in open council, the different bands having
+presented their Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and
+head men, for the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of
+Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described;
+
+And whereas the said Commissioners then and there received and
+acknowledged the persons so represented, as Chiefs and head men,
+for the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians
+inhabiting the said district hereinafter described;
+
+And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a
+treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed
+upon and concluded as follows, that is to say:
+
+The Plain and Wood Cree Tribes of Indians, and all other the
+Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined,
+do hereby cede, release, surrender and yield up to the Government
+of the Dominion of Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever, all their rights titles and privileges
+whatsoever, to the lands included within the following limits, that
+is to say:
+
+Commencing at the mouth of the river emptying into the north-west
+angle of Cumberland Lake, thence westerly up the said river to the
+source, thence on a straight line in a westerly direction to the
+head of Green Lake, thence northerly to the elbow in the Beaver
+River, thence down the said river northerly to a point twenty miles
+from the said elbow; thence in a westerly direction, keeping on a
+line generally parallel with the said Beaver River (above the
+elbow), and about twenty miles distance therefrom, to the source of
+the said river; thence northerly to the north-easterly point of the
+south shore of Red Deer Lake, continuing westerly along the said
+shore to the western limit thereof, and thence due west to the
+Athabaska River, thence up the said river, against the stream to
+the Jasper House, in the Rocky Mountains; thence on a course
+south-eastwardly, following the easterly range of the Mountains, to
+the source of the main branch of the Red Deer River; thence down
+the said river, with the stream, to the junction therewith of the
+outlet of the river, being the outlet of the Buffalo Lake; thence
+due east twenty miles, thence on a straight line south-eastwardly
+to the mouth of the said Red Deer River on the South Branch of the
+Saskatchewan River; thence eastwardly and northwardly, following on
+the boundaries of the tracts conceded by the several Treaties
+numbered Four and Five, to the place of beginning;
+
+And also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever, to all
+other lands, wherever situated, in the North-West Territories, or
+in any other Province or portion of Her Majesty's Dominions,
+situated and being within the Dominion of Canada;
+
+The tract comprised within the lines above described, embracing an
+area of one hundred and twenty-one thousand square miles, be the
+same more or less;
+
+To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever;
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside
+reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at
+present cultivated by the said Indians, and other reserves for the
+benefit of the said Indians, to be administered and dealt with
+for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada,
+provided all such reserves shall not exceed in all one square mile
+for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or
+smaller families, in manner following that is to say:--
+
+That the Chief Superintendent of Indian Affairs shall depute and
+send a suitable person to determine and set apart the reserves for
+each band, after consulting with the Indians thereof as to the
+locality which may be found to be most suitable for them;
+
+Provided, however, that Her Majesty reserves the right to deal with
+any settlers within the bounds of any lands reserved for any band
+as she shall deem fit, and also that the aforesaid reserves of land
+or any interest therein may be sold or otherwise disposed of by Her
+Majesty's Government for the use and benefit of the said Indians
+entitled thereto, with their consent first had and obtained; and
+with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the
+behavior and good conduct of her Indians, she hereby, through her
+Commissioners, makes them a present of twelve dollars for each man,
+woman and child belonging to the bands here represented, in
+extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred;
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction
+in such reserves hereby made, as to her Government of the Dominion
+of Canada may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve
+shall desire it;
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that within the
+boundary of Indian reserves, until otherwise determined by her
+Government of the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall
+be allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force or
+hereafter to be enacted to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting
+the reserves or living elsewhere within her North-West Territories
+from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall
+be strictly enforced;
+
+Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that they the said
+Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations of hunting and
+fishing throughout the tract surrendered as hereinbefore described,
+subject to such regulations as may from time to time be made by her
+Government of her Dominion of Canada, and saving and excepting such
+tracts as may from time to time be required or taken up for
+settlement, mining, lumbering or other purposes by her said
+Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by any of the subjects
+thereof, duly authorized therefor, by the said Government;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians, that
+such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be
+required for public works or buildings of what nature soever, may
+be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the
+Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made for the value of
+any improvements thereon;
+
+And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as
+possible after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken, an
+accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above
+described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year
+ensuing the date hereof, at some period in each year, to be duly
+notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed
+for that purpose, within the territories ceded, pay to each Indian
+person the sum of five dollars per head yearly;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that
+the sum of fifteen hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and
+every year expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition
+and twine for nets for the use of the said Indians, in manner
+following, that is to say:--In the reasonable discretion as regards
+the distribution thereof, among the Indians inhabiting the several
+reserves, or otherwise included herein, of Her Majesty's Indian
+Agent having the supervision of this treaty;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that
+the following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said
+Indians who are now cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter
+commence to cultivate the land, that is to say--Four hoes for every
+family actually cultivating, also two spades per family as
+aforesaid; one plough for every three families, as aforesaid, one
+harrow for every three families as aforesaid; two scythes, and one
+whetstone and two hayforks and two reaping-hooks for every family
+as aforesaid; and also two axes, and also one cross cut saw, and
+also one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone
+and one auger for each band; and also for each Chief, for the use
+of his band, one chest of ordinary carpenter's tools; also for each
+band, enough of wheat, barley, potatoes and oats to plant the land
+actually broken up for cultivation by such band; also for each
+band, four oxen, one bull and six cows, also one boar and two sows,
+and one handmill when any band shall raise sufficient grain
+therefor; all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all for
+the encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians;
+
+It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that
+each Chief, duly recognized as such shall receive an annual salary
+of twenty-five dollars per annum; and each subordinate officer, not
+exceeding four for each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per
+annum; and each such Chief and subordinate officer as aforesaid,
+shall also receive, once every three years, a suitable suit of
+clothing, and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the
+closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal, and also, as soon
+as convenient, one horse, harness and waggon;
+
+That in the event hereafter of the Indians comprised within this
+treaty being overtaken by any pestilence, or by a general famine,
+the Queen, on being satisfied and certified thereof by her Indian
+Agent or Agents, will grant to the Indians assistance of such
+character and to such extent as her Chief Superintendent of Indian
+Affairs shall deem necessary and sufficient to relieve the Indians
+from the calamity that shall have befallen them;
+
+That during the next three years, after two or more of the reserves
+hereby agreed to be set apart to the Indians, shall have been
+agreed upon and surveyed, there shall be granted to the Indians
+included under the Chiefs adhering to the treaty at Carlton, each
+spring, the sum of one thousand dollars to be expended for them by
+Her Majesty's Indian Agents, in the purchase of provisions for the
+use of such of the band as are actually settled on the reserves and
+are engaged in cultivating the soil, to assist them in such
+cultivation;
+
+That a medicine chest shall be kept at the house of each Indian
+Agent for the use and benefit of the Indians, at the discretion of
+such Agent;
+
+That with regard to the Indians included under the Chiefs adhering
+to the treaty at Fort Pitt, and to those under Chiefs within the
+treaty limits who may hereafter give their adhesion hereto
+(exclusively, however, of the Indians of the Carlton Region) there
+shall, during three years, after two or more reserves shall have
+been agreed upon and surveyed, be distributed each spring among the
+bands cultivating the soil on such reserves, by Her Majesty's Chief
+Indian Agent for this treaty in his discretion, a sum not exceeding
+one thousand dollars, in the purchase of provisions for the use of
+such members of the band as are actually settled on the reserves
+and engaged in the cultivation of the soil, to assist and encourage
+them in such cultivation;
+
+That, in lieu of waggons, if they desire it, and declare their
+option to that effect, there shall be given to each of the Chiefs
+adhering hereto, at Fort Pitt or elsewhere hereafter (exclusively
+of those in the Carlton District) in recognition of this treaty, so
+soon as the same can be conveniently transported, two carts, with
+iron bushings and tires;
+
+And the undersigned Chiefs, on their behalf, and on behalf of all
+other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby solemnly
+promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also to
+conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her
+Majesty the Queen;
+
+They promise and engage that they will in all respects obey and
+abide by the law, and they will maintain peace and good order
+between each other, and also between themselves and other tribes of
+Indians, and between themselves and others of Her Majesty's
+subjects, whether Indians or whites, now inhabiting or hereafter to
+inhabit any part of the said ceded tracts, and that they will not
+molest the person or property of any inhabitant of such ceded
+tracts, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with
+or trouble any person passing or travelling through the said tracts
+or any part thereof; and that they will aid and assist the officers
+of Her Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian
+offending against the stipulations of this treaty, or infringing
+the laws in force in the country so ceded.
+
+In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said
+Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at or
+near Fort Carlton, on the day and year aforesaid, and near Fort
+Pitt on the day above aforesaid.
+
+(Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+           Lieut.-Governor, N.-W.T.
+         JAMES McKAY,
+         W. J. CHRISTIE,
+           Indian Commissioners.
+         MIST-OW-AS-IS,               His x mark.
+         AH-TUK-UK-KOOP,               "  x  "
+           Head Chiefs of the Carlton Indians.
+         PEE-YAHN-KAH-NIHK-OO-SIT,     "  x  "
+         AH-YAH-TUS-KUM-IK-IM-UM,      "  x  "
+         KEE-TOO-WA-HAN,               "  x  "
+         CHA-KAS-TA-PAY-SIN,           "  x  "
+         JOHN SMITH,                   "  x  "
+         JAMES SMITH,                  "  x  "
+         CHIP-EE-WAY-AN,               "  x  "
+           Chiefs.
+         MASSAN,                       "  x  "
+         PIERRE CADIEN,                "  x  "
+         OO-YAH-TIK-WAH-PAHN,          "  x  "
+         MAHS-KEE-TE-TIM-UN,           "  x  "
+           Councillors of Mist-ow-as-is.
+         SAH-SAH-KOO-MOOS,             "  x  "
+         BENJAMIN,                     "  x  "
+         MEE-NOW-AH-CHAHK-WAY,         "  x  "
+         KEE-SIK-OW-ASIS,              "  x  "
+           Councillors of Ah-tuk-uk-koop.
+         PEE-TOOK-AH-HAN-UP-EE-GIN-EW, "  x  "
+         PEE-AY-CHEW,                  "  x  "
+         TAH-WAH-PISK-EE-KAHP-POW,     "  x  "
+         AHS-KOOS,                     "  x  "
+           Councillors of Pee-yahn-kah-nihk-oo-sit.
+         PET-E-QUA-CAY,                "  x  "
+         JEAN BAPTISTE,                "  x  "
+         ISIDORE WOLFE,                "  x  "
+         KEE-KOO-HOOS,                 "  x  "
+           Councillors of Kee-too-wa-han.
+         OO-SAHN-ASKU-NUKIP,           "  x  "
+         YAW-YAW-LOO-WAY,              "  x  "
+         SOO-SOU-AIM-EE-LUAHN,         "  x  "
+         NUS-YOH-YAK-EE-NAH-KOOS,      "  x  "
+           Councillors of Ah-yah-tus-kum-ik-im-um.
+         WILLIAM BADGER,
+         BENJAMIN JOYFUL,              "  x  "
+         JOHN BADGER,
+         JAMES BEAR,
+           Councillors of John Smith.
+         KAH-TIP-IS-KOOR-AHT,          "  x  "
+         KAH-KEW-EE-KWAHW-AHS-UM,      "  x  "
+         NAH-PACH,                     "  x  "
+         MUS-IN-AH-NE-HIM-AHN,         "  x  "
+           Councillors of Cha-kas-ta-pay-sin.
+         BERNARD CONSTANT,
+         HENRY SMYTH,                  "  x  "
+         MAH-TUA-AHS-TIM-OO-WE-GIN,    "  x  "
+         JACOB McLEAN,                 "  x  "
+           Councillors of James Smith.
+         NAH-POO-CHEE-CHEES,           "  x  "
+         NAH-WIS,                      "  x  "
+         KAH-PAH-PAH-MAH-CHAHK-NAY,    "  x  "
+         KEE-YEW-AH-KAH-PIM-WAHT,      "  x  "
+           Councillors of Chip-ee-way-an.
+         NAH-WEE-KAH-NICK-KAH-OO-
+           TAH-MAH-HOTE                "  x  "
+           (or Neeh-cha-aw-asis),
+                Chief.
+
+Signed by the Chiefs within named in the presence of the following
+witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by Peter
+Erasmus, Peter Ballendine and the Rev. John McKay:
+
+(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D.
+         JAMES WALKER,
+         J. H. McILLREE,
+                 N.-W.M.P.
+         PIERRE LEVAILLER,  His x mark.
+         ISIDORE DUMOND,     "  x  "
+         JEAN DUMOND,        "  x  "
+         PETER HOURIE,
+         FRANCOIS GINGRAS,
+         J. B. MITCHELL,
+                Staff Constable, N.-W.M.P.
+         J. H. PRICE,
+                Hospital Steward, N.-W.M.P.
+         XAVIER LETANGER,   His x mark.
+         WILLIAM SINCLAIR,
+         A. R. KENNEDY,
+         R. J. PRITCHARD,
+         L. CLARKE,
+         W. McKAY,
+         W. D. JARVIS,
+                Inspector, N.-W.M.P.
+
+Signed by the Chiefs and head men of the Willow Indians near Fort
+Carlton, this 28th day of August, A.D. 1876, the same having been
+first read and explained by the Honorable James McKay, and Peter
+Erasmus, in the presence of the undersigned witnesses:
+
+                 SEE-SEE-QUAM-ISH,             His x mark.
+                 NEE-TOO-KEE-WEE-KAH-MAN,       "  x  "
+                                 Councillors.
+                 KAH-MEE-YIS-TOO-WAY-SIT,       "  x  "
+                 KAH-PAY-YAK-WAHSK-OO-MUM,      "  x  "
+                 SEE-SEE-KWAHN-IS,              "  x  "
+                  Joint Chiefs of Willow Indians.
+                 KAH-NAH-KAH-SKOW-WAHT.         "  x  "
+                 KAH-AH-TEE-KOO-NEW.            "  x  "
+                 KAH-NAH-MAH-CHEW.              "  x  "
+                 MOON-OO-YAHS.                  "  x  "
+                 PO-MIN-AH-KOW.                 "  x  "
+                 OO-TUK-KOO-PAH-KAH-MAY-
+                    TOU-MAY-YET.                "  x  "
+(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D.
+         JOSEPH GENTON.
+         JOHN A. KERR.
+         PIERRE LEVAILLER.    His x mark.
+         W. D. JARVIS,
+                N.-W.M.P.
+
+Signed by Her Majesty's Commissioners, and by the Chiefs and head
+men hereafter subscribing hereto, the same having been first read
+and explained to the Indians by the Honorable James McKay and Peter
+Erasmus, near Fort Pitt, this 9th day of September, A.D. 1876, in
+the presence of the undersigned witnesses:
+
+       (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS,
+                      Lieut.-Governor, N.W.T.
+                JAMES McKAY,
+                W. J. CHRISTIE,
+                        Indian Commissioners.
+                WEE-KAS-KOO-KEE-PAY-YIN,          His x mark.
+                PEE-YAS-EE-WAH-KAH-WE-CHAH-KOOT,   "  x  "
+                JAMES SEENUM,                      "  x  "
+                OO-NAH-LAT-MEE-NAH-HOOS,           "  x  "
+                SEE-KAHS-KOOTCH,                   "  x  "
+                TUS-TUSK-EE-SKWAIS,                "  x  "
+                PEE-WAY-SIS,                       "  x  "
+                KEE-YE-WIN,                        "  x  "
+                        Cree Chiefs.
+                KIN-OO-SAY-OO,                     "  x  "
+                        Chippewayan Chief.
+                SEE-WAS-KWAN,                      "  x  "
+                WAH-WAY-SEE-HOO-WE-YIN,            "  x  "
+                  Councillors to Wee-kas-koo-kee-pay-yin.
+                TIP-EE-SKOW-AH-CHAK,               "  x  "
+                PAY-PAY-SEE-SEE-MOO,               "  x  "
+                  Councillors to Pee-yas-ee-wah-kah-
+                         we-chah-koot.
+                OO-NOW-UK-EE-PAH-CHAS,             "  x  "
+                MY-OO-WAY-SEES,                    "  x  "
+                  Councillors to See-kahs-kootch.
+                OOS-PWAH-KHUN-IS,                  "  x  "
+                NEE-YE-PEE-TAY-AS-EE-KAY-SE,
+                  Councillors to Tus-tusk-ee-skwais.
+                MAH-CHAH-MEE-NIS,                  "  x  "
+                ISAAC CARDINAL,                    "  x  "
+                  Councillors to Pee-way-sis.
+                ANTOINE XAVIER,                    "  x  "
+                  Councillor to Kin-oo-say-oo.
+                WILLIAM BULL,                      "  x  "
+                  Councillor to James Seenum.
+                WAH-KEY-SEE-KOOT,                  "  x  "
+                  Councillor to See-kahs-kootch.
+                CHARLES CARDINAL,                  "  x  "
+                PIERRE WAHBISKAW,                  "  x  "
+                  Councillors to Kee-ye-win.
+                KI-YAS-EE-KUN,                     "  x  "
+                KAH-KEE-OO-PAH-TOW,                "  x  "
+                  Councillors to Wee-kas koo-kee-pay-yin.
+                CAKE-CAKE,                         "  x  "
+                  Councillor to Oo-nah-lat-mee-nah-hoos.
+                KAM-OO-NIN,                        "  x  "
+                  Councillor to James Seenum.
+                AH-SIS,                            "  x  "
+                  Councillor to See-kahs-kootch.
+
+Witnesses:
+
+(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D.
+         JAMES McLEOD,
+                Com., N.-W.M.P.
+         JAMES WALKER,
+                Inspector, N.-W.M.P.
+         E. DALRYMPLE CLARKE,
+                Adjutant, N.-W.M.P.
+         VITAL J. BISH,
+                Of St. Albert, O.M.J.
+         CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN,
+                Priest, O.M.J.
+         JOHN McDOUGALL,
+                Methodist Missionary.
+         JOHN McKAY.
+         W. E. JONES.
+         PETER C. PAMBRUN.
+         A. K. KENNEDY.
+         PETER ERASMUS.
+         THOMAS McKAY.
+         JAMES SIMPSON.
+         ELIZA HARDISTY.
+         MARY McKAY.
+
+
+ADHESIONS TO TREATY NUMBER SIX
+
+We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Cree and other bands
+of Indians having had communication of the treaty--a copy of which
+is printed in the Report of the Minister of the Interior, for the
+year ending 30th June, 1876, concluded at Forts Carlton and Pitt
+between the Indians inhabiting the country described in said treaty
+and Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, by the
+Commissioners the Honorable Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor
+of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, the Honorable W. J.
+Christie, and the Honorable James McKay; but not having been
+present when the negotiations were being conducted at the
+above-mentioned places, do hereby, for ourselves and the bands
+which we represent, agree to all the terms, conditions, covenants,
+and engagements of whatever kind enumerated in the said treaty, and
+accept the same as if we had been present, and had consented and
+agreed to the same when the treaty was first signed and executed.
+
+Witness our hands, at Fort Pitt, this ninth day of August, in the
+year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-seven.
+
+    (Signed) M. G. DICKIESON,
+       Commissioner.
+    PAY-MO-TAY-AH-SOO      His x mark.
+    KAH-SEE-MUT-A-POO       "  x  "
+    NAH-PAY-SIS             "  x  "
+    KE-HI-WINS,
+       Head man.
+
+Signed by the Chiefs and head men (having been first read and
+explained by Peter Erasmus) in the presence of
+
+(Signed) PETER ERASMUS.
+         RODERICK CAMPBELL.
+
+Signed at Edmonton, this 21st day of August, in the year
+above-written, by the Chiefs and head men hereto, the whole having
+been first read and explained by Peter Erasmus, in the presence of
+the following witnesses.
+
+(Signed) ALEXIS KEES-KEE-CHEE-CHI,    His x mark.
+                     Chief.
+         OO-MUO-IN-AH-SOO-WAW-SIN-EE,  "  x  "
+                     Head man.
+         CATSCHIS-TAH-WAY-SKUM,        "  x  "
+                     Chief.
+         KOO-SAH-WAN-AS-KAY,           "  x  "
+                     Head man.
+         PAHS-PAHS-CHASE.              "  x  "
+         TAH-KOOTCH.                   "  x  "
+
+Witnesses:
+(Signed) RIC HARDISTY.
+H. LEDUC.
+PETER ERASMUS.
+W. D. JARVIS,
+   Inspector, N.-W.M.P.
+
+We, members of the Cree tribe of Indians, having had explained to
+us the terms of the treaty, made and concluded near Carlton, on the
+23rd day of August and on the 28th day of said month respectively,
+and near Fort Pitt on the 9th day of September, 1876, between Her
+Majesty the Queen, by the Commissioners duly appointed to negotiate
+the said treaty, and the Plain and Wood Cree and other tribes of
+Indians inhabiting the country within the limits defined in said
+treaty; but not having been present at the council at which the
+articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, do now hereby, for
+ourselves and the band which we represent, in consideration of the
+provisions of the said treaty being extended to us and the band
+which we represent, transfer, surrender, and relinquish to Her
+Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, to and for the use of
+the Government of the Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and
+interest whatsoever which we and the said band which we represent
+have held or enjoyed of, in and to the territory described and
+fully set out in the said treaty, also all our right, title and
+interest whatsoever to all other lands wherever situated, whether
+within the limits of any other treaty heretofore made, or hereafter
+to be made with Indians, or elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories,
+to have and to hold the same, unto and for the use of Her Majesty
+the Queen, her heirs and successors forever;
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several benefits, payments, and
+reserves promised to the Indians under the Chiefs adhering to the
+said treaty at Fort Pitt, and solemnly engage to abide by, carry
+out and fulfil, all the stipulations, obligations and conditions
+therein contained, on the part of the Chiefs and Indians therein
+named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform to
+the articles of the said treaty, as if we ourselves and the band
+which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto,
+and been present at the councils held near Fort Pitt and had there
+attached our signatures to the said treaty.
+
+In witness whereof Her Majesty's Lieutenant-Governor and Indian
+Superintendent for the North-West Territories, and the Chiefs and
+Councillors of the band hereby giving their adhesion to the said
+treaty, have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at the
+Blackfoot Crossing of the Bow River this twenty-fifth day of
+September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-seven.
+
+    (Signed)   DAVID LAIRD,
+                  Lieut.-Governor and Indian
+                     Superintendent, N.W.T.
+               KIS-KAY-IM                  His x mark.
+                  (or, Bob Tail),
+                     Chief.
+               MEM-IN-OROU-TAW              "  x  "
+                  (or, Sometimes Glad),
+               TCHO-WEK                     "  x  "
+                  (or, Passing Sound),
+                     Councillors.
+
+Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by
+Rev. J. MacDougall.
+
+(Signed)   JAMES F. McLEOD,
+               Com., N.-W.M.P.
+           CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN.
+           A. S. IRVINE,
+               Assistant Commissioner.
+           J. McDOUGALL,
+               Missionary.
+
+The undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Cree Nation having had
+communication of the treaty concluded between Her Majesty the Queen
+by her Commissioners and certain Chiefs of the Cree Nation, at Fort
+Pitt on the 9th day of September 1876, agree to surrender our title
+to all our lands in the North-West Territories and to abide by all
+the promises set forth in the said treaty, on condition that all
+the payments, reserves of land, and promises named therein are
+secured to us by Her Majesty.
+
+And the undersigned Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the
+North-West Territories on behalf of Her Majesty agrees that all
+the payments, reserves and promises named in the said treaty to be
+made to each Cree Chief and his band shall be faithfully made and
+carried out to the Chiefs who have subscribed to this memorandum
+and to their people.
+
+In witness whereof the undersigned Indian Superintendent, and
+the undersigned Chiefs and head men have hereto set our hands
+this nineteenth day of August, one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-eight.
+
+  (Signed) DAVID LAIRD.
+           PUS-KEE-YAH-KAY-WE-YIN.    His x mark.
+           MAH-KAYO.                   "  x  "
+           PAY-PAHM-US-KUM-ICK-NIUM.   "  x  "
+           ISIDORE.                    "  x  "
+
+Signed the day and year above written after having been read and
+interpreted to the Chiefs and head men by Peter Erasmus, in the
+presence of
+
+(Signed) JOHN FRENCH,
+              Sub-Inspector, N.-W.M.P.
+          PETER ERASMUS.
+
+We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Wood Cree tribe of
+Indians, having had communication of the treaty made and concluded
+near Carlton, on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August
+respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September, one
+thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, between Her Majesty the
+Queen, by her Commissioners and the Plain and Wood Cree and other
+tribes of Indians inhabitants of the country named therein, hereby
+for ourselves and the bands which we represent, in consideration of
+the provisions of the said treaty being extended to our bands,
+cede, transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen,
+her heirs and successors to and for the use of her Government of
+the Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges
+whatsoever to all lands in the North-West Territories or elsewhere
+in Her Majesty's Dominions, to have and to hold the same unto and
+to the use of Her said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors
+forever.
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and
+reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise
+and engage to abide by and carry out all the stipulations and
+obligations therein contained, on the part of said Chiefs and
+Indians therein named to be observed and performed, and in all
+things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as if we
+ourselves and our band had originally been contracting parties
+thereto.
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen by her representative, the Honorable
+David Laird, Indian Superintendent of the North-West Territories,
+agrees that all the payments and provisions named in the said
+treaty to be made to each Chief and his band shall be faithfully
+made and fulfilled to the aforesaid Chiefs and their bands.
+
+In witness whereof we, the said Indian Superintendent of the
+North-West Territories, and the said Chief and head men of the
+Stony tribe of Indians have hereto set our hands, at Battleford,
+this twenty-ninth day of August, one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-eight.
+
+  (Signed) DAVID LAIRD,
+    Indian Superintendent.
+  SW-KE-MAW                  His x mark.
+    (or, Misketo).
+  ETA-WE-PE-TON               "  x  "
+    (or, Uses both Arms).
+  NESS-AU-ASIS                "  x  "
+    (or, Two Child).
+  KA-WA-SU-SKO-HO-PAT-ISK     "  x  "
+    (or, Lightning).
+
+Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by
+Peter Ballendine.
+
+  (Signed) JAMES WALKER,
+    Inspector N.-W.M.P.
+  P. BALLENDINE.
+  HAYTER REED.
+
+We the undersigned Chief and head men of the Plain Stony tribe of
+Indians, having had communication of the treaty made and concluded
+near Carlton on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August
+respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth of September, one
+thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, between Her Majesty the
+Queen by her Commissioners, and the Plain and Wood Crees and other
+tribes of Indians, inhabitants of the country named therein, hereby
+for ourselves and the band which we represent, in consideration of
+the provisions of the said treaty being extended to our band, cede,
+transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her
+heirs and successors, to and for the use of the Government of the
+Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever
+to all lands in the North-West Territories, or elsewhere in Her
+Majesty's Dominions, to have and to hold the same unto and to the
+use of Her said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors
+forever.
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and
+reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise
+and agree to abide by and carry out all the stipulations and
+obligations therein contained, on the part of said Chiefs and
+Indians therein named to be observed and performed, and in all
+things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as if we
+ourselves and our band had originally been contracting parties
+thereto.
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen by her Representative the Honorable David
+Laird, Indian Superintendent of the North-West Territories, agrees
+that all the payments and provisions named in the said treaty to be
+made to each Chief and his band, shall be faithfully made and
+fulfilled to the aforesaid Chiefs and their bands.
+
+In witness whereof, we, the said Indian Superintendent of the
+North-West Territories, and the said Chiefs and head men of the
+Wood Cree tribe of Indians, have hereto set our hands at Carlton
+this third day of September, one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-eight.
+
+       (Signed) DAVID LAIRD,
+          Indian Superintendent.
+       KO-PAT-A-WA-KE-NUM,     His x mark.
+          Chief.
+       BANJIEL MARISTZE,        "  x  "
+       JAMES (Chief's son),     "  x  "
+          Councillors.
+       SA-SE-WA-HUM.            "  x  "
+       KENE-MO-LAY.             "  x  "
+       MAS-E-WAS-CHASE.         "  x  "
+
+Signed by the Chiefs and Councillors within named in presence of
+the following witnesses, the same having first been explained by
+Peter Ballendine:
+
+(Signed) L. CLARKE.
+         A. E. FORGET.
+         P. BALLENDINE.
+
+We, the undersigned Indian Chief and head men, having had
+communication of the treaty made and concluded at Forts Carlton and
+Pitt, in the summer of 1876, but not having been present at the
+conferences at which said treaty was negotiated, hereby agree to
+accept the terms and conditions of the said treaty, and to abide
+thereby in the same manner as if we had been present at the time
+the said treaty was first signed.
+
+As witness our hands this eighteenth day of September, one thousand
+eight hundred and seventy-eight.
+
+       (Signed) MICHAEL CALISTROIS.      His x mark.
+                LOUIS PAY-FAHN-AH-WAYO.   "  x  "
+                AC-OO-SEE.                "  x  "
+
+Signed by the Chief and head men, after having been read and
+explained by Peter Erasmus.
+
+FORT WALSH, CYPRESS HILLS, 4th July, 1879.
+
+Sir,--I have the honor to enclose an agreement made with two Cree
+head men, who expressed to me a desire to join the treaty made at
+Fort Carlton and Fort Pitt on the 9th September, 1876. Little Pine
+is a Cree Chief who has for some time expressed his willingness to
+take the treaty. Lucky Man is a head man lately made by the Indians
+who have been followers of Big Bear but who have now left him.
+
+Big Bear himself was present when both Little Pine and Lucky Man
+signed, and, I think would have taken the treaty himself, had he
+not felt ashamed at so many of his lodges leaving him. He is now
+almost alone, only three or four followers having remained with
+him. He states that he will take the treaty at Sounding Lake at the
+time of the payments.
+
+Both Little Pine and Lucky Man have requested that they may be paid
+at Fort Walsh, as it is impossible for them to reach the more
+northern agencies, and I have agreed to it. It will therefore be
+necessary that enough money be forwarded to pay these Indians here.
+Little Pine states he will have thirty-four lodges, and Lucky Man
+twenty-five. Taking the average of a lodge at eight, which I
+understand is a fair estimate, it will make four hundred and
+seventy-two extra Indians to be paid.
+
+                  I have, &c.,
+           (Signed)    EDGAR DEWDNEY,
+                          Indian Commissioner.
+L. VANKOUGHNET, Esq.,
+     Deputy Supt. General of Indian Affairs, Ottawa.
+
+Whereas Little Pine, or Min-a-he-quo-sis, a Cree Chief on behalf of
+his band and certain other Cree Indians comprising twenty lodges,
+inhabitants of the country covered by the treaty commonly known as
+Treaty Number Six made between Her Majesty the Queen by her
+Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander Morris, the Honorable James
+McKay and the Honorable William Joseph Christie, of the one part,
+and the Plain and Wood Cree tribes of Indians of the other part, at
+Carlton on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August, and
+near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September in the year of our
+Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, who have not yet
+given in their adhesion to the said treaty, have presented
+themselves to Edgar Dewdney Esq., Indian Commissioner for the
+North-West Territories, and expressed a desire to join in the said
+treaty. And whereas, the said Commissioner has recognized the said
+Little Pine as the head man of his band, and the said band of
+twenty lodges have selected and appointed Pap-a-way the Lucky Man,
+one of their number, as the head man of their band, and have
+presented him as such to the said Commissioner, who has recognized
+and accepted him as such head man.
+
+Now this instrument witnesseth that the said Little Pine and
+Pap-a-way, or the Lucky Man, for themselves and on behalf of the
+bands which they represent, do transfer, surrender and relinquish
+to her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors to and for the
+use of her Government of the Dominion of Canada, all their right,
+title and interest whatsoever, which they have held or enjoyed, of,
+in and to the territory described and fully set out in the said
+treaty; also all their right, title and interest whatsoever to all
+other lands wherever situated, whether within their limits of any
+other treaty heretofore made or hereafter to be made with Indians
+or elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, to have and to hold the
+same unto and for the use of Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and
+successors forever. And do hereby agree to accept the several
+benefits, payments and reserves promised to the Indians adhering to
+the said treaty at Carlton and Fort Pitt on the dates above
+mentioned; and further, do solemnly engage to abide by, carry out
+and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions
+contained on the part of the Indians therein named, to be observed
+and performed, and in all things to conform to the articles of the
+said treaty, as if the said Little Pine and Pap-a-way or the Lucky
+Man and the bands whom they represent had been originally
+contracting parties thereto, and had been present at the treaty at
+Carlton and Fort Pitt, and had there attached their signatures to
+the said treaty.
+
+In witness whereof Edgar Dewdney, Indian Commissioner for the
+North-West Territories, and the said Little Pine and Pap-a-way or
+the Lucky Man, head men of the said bands, hereby giving their
+adhesion to the said treaty, have hereunto subscribed and set their
+hands at Fort Walsh, in the said North-West Territories this second
+day of July in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-nine.
+
+         (Signed) EDGAR DEWDNEY,
+                       Indian Commissioner.
+                  LITTLE PINE.      His x mark.
+                  THE LUCKY MAN.     "  x  "
+
+Signed by the parties hereto, in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been explained to the Indians by the
+said Edgar Dewdney, Esq., Indian Commissioner, through the
+interpreters Edward McKay and P. Leveiller.
+
+(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD,
+            Com. N.-W.M.P.
+         A. G. IRVINE,
+            Assistant Com. N.-W.M.P.
+         FRANK NORMAN,
+            Staff Constable N.-W.M.P.
+
+
+
+THE TREATY WITH THE BLACKFEET, NUMBER SEVEN
+
+Articles of a treaty made and concluded this twenty-second day of
+September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-seven, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great
+Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable David
+Laird, Lieutenant-Governor and Indian Superintendent of the
+North-West Territories, and James Farquharson McLeod, C.M.G.,
+Commissioner of the North-West Mounted Police, of the one part, and
+the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, Stony, and other Indians,
+inhabitants of the territory north of the United States boundary
+line, east of the central range of the Rocky Mountains, and south
+and west of Treaties Numbers Six and Four, by their head Chiefs and
+minor Chiefs or Councillors, chosen as hereinafter mentioned, of
+the other part:
+
+Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said territory, have pursuant to
+an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at a
+meeting at the "Blackfoot crossing" of the Bow River, to deliberate
+upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of
+the one part, and the said Indians of the other;
+
+And whereas the said Indians have been informed by Her Majesty's
+Commissioners that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open up for
+settlement, and such other purposes as to Her Majesty may seem
+meet, a tract of country, bounded and described as hereinafter
+mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects
+inhabiting the said tract, and to make a treaty, and arrange with
+them, so that there may be peace and good will between them and Her
+Majesty, and between them and Her Majesty's other subjects; and
+that her Indian people may know and feel assured of what allowance
+they are to count upon and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and
+benevolence;
+
+And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council,
+and being requested by her Majesty's Commissioners to present
+their head Chiefs and minor Chiefs, or Councillors, who shall be
+authorized, on their behalf, to conduct such negotiations and sign
+any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her
+Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of
+such obligations as should be assumed by them, the said Blackfeet,
+Blood, Piegan and Sarcee Indians have therefore acknowledged for
+that purpose, the several head and minor Chiefs, and the said Stony
+Indians, the Chiefs and Councillors who have subscribed hereto,
+that thereupon in open council the said Commissioners received and
+acknowledged the head and minor Chiefs and the Chiefs and Councillors
+presented for the purpose aforesaid;
+
+And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a
+treaty with the said Indians; and the same has been finally agreed
+upon and concluded as follows, that is to say: the Blackfeet,
+Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, Stony and other Indians inhabiting the
+district hereinafter more fully described and defined, do hereby
+cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government of Canada
+for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever, all their
+rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the lands included
+within the following limits, that is to say:
+
+Commencing at a point on the international boundary due south of
+the western extremity of the Cypress Hills; thence west along
+the said boundary to the central range of the Rocky Mountains,
+or to the boundary of the Province of British Columbia; thence
+north-westerly along the said boundary to a point due west of
+the source of the main branch of the Red Deer River; thence
+south-westerly and southerly following on the boundaries of the
+tracts ceded by the Treaties Numbered Six and Four to the place
+of commencement; and also all their rights, titles and privileges
+whatsoever, to all other lands wherever situated in the North-West
+Territories, or in any other portion of the Dominion of Canada:
+
+To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her
+successors forever:
+
+And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees with her said Indians,
+that they shall have right to pursue their vocations of hunting
+throughout the tract surrendered as heretofore described, subject
+to such regulations as may, from time to time, be made by the
+Government of the country, acting under the authority of Her
+Majesty; and saving and excepting such tracts as may be required or
+taken up from time to time for settlement, mining, trading or other
+purposes by her Government of Canada, or by any of her Majesty's
+subjects duly authorized therefor by the said Government.
+
+It is also agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians that
+reserves shall be assigned them of sufficient area to allow one
+square mile for each family of five persons, or in that proportion
+for larger and smaller families, and that said reserves shall be
+located as follows, that is to say:
+
+First--The reserves of the Blackfeet, Blood and Sarcee bands of
+Indians, shall consist of a belt of land on the north side of the
+Bow and South Saskatchewan Rivers, of an average width of four
+miles along said rivers, down stream, commencing at a point on the
+Bow River twenty miles north-westerly of the "Blackfoot crossing"
+thereof, and extending to the Red Deer River at its junction with
+the South Saskatchewan, also for the term of ten years, and no
+longer, from the date of the concluding of this treaty, when it
+shall cease to be a portion of said Indian reserves, as fully to
+all intents and purposes as if it had not at any time been included
+therein, and without any compensation to individual Indians for
+improvements, of a similar belt of land on the south side of the
+Bow and Saskatchewan Rivers of an average width of one mile along
+said rivers, down stream; commencing at the aforesaid point on the
+Bow River, and extending to a point one mile west of the coal
+seam on said river, about five miles below the said "Blackfoot
+crossing;" beginning again one mile east of the said coal seam and
+extending to the mouth of Maple Creek at its junction with the
+South Saskatchewan; and beginning again at the junction of the Bow
+River with the latter river, and extending on both sides of the
+South Saskatchewan in an average width on each side thereof of one
+mile, along said river against the stream, to the junction of the
+Little Bow River with the latter river, reserving to Her Majesty,
+as may now or hereafter be required by her for the use of her
+Indian and other subjects, from all the reserves hereinbefore
+described, the right to navigate the above mentioned rivers, to
+land and receive fuel and cargoes on the shores and banks thereof,
+to build bridges and establish ferries thereon, to use the fords
+thereof and all the trails leading thereto, and to open such other
+roads through the said reserves as may appear to Her Majesty's
+Government of Canada, necessary for the ordinary travel of her
+Indian and other subjects, due compensation being paid to
+individual Indians for improvements, when the same may be in any
+manner encroached upon by such roads.
+
+Secondly--That the reserve of the Piegan band of Indians shall be
+on the Old Man's River, near the foot of the Porcupine Hills, at a
+place called "Crow's Creek."
+
+And thirdly--The reserve of the Stony band of Indians shall be in
+the vicinity of Morleyville.
+
+In view of the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the recent general
+good conduct of her said Indians, and in extinguishment of all
+their past claims, she hereby, through her Commissioners, agrees to
+make them a present payment of twelve dollars each in cash to each
+man, woman, and child of the families here represented.
+
+Her Majesty also agrees that next year, and annually afterwards
+forever, she will cause to be paid to the said Indians, in cash, at
+suitable places and dates, of which the said Indians shall be duly
+notified, to each Chief, twenty-five dollars, each minor Chief or
+Councillor (not exceeding fifteen minor Chiefs to the Blackfeet and
+Blood Indians, and four to the Piegan and Sarcee bands, and five
+Councillors to the Stony Indian Bands) fifteen dollars, and to
+every other Indian of whatever age, five dollars; the same, unless
+there be some exceptional reason, to be paid to the heads of
+families for those belonging thereto.
+
+Further, Her Majesty agrees that the sum of two thousand dollars
+shall hereafter every year be expended in the purchase of
+ammunition for distribution among the said Indians; provided that
+if at any future time ammunition became comparatively unnecessary
+for said Indians, her Government, with the consent of said Indians,
+or any of the bands thereof, may expend the proportion due to such
+band otherwise for their benefit.
+
+Further, Her Majesty agrees that each head Chief and minor Chief,
+and each Chief and Councillor duly recognized as such, shall, once
+in every three years, during the term of their office, receive a
+suitable suit of clothing, and each head Chief and Stony Chief, in
+recognition of the closing of the treaty, a suitable medal and
+flag, and next year, or as soon as convenient, each head Chief, and
+minor Chief, and Stony Chief shall receive a Winchester rifle.
+
+Further, Her Majesty agrees to pay the salary of such teachers to
+instruct the children of said Indians as to her Government of
+Canada may seem advisable, when said Indians are settled on their
+reserves and shall desire teachers.
+
+Further, Her Majesty agrees to supply each head and minor Chief,
+and each Stony Chief, for the use of their bands, ten axes, five
+handsaws, five augers, one grindstone, and the necessary files and
+whetstones.
+
+And further, Her Majesty agrees that the said Indians shall be
+supplied as soon as convenient, after any band shall make due
+application therefor, with the following cattle for raising stock,
+that is to say: for every family of five persons, and under, two
+cows; for every family of more than five persons, and less than ten
+persons, three cows; for every family of over ten persons, four
+cows; and every head and minor Chief, and every Stony Chief, for
+the use of their bands, one bull; but if any band desire to
+cultivate the soil as well as raise stock, each family of such band
+shall receive one cow less than the above mentioned number, and in
+lieu thereof, when settled on their reserves and prepared to break
+up the soil, two hoes, one spade, one scythe, and two hay forks,
+and for every three families, one plough and one harrow, and for
+each band, enough potatoes, barley, oats, and wheat (if such seeds
+be suited for the locality of their reserves) to plant the land
+actually broken up. All the aforesaid articles to be given, once
+for all, for the encouragement of the practice of agriculture among
+the Indians.
+
+And the undersigned Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan and Sarcee head Chiefs
+and minor Chiefs, and Stony Chiefs and Councillors, on their own
+behalf and on behalf of all other Indians inhabiting the tract
+within ceded do hereby solemnly promise and engage to strictly
+observe this treaty, and also to conduct and behave themselves as
+good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and
+engage that they will, in all respects, obey and abide by the law,
+that they will maintain peace and good order between each other and
+between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between
+themselves and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians,
+Half-breeds or whites, now inhabiting, or hereafter to inhabit, any
+part of the said ceded tract; and that they will not molest the
+person or property of any inhabitant of such ceded tract, or the
+property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with or trouble any
+person, passing or travelling through the said tract or any part
+thereof, and that they will assist the officers of Her Majesty in
+bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the
+stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the
+country so ceded.
+
+In witness whereof Her Majesty's said Commissioners, and the said
+Indian head and minor Chiefs, and Stony Chiefs and Councillors,
+have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the "Blackfoot
+crossing" of the Bow River, the day and year herein first above
+written.
+
+(Signed) DAVID LAIRD,
+   Gov. of N.-W.T., and Special Indian Commissioner.
+   JAMES F. McLEOD,
+      Lieut.-Colonel, Com. N.-W.M.P., and
+         Special Indian Commissioner.
+   CHAPO-MEXICO (or Crowfoot),             His x mark.
+      Head Chief of the South Blackfeet.
+   MATOSE-APIW (or Old Sun),                "  x  "
+      Head Chief of the North Blackfeet.
+   STAMISCOTOCAR (or Bull Head),            "  x  "
+      Head Chief of the Sarcees.
+   MEKASTO (or Red Crow),                   "  x  "
+      Head Chief of the South Bloods.
+   NATOSE-ONISTORS (or Medicine Calf).      "  x  "
+   POKAPIW-OTOIAN (or Bad Head).            "  x  "
+   SOTENAH (or Rainy Chief),                "  x  "
+      Head Chief of the North Bloods.
+   TAKOYE-STAMIX (or Fiend Bull).           "  x  "
+   AKKA-KITCIPIMIW-OTAS (or Many            "  x  "
+      Spotted Horses).
+   ATTTISTAH-MACAN (or Running Rabit).      "  x  "
+   PITAH-PEKIS (or Eagle Rib).              "  x  "
+   SAKOYE-AOTAN (or Heavy Shield),          "  x  "
+      Head Chief of the Middle Blackfeet.
+   ZOATZE-TAPITAPIW (or Setting on an       "  x  "
+      Eagle Tail).
+      Head Chief of the North Piegans.
+   AKKA-MAKKOYE (or Many Swans).            "  x  "
+   APENAKO-SAPOP, (or Morning Flume).       "  x  "
+  *MAS-GWA-AH-SID (or Bear's Paw).          "  x  "
+  *CHE-NE-KA (or John).                     "  x  "
+  *KI-CHI-PWOT (or Jacob).                  "  x  "
+   STAMIX-OSOK (or Bull Bacfat).            "  x  "
+   EMITAH-APIAKINNE (or White Striped Dog). "  x  "
+   MATAPI-KOMOTZIW (or the Captive or       "  x  "
+      Stolen Person).
+   APAWAWAKOSOW (or White Antelope).        "  x  "
+   MAKOYE-KIN (or Wolf Collar).             "  x  "
+   AYE-STIPIS-SIMAT (or Heavily Whipped).   "  x  "
+   KISSOUM (or Day Light).                  "  x  "
+   PITAH-OTOCAN (or Eagle Head).            "  x  "
+   APAW-STAMIX (or Weasel Bull).            "  x  "
+   ONISTAH-POKAH (or White Calf).           "  x  "
+   NETAH-KITEI-PI-MEW (or Only Spot).       "  x  "
+   AKAK-OTOS (or Many Horses).              "  x  "
+   STOKIMATIS (or The Drum).                "  x  "
+   PITAH-ANNES (or Eagle Robe).             "  x  "
+   PITAH-OTSIKIN (or Eagle Shoe).           "  x  "
+   STAMIX-OTA-KA-PIW (or Bull Turn Round).  "  x  "
+   MASTE-PITAH (or Crow Eagle).             "  x  "
+  #JAMES DIXON.                             "  x  "
+  #ABRAHAM KECHEPWOT.                       "  x  "
+  #PATRICK KECHEPWOT.                       "  x  "
+  #GEORGE MOY-ANY-MEN.                      "  x  "
+  #GEORGE CRAWLOR.                          "  x  "
+   EKAS-KINE (or Low Horn).                 "  x  "
+   KATO-OKOSIS (or Bear Shield).            "  x  "
+   PONOKAH-STAMIX (or Bull Elk).            "  x  "
+   OMAKSI SAPOP (or Big Plume).             "  x  "
+   ONISTAH (or Calf Robe).                  "  x  "
+   PITAH-SIKSINUM (or White Eagle).         "  x  "
+   APAW-ONISTAW (or Weasel Calf).           "  x  "
+   ATTISTA-HAES (or Rabbit Carrier).        "  x  "
+   PITAH (or Eagle).                        "  x  "
+   PITAH-ONISTAH (or Eagle White Calf).     "  x  "
+   KAYE-TAPO (or Going to Bear).            "  x  "
+
+      [* Stony Chiefs.
+       # Stony Councillors.]
+
+Signed by the Chiefs and Councillors within named in presence of
+the following witnesses, the same having been first explained by
+James Bird, Interpreter.
+
+(Signed) A. G. IRVINE, Ass't Com., N.-W.M.P.
+         J. McDougall, Missionary.
+         JEAN L'HEUREUX,
+         W. WINDER,
+         T. N. F. CROZIER, Inspectors.
+         E. DALRYMPLE CLARK, Lieut. and Adjutant. N.-W.M.P.
+         A. SHURTLIFF,
+         C. E. DENING,
+         W. D. ANTROBUS, Sub-Inspectors.
+         FRANK NORMAN, Staff Constable.
+         MARY J. MACLEOD.
+         JULIA WINDER.
+         JULIA SHURTLIFF.
+         E. HARDISTY.
+         A. McDOUGALL.
+         E. A. BARRETT.
+         CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, Priest, Witness
+            to signatures of Stonixosak
+            and those following.
+         CHARLES E. CONRAD.
+         THOS. J. BOGG.
+
+
+ADHESION TO TREATY NUMBER SEVEN
+
+We, the members of the Blackfoot tribe of Indians, having had
+explained to us the terms of the treaty made and concluded at the
+Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, on the twenty-second day of
+September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and
+seventy-seven;
+
+Between Her Majesty the Queen, by her Commissioners duly appointed
+to negotiate the said treaty and the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan,
+Sarcee, Stony and other Indian inhabitants of the country within
+the limits defined in the said treaty, but not having been present
+at the Councils at which the articles of the said treaty were
+agreed upon, do now hereby, for ourselves and the bands which we
+represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty
+being extended to us and the bands which we represent, transfer,
+surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and
+successors, to and for the use of her Government of the Dominion of
+Canada, all our right, title, and interest whatsoever, which we and
+the said bands which we represent have held or enjoyed, of in and
+to the territory described and fully set out in the said treaty;
+also, all our right, title, and interest whatsoever to all other
+lands wherever situated, whether within the limits of any other
+treaty heretofore made or hereafter to be made with Indians, or
+elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, to have and to hold the
+same unto and for the use of Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and
+successors forever;
+
+And we hereby agree to accept the several benefits, payments, and
+reserves promised to the Indians under the Chiefs adhering to the
+said treaty at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, and we
+solemnly engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the
+stipulations, obligations and conditions therein contained on the
+part of the Chiefs and Indians therein named, to be observed and
+performed and in all things to conform to the articles of the said
+treaty, as if we ourselves and the bands which we represent had
+been originally contracting parties thereto and had been present at
+the Councils held at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, and
+had there attached our signatures to the said treaty.
+
+In witness whereof James Farquharson McLeod, C.M.G., one of Her
+Majesty's Commissioners appointed to negotiate the said treaty, and
+the Chief of the band, hereby giving their adhesion to the said
+treaty, have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Fort
+McLeod, this fourth day of December, in the year of our Lord one
+thousand eight hundred and seventy-seven.
+
+(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD,
+           Lieut.-Col., Special Indian Commissioner.
+         MEANXKISTOMACH        His x mark.
+            (or Three Bulls).
+
+Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned
+witnesses, the same having been explained to the Indians by the
+said James Farquharson McLeod, one of the Commissioners appointed
+to negotiate the said treaty, through the interpreter, Jerry Potts,
+in the presence of
+
+(Signed) A. G. IRVINE,
+           Assistant Commissioner.
+         E. DALRMYMLE CLARK,
+           Lieutenant and Adjutant N.-W.M.P.
+         CHARLES E. CONRAD,
+         W. WINDER,
+           Inspector.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treaties of Canada with The
+Indians of Manitoba
+and the North-West Territories, by Alexander Morris
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREATIES OF CANADA ***
+
+This file should be named 7126.txt or 7126.zip
+
+Produced by Andrew Sly, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team.
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+https://gutenberg.org or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+